Operating Instructions

About This Machine

1 Getting Started
2 Entering Text
3 Operating Instructions
4 Appendix

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information
in this manual before using the machine.
Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your safety and
benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy place for quick reference.

Important

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.

Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Operator Safety

This machine contains LED Array in writing units.

The machine is considered a class 1 LED device, safe for both office and EDP use.

Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before
reading this manual. (For details, see p.30 "Machine Types".)
Type 1: 5100WD/GWD5100/LW5100/Aficio MP W5100
Type 2: 7140WD/GWD7140/LW7140/Aficio MP W7140
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

For good copy quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier.

The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other than
genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.

Power Source

208-240 V, 60 Hz, 16 A
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source, see
Troubleshooting.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.

• Media differ according to manual.

• The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
• For details about the functions of RW-7140, refer to the manuals for this option.
About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also explains the control panel,
preparation procedures for using the machine, how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs
provided.
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace paper, toner, and other
consumables.
Copy/Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for
explanations on how to place originals.
Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software
provided.
General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering e-mail addresses, and
user codes. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect the machine.
Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that you can use to
prevent unauthorized use of the machine, data tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced
security, we recommend that you first make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.

1
 • Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator using Web Image Monitor.
For details, see “Setting Up the Machine”, Security Reference.
Be sure to read this manual when setting the enhanced security functions, or user and administrator
authentication.
PostScript 3 Supplement
Explains how to set up and use PostScript 3.
UNIX Supplement
For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized dealer.
This manual includes descriptions of functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
Information
Contains general notes on the machine, and information about the trademarks of product names used
in the manuals.
Other manuals
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide

• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.

• The following software products are referred to using general names:

Product name General name

DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder

DeskTopBinder
Professional *1

ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and ScanRouter

the ScanRouter delivery software
EX Enterprise *1

*1 Optional

2
Manuals List

Printed Manuals HTML Manuals PDF Manuals

Manual Name
Provided Provided Provided

About This Machine Yes Yes Yes

Troubleshooting Yes Yes Yes

Copy/Document Server Reference No Yes Yes

Printer Reference No Yes Yes

Scanner Reference No Yes Yes

Network Guide No Yes Yes

General Settings Guide No Yes Yes

Security Reference No Yes Yes

PostScript 3 Supplement No Yes Yes

UNIX Supplement No No Yes

Information No Yes No

3
 What You Can Do with This Machine
This section introduces the features of this machine.

• For details about options, see “Options”.

• For functions of printer (Printer Controller Type RW-7140) and scanner (RW-7140 Scanner Option),
see manuals that come with those options.
• Printer functions stated below apply to Printer Option Type W7140 only.
• Scanner functions stated below apply to Scanner Option Type W7140 only.

• p.35 "Options"

Using This Machine as a Copier

You can make copies of originals.

BKV001S

• You can print stamps on copies. Stamps can include background numbers, scanned images, dates,
and page numbers.
• You can reduce or enlarge the copy image. With Auto Reduce/Enlarge, the machine automatically
detects the original size, and then selects an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the paper size
you select. If the orientation in which your original is placed is different from that of the paper you are
copying onto, the machine rotates the original image by 90 degrees and fits it on the copy paper.
• You can use the “Combine” function to save paper by printing multiple pages on a single sheet.
• You can specify how copies are finished. When attached to the machine, the optional folding finisher
can automatically fold copies after they are printed.

• See Copy/Document Server Reference.

4
Using This Machine as a Printer

You can print documents created in applications.

BKV002S

• This machine supports network and local connections.

• You can print HP-GL, HP-GL/2 (HP-RTL), TIFF, and CALS files directly using the GL/2 & TIFF filter.
See Printer Reference.
• You can send PDF files directly to the machine for printing, without having to open a PDF application.
• You can print or delete print jobs stored on the machine's hard disk, which have been previously sent
from computers using the printer driver. The following types of print jobs can be selected: Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.

• See Printer Reference.

Utilizing Stored Documents

You can store files scanned in copier, printer, or scanner mode on the machine's hard disk. With
DeskTopBinder (optional) or Web Image Monitor, you can use your computer to search for, view, print,
delete, and send stored files via the network. You can also change print settings and print multiple documents
(Document Server).

BKV031S

5
 • You can also retrieve stored documents scanned in scanner mode.
• You can download documents stored in copier, Document Server, or printer mode to your computer.

• For details about machine's settings, see “Network Settings Required to Use Document Server”,
General Settings Guide.
• For details about Document Server in printer mode, see “Saving and Printing Using the Document
Server”, Printer Reference.
• For details about Document Server in scanner mode, see “Storing Files Using the Scanner Function”,
Scanner Reference.
• For details about Document Server, see “Document Server”, Copy/Document Server Reference.
• For details about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder manuals.

Using the Scanner in a Network Environment

You can use a scanner over the network.

BKV003S

• You can perform color scanning.

• You can send scan files to a specified destination using e-mail (Sending scan files by e-mail). See
“Sending Scan Files by E-mail”, Scanner Reference.
• You can send scan files directly to folders (Sending scan files by Scan to Folder). See “Sending Scan
Files to Folder”, Scanner Reference.
• You can use this machine as a delivery scanner for the ScanRouter delivery application (Network
delivery scanner). You can save scan files in the delivery server or send them to a folder in a computer
on the same network. For details about the machine's settings, see “Network Settings Required to Use
the Network Delivery Scanner”, General Settings Guide. For details about how to use the function,
see “Delivering Scan Files”, Scanner Reference.

6
Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security Functions)

You can prevent information leakage by managing the machine and protecting documents.

BKV004S

• You can protect documents from unauthorized access and stop them from being copied without
permission.
• You can control the use of the machine, as well as prevent machine settings from being changed
without authorization.
• By setting passwords, you can prevent unauthorized access via the network.
• You can erase the data on the hard disk to prevent the information from leaking out.

• See the manual for the DataOverWriteSecurity Unit (optional), and Security Reference.

Monitoring the Machine Via Computer

You can change the machine's settings and monitor its status from a connected computer.

BKV005S

• Web Image Monitor lets you configure and operate the machine using a Web browser on a computer.
You can also install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin on a computer to configure and operate the
machine.

7
 • Using Web Image Monitor, you can register information in the address book, specify the machine's
settings, and check the machine's status with ease.
• Using Web Image Monitor, you can check and specify the initial settings (system settings, printer
features, network settings, security settings/certificate management, and E-mail Notification), control
print jobs, display the print job journal, and protect the data in the machine using authentication.
• You can also use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin to register information in the address book.

8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine.................................................................................................................................1
Manuals List....................................................................................................................................................3
What You Can Do with This Machine...............................................................................................................4
Using This Machine as a Copier...................................................................................................................4
Using This Machine as a Printer....................................................................................................................5
Utilizing Stored Documents...........................................................................................................................5
Using the Scanner in a Network Environment.............................................................................................6
Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security Functions)..................................................7
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer.......................................................................................................7
Notice................................................................................................................................................................12
Important......................................................................................................................................................12
Note to Users...............................................................................................................................................12
Regulatory Information................................................................................................................................13
How to Read This Manual...............................................................................................................................14
Symbols........................................................................................................................................................14
Names of Major Options............................................................................................................................14
Terms.............................................................................................................................................................14
Safety Information............................................................................................................................................15
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................................................15
Safety Precautions to be Followed.............................................................................................................15
Safety Labels of This Machine.........................................................................................................................21
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels.........................................................................................21
Power Switch Symbols.................................................................................................................................25
ENERGY STAR Program..................................................................................................................................27
Energy Saving Functions..................................................................................................................................28
Machine Types.................................................................................................................................................30
1. Getting Started
Guide to Components......................................................................................................................................31
Options.............................................................................................................................................................35
External options............................................................................................................................................35
Internal options.............................................................................................................................................37
Control Panel....................................................................................................................................................39
Display Panel....................................................................................................................................................42

9
 Simplified Display........................................................................................................................................42
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed...............................................................................................44
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)................................................................................44
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)....................................................................................45
Login (Using the Control Panel)..................................................................................................................45
Logout (Using the Control Panel)................................................................................................................46
Login (Using a Printer Driver)......................................................................................................................47
Login (Using Web Image Monitor)............................................................................................................47
Logout (Using Web Image Monitor)..........................................................................................................47
Changing Modes.............................................................................................................................................48
System Reset.................................................................................................................................................49
Turning On/Off the Power..............................................................................................................................50
Turning On the Main Power........................................................................................................................50
Turning On the Power..................................................................................................................................51
Turning Off the Power..................................................................................................................................51
Turning Off the Main Power........................................................................................................................52
Saving Energy..............................................................................................................................................52
Anti-humidity Heater Switch........................................................................................................................53
2. Entering Text
Entering Text.....................................................................................................................................................55
Available Characters...................................................................................................................................55
Keys...............................................................................................................................................................55
How to Enter Text.........................................................................................................................................56
3. Operating Instructions
Installing Operating Instructions......................................................................................................................59
PDF Manuals................................................................................................................................................59
How to Use the Operating Instructions...........................................................................................................61
Opening from the Icon................................................................................................................................61
Opening from the [Start] Menu..................................................................................................................61
Opening from the CD-ROM.......................................................................................................................62
4. Appendix
Dos and Don'ts.................................................................................................................................................63
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM..........................................................................................65

10
 Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM.......................................................................................................65
Printer Drivers for This Machine..................................................................................................................65
TWAIN Driver..............................................................................................................................................67
DeskTopBinder Lite......................................................................................................................................67
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin..................................................................................................................68
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client........................................................................................69
Specifications for the Main Unit......................................................................................................................71
Document Server..........................................................................................................................................75
Specifications for Options...............................................................................................................................76
Roll Feeder Type 7140...............................................................................................................................76
Paper Cassette Type 7140.........................................................................................................................76
Carrier Sheet................................................................................................................................................77
Original Hanger..........................................................................................................................................77
Multi Stacker................................................................................................................................................77
Specifications for IEEE 1284 Interface Board (Optional)........................................................................77
Specifications for Wireless LAN Board (Optional)...................................................................................77
Specifications for Gigabit Ethernet (Optional)..........................................................................................78
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types..........................................................................................................79
Paper roll......................................................................................................................................................85
Cut paper......................................................................................................................................................86
Notes on using translucent paper...............................................................................................................86
Hemmed paper............................................................................................................................................86
Unusable Paper................................................................................................................................................88
Paper Storage..................................................................................................................................................90
Handling Paper................................................................................................................................................91
INDEX.............................................................................................................................................................93

11
 Notice
Important

Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain
items, consult with your legal advisor.

Note to Users

Note to users in the United States of America

Declaration of conformity
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Responsible party: Ricoh Americas Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000

Product Name: Multi Function Peripheral

Model Number: 5100WD/7140WD/GWD5100/GWD7140/LW5100/LW7140/Aficio MP
W5100/Aficio MP W7140

Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

12
 reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Note to users in Canada

Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada

Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Regulatory Information

Note to users in the state of California

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

13
 How to Read This Manual
Symbols

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.

[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.

Names of Major Options

Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual:

• Roll Feeder Type 7140 Paper roll tray
• Paper Cassette Type 7140 Cut paper tray

Terms

This section explains the meanings of terms used in this manual.

• Long length original/paper
Original/paper length longer than 1,189 mm (A0 ), 46.8".
• Fan fold
The paper is fan-folded at right angles to the paper feed direction.
• Cross fold
Paper can be successively folded in half, first one way and then the other.

14
Safety Information
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.

Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death
or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or
moderate injury or damage to property.

Safety Precautions to be Followed

This section explains safety precautions that should always be followed when using this machine.

Environments where the machine can be used

This section explains safety precautions about environments where the machine can be used.

• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur.

• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, an injury might occur.

• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious. Good
ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.

15
 Handling power cords and power plugs
This section explains safety precautions about handling power cords and power plugs.

• Connect this machine only to a power source that matches the specifications shown on the inside
front cover of this manual and do not use an extension cord.
• Use of this machine with extension cords and power sources other than those that match the
specifications shown constitutes an electric shock and fire hazard.

• Power cords that are damaged, broken, modified, trapped under heavy objects, pulled hard, or
bent severely are electric shock and fire hazards.

• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power cable or plug becomes
frayed or otherwise damaged.
• If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection, etc.), contact your service
representative to change a new one. Operating the machine with a damaged power cord may
cause an electric shock or fire.
• It is dangerous to handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this may result in receiving an electric
shock.

• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and electric
shock hazard.

• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the cable).

• To disconnect the power cord, pull it out by plug. Do not drag the cord itself. Doing so may result
in damage to the cord, leading to fire or electric shock.
• For safety reason, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet if the machine will not be used for
an extended period of time such as holidays.

16
 • Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around the
prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.

Handling the main machine

This section explains safety precautions about handling the main machine.

• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if any of the
following occurs:
• You spill something into the machine.
• You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.
• The external housing of your machine has been damaged.

• Do not turn the earth leakage breaker from the off to the on position. Otherwise it might lead to
an electric shock, fire or smoke, or cause the circuit breakers to trip.

• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the machine.

• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might
move or come down to cause an injury.

• Contact your service representative if you need to lift the machine (such as when relocating it to
another floor). Do not attempt to lift the machine without the assistance of your service
representative. The machine will be damaged if it topples or is dropped, resulting in malfunction
and risk of injury to users.

17
 • Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the machine.
• Do not look into the lamp. It can damage your eyes.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended supply waste at household
waste collection points. Disposal can take place at an authorized dealer.

Handling the machine's interior

This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's interior.

• To avoid hazardous electric shock, do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified
in this manual.

• The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be taken when removing misfed
paper.

• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label indicating the “hot
surface”. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
• During operation, rollers for transporting the paper and originals revolve. A safety device has
been installed so that the machine can be operated safely. But take care not to touch the machine
during operation. An injury might occur.
• Fire and breakdown can result from heavy accumulation of dust inside this machine. Consult your
service representative for details about and charges for cleaning the machine's interior.
• There is a cutter blade inside the paper roll tray. When replacing or loading the paper roll, or
clearing paper jams, do not touch the parts a label indicates. Otherwise an injury may result.

Handling the machine's supplies

This section explains safety precautions about handling the machine's supplies.

• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open
flame. Dispose of used toner containers in accordance with local regulations.

18
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open
flame.

• Do not store toner, used toner, or toner containers in a place with an open flame. The toner might
ignite and cause burns or a fire.

• To avoid fire or machine failure, do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive
paper.

• Do not open toner containers forcefully. Toner can spill, dirtying your clothes or hands, and possibly
resulting in accidental ingestion.

• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.

• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air environment.
Consult a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.

• Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or replacing toner. If your
skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
may make removing the stain impossible.

19
 • When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Hold the paper roll horizontally with both hands. When you grab the paper holder and hold the
paper roll vertically, the paper roll may fall off and an injury may result.

20
Safety Labels of This Machine
This section explains the machine's safety information labels.

Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels

This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety,
please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.

BKV010S

BKV036S

Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside of the machine could be very hot. Caution should be
taken when removing misfed paper.

2
3

BKX007S

21
 BKV038S

Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside of the machine could be very hot. Caution should be
taken when removing misfed paper. The higher temperature (145°C) applies to plain paper. Translucent
paper can cause the indicated part to reach 160°C.

BKV039S

The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an
injury might occur.

5
6
BKX018S

BKX010S

Pressing the auto feed button causes the feed roller to revolve, as shown, when replacing the paper roll or
clearing paper jams. Be careful your hands or clothing do not get caught in the feed roller as it is revolving.
This could result in severe injury.

5 (This label is affixed to the back of the cover.)

22
 BKX011S

There is a cutter blade inside. When replacing or loading the paper roll, or clearing paper jams, do not
touch the parts this label indicates. Otherwise an injury may result.

BKV043S

Hold the paper roll horizontally with both hands. When you grab the paper holder and hold the paper
roll vertically, the paper roll may fall off and an injury may result.
7 8 9

BKX022S

BKV053S

The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an
injury might occur.

23
 BKV052S

The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an
injury might occur.

BKV054S

The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an
injury might occur.

10

BKX019S

10

BKX013S

The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts a label indicates. Otherwise, an injury
might occur.

24
 11

BKX031S

11

BKX029S

The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an
injury might occur.

12

BKX032S

12

BKX030S

The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an
injury might occur.

Power Switch Symbols

The meanings of the symbols for the switches on this machine are as follows:
• :POWER ON.

25
 • :POWER OFF.
• :STANDBY.

26
ENERGY STAR Program
ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment
This company is a participant in the ENERGY STAR® Program.
This machine is compliant with the regulations specified by the
ENERGY STAR® Program.

The ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourage energy conservation by
promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving functions.
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.
Targeted products are computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, copiers, scanners, and multi-function
devices. Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.

• For details about the “default delay time”, see “Energy Saving Functions”.

• p.28 "Energy Saving Functions"

27
 Energy Saving Functions
To reduce its power consumption, this machine has the following functions:
Low Power mode
• If this machine remains idle for a specified period, it automatically reduces its electrical
consumption.
• The default period the machine waits before entering Low Power Mode is 7 minutes. This default
time can be changed.
Off Mode (on machines with only copier function)
• If this machine remains idle for a specified period, it automatically turns off its power.
• The default delay time the machine waits before entering Off Mode is 14 minutes. This default
time can be changed.
Sleep Mode (on machines with printer, or scanner functions)
• If this machine is already in Low Power Mode and remains idle for a specified period, it
automatically enters Sleep Mode to further reduce its electrical consumption.
• The default delay time the machine waits before entering Sleep Mode is 14 minutes. This default
time can be changed.
• The machine can print jobs from computers while in Sleep Mode.
Specifications

Type 1 Type 2

Reduced Electrical
Consumption by Low Power 210 W 210 W
Mode

Time of Switch into Low Power

7 minutes 7 minutes
Mode

Time of Switch out from Low 120 seconds or 120 seconds or

Power Mode less less

Reduced Electrical
11 W 11 W
Consumption by Off Mode

Time of Switch into Off Mode 14 minutes 14 minutes

Time of Switch out from Off

120 seconds or less 120 seconds or less
Mode

28
 Type 1 Type 2

Reduced Electrical
30 W 30 W
Consumption by Sleep Mode

Time of Switch into Sleep Mode 14 minutes 14 minutes

Time of Switch out from Sleep

120 seconds or less 120 seconds or less
Mode

• Figures for power consumption were obtained from testing performed prior to shipment.
• Using the Energy Saver Timer setting, you can change the length of time that the machine waits before
it switches to Low Power mode. See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
• Using the Auto Off Timer setting, you can change the length of time that the machine waits before it
switches to Off mode. See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.

29
 Machine Types
This machine comes in two models which vary in copy/print speed. To ascertain which model you have,
see the inside front cover.

Type 1 Type 2

Copy/print speed 5 sheets/minute (A0 (E) ) 7 sheets/minute (A0 (E) )

10 sheets/minute (A1 (D) ) 14 sheets/minute (A1 (D) )

30
1. Getting Started
This section describes how to start using this machine.

1
Guide to Components
This section introduces the names and functions of the components.

• Do not turn the earth leakage breaker from the off to the on position. Otherwise it might lead to
an electric shock, fire or smoke, or cause the circuit breakers to trip.

• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes by placing objects near them or leaning things against them. If
the machine overheats, a fault might occur.

1
2
11
3
4
12
13

14
5
15

6 16

7
17
8
9

10

BKX028S

1. Upper output stacker

When the upper output is selected, output paper is stacked here.
2. Control panel
See “Control Panel”.

31
 1. Getting Started

3. Scanner cover
This protects the original feed mechanism and the scanning glass.
4. Scanner cover release lever

1 Use to open the scanner cover to clear jammed originals or to clean the machine.
5. Front output auxiliary tray
Use to receive copy paper. When copying rolled originals, this can also serve as an original tray.
6. Main power switch
If the machine does not operate after turning on the operation switch, check if the main power switch is turned
on. If it is off, turn it on.
See “Turning On/Off the Power”.
7. Earth Leakage Breaker
To prevent electric shock this machine has an earth leakage breaker. The earth leakage breaker is normally in
the on position.
If the power does not come on, check if the earth leakage breaker is in the off position. If so, do not turn it to the
on position.
Contact your sales or service representative immediately.
8. Upper tray
Includes Tray 1 (front) and Tray 2 (rear).
9. Anti-condensation heater switch
If condensation forms inside the machine as a result of temperature change, the machine may not print properly.
To minimize this problem, use the anti-condensation heater.
10. Lower tray (optional) or Cut paper trays (optional)
The illustration shows the cut paper trays.
11. Operation switch
Press to turn the power on (the operation switch indicator lights up). To turn the power off, press again (the
operation switch indicator goes off).
See “Turning On/Off the Power”.
12. [Scanner Stop] key
Use if originals are feeding in slanted, or to cancel scanning while an original is feeding in. You can also use this
to release the paper edge hold function.
13. Original table
Place originals here scanning side up.
14. Original guide
Set to the width of your originals.
15. Imaging unit release lever
Use this lever to open the imaging unit when clearing paper jams inside or cleaning the machine.
Do not leave the imaging unit open more than 10 minutes, otherwise copy quality may deteriorate.
While holding down the imaging unit, pull the release lever to open it.

32
 Guide to Components

16. Paper Bypass

Use to feed paper in manually. Load paper print side up.
17. Paper bypass's paper guide
Set to the width of the paper for bypass copying. 1
1

BKV047S

1. Rear original exit (straight)

Holds originals ejected at the back of the machine
The rear original exit is used when the stacker is attached to the back of the machine. For details, contact your
sales or service representative.
2. Fusing unit cover
Protects the fusing unit.
3. Rear output
Stacks copies delivered to the rear output.

2 3

4
1

6
BKV012S

33
 1. Getting Started

1. Anti-humidity heater switch

When humidity is high, paper in the paper tray may absorb moisture, which can affect copy quality. The anti-
humidity heater prevents this.

1 Turn this switch on when humidity is high.

2. Paper holder
The two paper holders grip the paper roll and are mounted on the paper roll tray's roll holder.
3. Paper feed knob
Use when loading paper rolls or clearing paper jams.
4. Cutter knob
Use to manually cut paper if there are paper jams in the cutter area of the machine.
Always return the cutter knob to the left or right end.
5. Auto feed button
Use this to clear misfeeds in the paper feed area. Keep this button pressed to feed the roll paper continuously.
When approximately 100 mm, 3.9" of paper length is fed, release the button so that paper will be cut
automatically.
6. Roll holder
Adjust this to the size of the paper roll you are using.

• p.39 "Control Panel"

• p.50 "Turning On/Off the Power"

34
 Options

Options
This section introduces the names and functions of main optional parts.
1
External options

This section provides explanations about external options.

BKX006S

1. Original hanger
Stack originals here before copying or scanning them.
2. Lower tray (paper roll tray)
You can load two paper rolls.
3. Cut paper trays
Load cut paper here.
You can load up to 250 sheets of A2 size paper for each.
4. Bridge Unit
Relays copies to the folding finisher.
5. Fan Folding Finisher
Automatically folds paper like fans or accordion.
6. Cross Folding Finisher
The machine rotates fan-folded copies to further fold them in half or into thirds.
7. Multi Stacker
Attach this to the front or back of the machine.
You can stack a large number of copies on it.

35
 1. Getting Started

2 3

1 1

6
BKV012S

1. Anti-humidity heater switch

When humidity is high, paper in the paper tray may absorb moisture, which can affect copy quality. The anti-
humidity heater prevents this.
Turn this switch on when humidity is high.
2. Paper holder
The two paper holders grip the paper roll and are mounted on the paper roll tray's roll holder.
3. Paper feed knob
Use when loading paper rolls or clearing paper jams.
4. Cutter knob
Use to manually cut paper if there are paper jams in the cutter area of the machine. Always return the cutter knob
to the left or right end.
5. Auto feed button
Use this to clear misfeeds in the paper feed area. Keep this button pressed to feed the roll paper continuously.
When approximately 100 mm, 3.9" of paper length is fed, release the button so that paper will be cut
automatically.
6. Roll holder
Adjust this to the size of the paper roll you are using.

4
3
4

1 1

2 5 5

BKV014S

1. Back fence
Adjust to the paper length.

36
 Options

2. Anti-humidity heater switch

When humidity is high, paper in the paper tray may absorb moisture, which can affect copy quality. The anti-
humidity heater prevents this.
Turn this switch on when humidity is high.
3. Side guide pocket
1
Use the side guide inside here to align translucent paper. Keep covered when not in use.
4. Side lever
Use to fix the position of the side fences.
5. Side fences
Adjust to the paper width.

• Some options cannot be installed on the machine if certain other options already installed. For details
about which options can be used in combination, contact your sales or service representative.

Internal options

This section describes the options that can be installed in the machine.
• Printer unit
Allows you to use the printer function.
You can install either Printer Option Type W7140 or Printer Controller Type RW-7140.
• Scanner unit
Allows you to use the scanner function.
You can install either Scanner Option Type W7140 or RW-7140 Scanner Option or both.
• IEEE 1284 Interface Board
Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1284 cable.
• Wireless LAN board
Allows you to install a wireless LAN interface.
• DataOverWriteSecurity Unit
Allows you to erase data that is stored on the hard disk.
• Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T)
Allows you to communicate over 1000BASE-T.
• HDD Encryption Unit
Allows you to encrypt data that is stored on the hard disk.
• VM card
With this card, you can install embedded software architecture applications.

37
 1. Getting Started

• Browser Unit
You can use this function to display data from the server in HTML format on the machine's control
panel. You can also use this function to send scan files from the control panel.

1
• Some options cannot be installed on the machine if certain other options already installed. For details
about which options can be used in combination, contact your sales or service representative.

Other options
Carrier sheet
Use to load bent, folded, creased, thin or pasted originals.

BKV008S

Paper holder
Use to set a paper roll in the paper roll tray's roll holder.
This is useful to change quickly to a different size paper roll from the paper holder.

BKV009S

38
 Control Panel

Control Panel
This section introduces the names and functions of the components on the control panel.
1
• Do not turn off the main power switch while the operation switch indicator is lit or blinking. Doing so
may damage the hard disk.
This illustration shows the control panel of the machine with options fully installed.

BKX023S

1. [User Tools/Counter] key

• User Tools
Press to change the default and conditions to meet your requirements. See “Accessing User Tools”, General
Settings Guide.
• Counter
Press to check or print the counter value. See “Counter”, General Settings Guide.
• Inquiry
Press to find out where to order expendable supplies and where to call when a malfunction occurs. You
can also print these details. See “Inquiry”, General Settings Guide.
2. Function keys
Press to display the operation screen of one of the following functions: copy, document server, printer, or scanner.
The indicator of the selected function goes on. See “Changing Modes”.
3. Display panel
Displays keys for each function, operation status, or messages. See “Display Panel”.
4. [Clear Modes] key
Press to clear the current settings.

39
 1. Getting Started

5. [Program] key (copier, Document Server, and scanner mode)

• Press to register frequently used settings, or to recall registered settings (except Document Server mode).
See “Registering Frequently Used Functions”, Copy/Document Server Reference.

1 See “Registering Frequently Used Setting” Scanner Reference.

• Press to program defaults for the initial display when modes are cleared or reset, or immediately after the
operation switch is turned on. See “Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions”, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
See “Registering the Default Values of the Scanner's Initial Display”, Scanner Reference.
6. [Interrupt] key
Press to make interrupt copies. See “Interrupt Copy”, Copy/Document Server Reference.
7. [Energy Saver] key
Press to switch to and from Energy Saver mode. See “Saving Energy”.
8. Main power indicator
The main power indicator goes on when you turn on the main power switch.
9. Operation switch
Press to turn the power on (the operation switch indicator goes on). To turn the power off, press again (the
operation switch indicator goes off). See “Turning On the Power”.
10. [Login/Logout] key
Press this to log in or log out.
11. [Simplified Display] key
Press this to switch to the Simplified Display.
12. [Sample Copy] key
Press to make a single set of copies or prints to check print quality before making multiple sets. See “Sample
Copy”, Copy/ Document Server Reference.
13. [Start] key
Press to start copying, printing, scanning, or sending.
14. [ ] key (Enter key)
Press to confirm values entered or items specified.
15. [Clear/Stop] key
• Clear
Press to delete a number entered.
• Stop
Press to stop a job in progress, such as copying, scanning, or printing.
16. Number keys
Use to enter the numbers for copies and data for the selected function.
17. Alert indicator
Lights continuously if an error has occurred.

40
 Control Panel

18. Data In indicator (printer mode)

Flashes when the machine is receiving print jobs from a computer. See Printer Reference.

• p.42 "Display Panel" 1

• p.48 "Changing Modes"
• p.50 "Turning On/Off the Power"

41
 1. Getting Started

Display Panel
The display panel shows machine status, error messages, and function menus.
1
• Don't apply strong impact or force to the screen. Or it may be damaged. Maximum force allowable
is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an item by lightly pressing
them.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like . Keys appearing as
cannot be used.
The copy display is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.

• The display panels shown in this manual's illustrations are taken from a machine on which all options
are installed.

Simplified Display

This section explains how to switch to the simplified display.

When you press the [Simplified Display] key, the screen changes from the initial display to the simplified
display.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.

42
 Display Panel

BKX024S

Example of a simplified display

This illustration shows the copier function's simplified display.

BKX034S

1. [Key Color]
Press to increase screen contrast by changing the color of the keys.
This is available only for the simplified display.

• To return to the initial display, press the [Simplified Display] key again.
• Certain keys do not appear on the simplified display.

43
 1. Getting Started

When the Authentication Screen is Displayed

This section explains the authentication screen.
1
• Ask the user administrator for the login user name, login password, and user code. For details about
user authentication, contact your administrator.
• User code to enter on User Code Authentication is the numerical value registered in the address book
as “login user name”.
If Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication
is active, the authentication screen appears on the display. The machine only becomes operable after
entering your own login user name and login password. If User Code Authentication is active, you cannot
use the machine until you enter the user code.
If you can use the machine, you can say that you are logged in. When you go out of the operable state,
you can say that you are logged out. After logging in the machine, be sure to log out of it to prevent
unauthorized usage.

• If authentication fails, the "Authentication has failed." message appears. Check that the login user
name and login password are correct.

User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)

This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine using the control panel while User Code
Authentication is active.
If User Code Authentication is active, a screen prompting you to enter a user code appears.

1. Enter a user code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].

• To log off, do one of the following:

• Press the operation switch.

44
 When the Authentication Screen is Displayed

• Press the [Energy Saver] key after jobs are completed.

User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)

1
This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine using a printer driver while User Code
Authentication is active.
If User Code Authentication is active, specify the user code in the printer properties of the printer driver.
For details, see the printer driver Help.

• When logged in through User Code Authentication, you do not have to log out.

Login (Using the Control Panel)

This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set.

1. Press [Login].

2. Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

45
 1. Getting Started

3. Enter a login password, and then press [OK].

When the user is authenticated, the screen for the function you are using appears.

• If authentication fails, the "Authentication has failed." message appears. Check that the login user
name and login password are correct.

Logout (Using the Control Panel)

This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set.

• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized persons, always log out when you have finished using
the machine.

1. Press the [Login/Logout] key.

BKX027S

46
 When the Authentication Screen is Displayed

2. Press [Yes].

Login (Using a Printer Driver)

This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine using a printer driver.
If Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication
is active, make encryption settings in the printer properties of the printer driver, and then specify a login
user name and password. For details, see the printer driver Help.

• When logged in using a printer driver, you do not have to log out.

Login (Using Web Image Monitor)

This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine via Web Image Monitor.

1. Click [Login].
2. Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].

• For user code authentication, enter a user code in [User Name], and then click [OK].

Logout (Using Web Image Monitor)

This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine via Web Image Monitor.

1. Click [Logout] to log out.

• Delete the cache memory of a Web browser after logging out.

47
 1. Getting Started

Changing Modes
This section explains how to change modes.
1

BKX004S

• You cannot switch modes in any of the following situations:

• When accessing User Tools / Counter / Inquiry
• During interrupt copying
• While scanning an original
• The copy display is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on. You can change this
default setting under Function Priority. See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.

48
 Changing Modes

System Reset

This section explains System Reset.

After finishing a job, the machine waits a specified length of time and then restores its settings to the default 1
values specified under Function Priority. This function is called “System Reset”. For the procedure for
specifying default settings under Function Priority, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
To change the length of time that the machine waits before restoring its settings to their default values, use
the System Auto Reset Timer setting. See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.

49
 1. Getting Started

Turning On/Off the Power

This section discusses how to turn on/off the power.
1 Power supply
This machine has two power switches: operation switch and main power switch.
• Operation switch (right side of the control panel)
Press to activate the machine. When the machine has finished warming up, you can make use
of each function.
• Main power switch (left side of the machine)
Turning off this switch makes the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel go
off. When this is done, machine power is completely off.

• This machine automatically enters Energy Saver mode or turns itself off if you do not use it for a while.
To specify the time that the machine waits before it enters Energy Saver mode and/or turns itself off,
configure the Energy Saver Timer and/or Auto Off Timer setting, respectively. See “System Settings”,
General Settings Guide.

Turning On the Main Power

This section explains how to turn on the main power.

• Do not turn off the main power switch immediately after turning it on. Doing so may result in damage
to the hard disk or memory, leading to malfunctions.

1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes on.

BKX016S

50
 Turning On/Off the Power

• To start using the folding finisher, turn its main power switch on before turning on the main unit's main
power switch.
• After you switch the main power on, a screen may appear to indicate that the machine is initializing. 1
Do not switch the power off during this process. Initialization takes about three minutes.

Turning On the Power

This section explains how to turn on the power.

1. Press the operation switch.

The operation switch indicator goes on.

BKX026S

• If the power does not come on when the operation switch is pressed, check the main power switch is
on. If it is off, turn it on.

Turning Off the Power

This section explains how to turn off the power.

1. Press the operation switch.

The operation switch indicator goes off.

51
 1. Getting Started

BKX026S

• Even if you press the operation switch, the operation switch indicator does not go out, but blinks in
the following cases:
• During communication with external equipment.
• When the hard disk is active.

Turning Off the Main Power

This section explains how to turn off the main power.

• Do not turn off the main power switch when the operation switch indicator is lit or blinking. Doing so
may result in damage to the hard disk or memory.
• Make sure to turn off the main power switch before pulling out the power plug. Not doing so may
result in damage to the hard disk or memory.

1. Make sure the operation switch indicator is not lit.

2. Turn off the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes out.

• To power down the folding finisher, turn off the main power switch of the main unit first, and then turn
off the folding finisher's main power switch.

Saving Energy

This section explains the machine's energy saving functions.

This machine has the following energy saving functions.

52
 Turning On/Off the Power

Energy Saver
If you do not use the machine for a certain period after an operation, or when you press the [Energy
Saver] key, the display disappears and the machine goes into Energy Saver mode. When you press
the [Energy Saver] key again, the machine returns to the ready condition. The machine uses less
electricity in Energy Saver mode.
1
You can change the amount of time the machine waits before switching to Energy Saver mode after
copying has finished or the last operation is performed under Energy Saver Timer.
Auto Off
The machine automatically turns itself off when the job is finished, after a certain period of time has
elapsed. This function is called “Auto Off”.
You can change the Auto Off time under Auto Off Timer.

• See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.

• The Energy Saver and Auto Off functions will not operate in the following cases:
• When a warning message appears
• When the service call message appears
• When paper is jammed
• When the cover is open
• When the "Add Toner" message appears
• When toner is being replenished
• When the User Tools/Counter/Inquiry screen is displayed
• When fixed warm-up is in progress
• When data is being processed
• When operations are suspended during printing
• When the Data In indicator is on or blinking
• When the screen of stored document under the printer function is displayed

Anti-humidity Heater Switch

During winter or humid periods when there can be sudden changes in temperature, the paper in the paper
roll tray, or the cut paper tray can absorb moisture. This may cause copy quality to deteriorate.
To prevent this, the machine has a built-in anti-humidity heater.
There is a switch for the anti-humidity heater in the left side of paper trays. Turn this switch on if the humidity
level becomes high and copy quality is affected. Turn the switch off at other times.

53
 1. Getting Started

Paper roll trays

BKV050S

Cut paper trays

BKV051S

• p.91 "Handling Paper"

54
2. Entering Text
This section describes how to enter characters.

Entering Text
This section explains how to enter text. 2
When you enter a character, it appears at the position of the cursor. If there is a character already at the
cursor position, the entered character appears before that.

Available Characters

This section explains which characters are available.

You can enter the following characters:
• Alphabetic characters
• Symbols
• Numerals
0123456789

Keys

This section explains the entry screen and the keys displayed on it.
You can change the entry screen using the keys below.

55
 2. Entering Text

BKX033S

• When entering uppercase or lowercase letters continuously, use [Shift Lock] to lock the case.
• You can also use the number keys to enter numbers, regardless of mode.

How to Enter Text

This section explains text entry more specifically.

Entering letters
This section explains how to enter letters.

1. Press [Shift] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

2. Press the letters you want to enter.

Deleting characters
This section explains how to delete characters.

1. Press [Backspace] or [Delete All] to delete characters.

56
 Entering Text

Adding user text

You can select and use a User Text that is registered in [Program / Change / Delete User Text].
For the registration procedure under Program / Change / Delete User Text, see “System Settings”, General
Settings Guide.

1. Press [User Text].

2

2. Select the User Text you want to use.

57
 2. Entering Text

58
3. Operating Instructions
This section describes the Operating Instructions of this machine.

Installing Operating Instructions

The supplied CD-ROMs contain HTML format manuals. For easy access, we recommend you install the
manuals on a computer.

3
• The CD-ROM that includes Security Reference is for administrators of the machine.
• The system requirements for installing the manuals are as follows:
• Operating system: Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2,
or Windows NT4.0
• Minimum display resolution: 800 × 600 pixels
• Recommended browsers:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 SP2 or later
• Netscape 6.2 or later
• Non-recommended browsers can display the simplified manual only.
• HTML manuals can also be viewed on a Macintosh.

1. Select a language and a product, and then click [OK].

2. Click [Install manuals].
If you want to read manuals from the CD-ROM, click [Read HTML manuals] or [Read PDF manuals].
3. Install the manual you require according to the displayed instructions.
4. When installation is complete, click [Finish].
5. Click [Finish].

• If you cannot install a manual, copy the “MANUAL_HTML” folder to your computer's hard drive, and
then run “Setup.exe”.
• To delete an installed manual, on the [Start] menu, click [Programs], then [Product Name], and then
uninstall the data.
• If you are installing the manuals on a Macintosh, open the “Manuals.htm” file on the CD-ROM.

PDF Manuals

Some documentation about using the machine is included on the CD-ROMs in PDF format.

59
 3. Operating Instructions

File path
The PDF manuals are in the following folder on the CD-ROM:
MANUAL_PDF\ENGLISH

• To view the PDF manuals, you need to have Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader installed on your
computer.

60
 How to Use the Operating Instructions

How to Use the Operating Instructions

This section explains how to use manuals.

Opening from the Icon

This section explains how to open a manual using its desktop icon.

1. Double-click the icon on your desktop.

The browser opens and the manual appears.

Opening from the [Start] Menu

This section explains how to open a manual from the [Start] menu.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs] (Windows XP: [All Programs]), then [Product
Name], and then click the manual you want to view.
The browser opens, and then the manual appears.

• Depending on the settings made during installation, menu folder names may differ.

61
 3. Operating Instructions

Opening from the CD-ROM

This section explains how to open a manual from the supplied CD-ROMs.

1. Click [Read HTML manuals].

2. Click the title of the manual you want to view.
The browser opens, and then the manual appears.

62
4. Appendix
This section describes Dos and Don'ts, the provided software and utilities CD-ROMs, specifications, and
paper.

Dos and Don'ts

The following items should be followed during use of this machine.

• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur.
4

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the machine.

• Do not turn the power off while the operation switch indicator is lit or blinking. Doing so may damage
the hard disk.
• Before unplugging the power cord or turning off the main power switch, make sure remaining memory
space is at 100%, as shown on the screen. See “Turning On/Off the Power”.
• Do not touch areas on or around the fusing unit. These areas get hot.
• The area around the ventilation holes might feel warm. This is caused by exhaust air and is not a
malfunction.
• When you use this machine for a long time in a confined space without good ventilation, you may
detect an odd smell. To keep the workplace comfortable, we recommend that you keep it well
ventilated.
• If the machine is moved from a cold to a warm place, condensation may form inside it. After moving
the machine, do not use it for at least an hour. The machine requires this time to adapt to its new
environment.
• The machine will malfunction if its internal temperature becomes too high. Be sure not to block the
intake and exhaust vents.
• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation. See “Turning On/Off the Power”.
• Do not leave the main unit open for more than 10 minutes, otherwise image quality may deteriorate.
• Do not open the covers of the machine when it is in operation. If you do, misfeeds might occur.
• Do not move or tilt the machine when the power is on.
• Do not allow small objects such as paperclips to fall into or become stuck inside the machine.

63
 4. Appendix

• Do not knock the machine while it is operating (for instance, do not use the machine's surfaces to
knock stacks of paper into square).
• Depending on the ambient temperature and humidity, steam may come from the exhaust vent behind
the control panel during printing. This is water vapour from the paper, not a sign of malfunction. Steam
might cause condensation to form on the machine, but this will not result in operational problems.
• If condensation forms inside the machine as a result of temperature change, the machine may not
print properly. To minimize this problem, use the anti-condensation heaters.
• The anti-humidity heater and anti-condensation heater warm the machine's interior to prevent build-
up of humidity and condensation. With the anti-humidity heater turned on, the machine remains warm
even if its power is turned off.
• Be sure to make a note of the registered machine settings in case they are lost due to accident or
4 malfunction.
• The supplier shall not be liable for any loss or damage resulting from a failure of the machine, loss of
settings, or use of the machine.
• The paper roll tray has the anti-humidity function. Even when the main power switch is in the standby
position, the anti-humidity heater is active if it is turned on.
• If you do not use the machine for a long time, remove the paper from the paper roll tray, or the cut
paper tray and place it in its storage bag.

• p.50 "Turning On/Off the Power"

64
 Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

This section explains the software and utilities CD-ROMs provided with this machine.
Two CD-ROMs come with this machine: “Printer Drivers and Utilities”, and “Scanner Driver and Utilities”.
The following are included in these CD-ROMs:
Font Manager
For installing new screen fonts, or organizing and managing fonts already in the system. For details
about Font Manager, see the manual on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
For the system administrator to manage network printers.
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 4
For users to manage their network print status.
Printer Utility for Mac
This utility allows users to download and manage a variety of fonts as well as manage printers. For
details about this utility, see PostScript 3 Supplement.

• Some documentation about using the machine is included on the CD-ROM in PDF format. For details
about using Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader, see Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader
online Help.

Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM

This section explains how to view the contents of the CD-ROMs.

1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.
2. Click [Browse This CD-ROM].
Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.

Printer Drivers for This Machine

This section explains printer drivers for this machine.

• You can install the RPCS printer driver, and the Adobe PostScript printer drivers from the CD-ROM
provided with this machine or download them from the supplier's Web site. If your operating system
is Windows XP x64/Vista x64, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 x64, you must download the printer

65
 4. Appendix

drivers from the supplier's Web site. Select this machine and the operating system you are using, and
then download them.
Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The following drivers are included
on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.

Printer Language RPCS PostScript 3 HDI driver

Windows 2000 *1 OK OK OK

Windows XP *2 OK OK OK

Windows Vista *3 OK OK OK

4 Windows Server 2003 *4 OK OK OK

Mac OS *5 OK

Mac OS X *6 OK

*1 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional /Microsoft Windows 2000 Server/Microsoft Windows 2000
Advanced Server
*2 Microsoft Windows XP Professional/Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
*3 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate/Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise/Microsoft Windows Vista Business/
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
*4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition/
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Web Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition/Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition/Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 R2 Datacenter Edition
*5 Versions 8.6 to 9.2 of the Mac OS (Mac OS X Classic mode is supported.)
*6 Mac OS X 10.1 or later (Native mode)
RPCS printer driver
This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. In
addition to the conventional user interface, another preset user interface is provided.
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files
Adobe PostScript printer drivers allow the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer
language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
PPD files
PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
HDI driver
The HDI driver for the AutoCAD 2000 series is provided to work specifically with the AutoCAD 2000
series of CAD applications.

66
 Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

Using the HDI driver reduces data size during print out, enabling faster print out.
Also, the HDI driver is specially designed for use in environments where AutoCAD 2000 applications
are running.

• For details, see “Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference, and PostScript 3 Supplement.
• For details, see “Using the HDI Driver for AutoCAD”, Printer Reference

TWAIN Driver

This section describes the file path and system requirements of the TWAIN driver.
This driver is required to scan an original using a scanner. To use the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, 4
this driver must be installed.
File path
The driver is included in the following folder on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver and Utilities”
provided with this machine:
\DRIVERS\TWAIN
System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the following operating system properly
• Operating system
Windows 2000/XP/Vista
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
• Display resolution
800 × 600 pixels, 256 colors or higher

• For details, see Scanner Reference, and TWAIN driver help.

DeskTopBinder Lite

This section describes the file path and system requirements of DeskTopBinder Lite.
DeskTopBinder is to be installed on the client computers for integration and management of various kinds
of files such as scan files, files created with applications, and existing scan files. This software allows you
to use various functions for stored scan files such as viewing stored files. Also, with the ScanRouter delivery
software, you can view the files stored in in-trays of the delivery server, or use other functions for stored
files.

67
 4. Appendix

For details about the software installed with DeskTopBinder Lite, see “DeskTopBinder Lite”, Scanner
Reference.
File path
The software is included in the following folder on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver and
Utilities” provided with this machine:
\UTILITY\DESKV2
System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
• Operating system
4 • When installing all functions of DeskTopBinder:
Windows 2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1 or later/2000 Advanced
Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition
• When installing only SmartDeviceMonitor for Client:
Windows 2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP
Home Edition

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

This section describes the file path and available functions of SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is an application that uses TCP/IP and IPX/SPX to monitor network printers.
It can monitor multiple network printers using IP address. We recommend that network administrators use
this application.
File path
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder in the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers
and Utilities”:
\NETWORK\DEVMON\ADMIN\DISK1

Operating system Protocol stack

Windows 2000 TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT

68
 Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

Operating system Protocol stack

Windows XP TCP/IP provided with Windows XP

IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client provided with Windows XP

Windows Vista TCP/IP provided with Windows Vista

Novell Client provided with Windows Vista

Windows Server 2003 TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003

IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003
4
NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003

Available functions
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the functions to check the followings:
• Printer supplies such as paper or toner
• Results of print jobs executed from the computer

• For details, see Network Guide, and SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

This section describes the file path and system requirements of DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client.
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client allows you to manage and print various data such as files
created with an application, images scanned with a scanner, and existing images as one document.
File path
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM
labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”:
\NETWORK\DEVMON\CLIENT\DISK1
Operating environment of the printer driver
• Applicable computer
Machines which properly work with the applicable OS below. PC/AT compatible machine.
• Applicable OS

69
 4. Appendix

Windows 2000/XP/Vista
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

• See “DeskTopBinder Lite”, Scanner Reference or Help of DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for

Client.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is also included in DeskTopBinder and DeskTopBinder Lite. See Help
of DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

70
 Specifications for the Main Unit

Specifications for the Main Unit

This section describes specifications for the main unit.
Configuration:
Console
Photosensitivity type:
OPC drum
Original scanning:
Original feed image scanning over fixed contact image sensor
Copy process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
4
Development:
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
Fusing:
Heating roll pressure system
Resolution:
• Scanning originals: 600 dpi
• Printing: 600 dpi
Original reference position:
Center
Warm-up time (23°C, rated voltage):
Less than 2 minutes
Originals:
Sheet
Maximum original size:
• Metric version:
914 mm×30,000 mm
• Inch version:
36"×1181" (98.4 ft.)
Paper size:
• Type 1
• Metric version:
Paper roll: 210×210 mm - 914×15,000 mm

71
 4. Appendix

Bypass tray: 210×182 mm - 914×2,000 mm

• Inch version:
Paper roll: 81/2"×81/2"-36"×590.6"
Bypass tray: 81/2"×7.17"-36"×78"
• Type 2:
• Metric version:
Paper roll: 210×210 mm - 914×30,000 mm
Bypass tray: 210×182 mm - 914×2,000 mm
• Inch version:
Paper roll: 81/2"×81/2" - 36"×1181"
4 Bypass tray: 81/2"×7.17" - 36"×78"
Paper weight:
52.3 - 110 g/m2 (13.9 - 29.3 lb.)
Non-reproduction area (Copier):
• Metric version:
• Top: Less than 8 mm
• Bottom: Less than 8 mm
• Left and Right 2 ± 2 mm (less than 5 mm on either side)
• Inch version:
• Top: Less than 0.32"
• Bottom: Less than 0.32"
• Left and Right 0.08" ± 0.08" (less than 0.19" on either side)
First copy/print time:
• Type 1
• Metric version:
A1 : 13 seconds (Paper bypass: 31 seconds)
• Inch version:
D : 13 seconds (Paper bypass: 31 seconds)
• Type 2
• Metric version:
A1 : 10 seconds (Paper bypass: 31 seconds)
• Inch version:
D : 10 seconds (Paper bypass: 31 seconds)

72
 Specifications for the Main Unit

Copying speed:
• Type 1: 5 copies/minute (A0 (E) ), 10 copies/minute (A1 (D) )
• Type 2: 7 copies/minute (A0 (E) ), 14 copies/minute (A1 (D) )
Reproduction ratio:
• Preset reproduction ratios:
• Enlargement

Metric version Inch version (Engineering) Inch version (Architecture)

400.0% 400.0% 400.0%

282.8% 258.8% 266.7%

4
200.0% 200.0% 200.0%

141.4% 129.4% 133.3%

• Full size

Metric version Inch version (Engineering) Inch version (Architecture)

100% 100% 100%

• Reduction

Metric version Inch version (Engineering) Inch version (Architecture)

70.7% 64.7% 66.7%

50.0% 50.0% 50.0%

35.4% 32.4% 33.3%

25.0% 25.0% 25.0%

• Zoom: From 25.0 to 400.0% in increments of 0.1%

Maximum continuous copy run:
99 sheets
Power consumption:
• Main unit only

Type 1 Type 2

Warm-up 2400 W 3500 W

73
 4. Appendix

Type 1 Type 2

Stand-by 250 W 250 W

During printing 1750 W 2200 W

Maximum 2400 W 3500 W

• Complete system

Type 1 Type 2

Warm-up 2400 W 3500 W

4 Stand-by 300 W 300 W

During printing 1750 W 2200 W

Maximum 2400 W 3500 W

• The complete system consists of the main unit with roll feeder or paper cassette.
Dimensions (W × D × H):
1250×755×1200 mm, 49.2×29.7×47.2 inches (Upper output stacker and rear output tray not
included.)
Space for main unit (W × D):
1250×755 mm, 49.2×29.7 inches
Noise emission:
• Sound power level:

Type 1 Type 2

Stand-by Less than 57 dB (A) Less than 66 dB (A)

Copying Less than 73 dB (A) Less than 76 dB (A)

• Sound pressure level:

Type 1 Type 2

Stand-by Less than 51 dB (A) Less than 60 dB (A)

Copying Less than 67 dB (A) Less than 70 dB (A)

• Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values measured in accordance
with ISO 7779.

74
 Specifications for the Main Unit

• Sound power level and sound pressure level are measured from the position of the
bystander.
Weight:
Approx. 295 kg, 649 lb.

Document Server

HDD:
160 GB × 2
Capacity:
3,000 pages (With all functions combined, a total of 3,000 pages can be accommodated.) 4
Maximum number of stored documents:
3,000 documents
Maximum number of pages per document:
1,000 pages
Capacity (Memory Sorting):
The following minimum numbers of sheets can be accommodated:
A0: 100
A1: 100
A2: 200
A3: 400
A4: 400
Additional functions:
Sample copy, Sort, Stack, Sample Print, Locked Print, Stamp

75
 4. Appendix

Specifications for Options

This section describes specifications for options.

Roll Feeder Type 7140

This section describes specifications for the lower tray of Roll Feeder Type 7140.
Paper size:
Width: 210 - 914 mm, length: 15,000 mm (diameter: 175 mm)
Paper widths:
4 • Metric version
210 mm, 257 mm, 297 mm, 364 mm, 420 mm, 440 mm, 490 mm, 515 mm, 594 mm, 620
mm, 625 mm, 660 mm, 680 mm, 707 mm, 728 mm, 800 mm, 841 mm, 880 mm, 914 mm
• Inch version
81/2", 9", 11", 12", 17", 18", 22", 24", 30", 34", 36"
Power consumption
88 W (supplied by main unit)
Dimensions (W × D × H):
1124×369×236 mm, 44.3×14.6×9.3 inches
Weight:
Approx. 36 kg, 79.2 lb.

Paper Cassette Type 7140

This section describes specifications for the cut paper tray of Paper Cassette Type 7140
Paper size:
A2 , B3 , A3 , B4 , A4 , 11"×17" , 81/2"×14" , 81/2"×13" , 81/2"×11"
, 12"×18" 1
, 14 /2"×12" , 15×11" , 11"×14" , 9"×12" 1
, 8 /2"×12"
Paper weight:
64 - 110 g/m2, 17 - 29.3 lb.
Power consumption:
76 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W × D × H):
1014×644×236 mm, 40.0×25.4×9.3 inches

76
 Specifications for Options

Weight:
Approx. 38 kg, 83.6 lb.

Carrier Sheet

Allows you to load bent, folded, creased, thin, or pasted originals using this sheet.

Original Hanger

Stack originals here before copying or scanning them.

4
Multi Stacker

Attach this to the front or back of the machine.

You can stack a large number of copies on it.

Specifications for IEEE 1284 Interface Board (Optional)

This section describes specifications for the IEEE 1284 interface board.
Transmission spec.:
IEEE 1284
Required cable:
Standard IEEE 1284 compliant Micro Centronics 36 pin cable

Specifications for Wireless LAN Board (Optional)

This section describes specifications for the wireless LAN board.

Transmission spec.:
• Based on IEEE 802.11a/b/g (wireless LAN)
• Based on IEEE 802.11b/g (wireless LAN)
Protocol:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Data transfer speed:
Auto select from the following speed:

77
 4. Appendix

1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 6 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 11 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 36 Mbps,
48 Mbps, 54 Mbps
Frequency range:
• IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless LAN:
• 2412 - 2472 MHz (1 - 13 channels)
• 5180 - 5320 MHz (36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, and 64 channels)
• IEEE 802.11b/g wireless LAN:
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
Transmission mode:
• Ad hoc mode
4 • Infrastructure mode

• SmartDeviceMonitor and Web Image Monitor are supported.

Specifications for Gigabit Ethernet (Optional)

This section describes specifications for the Gigabit Ethernet.

Interface Connector:
Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T)
Data Transmission Speed:
1000 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 10 Mbps
Protocol:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Distance Between Devices:
100 m

78
 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

This section describes recommended paper sizes and types.

• If you use damp or curled paper, a staple clogging or paper jam may occur.
Metric version

Where paper is Number of sheets that

Paper type Paper size
placed can be placed

Paper roll
Diameter: less than 4
175 mm
Core: 76.4 ± 0.25 mm
Plain paper Width: 210, 257,
Paper roll tray
52.3 - 110 g/m2 297, 364, 420, 440, -
(optional) 490, 515, 594, 620,
(13.9 - 29.3 lb)
625, 660, 680, 707,
728, 800, 841, 880,
914 mm
Roll length: less than
150 m

Paper roll
Diameter: less than
175 mm
Core: 76.4 ± 0.25 mm
Width: 210, 257,
Paper roll tray
Translucent paper 297, 364, 420, 440, -
(optional) 490, 515, 594, 620,
625, 660, 680, 707,
728, 800, 841, 880,
914 mm
Roll length: less than
150 m

79
 4. Appendix

Where paper is Number of sheets that

Paper type Paper size
placed can be placed

Paper roll
Diameter: less than
175 mm
Core: 76.4 ± 0.25 mm
Width: 210, 257,
Paper roll tray
Recycled paper 297, 364, 420, 440, -
(optional) 490, 515, 594, 620,
625, 660, 680, 707,
4 728, 800, 841, 880,
914 mm
Roll length: less than
150 m

Paper roll
Diameter: less than
175 mm
Core: 76.4 ± 0.25 mm
Width: 210, 257,
Paper roll tray
Film 297, 364, 420, 440, -
(optional) 490, 515, 594, 620,
625, 660, 680, 707,
728, 800, 841, 880,
914 mm
Roll length: less than
150 m

Plain paper
Cut paper tray A2 , B3 , A3 ,
64 - 110 g/m2 250 sheets
(optional) B4 , A4
(17 - 29.3 lb)

Cut paper tray A2 , B3 , A3 ,

Recycled paper 250 sheets
(optional) B4 , A4

Cut paper tray

(optional) Translucent paper A2 , B3 , A3 ,
250 sheets
(Supported by Tray 4 (vellum) B4 , A4
only.)

80
 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

Where paper is Number of sheets that

Paper type Paper size
placed can be placed

A0 , A1 , A2
A3 , A4 , B1 ,
Plain paper B2 , B3 , B4

Bypass tray 52.3 - 110 g/m2 1 sheet

Paper width: 210 -
(13.9 - 29.3 lb) 914 mm
Paper length: 182 -
2000 mm

A0 , A1 A2 4
A3 , A4 , B1 ,
B2 , B3 , B4

Bypass tray Translucent paper

Paper width: 210 -
914 mm
Paper length: 182 -
2000 mm

A0 , A1 , A2
A3 , A4 , B1 ,
B2 , B3 , B4

Bypass tray Film

Paper width: 210 -
914 mm
Paper length: 182 -
2000 mm

81
 4. Appendix

Inch version

Where paper is Number of sheets that

Paper type Paper size
placed can be placed

Paper roll
Diameter: 6.7" or less
Internal diameter: 3.0"
Plain paper ± 0.01"
Paper roll tray
64 - 110 g/m2 Width: 81/2", 9", 11", -
(optional)
(17 - 29.3 lb) 12", 17", 18", 22",
24", 34", 36"
4 Roll length:
590" (49.2 ft.) or less

Paper roll
Diameter: 6.7" or less
Internal diameter:
Paper roll tray Translucent paper 2.98" - 3.03"

(optional) (vellum) Width: 81/2", 9", 11", -

12", 17", 18", 22",
24", 34", 36"
Roll length:
590" (49.2 ft.) or less

Paper roll
Diameter: 6.7" or less
Internal diameter: 3.0"
Paper roll tray ± 0.01"
Film Width: 81/2", 9", 11", -
(optional)
12", 17", 18", 22",
24", 34", 36"
Roll length:
590" (49.2 ft.) or less

82
 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

Where paper is Number of sheets that

Paper type Paper size
placed can be placed

11"×17" ,
81/2"×14" ,
81/2"×13" ,
Plain paper 81/2"×11" ,
Cut paper tray
64 - 110 g/m2 12"×18" , 250 sheets
(optional) 141/2"×12" ,
(17 - 29.3 lb)
15×11" , 11"×14"
, 9"×12" ,
81/2"×12"

11"×17" , 4
81/2"×14" ,
1
8 /2"×13" ,
Cut paper tray 81/2"×11" ,
Recycled paper 12"×18" , 250 sheets
(optional) 141/2"×12" ,
15×11" , 11"×14"
, 9"×12" ,
1
8 /2"×12"

11"×17" ,
81/2"×14" ,
Cut paper tray 81/2"×13" ,
1
8 /2"×11" ,
(optional) Translucent paper
12"×18" , 250 sheets
(Supported by Tray 4 (vellum) 141/2"×12" ,
only.) 15×11" , 11"×14"
, 9"×12" ,
81/2"×12"

83
 4. Appendix

Where paper is Number of sheets that

Paper type Paper size
placed can be placed

• Engineering
E (34"×44") ,
D (22"×34") ,
C (17"×22") ,
B (11"×17") ,
Plain paper
A (81/ 2"×11")
Bypass tray 52.3 - 110 g/m2 1 sheet
• Architecture
(13.9 - 29.3 lb)
4 E (36"×48") ,
D (24"×36") ,
C (18"×24") ,
B (12"×18") ,
A (9"×12")

• Engineering
E (34"×44") ,
D (22"×34") ,
C (17"×22") ,
B (11"×17") ,
Translucent paper A (81/2"×11")
Bypass tray 1 sheet
(vellum) • Architecture
E (36"×48") ,
D (24"×36") ,
C (18"×24") ,
B (12"×18") ,
A (9"×12")

84
 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

Where paper is Number of sheets that

Paper type Paper size
placed can be placed

• Engineering
E (34"×44") ,
D (22"×34") ,
C (17"×22") ,
B (11"×17") ,
A (81/ 2"×11")
Bypass tray Film 1 sheet
• Architecture
E (36"×48") , 4
D (24"×36") ,
C (18"×24") ,
B (12"×18") ,
A (9"×12")

• Load paper into the cut paper tray with the print side down.
• Load paper into the bypass tray with the print side up.
• You must manually specify the size of custom size paper when loading it on the bypass tray.
• If multiple-sheet jams occur, load the paper sheet by sheet.
• Do not use paper designed for inkjet printers, as these may stick to the fusing unit and cause a misfeed.
• If you load paper of the same size in the same orientation in two or more trays, the machine
automatically shifts to the other tray - except the bypass tray - when the first tray in use runs out of
paper. This function is called “Auto Tray Switching”. (However, if one tray has recycled or special
paper, the settings of the other trays must be the same for Auto Tray Switching to work.) This saves
interrupting a copy run to replenish paper when making a large number of copies. See “Copier /
Document Server Features”, and “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.

Paper roll

• If humidity is high, and the paper roll has expanded due to moisture, be sure to cut off approximately
1000 mm (40"), before making copies or printing.
• Use a paper roll that has a black core.

85
 4. Appendix

• When a paper roll of 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or 110 g/m2 (29.3 lb) paper is used and there is little paper
left on the roll, image may be faint near the leading and/or trailing edge, or an image may be
doubled. To prevent this, set 3-5 mm (0.11"- 0.19") margins from the leading and trailing edges.

• p.53 "Anti-humidity Heater Switch"

• “Margin Adjustment”, Copy/Document Server Reference

Cut paper

• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.

4 • To prevent multiple-sheet fed simultaneously, fan the paper before loading it in the tray.
• Do not load paper over the limit mark of the paper tray.
• Make sure the paper edges of the sheets are aligned to the front of the paper tray.
• Load translucent paper lengthways when possible.
• If the output copies are badly curled, turn the paper loaded in the cut paper trays upside down, or
remove the copies during the copy run.

Notes on using translucent paper

Smooth out any curls in the paper before loading it.

Load translucent paper lengthways when possible.

Hemmed paper

When using hemmed paper, wrinkles and other problems may occur on paper.
Use the following procedure when copying or printing onto hemmed paper:
• Use the bypass tray.
• Make sure the paper is straight, and align the paper guides of the bypass tray to the paper size.
• Load only one sheet at a time.
• Remove each paper from the output tray and place it on a flat surface.

• Due to the thickness of hemmed paper, image may be faint, blurred, or wrinkled, and paper jams
may occur. You may be able to prevent this by copying or printing on the rear surface of the paper
or feeding the bottom of the paper in first.

86
 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

• “Copying from the Bypass Tray”, Copy/Document Server Reference

87
 4. Appendix

Unusable Paper
This section describes paper unusable on this machine.

• To avoid fire or machine failure, do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive
paper.

• To prevent faults, do not use any of the following kinds of treated paper:
• Paper for inkjet printers
4 • Thermal fax paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper
• Paper with perforated lines
• Hemmed-edge paper
• Color OHP transparencies with easily melted coatings
• Tab stock
• Envelopes
• Faults can occur if you copy or print onto sides that are already printed. Take care to copy or print
onto unprinted sides only.

• To prevent misfeeds, do not use the following kinds of paper:

• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Perforated paper
• Slippery paper
• Torn paper
• Rough paper
• Thin paper with little stiffness
• Paper with a dusty surface
• Adhesive labels
• OHP transparencies
• If you copy or print onto rough grain paper, the output image might be blurred.

88
 Unusable Paper

• Do not reuse copy paper that has been already copied or printed onto.
• When using non-recommended paper (especially chemically treated paper, hemmed paper, film),
paper jams may occur, paper wrinkle, or output image deteriorate.
• Do not copy or print on both sides of paper.
• If you use paper roll that is not marked with a black core, paper jams might occur when the paper
ends. If film is being supplied from the paper roll tray, jams can occur when the film runs out, whatever
the color of the roll core.
• Film and translucent paper is prone to slight tearing when copied onto.
• Do not use paper printed onto with an inkjet printer, as it may become entangled or jammed, which
may damage the machine. In the worst event, this may cause fire, depending on paper and ink type
combination.
4

89
 4. Appendix

Paper Storage
This section describes how to store paper.
• When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less).
• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper vertically.
• Under high temperature and humidity conditions, or low temperature and humidity conditions, store
paper in plastic bags.
4
• p.91 "Handling Paper"

90
 Handling Paper

Handling Paper
This section describes handling paper.
Depending on the humidity of the storage environment, handle paper as follows:

BKX017S

• If humidity is above 60%, turn on the anti-humidity heater.

• p.53 "Anti-humidity Heater Switch"

91
 4. Appendix

92
INDEX
A Display panel..................................................39, 42
Document Server........................................5, 48, 75
Alert indicator........................................................40
Dos and Don'ts......................................................63
Anti-condensation heater switch..........................32
Anti-humidity heater switch......................34, 36, 37 E
Anti-humidity Heater Switch.................................53 Earth leakage breaker..........................................32
Authentication screen............................................44 Energy Saver.........................................................52
Auto feed button.............................................34, 36 Energy Saver key..................................................40
Auto Off..................................................................52 Energy Saving Functions.......................................28
Auto Reduce/Enlarge.............................................4 ENERGY STAR Program.......................................27
Available characters.............................................55 Energy-saving........................................................27
B Enlarge.....................................................................4
Enter key (# key)...................................................40
Back fence.............................................................36
Entering letters.......................................................56
Bridge Unit.............................................................35
Entering text.....................................................55, 56
C Entry screen............................................................55
Carrier Sheet..........................................................77 Environments where the machine can be used........
................................................................................15
CAUTION........................................................15, 21
Ethernet...................................................................78
CD-ROM............................................59, 61, 62, 65
External options.....................................................35
Changing modes...................................................48
Clear Modes key...................................................39 F
Clear/Stop key.....................................................40 Fan Folding Finisher..............................................35
Combine...................................................................4 Font Manager........................................................65
Components...........................................................31 Front output auxiliary tray.....................................32
Computer..................................................................7 Function keys.........................................................39
Contents of the CD-ROM.....................................65 Fusing unit cover....................................................33
Control panel...............................31, 39, 44, 45, 46
G
Copier................................................................4, 48
Copy speed...........................................................30 Gigabit Ethernet..............................................37, 78
Counterfeit bank bills............................................12 H
Cross Folding Finisher...........................................35
Handling Paper.....................................................91
Cut paper...............................................................86
Handling power cords..........................................16
Cut paper trays......................................................35
Handling power plugs..........................................16
Cut paper trays (optional)....................................32
Handling the machine's interior............................18
Cutter knob......................................................34, 36
Handling the machine's supplies..........................18
D Handling the main machine..................................17
Data In indicator....................................................41 Hold Print..................................................................5
DataOverWriteSecurity Unit............................7, 37 How to enter text...................................................56
Deleting characters...............................................56 How to use the operating instructions..................61
DeskTopBinder.........................................................5 HTML manuals............................................3, 59, 61
DeskTopBinder Lite................................................67 I
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client......
..........................................................................65, 69 IEEE 1284 interface board............................37, 77

93
 Imaging unit release lever....................................32 O
Important................................................................12
Off mode................................................................27
Installing operating instructions............................59
OHP transparencies..............................................88
Internal options......................................................37
Opening manuals from the [Start] menu.............61
Interrupt key...........................................................40
Opening manuals from the CD-ROM..................62
K Opening manuals from the icon...........................61
Key arrangement...................................................55 Operating instructions...........................................61
Key Color...............................................................43 Operation switch......................................32, 40, 50
Options......................................................14, 35, 37
L
Original guide.......................................................32
Legal prohibition.................................................... 12 Original hanger..............................................35, 77
Local connection......................................................5 Original table........................................................32
Locked Print..............................................................5 Other options.........................................................38
Login.................................................................45, 47
P
Login/Logout key..................................................40
Logout..............................................................46, 47 Paper Bypass.........................................................33
Low Power mode...................................................27 Paper bypass's paper guide.................................33
Lower tray (optional).............................................32 Paper feed knob..............................................34, 36
Lower tray (paper roll tray)..................................35 Paper holder....................................................34, 36
Paper roll................................................................85
M
Paper sizes.............................................................79
Machine types.......................................................30 Paper storage........................................................90
Main power.....................................................50, 52 Paper types............................................................79
Main power indicator...........................................40 Password..................................................................7
Main power switch.........................................32, 50 PDF manuals......................................................3, 59
Main unit................................................................71 Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels......
Manuals..............................................59, 61, 62, 65 ................................................................................21
Manuals for this machine........................................1 PostScript................................................................65
Manuals list..............................................................3 Power...............................................................50, 51
Multi Stacker...................................................35, 77 Power supply.........................................................50
Power Switch Symbols..........................................25
N
Print speed..............................................................30
Names of major options.......................................14 Printed manuals........................................................3
Network....................................................................6 Printer.................................................................5, 48
Network connection................................................5 Printer driver..............................................45, 47, 65
Network delivery scanner.......................................6 Printer Drivers and Utilities.......................65, 68, 69
Note.................................................................12, 13 Printer unit...............................................................37
Note to users.......................................................... 12 Printer Utility for Mac............................................65
Note to users in Canada.......................................13 Printing a PDF file directly.......................................5
Note to users in the state of California................13 Program key...........................................................40
Note to users in the United States of America.........
................................................................................12 R
Notice..................................................................... 12 Rear original exit (straight)...................................33
Number keys..........................................................40

94
Rear output.............................................................33 Terms......................................................................14
Recommended paper sizes and types.................79 Text...................................................................55, 56
Reduce......................................................................4 Translucent paper..................................................79
Regulatory information..........................................13 Turning off the main power...................................52
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada... Turning off the power......................................50, 51
................................................................................13 Turning on the main power...................................50
Roll holder.......................................................34, 36 Turning on the power......................................50, 51
RPCS.......................................................................65 TWAIN driver........................................................67
S U
Safety information.................................................15 Unusable paper.....................................................88
Safety precautions to be followed.......................15 Upper output stacker.............................................31
Sample Copy key..................................................40 Upper tray..............................................................32
Sample Print.............................................................5 User Code Authentication..............................44, 45
Scanner..............................................................6, 48 User Text................................................................57
Scanner cover........................................................ 32 User Tools/Counter key.......................................39
Scanner cover release lever.................................32 Using the Print Job function.....................................5
Scanner Driver and Utilities............................65, 67 Utilities included on the CD-ROM........................ 65
Scanner Stop key..................................................32
V
Scanner unit...........................................................37
ScanRouter...............................................................6 Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM..................65
Security functions.....................................................7 W
Sending scan files by e-mail...................................6
Sending scan files by Scan to Folder.....................6 WARNING.....................................................15, 21
Side fences.............................................................37 Web Image Monitor..................................... 5, 7, 47
Side guide pocket.................................................37 Wireless LAN..................................................37, 77
Side lever...............................................................37 Wireless LAN board.......................................37, 77
Simplified Display..................................................42
Simplified Display key....................................40, 42
Sleep mode............................................................27
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin................. 7, 65, 68
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.............................69
Software included on the CD-ROM....................65
Specifications.....................................71, 76, 77, 78
Specifications for Document Server.....................75
Stamp........................................................................4
Start key.................................................................40
Stored Print...............................................................5
Storing paper.........................................................90
Symbols..................................................................14
System Reset..........................................................49
T
Tab stock................................................................88

95
 MEMO

96 EN USA D046-7704
Trademarks

Adobe, Acrobat, Acrobat Reader, PostScript, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Apple®, AppleTalk®, Macintosh®, and Mac OS® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows NT®, Windows Server®, and Windows Vista® are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Monotype is a registered trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
PowerPC® is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or
both.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company Limited.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective
companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
* The product name of Windows 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
* The product name of Windows 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
* The product name of Windows Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
* The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
* The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Media Center Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Tablet PC Edition
* The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Web Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Datacenter Edition
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Datacenter Edition
* The product names of Windows NT 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT ® Workstation 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT ® Server 4.0

Copyright © 2008
 Operating Instructions About This Machine

Type for 5100WD/GWD5100/LW5100/Aficio MP W5100

Type for 7140WD/GWD7140/LW7140/Aficio MP W7140

EN USA D046-7704
 Operating Instructions
Troubleshooting

1 When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted

2 Troubleshooting When Using the Copy/Document Server Function
3 Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
4 Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
5 Adding Paper and Toner
6 Clearing Misfeeds
7 Remarks

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information
in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your safety and
benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy place for quick reference.

Important

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.

Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Notes:

The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before
reading this manual. (For details, see "Machine Types", About This Machine.)
Type 1: 5100WD/GWD5100/LW5100/Aficio MP W5100
Type 2: 7140WD/GWD7140/LW7140/Aficio MP W7140
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

For good copy quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier.

The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other than
genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.

Power Source

208-240 V, 60 Hz, 16 A
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source, see p.97
"Power Connection".
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.

• Media differ according to manual.

• The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
• For details about the functions of RW-7140, refer to the manuals for this option.
About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also explains the control panel,
preparation procedures for using the machine, how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs
provided.
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace paper, toner, and other
consumables.
Copy/Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for
explanations on how to place originals.
Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software
provided.
General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering e-mail addresses, and
user codes. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect the machine.
Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that you can use to
prevent unauthorized use of the machine, data tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced
security, we recommend that you first make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.

1
 • Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator using Web Image Monitor.
For details, see “Setting Up the Machine”, Security Reference.
Be sure to read this manual when setting the enhanced security functions, or user and administrator
authentication.
PostScript 3 Supplement
Explains how to set up and use PostScript 3.
UNIX Supplement
For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized dealer.
This manual includes descriptions of functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
Information
Contains general notes on the machine, and information about the trademarks of product names used
in the manuals.
Other manuals
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide

• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.

• The following software products are referred to using general names:

Product name General name

DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Professional *1 DeskTopBinder

*1 Optional

2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine.................................................................................................................................1
How to Read This Manual.................................................................................................................................6
Symbols...........................................................................................................................................................6
Names of Major Options..............................................................................................................................6
1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted
Indicators.............................................................................................................................................................7
Panel Tone...........................................................................................................................................................8
Checking Machine Status and Settings............................................................................................................9
When an Indicator to the Right of a Function Key Is Lit.................................................................................12
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.....................................................................................14
When a Job Is Not Performed.........................................................................................................................18
2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy/Document Server Function
Messages Displayed When Using the Copy/Document Server Function..................................................21
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies.........................................................................................................24
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted...............................................................................................28
When Memory Is Full..................................................................................................................................34
3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver...............................................................................35
Windows 2000...........................................................................................................................................35
Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2.............................................................35
Windows XP Home Edition.........................................................................................................................36
Windows Vista.............................................................................................................................................36
If USB Connection Fails...................................................................................................................................38
Messages Displayed When Using the Printer Function.................................................................................39
Status Messages..........................................................................................................................................39
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When Using the Printer Function.........................................39
Message Printed on the Error Logs or Reports..........................................................................................41
When You Cannot Print...................................................................................................................................49
When the Data In Indicator Does Not Light Up or Flash..........................................................................51
Other Printing Problems...................................................................................................................................53
4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected....................................................................................................61
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files.........................................................................................................63

3
 When Stored Files Cannot Be Accessed...................................................................................................63
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan File..................................................................63
When the TWAIN Driver Cannot Be Started............................................................................................63
When Stored Files Cannot Be Edited.........................................................................................................64
When the Network Delivery Function Cannot Be Used...........................................................................64
When S/MIME Cannot Be Used...............................................................................................................64
Operations Are Not Possible When Messages Are Displayed...............................................................65
Messages Displayed When Using the Scanner Function.............................................................................66
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When Using the Scanner Function.....................................66
Messages Displayed on the Client Computer...........................................................................................74
5. Adding Paper and Toner
Loading Paper..................................................................................................................................................77
Loading the Paper Roll................................................................................................................................78
Loading Cut Paper.......................................................................................................................................79
Changing the Paper Size.................................................................................................................................81
Changing the Paper Size in the Paper Roll Tray.......................................................................................81
Changing the Paper Size in the Cut Paper Tray........................................................................................81
Adding Toner....................................................................................................................................................83
Replacing Toner...........................................................................................................................................84
Sending Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out........................................................................85
Used Toner...................................................................................................................................................85
6. Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Jammed Paper................................................................................................................................87
Locating Jammed Paper..............................................................................................................................87
Removing Jammed Paper............................................................................................................................88
7. Remarks
Where to Put Your Machine............................................................................................................................95
Machine Environment..................................................................................................................................95
Power Connection.......................................................................................................................................97
Maintaining Your Machine.............................................................................................................................99
Cleaning the Inside the Scanner Cover.....................................................................................................99
Cleaning the Imaging Unit........................................................................................................................101
Cleaning the Power Cable Plug...............................................................................................................102

4
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................103

5
 How to Read This Manual
Symbols

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.

Names of Major Options

Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual:

• Roll Feeder Type 7140 Paper roll tray
• Paper Cassette Type 7140 Cut paper tray
• Folder FD6500A/FD6500B Folding finisher

6
1. When the Machine Does Not Operate
As Wanted
This chapter describes basic troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all functions of this machine.

1
Indicators
This section describes the indicators displayed when the machine requires the user to remove misfed paper,
to add paper or to perform other procedures.

Indicator Status

: Misfeed indicator Appears when a misfeed occurs.

See p.87 "Removing Jammed Paper".

: Load Paper indicator Appears when paper runs out.

See p.77 "Loading Paper".

: Add Toner indicator Appears when toner runs out.

See p.83 "Adding Toner".

: Waste Toner Full indicator Appears when the waste toner bottle is full.
Contact your sales or service representative.

: Service Call indicator Appears when the machine is malfunctioning or requires

maintenance.

: Open Cover indicator Appears when the front cover, etc., is open.

7
 1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted

Panel Tone
The following table describes the meaning of the various beep patterns that the machine produces to alert
1 users about machine conditions.

Beep pattern Meaning Cause

Single short beep. Panel/screen input A control panel or screen key was
accepted. pressed.

Short, then long beep. Panel/screen input rejected. An invalid key was pressed on the
control panel or screen, or the entered
password was incorrect.

Single long beep. Job completed successfully. A Copier/Document Server Features

job has finished.

Two long beeps. Machine has warmed up. After cooling or being switched on, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.

Five long beeps. Soft alert. The initial screen returns when the
machine goes into energy-saving mode
and when simplified display is canceled.

Five long beeps repeated Soft alert. Paper is empty.

four times.

Five short beeps repeated Strong alert. The machine requires user attention
five times. because paper has jammed, the toner
needs replenishing, or other problems
have occurred.

• Users cannot mute the machine's beep alerts. When the machine beeps to alert users of a paper jam
or toner request, if the machine's covers are opened and closed repeatedly within a short space of
time, the beep alert might continue, even after normal status has resumed.
• You can select to enable or disable beep alerts. For details about Panel Key Sound, see “System
Settings”, General Settings Guide.

8
 Checking Machine Status and Settings

Checking Machine Status and Settings

You can check the machine's system status.
Maintenance Info 1
You can check the following items under [Maintenance Info]:
• [Remaining Toner]
Displays the amount of remaining toner.
• [Paper Tray]
Displays the paper type and size loaded in the paper tray.
• [Original Misfeed]
Displays state of and solutions for original misfeeds.
• [Paper Misfeed]
Displays state of and solutions for paper jams.
• [Cover Open]
Indicates whether front cover, scanner cover, etc., is open.
Data Storage
You can check the following items under [Data Storage]:
• [HDD Remaining Memory]
Displays the amount of available hard disk drive memory.
• [HDD File(s)]
Displays the total number of jobs stored in the hard disk drive.
• [Print Job(s)]
Displays the number of jobs for “Hold Print”, “Stored Print”, “Locked Print”, and “Sample Print”.
• [Memory Erase Status]
Displays the state of the memory data.
Machine Address Info
You can check the following items under [Machine Address Info]:
• [Machine IPv4 Address]
Displays the machine's IPv4 address.
• [Machine IPv6 Address]
Displays the machine's IPv6 address.
Inquiry
You can check the following items under [Inquiry]:

9
 1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted

• [Machine Repairs]
Displays the machine number and contact number that are required for service.
• [Sales Representative]
1 Displays the sales representative's telephone number.
• [Supply Order]
Displays the contact number for placing supply orders.
• [Supply Details]
Displays the name of toner used on the machine.

1. On the control panel, press [System Status].

2. Press each tab and check the contents.

10
 Checking Machine Status and Settings

3. After checking the information, press [Exit]. The previous screen returns.

• [Original Misfeed], [Paper Misfeed], and [Cover Open] appear on the [Maintenance Info] tab only
when these errors occur.
• For details about how to locate and remove misfeeds, see “Removing Jammed Paper”.

• p.87 "Removing Jammed Paper"

11
 1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted

When an Indicator to the Right of a Function Key

Is Lit
1 When an indicator to the right of a function key lights up, press the corresponding function key. Then, follow
the instructions displayed on the control panel.

BLI018S

If an error occurs in the function you are using, check the message that appears on the control panel, and
then refer to “Messages Displayed” for the relevant function.
Following describe the main reasons the indicator lights up.

Problem Cause Solution

Documents and reports do There is no paper left. Load paper. See p.77 "Loading
not print out. Paper".

An error has occurred. The function whose indicator Record the code number shown on the
is lit is defective. display and contact your service
representative. See “Messages
Displayed” of each chapter.
You can use other functions normally.

12
 When an Indicator to the Right of a Function Key Is Lit

Problem Cause Solution

The machine is unable to A network error has • Check the displayed message and
connect to the network. occurred. take an appropriate action. See
“Messages Displayed” of each 1
chapter.
• Check that the machine is correctly
connected to the network, and that
the machine is correctly set. For
details about how to connect the
network, see “Connecting the
Machine”, General Settings
Guide.
• Contact the network administrator.
• If the indicator is still lit even after
trying to solve the problem as
described here, contact your
service representative.

13
 1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted

When You Have Problems Operating the

Machine
1 This section describes common problems and messages.
If other messages appear, follow the instructions displayed.

Problem Cause Solution

Although the copier screen Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
appears when the machine is copier function are not yet
turned on using the main ready.
power switch, it cannot be
switched to another screen by
pressing the [Printer] or
[Scanner] key.

The machine has just been Functions other than the Wait a little longer.
turned on and the User Tools copier function are not yet
screen is displayed, but the ready. Time required varies
User Tools menu has items by function. Functions appear
missing. in the User Tools menu when
they become ready for use.

The operation switch This occurs in the following Check if the machine is communicating
indicator continues blinking cases: with external equipment.
and does not turn off when • The machine is
pressed. communicating with
external equipment.
• The hard disk is active.
• The machine is cooling
down.

The display is off. The machine is in Energy Press the [Energy Saver] key to cancel
Saver mode. Energy Saver mode.

The display is off. The operation switch is turned Turn on the operation switch.
off.

Nothing happens when the The main power switch is Turn on the main power switch.
operation switch is turned on. turned off.

14
 When You Have Problems Operating the Machine

Problem Cause Solution

"Please wait." appears. This message appears when Wait for a while. If the machine does not
you turn on the operation get ready in three minutes, contact your
switch. service representative. 1
"Please wait." appears. This message appears when • Wait for a while. If the machine
the machine is warning up. does not get ready in three minutes,
contact your service
representative.
• Wait until the message disappears.
Do not turn off the main power
switch while the message is
showing.

"Please wait." appears. This message appears when Wait for a while. If the message does not
you change the toner disappear in three minutes, contact your
cartridge. service representative.

"Memory is full. Do you want The scanned originals • Press [Store File] to store pages that
to store scanned file?" exceed the number of have been scanned. Delete
appears. sheets/pages that can be unnecessary files with [Delete File].
stored in the hard disk. • Press [No] if you are not storing
pages that have been scanned.
Delete unnecessary files with
[Delete File].

The user code entry screen is Users are restricted by User Enter the user code (up to eight digits),
displayed. Code Authentication. and then press [OK].

The Authentication screen Basic Authentication, Enter your login user name and user
appears. Windows Authentication, password. See “When the
LDAP Authentication or Authentication Screen is Displayed”,
Integration Server About This Machine.
Authentication is set.

"Authentication has failed." The entered login user name Inquire the user administrator for the
appears. or login password is not correct login user name and login
correct. password.

"Authentication has failed." The machine cannot perform Contact the administrator.
appears. authentication.

15
 1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted

Problem Cause Solution

"You do not have the The logged in user name does Contact the administrator about the
privileges to use this function." not have permission for the permission for the required function.
1 continues to be displayed selected function.
even though you have
entered a valid user name.

"The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files Files can be deleted by the person who
contained file(s) without without the authority to do so. created the file. To delete a file which
access privileges. Only file(s) you are not authorized to delete, contact
with access privileges will be the person who created the file.
deleted." appears.

An error message remains, • When a misfeed Remove misfed paper, and then open
even if misfed paper is message appears, it and close the cover. See p.87
removed. remains until you open "Removing Jammed Paper".
and close the cover as
required.
• Paper is still jammed in
the tray.

Original images are printed You may have loaded the Load paper correctly. Load paper into
on the reverse side of the paper incorrectly. the cut paper tray print side down, and
paper. into the bypass tray print side up. See
p.77 "Loading Paper".

Misfeeds occur frequently. The cut paper tray's side or • Remove the misfed paper. See
back fences may not be set p.87 "Removing Jammed
properly. Paper".
• Check the side or back fences are
set properly. Also, check the side
fences are locked. See p.81
"Changing the Paper Size".

Misfeeds occur frequently. Paper is wrinkled or folded. Cut folded or wrinkled areas off the
paper roll.
Remove cut paper that is folded or
wrinkled.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Jammed or torn paper is Remove the paper, as necessary. See
inside the machine. p.87 "Removing Jammed Paper".

16
 When You Have Problems Operating the Machine

Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently. You may have loaded paper

of a size different from the
paper size settings. 1
Originals jam frequently. Originals are curled. Smooth out any curls and try again.

• If you cannot make copies as you want because of paper type, paper size, or paper capacity
problems, use recommended paper. See “Recommended Paper Sizes and Types”, About This
Machine.
• Loading curled paper in the cut paper tray can result in misfeeds and soiled paper edges. To load
curled paper in the cut paper tray, first flatten it by hand, and be sure to load it print side down. Also,
to prevent paper from curling, lay paper on a flat surface, and do not lean it against the wall.

17
 1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted

When a Job Is Not Performed

If you are not able to carry out your job, it may be that the machine is being used by another function.
1 Wait until the current job is completed before trying again. In certain cases, you can carry out another job
using a different function while the current job is being performed. Performing multiple functions
simultaneously like this is called “Multi-accessing”.
Combination Chart
Function Compatibility
The chart shows Function Compatibility when print priority is set to [Interleave]. For details about Print
Priority, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
: Simultaneous operations are possible.
: Operation is enabled when the relevant function key is pressed and remote switching (of the
scanner/external extension) is done.
: Operation is enabled when the [Interrupt] key is pressed to interrupt the preceding operation.
: Operation is performed automatically once the preceding operation ends.
: The operation must be started once the preceding operation ends. (Simultaneous operations are
not possible.)

18
 When a Job Is Not Performed

BLI015S

*1 Simultaneous operations are only possible after the preceding job documents are all scanned and [New Job]
appears.
*2 You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
*3 Simultaneous operation becomes possible after you press [New Job].

• If the machine is capable of executing multiple functions simultaneously, specify which function should
have priority in “Print Priority”. This setting is factory-preset to “Display Mode”. For details about Print
Priority, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
• While printing is in progress, scanning a document using another function may take longer than usual.

19
 1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As Wanted

20
2. Troubleshooting When Using the
Copy/Document Server Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for copier/document server function
problems.

2
Messages Displayed When Using the Copy/
Document Server Function
This section describes the machine's main messages. If other messages appear, follow the instructions they
contain.

• If you cannot make copies as you want because of the paper type, paper size or paper capacity
problems, use recommended paper. See “Recommended Paper Sizes and Types”, About This
Machine.
• For messages that are not listed here, see “When You Have Problems Operating the Machine”.

• p.14 "When You Have Problems Operating the Machine"

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication has failed." The entered login user name Inquire the user administrator for the
or login password is not correct login user name and login
correct. password.

"Authentication has failed." The machine cannot perform Contact the administrator.
authentication.

"Cannot detect original size." Original is not placed. Place your originals.

"Cannot use this setting for The image is too large for Cancel printing or editing.
images above 36 inch × 48 editing or printing. The
inch." machine cannot print or edit
images larger than 36 × 48
in.

"Check paper size." An irregular paper size is set. If you press the [Start] key, copy will start
onto the selected paper.

21
 2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy/Document Server Function

Message Cause Solution

"File being stored exceeded The scanned originals have Press [Exit], and then store again with an
max. number of pages per too many pages to store as appropriate number of pages.
file. Copying will be one document.
stopped."

2 "Maximum number of sets is The number of copies You can change the maximum copy
n." exceeds the maximum copy quantity from [Max. Copy Quantity] in
(A figure is placed at n.) quantity. [General Features] under [Copier /
Document Server Features].

"Memory is full." The machine's memory is full • When Sort is selected, press [Exit]
due to scanning originals or to copy scanned originals, and
performing a function. The then copy remaining originals.
number of originals that can • When the Job Preset function is
be stored in memory depends selected, check the number of
on the size of originals and preset jobs, and then try scanning
function settings. the originals again.

"Orig. is being scanned by A function of the machine Cancel the job in progress. For example,
another function. Please other than the Copier function press [Exit], and then press the
wait." is being used such as the [Document Server] key. Next, press the
Document Server function. [Clear/Stop] key. When the message
"The Clear / Stop key was pressed. Are
you sure you want to stop scanning?"
appears, press [Stop].

"Please wait." The main power has just been Wait for the machine to fully warm-up.
turned on, paper type (plain When "Scanning originals can be
paper/ translucent paper/ started." and "Select copy mode and
film) was changed, or the Place original." are displayed
machine is otherwise getting alternately, you can make the settings for
ready. your copies and scan your originals.
After the originals have been scanned,
the machine will automatically start
copying after it has warmed-up.

22
 Messages Displayed When Using the Copy/Document Server Function

Message Cause Solution

"Please wait." The destination list is being Wait until the message disappears. Do
updated from the network not switch off the power while this
using SmartDeviceMonitor message is displayed.
for Admin. Depending on the
number of destinations to be
updated, there may be some 2
delay before you can resume
operation. Operations are
not possible while this
message is displayed.

"Rotate Sort is not available A size of paper for which Select a proper paper size. See
with this paper size." Rotate Sort is not available is “Supplementary Information”, Copy/
selected. Document Server Reference.

"The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files Files can be deleted by the person who
contained file(s) without without the authority to do so. created the file. To delete a file which
access privileges. Only file(s) you are not authorized to delete, contact
with access privileges will be the person who created the file.
deleted."

"You do not have the The logged in user name does Contact the administrator about the
privileges to use this function." not have permission for the permission for the required function.
selected function.

23
 2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy/Document Server Function

When You Cannot Make Clear Copies

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for unclear copies.

Problem Cause Solution

2 Black or white streaks appear The original is dusty.

on copies.
Clean the original and try copying
again.
Be particularly careful when using the
following types of original:
• Hand drawn or drawn on with
other forms of pencil or pen, such
as a plotter.
• Film, translucent paper, or other
originals that attract static
electricity.
• Very long originals.

The background is dirty. Image density is too high. Adjust the image density settings. See
“Adjusting Copy Image Density”,
Copy/Document Server Reference.

The background is dirty. Auto Image Density is not On the control panel, select [Auto
selected. Density].

The reverse side of an original Image density is too high. Adjust the image density settings. See
image is copied. “Adjusting Copy Image Density”,
Copy/Document Server Reference.

The reverse side of an original Auto Image Density is not On the control panel, select [Auto
image is copied. selected. Density].

A shadow appears on copies Image density is too high. • Adjust the image density settings.
if you use pasted originals. See “Adjusting Copy Image
Density”, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
• Change the orientation of the
original.
• Put mending tape on the pasted
part.

The same copy area is dirty The scanning glass or white Clean them. See p.99 "Maintaining
whenever making copies. strip is dirty. Your Machine".

24
 When You Cannot Make Clear Copies

Problem Cause Solution

The same copy area is dirty • The original that has On the control panel, press [Generation
whenever making copies. already been printed is Copy] in [Others], and then begin
scanned. copying.
• Original Type is set to
[Text / Photo], and an
original with text and
2
photographs that can
hardly be distinguished
from each other is
loaded.

Toner fusing is poor. The paper thickness is not Set the paper thickness again. See “Tray
properly set. Paper Settings”, General Settings
Guide.

Toner fusing is poor. The copy paper is too thick. Set the paper thickness again. See “Tray
Paper Settings”, General Settings
Guide.

Copies are too light. Image density is too light. Adjust the image density settings. See
“Adjusting Copy Image Density”,
Copy/Document Server Reference.

Copies are too light. A light copy may result when Use recommended paper only and be
you use damp or rough grain sure its storage environment meets the
paper. recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
recommended paper and the proper
way to store it, see “Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types” and “Paper
Storage”, About This Machine.

Copies are too light. Toner cartridge is almost Add toner. See p.83 "Adding Toner".
empty.

Copies are blurred. Continuous copies have been Wait about two minutes, and then try
made on small sized paper. copying again.

Parts of images are not The original is not set Set originals correctly. See “Placing
copied. correctly. Originals”, Copy/Document Server
Reference.

25
 2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy/Document Server Function

Problem Cause Solution

Parts of images are not The correct paper size is not Select the proper paper size.
copied. selected.

Images appear only partially. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
2 humidity condition. For details about the
proper way to store it, see “Paper
Storage”, About This Machine.

Image density is uneven. The original has areas of solid When using Repeat Copy with originals
color, or [Positive/Negative] that have areas of solid color, set the
is selected when copying number of originals as follows: A0 - A2
multiple sheets. (E - C): 1 sheet, A3 (B) or smaller: 3
sheets. For details about sizes of
originals, see “Measure Chart”, Copy/
Document Server Reference.

Image density is uneven. Halftone originals can cause Try using “Text / Photo”.
this problem.

Images are blurred when Translucent paper is being Select a proper paper thickness for the
using translucent paper. used when copying multiple copy paper. See “Tray Paper Settings”,
sheets. General Settings Guide.

Extreme wrinkling occurs An improper paper thickness Select a proper paper thickness for the
when using translucent is selected. copy paper. See “Tray Paper Settings”,
paper. General Settings Guide.

Strong wrinkles appear when The paper type has recently Wait about one minute.
using translucent paper. been changed from plain
paper to translucent paper.

Streaks, scratches, or Copy paper has been After switching from plain to translucent
wrinkles appear in areas of changed from plain to paper, wait one minute. After switching
solid black. translucent paper, or from from translucent to plain paper, wait two
translucent to plain paper. minutes before making copies.

Black lines appear. The exposure glass or Clean them. See p.99 "Maintaining
scanning glass is dirty. Your Machine".

White lines appear. The exposure glass or Clean them. See p.99 "Maintaining
scanning glass is dirty. Your Machine".

26
 When You Cannot Make Clear Copies

Problem Cause Solution

White lines appear. When is blinking, toner is Add toner. See p.83 "Adding Toner".
beginning to run out.

Copies are blank. The original is not set When using the original table, face the
correctly. originals down.

A moiré pattern is produced Your original has a dot • Change the orientation of the
2
on copies. pattern image or many lines. original. This may prevent the
moiré pattern.
• Copy using “Photo” mode.

Wrinkles appear on the copy. The paper is damp. • Replace the paper with new paper.
• To prevent paper absorbing
moisture, turn on the anti-humidity
heater switch. See “Guide to
Components”, About This
Machine.

27
 2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy/Document Server Function

When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for unsatisfactory copy results.

Basic
Problem Cause Solution
2 Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets loaded Load paper only as high as the upper
exceeds the capacity of the limit markings on the side fences of the
machine. cut paper tray or paper bypass.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The cut paper tray's side Push the side fences lightly, and then
fences are set too tightly. reset it.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Paper
Storage”, About This Machine.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or too Use recommended paper. See
thin. “Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types”, About This Machine.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is folded or Cut folded or wrinkled areas off the
creased. paper roll.
Remove cut paper that is folded or
wrinkled.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Jammed or torn paper is Remove the paper properly. See
inside the machine. p.87 "Removing Jammed Paper".

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is curled. Smooth out the curl and try again.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Printed paper is being used. Do not use paper that has been already
copied or printed onto.

Copy paper becomes The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
creased. recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Paper
Storage”, About This Machine.

Copy paper becomes The paper is too thin. Use recommended paper. See
creased. “Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types”, About This Machine.

28
 When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted

Problem Cause Solution

You cannot combine several Selected functions cannot be Check the combination of functions and
functions. used together. make the settings again. See “Function
Compatibility”, Copy/Document
Server Reference.

Images are skewed. The side fences in the cut Make sure the side fences are set 2
paper tray are not set properly. For details about how to set the
properly. side fences, see p.81 "Changing the
Paper Size".

Images are skewed. The paper is feeding in at a Load the paper correctly. See p.77
slant. "Loading Paper".

Images are skewed. The original was not set Set the original so that it is squarely
straightly. aligned with the original guides.

Original and copy size does Dampness can cause paper Adjust the Fine Magnification setting for
not match. to stretch. Additional Copy. See “Fine
Magnification”, Copy/Document
Server Reference.

Cannot scan originals on Originals on different series Scan the originals on each series
mixed A series and JIS B of paper cannot be scanned separately.
series paper continuously. continuously at the same time.

The machine does not start Originals are not scanned. After scanning the originals, load paper
copying even though you in the paper bypass.
have inserted paper into the
bypass tray.

Copies shift sideways. The paper roll is not set Set the paper roll correctly, making sure
correctly. it is straight and not loose. See p.77
"Loading Paper".

Copies shift sideways. The original does not match Adjust the original guides to the
the size in the original table specified size, and then insert the
setting. original along the guides. See “Placing
Originals”, Copy/Document Server
Reference.

29
 2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy/Document Server Function

Problem Cause Solution

Copies shift sideways. The paper is not set correctly Make sure the paper size matches the
in the bypass tray. paper bypass's paper guides. See
“Copying from the Bypass Tray”,
Copy/Document Server Reference.
2 Copies shift in the direction of Print Position Adjustment or Cancel Print Position Adjustment or
the original feed (or opposite) Margin Adjustment mode is Margin Adjustment mode. See “Margin
direction. selected. Adjustment” and “Adjust Print Position”,
Copy/Document Server Reference.

Copies are shorter than the Print Position Adjustment or Cancel Print Position Adjustment or
selected size, or cut off before Margin Adjustment mode is Margin Adjustment mode. See “Margin
the end. selected. Adjustment” and “Adjust Print Position”,
Copy/Document Server Reference.

Edit
Problem Cause Solution

In “Double Copies” mode, Combination of original and Specify the paper size again. For
parts of the original image copy paper is not correct. example, select 11" × 17" for 81/2"
are not copied. × 11" originals. See “Double Copies”,
Copy/Document Server Reference.

In “Erase Border”, “Erase You set a wide erased Reduce the margin width. You can set the
Inside”, or “Erase Outside” margin. border to between 2 and 99 mm (0.1 -
mode, parts of the original 3.9 in), and you can set the inside and
image are not copied. outside borders individually to between
0 and 1220 mm (0.1 - 48 in).

In “Erase Border”, “Erase Originals are not scanned Place the originals correctly.
Inside”, or “Erase Outside” correctly.
mode, parts of the original
image are not copied.

Parts of the image are not Print Position Adjustment or Cancel Print Position Adjustment or
copied. Margin Adjustment mode is Margin Adjustment mode. See “Margin
selected. Adjustment” and “Adjust Print Position”,
Copy/Document Server Reference.

30
 When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted

Problem Cause Solution

Parts of the image are not You placed a custom size Enter the size of the original, or set the
copied. original. scanning area wider. See “Placing
Custom Size Originals” and “Wide
Scan”, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
2
In “Image Repeat” mode, the You selected copy paper the Select copy paper larger than the
original image is not copied same size as the originals, or originals or select the proper
repeatedly. you did not select the proper reproduction ratio.
reproduction ratio.

Combine
Problem Cause Solution

When using “Combine”, You specified a reproduction When you specify a reproduction ratio
parts of the image are not ratio that does not match the using Manual Paper Select mode, make
copied. sizes of your originals and sure the ratio matches your originals and
copy paper. the copy paper. Select the correct
reproduction ratio before using
Combine mode. See “One-Sided
Combine” and “Auto Reduce/
Enlarge”, Copy/Document Server
Reference.

Copies are not in correct You placed the originals in Start with the first page to be copied.
order. the incorrect order. If you place an original on the exposure
glass, start with the first page to be
copied.

Folding finisher
Problem Cause Solution

The folding finisher is not The folding finisher is turned If the folding finishers is offline, turn off
recognized (is offline). off, or the folding finisher and the main power switches of both the
the machine were not turned machine and folding finisher, and then
on in the correct order. turn them back on again in the following
order: folding finisher, and then the
machine.
Then check the folding finisher is online.

31
 2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy/Document Server Function

Problem Cause Solution

"Please wait." appears on the The folding finisher is offline. Turn off the main power switches of both
display panel and printing the machine and folding finisher, and
cannot be done. then turn them back on again in the
following order: folding finisher, and

2 then the machine.

Then check the folding finisher is online.

Cannot specify folding. Translucent paper or film has Translucent paper and film are not
been selected. available for folding. They are delivered
to the upper output stacker, but not
folded. Select another paper type, and
then specify folding.

Document Server
Problem Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The number of scanned • To store scanned pages as a file,
pages per file. Do you want pages exceeds the capacity press [Store File]. Scanned data is
to store the scanned pages as per file of the Document stored as a file in the Document
1 file?" appears. Server. Server.
• If you do not want to store scanned
pages, press [No]. Scanned data
is deleted.
• You can store up to 1000 A4 size
pages per document.

"Original is being scanned by Copier or Scanner function is To cancel a job in progress, first press
another function. Please in use. [Exit], and then press the [Copy] key or
wait." appears. [Scanner] key. Next, press the [Clear/
Stop] key. When the message "The Stop
key has been pressed. Are you sure you
want to stop copying?" or "The Clear /
Stop key was pressed. Are you sure you
want to stop scanning?" appears, press
[Stop].

32
 When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted

Problem Cause Solution

You forgot your password. You cannot access a Contact the administrator.
protected file without entering To delete the files stored in the document
the password. server, select [Delete All Files in
Document Server] under [Administrator
Tools] in [System Settings]. As this will
permanently delete every single file,
2
make sure the document server does not
contain any files you want to keep. For
details about Delete All Files in
Document Server, see “System
Settings”, General Settings Guide.

You cannot find out what is You may not be able to You can switch the Select File screen
stored in a file. ascertain the contents of a file between [List] and [Thumbnails] display
simply from the file name. to check the contents of the file. Check
information other than the file name.
• List display
The file name, data of storage, and
user name are shown.
• Thumbnails display
An image of the stored file
appears.
You can enlarge the image by pressing
[Preview]. See “Checking the Details of
a Stored Document”, Copy/Document
Server Reference.

Memory frequently becomes The document server memory Delete unnecessary files. On the file
full. is full. selection display, select unnecessary
files, and then press [Delete File]. If this
does not increase available memory, do
the following.
• Switch to the scanner screen, and
then delete unnecessary files
stored under the scanner function.
• Switch to the printer screen, and
then delete unnecessary files
stored under Sample Print, Locked
Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print.

33
 2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy/Document Server Function

Problem Cause Solution

You want to check print You can print a single copy Check print quality by printing out only
quality before making a large without specifying the setting the first set using the [Sample Copy] key.
print run. again. See “Finishing”, Copy/Document
Server Reference.

2 "Cannot display preview of The image data may have Press [Exit] to display the preview screen
this page." appears, and you been corrupted. without a thumbnail.
can not check the thumbnail If the selected document contains
image. several pages, press [Switch] on the
“Display Page” area to change the
page, and then a preview of the next
page will appear.

When Memory Is Full

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems related to full memory.

Message Cause Solution

"Memory is full. nn originals The scanned originals Press [Print] to copy scanned originals
have been scanned. Press exceeds the number of and cancel the scanning data. Press
[Print] to copy scanned pages that can be stored in [Stop] to cancel the scanning data and
originals. Do not remove memory. not copy.
remaining originals."
“n” in the message represents
a changeable number.

"Press [Continue] to scan and The machine checked if the To continue copying, remove all copies,
copy remaining originals." remaining originals should be and then press [Continue]. To stop
copied, after the scanned copying, press [Stop].
originals were printed.

34
3. Troubleshooting When Using the
Printer Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for printer function problems.

Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer

Driver
3
This section describes what to do if a message appears when installing the printer driver.
Message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver cannot be installed using Auto Run. Install the
printer driver using [Add Printer] or [Install Printer].
Message number 58 appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed.

Windows 2000

This section describes the procedure under Windows 2000.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

2. Double-click the Add Printer icon.
3. Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is \DRIVERS\RPCS
\XP_VISTA\(language)\DISK1. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
4. Specify a port.

• Available ports vary according to your Windows operating system or the type of interface. For details,
see “Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference.

Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2

This section describes the procedure under Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003
R2.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

2. Click [Add a printer].

35
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

3. Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.

If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is \DRIVERS\RPCS
\XP_VISTA\(language)\DISK1. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
4. Specify a port.

• Available ports vary according to your Windows operating system or the type of interface. For details,
see “Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference.

3 Windows XP Home Edition

This section describes the procedure under Windows XP Home Edition.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].

2. Click [Printer and Other Hardware].
3. Click [Printers and Faxes].
4. Click [Add a Printer].
5. Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is \DRIVERS\RPCS
\XP_VISTA\(language)\DISK1. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
6. Specify a port.

• Available ports vary according to your Windows operating system or the type of interface. For details,
see “Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference.

Windows Vista

This section describes the procedure under Windows Vista.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].

2. Click [Hardware and Sound].
3. Click [Printers].
4. Click [Add a printer].
5. Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is \DRIVERS\RPCS
\XP_VISTA\(language)\DISK1. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
6. Specify a port.

36
 Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver

• Available ports vary according to your Windows operating system or the type of interface. For details,
see “Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference.

37
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

If USB Connection Fails

This section describes how to troubleshoot a problem related to USB connections.

Problem Cause Solution

The machine is not The USB cable is not Turn off the power of the machine,
automatically recognized. connected properly. reconnect the USB cable, and then turn
it on again.
3 Windows has already Check whether the computer Open Windows' Device Manager, and
configured the USB settings. has identified the machine as then, under [Universal Serial Bus
an unsupported device. controllers], remove any conflicting
devices. Conflicting devices have a [!] or
[?] icon by them. Take care not to
accidentally remove required devices.
For details, see Windows Help.

38
 Messages Displayed When Using the Printer Function

Messages Displayed When Using the Printer

Function
This section describes the principal messages that appear on the panel display. If a message not described
here appears, act according to the message.

Status Messages

This section describes the machine status messages.

3
Message Status

"Hex Dump Mode" In the Hex Dump mode, the machine receives data in
hexadecimal format. Turn off the machine after printing, and
then turn back on.

"Job Suspended..." All jobs in the machine are suspended. Wait a while.

"Offline" The machine is offline. To start printing, switch the machine

online by pressing [Online].

"Please wait." This message might appear for a second or two while the
machine is preparing, performing initial adjustments, or
adding toner. Wait a while.

"Ready" This is the default ready message. The machine is ready for
use. No action is required.

"Resetting job..." The machine is resetting the print job. Wait until "Ready"
appears on the display panel.

"Setting change..." The machine is setting changing. You cannot use the control
panel while this message is displayed. Wait a while.

"Waiting for print data..." The machine is waiting for the next data to print. Wait a while.

Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When Using the Printer Function

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that appear on the
control panel.

• Before turning the main power off, see “Turning On/Off the Power”, About This Machine.

39
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication has failed." The entered login user name Inquire the user administrator for the
or login password is not correct login user name and login
correct. password.

"Authentication has failed." The machine cannot perform Contact the administrator.
authentication.

"Hardware Problem: An error has occurred in the Turn off the main power switch, and
3 Ethernet" Ethernet board. back on again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Hardware Problem: HDD" An error has occurred in the Turn off the main power switch, and
hard disk drive. back on again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Hardware Problem: USB" An error has occurred in the Turn off the main power switch, and
USB interface. back on again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Hardware Problem: • A wireless card that the Turn off the machine, and check the
Wireless Card" machine cannot use has wireless card. Then, turn the machine on
been installed. again. If the message appears again,
• An error has occurred call your service representative.
with the wireless card.

"Paper size of _%_ is The size of the paper in the Open the Printer Properties dialog box
mismatched. " specified tray does not match and make sure that [Auto Tray Select] is
"Change the setting to the size of the original. not specified as the [Paper source tray:]
continue the current job or setting. Select the tray manually.
press [Job Reset]." Depending on the size of your original,
the roll that is set might be too small so
some areas of image might be lost.

"Parallel I/F board has a An error has occurred in the Turn off the main power switch, and
problem." parallel interface board. back on again. If the message appears
again, contact your service
representative.

"Printer font error." An error has occurred in the Contact your service representative.
font settings.

40
 Messages Displayed When Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files Files can be deleted by the person who
contained file(s) without without the authority to do so. created the file. To delete a file which
access privileges. Only file(s) you are not authorized to delete, contact
with access privileges will be the person who created the file.
deleted."

"Updating the destination The destination list is being Wait until the message disappears. Do
list... Please wait. Specified updated from the network not switch off the power while this
destination(s) or sender's using SmartDeviceMonitor message is displayed. Depending on the 3
name has been cleared." for Admin or Web Image number of destinations to be updated,
Monitor. there may be some delay before you
can resume operation. Operations are
not possible while this message is
displayed.

"You do not have the The logged in user name does Contact the administrator about the
privileges to use this function." not have permission for the permission for the required function.
selected function.

Message Printed on the Error Logs or Reports

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that are printed on the
error logs or reports.

Message Cause Solution

"84: Error" There is no work area • In [Printer Features], under

available for image [System], set [Memory Usage] to
processing. [Font Priority].
• Decrease the number of files sent to
the machine.

"85: Error" The specified graphics library Check that the data is valid.
is unavailable.

"86: Error" Parameters of the control Set the parameters correctly.

code are invalid.

"91: Error" Printing was canceled by the Check that the data is valid.
auto job cancel function due
to a command error.

41
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"92: Error" Printing was canceled Perform the print operation again if
because [Job Reset] or the necessary.
[Clear/Stop] key was
selected on the machine's
control panel.

"Address Book is currently in The machine currently cannot Wait a while, and then retry the
use by another function. perform authentication operation.
3 Authentication has failed." because the address book is
being used by another
function.

"Auto-registration of user Automatic registration of Contact the administrator.

information has failed." information for LDAP
Authentication or Windows
Authentication failed
because the address book is
full.

"Collate has been Collate was canceled. • Decrease the file size sent to the
cancelled." machine.
• Turn the main power switch off and
then back on again. If the message
appears again, contact your sales
or service representative.

"Command Error" An RPCS command error Check using the following procedure:
occurred. • Check if the communication
between the computer and the
machine is working correctly.
• Check if the correct printer driver is
being used.
• Check if the machine's memory size
is set correctly in the printer driver.
• Check that the printer driver is the
most up-to-date version available.

42
 Messages Displayed When Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"Data storage error." You tried to print a Sample Contact your service representative.
Print, Locked Print, Hold Print,
or Stored Print file, or to store
a file in the document server
when the hard disk drive is
malfunctioning.

"Document Server is not You cannot use the document Contact the administrator.
available to use. Cannot server function. 3
store."

"Error has occurred." A syntax error, etc., occurred. Check that the PDF file is valid.

"Exceeded max. capacity of The hard disk became full Delete some of the files stored in the
Document Server. Cannot after a file was stored. document server or reduce the size that
store." you want to send.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum file capacity of Delete some of the files stored in the
files of Document Server. the document server was document server.
Cannot store." exceeded.

"Exceeded max. number of While printing a Sample Print, Delete unneeded files stored in the
files to print for temporary / Locked Print, Hold Print or machine.
stored jobs." Stored Print file, the maximum
file capacity was exceeded.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum page capacity Delete some of the files stored in the
pages of Document Server. of the document server was document server or reduce the number
Cannot store." exceeded. of pages that you want to send.

"Exceeded max. number of While printing a Sample Print, Delete unneeded files stored in the
pages to print for Locked Print, Hold Print or machine.
temporary / stored jobs." Stored Print file, the maximum Reduce the number of pages to print.
page capacity was
exceeded.

"Exceeded max. pages. The number of pages Reduce the number of pages to print.
Collate is incomplete." exceeds the maximum
number of sheets that you can
use Collate with.

"File system is full." PDF file do not print out Delete all unnecessary files from the
because the capacity of file hard disk, or decrease the file size sent
system is full. to the machine.

43
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"Fold mode has been Fold mode has been Check the paper settings.
cancelled." cancelled. Fold mode is automatically cancelled in
the following cases:
• If the bypass tray is selected as the
output tray.
• If a paper type that cannot be

3 folded is specified.
• If a sheet that is the wrong size or
in the wrong orientation is loaded.
• If fan fold is specified for a sheet
that is 319 mm (12.5 in) or less in
length.

"HDD is full." The hard disk became full Delete unneeded files stored in the
while printing a Sample Print, machine.
Locked Print, Hold Print or Alternatively, reduce the data size of the
Stored Print file. Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print or
Stored Print file.

"HDD is full." When printing with the Delete unneeded forms or fonts
PostScript 3 printer driver, the registered in the machine.
HDD's capacity for fonts and
forms has been exceeded.

"I/O buffer overflow." An input buffer overflow • In [Printer Features], under

occurred. [System], set [Memory Usage] to
[Font Priority].
• In [Printer Features], under [Host
Interface], select [I/O Buffer], and
then set the maximum buffer size to
a larger value.
• Reduce the number of files being
sent to the machine.

44
 Messages Displayed When Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"Information for user The user name for LDAP or Contact the administrator.
authentication is already RDH authentication was
registered for another user." already registered in a
different server with a
different ID, and a
duplication of the user name
occurred due to a switching
of domains (servers),etc.
3
"Insufficient Memory" A memory allocation error On the RPCS printer driver's [Print
occurred. Quality] tab, open the [Change User
Settings...] dialog box, and then, on the
[Image Adjustments] tab, specify a
lower value for [Resolution:].

"Memory Overflow" • The memory is full. • On the RPCS printer driver's [Print
• Maximum capacity of Quality] tab, open the [Change
PostScript 3 display list User Settings...] dialog box, and
has been exceeded. then, on the [Image Adjustments]
tab, specify a lower value for
[Resolution:].
• On the PostScript 3 printer driver,
Reduce the value of [Resolution].
• In [Printer Features], under
[System], set [Memory Usage] to
[Font Priority].
If this message continues to appear after
taking these steps, decrease the number
of files sent to the machine.

"Memory Retrieval Error" A memory allocation error Turn off the main power switch, and
occurred. back on again. If the message appears
again, replace the RAM.

"No response from the server. A timeout occurred while Check the status of the server.
Authentication has failed." connecting to the server for
LDAP authentication or
Windows Authentication.

45
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"Output tray has been The output tray was changed Specify the proper output tray.
changed." because the paper size of the
specified output tray is
limited.

"Print overrun." Images were discarded while On the RPCS printer driver's [Print
printing. Quality] tab, open the [Change User
Settings...] dialog box, and then, on the
3 [Image Adjustments] tab, specify a
lower value for [Resolution:].

"Receiving data failed." Data reception was aborted. Resend the data.

"Selected ppr. size is not Job reset is automatically Specify the correct paper size and print
supported. Job was performed if the specified the file again.
cancelled." paper size is incorrect.

"Sending data failed." The machine received a Check if the computer is working
command to stop correctly.
transmission from the printer
driver.

"The entered password is The password of the Enter the correct password.
incorrect." encrypted PDF file has been
entered incorrectly.

"The print job has been The hard disk became full Delete the files stored in the document
cancelled because capture after a file was stored. server or reduce the file size to be sent.
file(s) could not be stored:
Exceeded max. memory."

"The print job has been The maximum file capacity of Delete the files stored in the document
cancelled because capture the document server was server.
file(s) could not be stored: exceeded.
Exceeded max. number of
files."

"The print job has been The maximum page capacity Delete some of the files stored in the
cancelled because capture of the document server was document server or reduce the number
file(s) could not be stored: exceeded. of pages that you want to send.
Exceeded max. number of
pages per file."

46
 Messages Displayed When Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution

"You do not have a privilege The entered login user name Check that the user name and password
to use this function. This job or login password is not are correct.
has been cancelled." correct.

"You do not have a privilege The logged in user is not Contact the administrator.
to use this function. This job allowed to use the selected
has been cancelled." function.

If the printing does not start, contact your service representative. 3

• For details about how to print the Error Log, see “List / Test Print”, General Settings Guide.
• For details about how to print the error report, see “System”, General Settings Guide.
• The contents of errors may be printed on the Configuration Page. Check the Configuration Page in
conjunction with the error log. For details about how to print the Configuration Page, see “List / Test
Print”, General Settings Guide.

Checking the Error Log

If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors by checking the error log
on the control panel.

• The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added when there are 30 errors
already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the earliest error is a Sample Print, Locked
Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print error, it is not deleted. The error is stored separately until the number
of errors reaches 30.
• If the main power switch is turned off, the log is deleted.
• You cannot view [Error Log] on the simplified display.

47
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

1. Press the [Printer] key to display the printer screen.

3
BLI019S

2. Press [Error Log].

An error log list appears.

3. Press the desired job list, and then press [Details].
A detailed error log appears.

• You can print the Error Log. For details about how to print the Error Log, see “List / Test Print”, General
Settings Guide.

48
 When You Cannot Print

When You Cannot Print

This section describes what to do if printing does not start even after performing [Print].

Problem Cause Solution

Printing does not start. The power is off. Check the cable is securely plugged into
the power outlet and the machine. Turn
on the main power switch.

Printing does not start. The machine is set to Press [Online]. 3

“Offline”.

Printing does not start. The cause is displayed on the Check the error message or warning
display of the control panel. status on the display panel and take the
required action.

Printing does not start. The interface cable is not Connect the interface cable securely. If
connected correctly. it has a fastener, fasten that securely as
well. See “Connecting to the Interfaces”,
General Settings Guide.

Printing does not start. The correct interface cable is The type of interface cable you should
not being used. use depends on the computer. Be sure to
use the correct one. If the cable is
damaged or worn, replace it. See
“Connecting to the Interfaces”, General
Settings Guide.

Printing does not start. The interface cable was Connect the interface cable before
connected after the machine turning on the machine.
was switched on.

Printing does not start. If the machine is using In [System Settings], under [Interface
wireless LAN, failure to print Settings], select [Wireless LAN], and
might result from a weak then press [Wireless LAN Signal] to
wireless signal. check signal status. If signal quality is
poor, move the machine to a location
where radio waves can pass or remove
objects that might cause interference.
(You can check signal status only when
using wireless LAN in the infrastructure
mode.)

49
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

Problem Cause Solution

Printing does not start. If the machine is using Check using the machine's display panel
wireless LAN, SSID settings that the SSID is correctly set. See
are incorrect. “Connecting the Machine”, General
Settings Guide.

Printing does not start. If the machine is using Check access point settings when in the
wireless LAN, the receiver's infrastructure mode. Depending on the
MAC address may be access point, client access may be
3 preventing communication limited by MAC address. Also, check
with the access point. there are no problems in transmission
between access point and wired clients,
and between access point and wireless
clients.

Printing does not start. The wireless LAN interface is Confirm the orange LED is lit, and the
not working. green LED is lit or blinks during
transmission.

Printing does not start. The login user name, login Check the login user name, login
password, or driver password, or driver encryption key.
encryption key is invalid.

Printing does not start. Advanced encryption has Check the settings of the Extended
been set using the Extended Security function with the administrator.
Security function.

Data In indicator does not If the Data In indicator does • When the machine is connected to
light up or flash. not light up or flash even after a computer via a cable, check the
the print job starts, the computer print port settings are
machine has not received the correct. For details, see p.51
data. "When the Data In Indicator Does
Not Light Up or Flash".
• When it is networked with a
computer, contact the
administrator.

[List / Test Print] is disabled. A mechanical error might Contact your service representative.
have occurred.

50
 When You Cannot Print

Problem Cause Solution

Printing does not start when The correct Communication • Turn the main power off and back
using the extended wireless mode is not set. on. See “Turning On/Off the
LAN in Ad-hoc mode. Power”, About This Machine.
• In [System Settings], under
[Interface Settings], select
[Wireless LAN], and then set
[Communication Mode] to
[802.11 Ad-hoc Mode] and 3
[Security Method] to [Off]. Then at
the other side, set [SSID Setting]
and [Ad-hoc Channel] to the same
values.

The status indicator of the The cause is displayed Check the error message on the display
printer is lit. on the display of the control panel and take required action. See
panel. p.39 "Messages Displayed When Using
the Printer Function".

"Updating the destination The destination list is being Wait until the message disappears. Do
list... Please wait. Specified updated from the network not switch off the main power while this
destination(s) or sender's using SmartDeviceMonitor message is displayed. Depending on the
name has been cleared." for Admin. number of destinations to be updated,
appears. there may be some delay before you
can resume operation. Operations are
not possible while this message is
displayed.

If the printing does not start, consult your service representative.

When the Data In Indicator Does Not Light Up or Flash

When the Data In indicator does not light up or flash after starting a print job, data is not being sent to the
machine.

When the machine is connected to the computer using the interface cable
This section describes how to check the print port when the Data In indicator does not light up or blink.
Check if the print port setting is correct. When it is connected using a parallel interface, connect it to LPT1
or LPT2.

51
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

For Windows 2000

1. Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
2. Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
3. Click the [Ports] tab.
4. In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
For Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
1. Click the [Start] button, and then click [Printers and Faxes].

3 2. Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
3. Click the [Ports] tab.
4. In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
For Windows XP Home Edition
1. Click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panel].
2. Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
3. Click [Printers and Faxes].
4. Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
5. Click the [Ports] tab.
6. In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
For Windows Vista
1. Click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panel].
2. Click [Printers].
3. Click the icon of the machine. On the [Organize] menu, click [Properties].
4. Click the [Ports] tab.
5. In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.

Network connection
Contact the network administrator.

52
 Other Printing Problems

Other Printing Problems

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that can occur when printing
from a computer.

When you cannot print clearly

Problem Cause Solution

The printed image is faded When is blinking, toner is Add toner. See p.83 "Adding Toner".
over the entire page. beginning to run out. 3
The printed image is faded The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
over the entire page. recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Paper
Storage”, About This Machine.

Parts of images are not The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
printed. recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Paper
Storage”, About This Machine.

The printed image is faded The paper is unsuitable. Use recommended paper. Printing on
over the entire page. coarse or treated paper might result in
faint print image. See “Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types”, About This
Machine.

The printed image is different With certain functions, such In the application, change the layout,
from the image on the as enlargement and character size, and character settings.
computer's display. reduction, image layout
might be different to that on
the computer display.

The printed font is different You might have selected to To print a font similar to that of the
from the image on the replace TrueType fonts with computer display, open the [Change
computer's display. machine fonts in the printing User Settings...] dialog box on the RPCS
process. printer driver's [Print Quality] tab, and
then, on the [Misc.] tab, select the
[Change methods to extract TrueType
fonts] check box.

White lines appear. When is blinking, toner is Add toner. See p.83 "Adding Toner".
beginning to run out.

53
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

Problem Cause Solution

When printing graphics, the If the printer driver is If you want to print accurately, set the
output and the screen are configured to use the printer driver to print without using the
different. graphics command, the graphics command. See the printer
graphics command from the driver Help.
machine is used to print.

Lines of garbled or unwanted An incorrect printer language Set the correct printer language.
alphanumeric characters might have been selected.
3 appear.

Images are cut off, or excess You may be using paper Use the same size paper as that selected
is printed. smaller than the size selected in the application. If you cannot load
in the application. paper of the correct size, use the
reduction function to reduce the image,
and then print. See the printer driver
Help.

Page layout is not as Print areas differ depending On the RPCS printer driver's [Printer
expected. on machine used. Information Configuration] tab, adjust the [Printable
that fits on a single page on area:] setting. See the printer driver
one machine may not fit on a Help.
single page of another
machine.

Photo images are coarse. Some applications print at Use the application's settings to specify
lower resolution. a higher resolution.

Fine dot patterns are not Dither patterns do not match. On the RPCS printer driver's [Print
printed, or solid lines are Quality] tab, open the [Change User
printed as broken lines. Settings...] dialog box, and then, on the
[Image Adjustments] tab, change the
[Dithering:] setting. See the printer driver
Help.

54
 Other Printing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Fine lines are fuzzy, of Super fine lines have been On the RPCS printer driver's [Print
inconsistent thickness, or do specified in the application. Quality] tab, open the [Change User
not appear. Settings...] dialog box, and then, on the
[Image Adjustments] tab, change the
[Dithering:] setting. See the printer driver
Help.
If the problem continues after you
change the dithering settings, use the 3
settings of the application in which the
image was created to change the
thickness of the lines.

When paper is not fed properly

Problem Cause Solution

Paper is not fed from the When you are using a On the RPCS printer driver's [Setup] tab,
selected tray. Windows operating system, in the [Paper source tray:] list, select the
printer driver settings override desired input tray.
those settings using the
display panel.

Images are printed at a slant. The cut paper tray's side Check the cut paper tray's side fences
fences might not be locked. are locked. See p.81 "Changing the
Paper Size".

Images are printed at a slant. The paper is feeding in at a Load the paper correctly. See p.77
slant. "Loading Paper".

Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets loaded Load paper only as high as the upper
exceeds the capacity of the limit markings on the side fences of the
machine. paper tray or bypass tray.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Paper
Storage”, About This Machine.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or too Use recommended paper. See
thin. “Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types”, About This Machine.

55
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

Problem Cause Solution

Misfeeds occur frequently. The copy paper is wrinkled or Use recommended paper only and be
has been folded/creased. sure its storage environment meets the
recommended temperature and
humidity conditions. For details about
recommended paper and the proper
way to store it, see “Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types” and “Paper

3 Storage”, About This Machine.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Printed paper is being used. Do not use paper that has been already
copied or printed onto.

Misfeeds occur frequently. The cut paper tray's side Push the side fences lightly, and then
fences are set too tightly. reset it.

Copy paper becomes The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored in the
creased. recommended temperature and
humidity condition. See “Paper
Storage”, About This Machine.

Copy paper becomes The paper is too thin. Use recommended paper. See
creased. “Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types”, About This Machine.

Folding finisher
Problem Cause Solution

Cannot specify folding. The folding finisher is offline. When the folding finisher is offline,
folding cannot be specified.
Turn off the main power switches of both
the machine and folding finisher, and
then turn them back on again in the
following order: folding finisher, and
then the machine.
Then check the folding finisher is online.

Cannot specify folding. The optional device is not Configure the optional device correctly
configured correctly on the using [Change Accessories...] on the
printer driver. printer driver. See the printer driver
Help.

56
 Other Printing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Cannot specify folding. The paper tray setting in the Select Tray 1, 2, 3, or 4.
printer driver's Printer
Properties dialog box is set to
[Auto Tray Select] or [Bypass
Tray].

Cannot specify folding. Translucent paper or film was Translucent paper and film are not
specified. available for folding. They are delivered
to the upper output stacker, but not 3
folded. Select another paper type, and
then specify folding.

"Please wait." appears on the The folding finisher is offline. Turn off the main power switch of both
display panel and printing the machine and folding finisher, and
cannot be done. then turn them back on again in the
following order: folding finisher, and
then the machine.
Then check the folding finisher is online.

Other printing problems

Problem Cause Solution

It takes a long time to “Sleep mode” might be set. The machine requires time to warm up if
complete a print job. it has been in “Sleep mode”. In [System
Settings], under [Timer Settings], select
[Auto Off Timer], and then specify
“Sleep mode”.

It takes a long time to The paper type setting was If the paper type setting has been
complete a print job. changed. changed, there might be a delay before
printing begins. Wait for a moment.

57
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

Problem Cause Solution

It takes a long time to Photographs and other data If the Data In indicator is blinking, data
complete a print job. intensive pages take a long has been received by the printer. Wait
time for the machine to for a moment.
process, so simply wait when Changing the following settings with the
printing such data. printer driver may help speed up
printing:
On the [Print Quality] tab, open the
3 [Change User Settings...] dialog box,
and then, on the [Image Adjustments]
tab, specify a lower value for
[Resolution:].

Images are printed in the The feed orientation you Set the same settings for both the
wrong orientation. selected and the feed machine's feed orientation and the feed
orientation selected in the orientation specified in [Paper source
printer driver's option setup tray settings:] on the printer driver's
might not be the same. [Change Accessories] tab.

When using Windows Bidirectional communication Set up optional devices on the Properties
2000/ XP/ Vista and is not working. of the printer.
Windows Server 2003/ See the printer driver Help.
2003 R2, optional
components connected to the
machine are not recognized.

When using Windows The correct application or Make sure the application's paper size
2000/ XP/ Vista and printer driver settings are not and orientation settings match those of
Windows Server 2003/ made. the printer driver. If a different paper size
2003 R2, combined printing, and orientation are set, select the same
or Auto Reduce / Enlarge size and orientation.
printing does not come out as
expected.

When printing on custom size The correct custom paper size To print on custom size paper from the
paper under Windows, the is not specified in the printer paper tray, specify the paper size in the
image appears in the wrong driver's settings. printer driver's settings. See the printer
position. driver Help.

A print instruction was issued User Authentication may Contact the administrators.
from the computer, but have been set.
printing did not start.

58
 Other Printing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

The print job is not canceled Even when the machine is Change the setting of [Signal Control] to
even when the machine is offline, printing is performed [Printer Priority]. See “Interface
switched to offline status. when [Job Acceptance Settings”, General Settings Guide.
Priority] has been set in
[Parallel Interface] in the
[Interface Settings] in the
System Settings menu.

PDF files do not print out/ PDF files are password- To print password-protected PDF files, 3
cannot perform PDF direct protected. enter the password in the [PDF Menu] or
print. on Web Image Monitor. For details, see
“Printing a PDF File Directly”, Printer
Reference, or the Web Image Monitor's
Help.

PDF files do not print out/ PDF files cannot be printed if Change the PDF file security setting.
cannot perform PDF direct they are print-disabled in PDF
print. file security setting.

PDF files do not print out/ High compression PDF files Open the application used to create the
cannot perform PDF direct created using the machine's PDF, and then print the file using the
print. scanner function cannot print application's driver.
directly. Re-save the file in normal (non-
compressed) PDF format.
Some types of High Compression PDF
files are not supported. Consult your
sales representative about the
supported file types.

PDF direct print produces Fonts were not embedded. Embed fonts in the PDF file you want to
strange or malformed print and then print.
characters.

Printing by wireless LAN is The number of jobs exceeds Reduce the number of jobs.
slow. the capacity of the machine.

Printing by wireless LAN is • A communication error • Remove the machine from close
slow. might have occurred. proximity with the wireless LAN
• Interference from other devices.
wireless devices can • If there are active wireless devices
reduce communication nearby, relocate the machine or
speed. disable those devices.

59
 3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

If the problem cannot be solved, contact your service representative.

60
4. Troubleshooting When Using the
Scanner Function
This chapter describes likely causes of and possible solutions for scanner function problems.

When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected

This section describes causes and remedies when scan results are not as expected.

Problem Cause Solution

The scanned image is dirty. The scanning glass or white Clean them. See p.99 "Maintaining 4
strip is dirty. Your Machine".

The image is distorted or out The original was moved Do not move the original during
of position. during scanning. scanning.

The orientation of the The original was placed in the Place the original in the correct
scanned image is not correct. wrong top/bottom or left/ orientation. See “Setting Original
right orientation. Orientation on the TWAIN Scanner”,
Scanner Reference.

No image results from The original was placed with When the original is set on the exposure
scanning. the front and back reversed. glass, the side to be scanned must face
down.

The scanned image contains • If you scan originals Scanning at a higher resolution may
white spaces. using functions other reduce the margins.
than the network
TWAIN scanner
function, certain paper
size and resolution
settings may produce
scanned images that are
larger than the specified
size because of margins
being added to the
sides.
• If the File Format
Converter (optional) is
installed, the margins
may become wider.

61
 4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

Problem Cause Solution

The scanner journal cannot The paper tray is open. Close the paper tray.
be printed.

The scanner journal cannot Paper is loaded in the bypass Remove the paper from the bypass tray.
be printed. tray but another paper tray is
specified.

The scanner journal cannot The original exit switching Switch the original exit switching lever to
be printed. lever is in the rear output upper output.
position.

4 After an original is scanned,

the following settings are
To prevent the scanned data
being sent to the wrong
Contact your service representative.

canceled: destination, this machine has

Destination, Sender, E-mail a function that cancels the
text, Subject, and File name settings once the scanned
data is sent.

62
 When You Cannot Send Scanned Files

When You Cannot Send Scanned Files

This section describes likely causes of and solutions for problems related to network delivery and sending
e-mail.

When Stored Files Cannot Be Accessed

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for job access-related problems.

Problem Cause Solution

The stored file is locked and is The file, which is password

not accessible. protected, is locked because
Contact the administrator. 4
the password was incorrectly
entered ten times.

When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan File

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the network browsing failing to operate
when files are sent.

Problem Cause Solution

The network cannot be The following machine Check the settings. See “Connecting the
browsed when specifying the settings may not be correct: Machine”, General Settings Guide.
destination folder. • IP address
• Subnet Mask

When the TWAIN Driver Cannot Be Started

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the TWAIN driver-related problems.

Problem Cause Solution

The Scanner Properties Advanced encryption has For details about the extended security
dialog box cannot be been specified in the setting, contact an administrator.
displayed. extended security setting.

63
 4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

When Stored Files Cannot Be Edited

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for stored files being unable to be edited.

Problem Cause Solution

Stored files cannot be Limits have been imposed Contact the administrator.
deleted. File names and using the available extended
passwords cannot be security function.
changed. Files cannot be
redelivered.

4 When the Network Delivery Function Cannot Be Used

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the network delivery function problems.

Problem Cause Solution

Cannot use the network The delivery software may be Contact the administrator.
delivery function. an old version or a security
setting may be specified.

Cannot use the network The network delivery function Specify it correctly. See “Network
delivery function. setting is not correct. Settings Required to Use the Network
Delivery Scanner”, General Settings
Guide.

When S/MIME Cannot Be Used

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for S/MIME-related problems.

Problem Cause Solution

If several destinations are Encrypted e-mails are sent to Make sure S/MIME-authentication
selected for the broadcasting the destinations for which S/ destinations are separate from plain text
sequence, the data is sent MIME authentication is set, destinations.
over twice. and plain text e-mails are sent Contact the administrator for details
to the destinations for which about destination settings.
S/MIME authentication is not
set.

64
 When You Cannot Send Scanned Files

Problem Cause Solution

When putting a signature on When S/MIME is applied, Contact the administrator.

an e-mail using S/MIME, an the administrator appears in
e-mail address for “Sender” the “From” field, and the
is not set for “From”. sender appears in the “Reply-
to” field.

• Using S/MIME makes e-mail larger than when not using S/MIME.

Operations Are Not Possible When Messages Are Displayed 4

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for messages that appear and when the
machine fails to operate.

Message Cause Solution

"Destination list / machine The destination list is being Wait until the message disappears. Do
settings are updated. updated from the network not switch off the power while this
Selected destinations or using SmartDeviceMonitor message is displayed.
function settings have been for Admin. Depending on the
cleared. Please re-select the number of destinations to be
settings." updated, there may be some
delay before you can resume
operation. Operations are
not possible while this
message is displayed.

65
 4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

Messages Displayed When Using the Scanner

Function
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for error messages that may appear on the
machine's control panel and the client computer.

Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When Using the Scanner Function

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the error messages that appear on the
control panel.
4
• If a message not described here appears, act according to the message. For details about how to
turn off the main power switch, see “Turning On/Off the Power”, About This Machine.

Message Cause Solution

"Authentication has failed." The entered login user name Inquire the user administrator for the
or login password is not correct login user name and login
correct. password.

"Authentication has failed." The machine cannot perform Contact the administrator.
authentication.

"Authentication with the The entered user name or • Check that the user name and
destination has failed. Check password was invalid. password are correct.
settings. To check the current • Check that the ID and password for
status, press [Scanned Files the destination folder are correct.
Status]."
• A password of 128 or more
characters may not be recognized.

"Cannot detect original size. The original is a nonstandard • Place the original correctly.
Select scan size." size. • In [Scan Settings] on the scanner
screen, specify [Scan Size].

"Cannot display preview of The size of the image you Images larger than A2 (C) cannot be
this page." want to preview is larger than previewed.
A2 (C). Specify A2 (C) or a smaller image, or
can again at A2 (C) or smaller.

66
 Messages Displayed When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Cannot find the specified The destination computer Check whether the computer name and
path. Please check the name or folder name is the folder name for the destination are
settings." invalid. correct.

"Cannot find the specified An antivirus program or a • Antivirus programs and firewalls
path. Please check the firewall is preventing the can prevent client computers
settings." machine connecting to your establishing connection with this
computer. machine.
• To prevent an antivirus application
blocking the connection, register
the scanner program in the
antivirus program's exclusion list.
4
For details about the procedure for
excluding a program, see your
antivirus application's Help.
• To prevent a firewall blocking the
connection, register the machine's
IP address in the firewall's IP
address exclusion settings. For
details about the procedure for
excluding an IP address, see your
firewall's Help.

"Captured file exceeded The maximum number of Reduce the number of pages in the
max. number of pages per pages per file has been transmitted file, and then resend the file.
file. Cannot send the scanned exceeded. See “Storage function”, Scanner
data." Reference.

"Connection with LDAP server A network error has occurred • Try the operation once more. If the
has failed. Check the server and connection has failed. message is still shown, the network
status." Try the operation once more. may be crowded.
• In [System Settings], under
[Administrator Tools], check the
settings of LDAP server. For details,
see “Programming the LDAP
server”, General Settings Guide.

67
 4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Connection with the The correct Network settings • Check the network settings of the
destination has failed. Check are not made. client computer.
the status and connection. To • Check that components such as the
check the current status, press LAN cable are connected
[Scanned Files Status]." properly.
• Check that the server settings are
correct and the server is working
properly.

"Destinations to which The destination's S/MIME Contact the administrator.

4 encrypted files will be sent certificates are invalid or
contain users without cannot be found.
certificates or with invalid
certificates. Check the
destinations."

"Destinations to which S/MIME certificates are Contact the administrator.

encrypted files will be sent valid, but the Certificate
contain users that could not Authority could not be found
be verified by the certificates. for the destination.
Check the destinations."

"Entered user code is not You have entered an Check the authentication settings, and
correct." incorrect user code. then enter a correct user code.

"Exceeded max. E-mail size. The maximum e-mail size has • In [Scanner Features], under [Send
Sending E-mail has been been exceeded. Settings], increase the size of
cancelled. Check [Max. E- [Max. E-mail Size].
mail Size] in Scanner • In [Scanner Features], under [Send
Features." Settings], set [Divide & Send E-
mail] to [Yes (per Page)] or [Yes
(per Max. Size)].

"Exceeded max. No. of Search results have Search again after changing the search
results to display. Max.: n" exceeded the max. conditions.
(A figure is placed at n.) displayable number.

68
 Messages Displayed When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. data The scanned data exceeded Specify the scan size and resolution
capacity. Check scanning maximum data capacity. again. Note that it may not be possible
resolution, then press Start to scan very large originals at a high
key again." resolution. See “Relationship between
Resolution and Scan Size”, Scanner
Reference.

"Exceeded max. data The scanned original Specify the scan size and resolution
capacity. Check the exceeded maximum data again. Note that it may not be possible
resolution or scan type, then capacity. to scan very large originals at a high
reset n original(s)."
(A figure is placed at n.)
resolution. See “Relationship between
Resolution and Scan Size”, Scanner 4
Reference.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum number of The maximum number of characters
alphanumeric characters for specifiable alphanumeric which can be entered for the path is 256.
the path." characters in a path has been Check the number of character you
exceeded. entered, and then enter the path again.

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum enterable Make sure the maximum number of
alphanumeric characters." number of alphanumeric characters which can be entered, and
characters has been then enter it again. See “Values of
exceeded. Various Set Items for Transmission/
Storage/Delivery Function”, Scanner
Reference.

"Exceeded max. number of The number of files exceeded Reduce the number of files and send
files which can be sent at the the maximum number them again.
same time. Reduce the possible.
number of the selected files."

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum number of files Check the files stored by the other
files which can be used in that can be stored in the functions, and then delete unneeded
Document Server at the same document server has been files. For details about how to delete
time." exceeded. files, see “Document Server”, Copy/
Document Server Reference.

"Exceeded max. number of The file being stored has Specify whether to store the data or not.
pages per file. Do you want exceeded the max. number of Scan the pages that were not scanned
to store the scanned pages as pages for one file. and store them as a new file. See
1 file?" “Storing Files Using the Scanner
Function”, Scanner Reference.

69
 4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Exceeded max. number of The maximum number of There are 100 files waiting in the
standby files. Try again after standby files was exceeded. sending queue for e-mail, Scan to
the current file is sent." Folder, or delivery functions. Wait until
files have been sent.

"Exceeded max. number of Too many files are waiting to Please try again after they have been
stored files. Cannot send the be delivered. delivered.
scanned data as capturing
files is unavailable."

"Exceeded max. page The number of scanned Select whether to send the data so far.
4 capacity per file. Press [Send] pages exceeded maximum
to send the scanned data, or page capacity.
press [Cancel] to delete."

"Exceeded maximum number Too many files are waiting to Please try again after they have been
of file to store. Delete all be delivered. delivered.
unnecessary files."

"Exceeded time limit for LDAP A network error has occurred • Try the operation once more. If the
server search. Check the and connection has failed. message is still shown, the network
server status." may be crowded.
• In [System Settings], under
[Administrator Tools], check the
settings of LDAP server. For details,
see “Programming the LDAP
server”, General Settings Guide.

"Invalid certificates or no S/ The destination's S/MIME Contact the administrator.

MIME certificates were certificates are invalid or
found." cannot be found.

"LDAP server authentication The user name and password In [System Settings], under
has failed. Check the differ from those set for LDAP [Administrator Tools], check the settings
settings." Authentication. of LDAP server. For details, see
“Programming the LDAP server”,
General Settings Guide.

70
 Messages Displayed When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Memory is full. Cannot scan. Because of insufficient hard Try one of the following measures:
The scanned data will be disk space, the first page • Wait for a while, and then retry the
deleted." could not be scanned. scan operation.
• Reduce the scan area or scanning
resolution. See “Specifying Scan
Settings”, Scanner Reference.
• Delete unneeded stored files. See
“Deleting a Stored File”, Scanner
Reference.

"Memory is full. Do you want Because there is not enough Specify whether to use the data or not. 4
to store scanned file?" free hard disk space in the
machine for storing in the
Document Server, only some
of the pages could be
scanned.

"Memory is full. Scanning has Because there is not enough Specify whether to use the data or not.
been cancelled. Press [Send] free hard disk space in the
to send the scanned data, or machine for delivering or
press [Cancel] to delete." sending by e-mail while
storing in the Document
Server, only some of the
pages could be scanned.

"No paper. Load paper of No paper is set in the Load paper of the sizes listed in the
one of the following sizes." specified paper tray. message. See p.77 "Loading Paper".

"Original is being scanned by The machine is using another Retry scanning after the operation with
another function. Please function such as copying. the other function is completed.
wait."

"Original is being scanned by A function of the machine Cancel the job in progress.
another function. Switch to other than the Scanner For example, press [Exit], and then press
the following function, then function is being used such as the [Copy] key. Next, press the [Clear/
press the Stop key to cancel the Copier function. Stop] key. When the message "The
scanning or press the Start Clear / Stop key was pressed. Are you
key to continue." sure you want to stop scanning?"
appears, press [Stop].

71
 4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Output buffer is full. Sending Too many jobs are in standby Retry sending after sending jobs in
the data has been cancelled. state, and sending was standby state completes.
Please try again later." canceled.

"SMTP authentication E-mail The SMTP authentication e- Contact the administrator.

address and Administrator E- mail address and the
mail address mismatch." administrator's e-mail
address do not match.

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the name Cancel transmission (“Waiting...” status
use. Cannot change file of a file whose status is cleared) or the DeskTopBinder setting,
4 name." “Waiting...” or that is being and then change the file name.
edited with DeskTopBinder.

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the Cancel transmission (“Waiting...” status
use. Cannot change password of a file whose cleared) or the DeskTopBinder setting,
password." status is “Waiting...” or that is and then change the password.
being edited with
DeskTopBinder.

"Selected file is currently in You cannot change the Cancel transmission (“Waiting...” status
use. Cannot change user sender's name whose status is cleared) or the DeskTopBinder setting,
name." “Waiting...” or that is being and then change the user name.
edited with DeskTopBinder.

"Sending the data has failed. A network error has occurred Wait until sending is retried
The data will be resent later." and a file was not sent automatically after the preset interval. If
correctly. sending fails again, contact the network
administrator.

"Some invalid destination(s) The specified group contains In the message that appears at each
contained. Do you want to e-mail destinations and Scan transmission, press [Select].
select only valid destination to Folder destinations, either
(s)?" of which are incompatible
with the specified
transmission method.

"Some of selected files are You cannot delete a file which Cancel transmission (“Waiting...” status
currently in use. They could is waiting to be transmitted cleared) or the DeskTopBinder setting,
not be deleted." (“Waiting...” status and then delete the file.
displayed) or whose
information is being changed
with DeskTopBinder.

72
 Messages Displayed When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"The destination list has been A specified destination or Specify the destination or sender's name
updated. Specified sender's name was cleared again.
destination(s) or sender's when the destination list in the
name has been cleared." delivery server was updated.

"The entered path is not The entered path format is Confirm the destination computer and
correct. Please re-enter." incorrect. the path, and then enter it again.

"The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files The files can be deleted by the file
contained file(s) without without the authority to do so. administrator. To delete a file which you
access privileges. Only file(s) are not authorized to delete, contact the
with access privileges will be administrator. 4
deleted."

"The specified group contains The specified group contains To select destinations for sending by
some destination(s) that do some destinations for sending email, press [Select] for the message
not have access privileges. by e-mail and some displayed on the e-mail screen. To select
Do you want to select only the destinations for sending by destination for sending by Scan to
privileged destination(s)?" Scan to Folder. Folder, press [Select] for the message
displayed on the Scan to Folder screen.

"Transmission has failed. Transmission has failed. Allocate sufficient space.

Insufficient memory in the There was not enough free
destination hard disk. To space on the hard disk of the
check the current status, press SMTP server, FTP server, or
[Scanned Files Status]." client computer at the
destination.

"Transmission has failed. To While a file was being sent, a Try the operation once more. If the
check the current status, press network error occurred and message is still shown, the network may
[Scanned Files Status]." the file could not be sent be crowded. Contact the network
correctly. administrator. If multiple files were sent,
use the Scanned Files Status screen to
check for which file the problem
occurred.

"Updating the destination list A network error has occurred. Check whether the server is connected.
has failed. Try again?"

"Updating the destination The destination list is being If a destination or sender's name was
list... Please wait. Specified updated. already selected, re-select it after this
destination(s) or sender's message disappears.
name has been cleared."

73
 4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"You do not have the The logged in user name does Contact the administrator about the
privileges to use this function." not have permission for the permission for the required function.
selected function.

Messages Displayed on the Client Computer

This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error messages displayed on the
client computer when using the TWAIN driver.

4 • If a message not described here appears, act according to the message. For information about how
to turn off the main power switch, see “Turning On/Off the Power”, About This Machine.

Message Cause Solution

"Any of Login User Name, The entered login user name, • Check the login user name, login
Login Password or Driver password, or driver password, and driver encryption
Encryption Key is incorrect." encryption key was invalid. key.
• Permission to use this function has
not been granted. Contact the
administrator.

"Cannot detect the paper size The set original was • Place the original correctly.
of the original. Scanning will misaligned. • Specify the scan size.
be cancelled."

"Cannot find the scanner. The machine's main power Check that the cable is securely plugged
Check the scanner main switch is off. into the power outlet and the machine.
power switch." Set the main power switch to “On”.

"Error has occurred within the An error has occurred in the • Check whether the network cable
scanner driver." driver. is connected correctly to the client
computer.
• Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is recognized
correctly by Windows.
• Check whether the client computer
can use the TCP/IP protocol.

74
 Messages Displayed When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Error has occurred on the The application-specified Check whether the scanning settings
scanner. Scanning will be scan conditions have made with the application exceed the
cancelled." exceeded the setting range of setting range of the machine.
the machine.

"Fatal error has occurred in An unrecoverable error has An unrecoverable error has occurred in
the scanner." occurred on the machine. the machine. Contact your service
representative.

"Insufficient memory. Reduce Scanner memory is • Reset the scan size.

the scanning area." insufficient. • Lower the resolution.
• Under [Scanner Features], [Send
4
Settings], make sure
“Compression” is set to “On”.
The problem may be due to the following
cause:
• Scanning cannot be performed if
large values are set for brightness
when using halftone or high
resolution. For details about the
scanning requirements, see
“Relationship between Resolution
and Scan Size”, Scanner
Reference.

"Insufficient memory. Reduce The computer does not have Reduce the resolution or size of
resolution, original size, or enough memory. scanning. Alternately, try scanning
scanning area." again after closing any other
applications in use.

"No User Code is registered. Access is restricted with user Contact the administrator of the
Consult your system codes. machine.
administrator."

"Paper misfeed has A paper misfeed has Remove jammed originals, and place
occurred." occurred. them again.
Check whether the originals are suitable
to be scanned by the machine.

"Please call your service An unrecoverable error has Contact your service representative.
representative." occurred in the machine.

75
 4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution

"Scanner is in use by another A function of the machine • Wait for a while and reconnect.
function." other than the Scanner • Cancel the job in progress.
function is being used such as
For example, press [Exit], and then
the Copier function.
press the [Copy] key. Next, press
the [Clear/Stop] key. When the
message "The Clear / Stop key
was pressed. Are you sure you
want to stop scanning?" appears,
press [Stop].

4 "Scanner is not available on The TWAIN scanner function Contact your service representative.
the specified device." cannot be used on this
machine.

"Scanner is not available. The machine's main power Set the main power switch to “On”.
Check the scanner switch is off.
connection status."

"Scanner is not available. The machine is not connected • Check whether the machine is
Check the scanner to the network correctly. connected to the network correctly.
connection status." • Deselect the personal firewall
function of the client computer. For
details, see Windows Help.
• Use an application such as telnet to
make sure SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 is
set as the machine's protocol. See
“Connecting the Machine”,
General Settings Guide and
“Using telnet”, Network Guide.

"Scanner is not ready. Check The scanner cover is open. Check whether the scanner cover is
the scanner and the options." closed.

"Standby time reached." An original was not loaded Load an original within the time limit
within the specified time limit. specified in [Standby Time].

"The start position of the The specified area to be Check the location of the original.
scanning area does not scanned differs from the
match the original." actual scanned area of the
original.

76
5. Adding Paper and Toner
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all the machine's functions.

Loading Paper
This section describes what to do when paper runs out and needs reloading.

• Be careful when replacing the roll paper or removing misfed paper by following the operating
instructions properly. Otherwise, an injury may result from the paper cutter inside.
• When replacing or loading the paper roll, do not put the paper roll on the upper of the paper roll
tray. Otherwise the tray may fall and an injury may result.
• Hold the paper rolls horizontally with both hands. When you grab the paper holder and hold the
paper roll vertically, the paper roll may fall off and an injury may result. 5
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.

• When removing paper rolls, lift the paper holders on either side of the paper roll before removing.
Do not lift one side only. This could damage the machine.

BLG001S

• If the original hanger (optional) is installed, remove it before pulling out the paper roll tray or cut
paper tray.
• For paper types and sizes that can be loaded in the paper roll tray and cut paper tray, see
“Recommended Paper Sizes and Types”, About This Machine.
• For details about changing the paper size in the paper roll tray or cut paper tray, see “Changing the
Paper Size”.
• To load paper in the bypass tray, see “Copying from the Bypass Tray”, Copy/Document Server
Reference.

77
 5. Adding Paper and Toner

• p.81 "Changing the Paper Size"

Loading the Paper Roll

The following procedure explains loading the paper roll.

BLI012S

78
 Loading Paper

• When you use the printer function, set the [Paper Volume] again after loading the paper roll. See
“Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.

Loading Cut Paper

The following procedure explains loading cut paper.

BLI009S

When using translucent paper

Load the translucent paper into Tray 4.

BLG021S

Make sure to set the side guides before loading paper. After loading paper into the tray, make sure the
paper is placed straightly and the side guides are set securely onto it.

• Fan the paper before loading.

• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.

79
 5. Adding Paper and Toner

• For details about paper sizes and types, see “Recommended Paper Sizes and Types”, About This
Machine.

80
 Changing the Paper Size

Changing the Paper Size

This section describes how to change the paper size.
Procedures for changing the paper size differ depending on the tray. Make sure you are following the
appropriate procedure before you begin.

• Be sure to select the paper size with User Tools. If you do not, misfeeds might occur. For details about
Tray Paper Size, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
• For details about paper sizes and types, see “Recommended Paper Sizes and Types”, About This
Machine.

Changing the Paper Size in the Paper Roll Tray

This section describes how to change the paper size in the paper roll tray.
5

BLI008S

• When you use the printer function, set the [Paper Volume] again after loading the paper roll. See
“Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.
• When you change the paper size or paper type, make the paper size or type settings under System
Settings. See “Tray Paper Settings”, General Settings Guide.

Changing the Paper Size in the Cut Paper Tray

The following procedure explains how to change a paper size in the cut paper tray.

81
 5. Adding Paper and Toner

5 BLI009S

When using translucent paper

Load the translucent paper into Tray 4.

BLG021S

Make sure to set the side guides before loading paper. After loading paper into the tray, make sure the
paper is placed straightly and the side guides are set securely onto it.

• Fan the paper before loading.

• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• For details about paper sizes and types, see “Recommended Paper Sizes and Types”, About This
Machine.

82
 Adding Toner

Adding Toner
This section describes how to add and store toner.

• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open
flame. Dispose of used toner containers in accordance with local regulations.

• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.

• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air environment.
Consult a doctor if necessary. 5

• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.

• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.

• Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or replacing toner. If your
skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
may make removing the stain impossible.

• Do not open toner containers forcefully. Toner can spill, dirtying your clothes or hands, and possibly
resulting in accidental ingestion.

• Fault may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
• When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, settings will be lost.
• Always add toner when the machine instructs you.
• When a message " Add Toner" is shown on the display, replace the applicable toner.

83
 5. Adding Paper and Toner

• Do not repeatedly install and remove toner cartridges. This will result in toner leakage.
• Do not shake the removed toner cartridge. Remaining toner might scatter.
• Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.
• Store on a flat surface.

• You can check name of the required toner name and the replacement procedure using the " Add
Toner" screen.
• Press [System Status] to check contact number where you can order supplies. See “Checking Machine
Status and Settings”.

• p.9 "Checking Machine Status and Settings"

5 Replacing Toner

This section describes how to replace toner.

• Do not shake the removed toner cartridge. The remaining toner might scatter.

84
 Adding Toner

BLI004S

Sending Scanned Documents When Toner Has Run Out

When the machine has run out of toner, the indicator on the display lights. Note that even if there is no
toner left, you can still send scanned documents.

1. Make sure the machine is in scanner mode.

2. Press [Exit], and then perform transmission operation.
The error message disappears.

• If the scanner screen does not appear in step 1, press the [Scanner] key.

Used Toner

Toner cannot be re-used.

Bring the stored used container to your sales representative or service representative for recycling through
our recycling system. If you discard it on your own, treat it as general plastic waste material.

85
 5. Adding Paper and Toner

86
6. Clearing Misfeeds
This chapter describes what to do when paper or originals misfeed (become jammed inside the machine).

Removing Jammed Paper

This section describes how to locate and remove jammed paper.

• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch any parts other than specified in this
document when removing misfed paper. Otherwise, it may cause burn injury.

• The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be taken when removing misfed
paper.

6
• Be careful when replacing the roll paper or removing misfed paper by following the operating
instructions properly. Otherwise, an injury may result from the paper cutter inside.

• Keep your hands clear of the paper exit area and the inside of the folding finisher. You can trap
your fingers if you do not.

• If the paper jam indicator lights or begins to flash, do not open the imaging unit or paper source tray
immediately. Wait ten seconds before doing so. If you do not, it will be difficult to remove paper that
is jammed inside the fusing unit.
• When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your copy settings will be
lost.
• To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the machine.
• Contact your service representative if misfeeds occur frequently.

Locating Jammed Paper

If a misfeed happens, remove the misfed paper or original following the procedures stated on the sticker
inside the folding finisher or front cover.
A misfeed has occurred in the place corresponding to the letter displayed on the control panel.

87
 6. Clearing Misfeeds

BLG029S

1. Press the key of the section from where you want to remove the jammed paper.

2. After each step is complete, press [Next]. To go back to the previous step, press [Previous].

3. When all jammed paper is removed, restore the machine to the original state.

• More than one misfeed may be indicated. When this happens, check all the areas indicated.

Removing Jammed Paper

This section describes how to remove jammed paper.

88
 Removing Jammed Paper

• The internal parts of the machine may be hot. Wait for the fusing unit to cool down before clearing a
paper jam in the unit.
• When removing jammed sheets, take care to touch only those areas explicitly indicated in the manual.
• Do not remove the fusing unit. Doing so will result in loss of print quality.

• On the scanner cover, or imaging unit cover, inside the paper tray, there is a sticker explaining how
to remove misfed paper.
• If a detailed removal instruction appears on the right of the screen, follow it.
• You can also use the procedure indicated in [System Status] to remove jammed paper.

When A is displayed

BLI007S

When you can see the edge of the paper

BLI010S

89
 6. Clearing Misfeeds

When you cannot see the edge of the paper

6
BLI011S

Paper misfeeds in the cut paper trays

BLI013S

90
 Removing Jammed Paper

When B is displayed

Note Note

BLI002S

When C is displayed
When paper jams occur, first try removing the paper through the front paper exit at the front of the machine,
even if C lights up to indicate that the jam has occurred elsewhere. Then, if doing this does not resolve the 6
jam, do the following:

91
 6. Clearing Misfeeds

BLI003S

When P is displayed

BLI014S

When N1 - N16 is displayed

Paper is jammed in the folding finisher. Based on the number displayed, use one of the following procedures
to resolve the jam.

92
 Removing Jammed Paper

N1
See “When J01 Is Displayed” in “When a Paper Jam Occurs” in the manual supplied with the folding
finisher.
N3
See “When J03 Is Displayed” in “When a Paper Jam Occurs” in the manual supplied with the folding
finisher.
N5
See “When J05 Is Displayed” in “When a Paper Jam Occurs” in the manual supplied with the folding
finisher.
N7
See “When J07 Is Displayed” in “When a Paper Jam Occurs” in the manual supplied with the folding
finisher.
N8
See “When J08 Is Displayed” in “When a Paper Jam Occurs” in the manual supplied with the folding
finisher.
N9, N10, N11, N12, or N13 6
See “When J09, J10, J11, J12, or J13 Is Displayed” in “When a Paper Jam Occurs” in the manual
supplied with the folding finisher.
N14, N15 or N16
See “When J14, N15 or N16 Is Displayed” in “When a Paper Jam Occurs” in the manual supplied
with the folding finisher.

When V1 or V2 is displayed
See “When J31 or J32 Is Displayed” in “When a Paper Jam Occurs” in the manual supplied with the
folding finisher.

93
 6. Clearing Misfeeds

94
7. Remarks
This chapter describes how to maintain and operate the machine.

Where to Put Your Machine

This section describes precautions for installation and movement.

Machine Environment

Choose your machine's location carefully.

Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.

Moving
This section describes precautions when moving the machine.

• Contact your service representative if you need to lift the machine (such as when relocating it to
another floor). Do not attempt to lift the machine without the assistance of your service 7
representative. The machine will be damaged if it topples or is dropped, resulting in malfunction
and risk of injury to users. The machine's various handling areas are for service engineer use only.
Do not touch these areas.

• Before moving the machine, be sure to disconnect all external connections, especially the power
cord from the wall outlet. Damaged power cords are a fire and electric shock hazard.

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the machine.

• Be careful when moving the machine. Take the following precautions:

• Turn off the main power.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip
the plug to avoid damaging the cord, thereby reducing the risk of fire or electric shock.
• Close all covers and trays, including the front cover and bypass tray.

95
 7. Remarks

• Keep the machine level and carry it carefully, taking care not to jolt or tip it. Rough handling may
cause a malfunction or damage the hard disk or memory, resulting in loss of stored files.
• Do not take off the holding stand.
• Protect the machine from strong shocks. Impact can damage the hard disk and cause stored files to
be lost. As a precautionary measure, files should be copied to another computer.

• For details about how to turn the main power off, see “Turning On/Off the Power”, About This
Machine.

Optimum environmental conditions

This section describes precautions when locating the machine.

• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, an injury might occur.

7 • After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might
move or come down to cause an injury.

• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious. Good
ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.

• Temperature: 10- 30 °C (50- 86 °F)

• Humidity: 15- 90 %
• A strong and level base.
• The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2 inch: both front to rear and left to right.
• To avoid possible buildup of ozone, make sure to locate this machine in a large well ventilated room
that has an air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person.

Environments to avoid
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of strong light (more than 1,500 lux).
• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air from a heater. (Sudden
temperature changes can cause condensation to form inside the machine.)
• Locations close to machines generating ammonia, such as a diazo copy machine.

96
 Where to Put Your Machine

• Places where the machine will be subject to frequent strong vibration.

• Dusty areas.
• Areas with corrosive gases.

Access to the machine

Place the machine near the power source, providing the clearance areas shown.

BLI001S

1. Rear: 60 cm (40 inches) or more

2. Right: 45 cm (18 inches) or more
3. Front: 100 cm (40 inches) or more
7
4. Left: 40 cm (16 inches) or more

• For the required space when options are installed, contact your service representative.

Power Connection

This section describes power supply.

• Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside front cover of this manual.
Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and do not use an extension cord.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord. Do not place heavy objects
on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric
shock or fire.

97
 7. Remarks

• If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection, etc.), contact your service
representative to change a new one. Operating the machine with a damaged power cord may
cause an electric shock or fire.

• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the cable).

• To disconnect the power cord, pull it out by plug. Do not drag the cord itself. Doing so may result
in damage to the cord, leading to fire or electric shock.

• When the main power switch is in the stand-by position, the optional anti-condensation heaters are
on. In an emergency, unplug the machine's power cord.
• When you unplug the power cord, the anti-condensation heaters turn off.
• Make sure the plug is inserted firmly in the wall outlet.
• Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.
• The wall outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessible.
7

98
 Maintaining Your Machine

Maintaining Your Machine

If the exposure glass, or white strip is dirty, copy clarity may be reduced. Clean these parts if they are dirty.

• Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents, such as thinner or benzene. If such substances get
inside the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure might occur.
• Do not clean parts other than those explicitly specified in this manual. Other parts should only be
cleaned by your service representative.
How to maintain
Cleaning the machine: Wipe the machine with a soft, dry cloth. If this does not remove the dirt, wipe
the machine with a damp and tightly wrung cloth. If a damp cloth still does not remove the dirt, try
using a mild detergent. Wipe the machine with a dry cloth to remove the moisture, after using a damp
cloth.

Cleaning the Inside the Scanner Cover

If you open the scanner cover, you can access the exposure glass and original feed mechanism.

1. While holding both ends of the scanner cover, press the release levers, and then open the 7
cover by pulling it up.

BLG004S

99
 7. Remarks

2. Wipe the scanning glass with soft, dry cloth.

BLG005S

scanning glass
3. Wipe the white strip with a soft, dry cloth.

7
BLG006S

white strip
4. Wipe the original feed guides with a soft, dry cloth.

BLG007S

original feed guides

100
 Maintaining Your Machine

5. Close the scanner cover with both hands gently.

BLG008S

• If there is paper dust or fluff inside, remove it.

Cleaning the Imaging Unit

Clean off toner that may have collected on the imaging area.

• Do not leave the main unit more than 10 minutes, otherwise copy quality may deteriorate. 7
1. Lift the imaging unit release levers on either side and open the imaging unit.

BLG009S

101
 7. Remarks

2. Wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

BLG010S

3. While holding both ends of the imaging unit, lower it gently until it is fully closed.

Cleaning the Power Cable Plug

This section explains how to clean the plug on the power cable.

• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around the
7 prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.

• Make sure you turn the machine's main power switch to OFF before disconnecting the power cable
plug from the wall outlet. For details about how to turn the machine's main power switch to OFF, see
“Turning On/Off the Power”, in About This Machine.
Cleaning Method
Using a clean, dry cloth, wipe off any dust or grime from the prongs of the plug and the area around
the prongs.

BLI021S

102
INDEX
A L
Access to the machine...........................................97 Loading Cut Paper.................................................79
Adding toner..........................................................83 Loading paper.......................................................77
C Loading the Paper Roll..........................................78
Locating jammed paper........................................87
Cannot browse the network to send a scan file......
................................................................................63 M
Cannot make clear copies....................................24 Machine address info.............................................9
Cannot make copies as wanted...........................28 Machine environment...........................................95
Cannot print...........................................................49 Maintaining your machine....................................99
Cannot send scanned files....................................63 Maintenance info....................................................9
Changing the paper size......................................81 Manuals for this machine........................................1
Changing the Paper Size in the Cut Paper Tray...... Memory is full........................................................34
................................................................................81
Message Printed on the Error Logs or Reports........
Changing the Paper Size in the Paper Roll Tray..... ................................................................................41
................................................................................81
Messages displayed................................21, 39, 66
Checking machine status and settings....................9
Messages displayed on the client computer.......74
Checking the error log..........................................47
Messages Displayed on the Control Panel When
Cleaning the Imaging Unit..................................101 Using the Printer Function......................................39
Cleaning the Inside the Scanner Cover...............99 Messages displayed on the control panel when
Cleaning the Power Cable Plug.........................102 using the scanner function.....................................66
Clearing misfeeds..................................................87 Messages displayed when installing the printer
Combine................................................................. 28 driver......................................................................35
Control panel..................................................39, 66 Moving...................................................................95
Copy/Document Server function.........................21 Multi-accessing...................................................... 18

D N

Data storage............................................................9 Names of major options.........................................6

Document Server...................................................28 Network connection..............................................51
Network delivery function cannot be used.........64
E
O
Edit..........................................................................28
Environments to avoid...........................................96 Operations are not possible when messages are
displayed...............................................................65
Error log.................................................................47
Optimum environmental conditions.....................96
H Other printing problems........................................53
How to read this manual.........................................6 P
I Panel tone.................................................................8
If USB connection fails..........................................38 Paper......................................................................77
Indicators..................................................................7 Power connection..................................................97
Inquiry.......................................................................9 Printer function.......................................................39
Problems operating the machine..........................14
J
Job is not performed..............................................18

103
 R
Removing jammed paper...............................87, 88
Replacing Toner....................................................84
S
Scanner function....................................................66
Scanning is not done as expected.......................61
Sending scanned documents when toner has run
out...........................................................................85
Status messages..................................................... 39
Stored files cannot be accessed...........................63
Stored files cannot be edited................................ 64
Symbols....................................................................6
T
Toner.......................................................................83
TWAIN...................................................................74
TWAIN driver cannot be started..........................63
U
Used toner..............................................................85
W
When A is displayed.............................................89
When an indicator to the right of a function key is lit
................................................................................12
When B is displayed.............................................91
When C is displayed.............................................91
When N1 - N16 is displayed..............................92
When P is displayed.............................................92
When paper is not fed properly...........................53
When S/MIME cannot be used..........................64
When the data in indicator does not light up or flash
................................................................................51
When the machine is connected to the computer
using the interface cable.......................................51
When V1 or V2 is displayed................................93
When you cannot print clearly.............................53
Where to put your machine..................................95
Windows 2000.....................................................35
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2.......................35
Windows Vista.......................................................36
Windows XP Home Edition...................................36
Windows XP Professional.....................................35

104 EN USA D046-7804

Trademarks

Adobe, Acrobat, Acrobat Reader, PostScript, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
TrueType® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows NT®, Windows Server®, and Windows Vista® are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Monotype is a registered trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company Limited.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective
companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
* The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
* The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Media Center Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Tablet PC Edition
* The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Web Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Datacenter Edition
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Datacenter Edition

Copyright © 2008
 Operating Instructions Troubleshooting

Type for 5100WD/GWD5100/LW5100/Aficio MP W5100

Type for 7140WD/GWD7140/LW7140/Aficio MP W7140

EN USA D046-7804
 Operating Instructions
Copy/Document Server
Reference

1 Placing Originals
2 Basic Copying
3 Advanced Copying
4 Document Server
5 Appendix

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information
in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your safety and
benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy place for quick reference.

Important

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.

Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its completeness or
accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your
legal advisor.

Notes:

Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Notes:

The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before
reading this manual. (For details, see "Machine Types", About This Machine.)
Type 1: 5100WD/GWD5100/LW5100/Aficio MP W5100
Type 2: 7140WD/GWD7140/LW7140/Aficio MP W7140
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.

• Media differ according to manual.

• The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
• For details about the functions of RW-7140, refer to the manuals for this option.
About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also explains the control panel,
preparation procedures for using the machine, how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs
provided.
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace paper, toner, and other
consumables.
Copy/ Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for
explanations on how to place originals.
Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software
provided.
General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering e-mail addresses, and
user codes. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect the machine.
Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that you can use to
prevent unauthorized use of the machine, data tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced
security, we recommend that you first make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.

1
 • Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator using Web Image Monitor.
For details, see “Setting Up the Machine”, Security Reference.
Be sure to read this manual when setting the enhanced security functions, or user and administrator
authentication.
PostScript 3 Supplement
Explains how to set up and use PostScript 3.
UNIX Supplement
For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized dealer.
This manual includes descriptions of functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
Information
Contains general notes on the machine, and information about the trademarks of product names used
in the manuals.
Other manuals
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide

• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.

2
What You Can Do with This Machine
This section introduces the machine's copier functions that you are likely to use most often.
Functions differ depending on machine type and options.
See p.17 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations".

Assembling Copies as Sets in Sequential Order

Sort
Copies are assembled as sets in sequential order.
See p.77 "Sort".

BAS053S

Rotate Sort
Every other copy set is rotated by 90 degrees and delivered to the copy tray.
See p.77 "Sort".

BAS054S

Reducing/Enlarging Originals by Specifying the Paper Size

The machine automatically detects the original size, and then selects an appropriate reproduction ratio
based on the paper size you select.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
See p.65 "Auto Reduce/Enlarge".

3
 BAS033S

Saving Paper

The Combine function allow you to save paper.

Combine
Combines several pages onto one side of a sheet.
See p.74 "One-Sided Combine".

BAS038S

BAS039S

4
 BAS040S

Adjusting Image

Erase Border
Erases the edge margin of the original image.
See p.124 "Erase Border (same width)" and p.125 "Erase Border (different width)"

BKW013S

Erase Inside
Copies the original while erasing a specified area.
See p.126 "Erase Inside"

BKY003D

5
 Erase Outside
Copies the original while erasing outside a specified area.
See p.128 "Erase Outside"

BKY004D

Margin Adjustment
When Synchro Cut is selected, you can create a margin on the copy's leading and trailing edge.
See p.130 "Margin Adjustment".

BKY005D

Adjust Print Position

Moves (shifts) the copy image up, down, left, or right to create a margin.
See p.141 "Adjust Print Position".

6
 BKY006D

Image Repeat
Repeatedly copies the entire image.
See p.131 "Image Repeat".

BAS095S

7
 Double Copies
One original image is copied twice on one sheet.
See p.132 "Double Copies".

BAS098S

Positive/Negative
Copies an image inverted.
See p.133 "Positive/Negative".

BAS100S

Partial Copy
Copies only a specified portion of the original.
See p.134 "Partial Copy".

BKW045D

8
Mirror Image
Copies by reversing the image from left to right, as reflected in a mirror.
See p.135 "Mirror Image".

BAS101S

Format Overlay
Combines two images onto one copy.
See p.136 "Format Overlay".

BKY007D

Adding Stamps such as Page Number to the Copies

Background Numbering
Prints numbers on the background of copies.
See p.106 "Background Numbering".

9
 BAS070S

Preset Stamp
Preset messages are stamped on copies.
See p.107 "Preset Stamp".

BKY008D

User Stamp
Copies a scanned image as a stamp.
See p.110 "User Stamp".

BAS073S

Date Stamp
Prints dates on copies.
See p.115 "Date Stamp".

10
 BAS076S

Page Numbering
Prints page numbers on copies.
See p.118 "Page Numbering".

BAS078S

Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions

You can configure the settings of the initial screen so that the default display contain the functions you use
most often.
For example, the default setting for [Original Output Exit] is [Front], but you can change this setting to
[Rear]. For details, see “Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions”.
You can also store frequently used copy job settings in the machine memory and recall them for future use.
For details, see “Registering Frequently Used Function”.
See p.93 "Registering Frequently Used Functions".
See p.97 "Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions".

11
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine.................................................................................................................................1
What You Can Do with This Machine...............................................................................................................3
Assembling Copies as Sets in Sequential Order.........................................................................................3
Reducing/Enlarging Originals by Specifying the Paper Size....................................................................3
Saving Paper..................................................................................................................................................4
Adjusting Image..............................................................................................................................................5
Adding Stamps such as Page Number to the Copies.................................................................................9
Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions......................................................................................11
How to Read This Manual...............................................................................................................................16
Symbols........................................................................................................................................................16
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations................................................................................................17
Display..............................................................................................................................................................18
Simplified Display........................................................................................................................................18
1. Placing Originals
Original and Copy Output Locations.............................................................................................................21
Original Output Locations...........................................................................................................................21
Copy Output Locations................................................................................................................................23
Adjusting the rear output.............................................................................................................................25
Originals...........................................................................................................................................................26
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals.......................................................................................26
Originals that should be scanned using the carrier sheet.........................................................................27
Non-compatible originals...........................................................................................................................28
Missing Image Area....................................................................................................................................29
Placing Originals..............................................................................................................................................30
Placing Originals on the Original Table....................................................................................................30
To stop originals feeding in.........................................................................................................................31
Original Orientation....................................................................................................................................32
Placing Custom Size Originals...................................................................................................................33
Wide Scan....................................................................................................................................................34
Setting the Carrier Sheet.............................................................................................................................36
Setting the Original Hangers......................................................................................................................37
2. Basic Copying
Basic Procedure................................................................................................................................................39

12
 Check Modes...............................................................................................................................................40
Original Counter/Reset..............................................................................................................................41
Auto Start......................................................................................................................................................41
Interrupt Copy..............................................................................................................................................41
Job Preset......................................................................................................................................................43
Copying from the Bypass Tray........................................................................................................................44
Copying onto Regular Size Paper..............................................................................................................46
Copying onto Custom Size Paper..............................................................................................................46
Copying onto Special Paper.......................................................................................................................48
Selecting the Original Type Setting................................................................................................................50
Adjusting Copy Image Density........................................................................................................................52
Auto Image Density.....................................................................................................................................52
Manual Image Density................................................................................................................................52
Combined Auto and Manual Image Density............................................................................................53
Copy Quality................................................................................................................................................53
Selecting Copy Paper......................................................................................................................................56
Auto Paper Select........................................................................................................................................56
Manual Paper Select...................................................................................................................................57
Rotate Copy.................................................................................................................................................58
Setting the Length of Copy Paper Cut.............................................................................................................59
Synchro Cut..................................................................................................................................................59
Preset Cut......................................................................................................................................................60
Variable Cut.................................................................................................................................................62
Reducing or Enlarging Originals.....................................................................................................................64
Auto Reduce/Enlarge.................................................................................................................................65
User Auto Reduce/Enlarge.........................................................................................................................67
Preset Reduce/Enlarge...............................................................................................................................69
Zoom.............................................................................................................................................................70
Combined Copying.........................................................................................................................................74
One-Sided Combine...................................................................................................................................74
Finishing............................................................................................................................................................77
Sort................................................................................................................................................................77
Fold...............................................................................................................................................................80

13
 Storing Data in the Document Server.............................................................................................................86
Managing Jobs................................................................................................................................................88
Job List Screen..............................................................................................................................................88
Checking Jobs in the Job List.......................................................................................................................89
Changing the Order of Jobs.......................................................................................................................90
Holding Jobs................................................................................................................................................90
Deleting Jobs................................................................................................................................................91
Checking the Job History.............................................................................................................................91
Registering Frequently Used Functions...........................................................................................................93
Registering Functions in a Program............................................................................................................93
Changing a Stored Program.......................................................................................................................94
Deleting a Stored Program.........................................................................................................................95
Recalling a Stored Program........................................................................................................................95
Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions..........................................................................................97
3. Advanced Copying
Advanced Reduce/Enlarge Copying............................................................................................................99
Size Magnification.......................................................................................................................................99
Directional Magnification (%)..................................................................................................................100
Directional Size Magnification (inch)......................................................................................................102
Fine Magnification....................................................................................................................................104
Stamps............................................................................................................................................................106
Background Numbering...........................................................................................................................106
Preset Stamp..............................................................................................................................................107
User Stamp.................................................................................................................................................110
Date Stamp................................................................................................................................................115
Page Numbering.......................................................................................................................................118
Advanced Copier Functions.........................................................................................................................124
Erase Border (same width).......................................................................................................................124
Erase Border (different width)..................................................................................................................125
Erase Inside................................................................................................................................................126
Erase Outside............................................................................................................................................128
Margin Adjustment....................................................................................................................................130
Image Repeat............................................................................................................................................131

14
 Double Copies...........................................................................................................................................132
Positive/Negative.....................................................................................................................................133
Partial Copy...............................................................................................................................................134
Mirror Image.............................................................................................................................................135
Format Overlay.........................................................................................................................................136
Adjust Print Position....................................................................................................................................141
4. Document Server
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions...................................................................145
Document Server Display..............................................................................................................................146
Simplified Display......................................................................................................................................147
Preview Display.........................................................................................................................................148
Using the Document Server...........................................................................................................................150
Storing Data...............................................................................................................................................150
Changing the User Name of a Stored Document..................................................................................154
Changing the File Name of a Stored Document....................................................................................155
Changing the Password of a Stored Document......................................................................................156
Checking the Details of a Stored Document...........................................................................................156
Searching for Stored Documents.............................................................................................................157
Printing Stored Documents........................................................................................................................159
Deleting a Stored Document....................................................................................................................165
Print Backup...............................................................................................................................................166
Displaying Stored Documents with Web Image Monitor......................................................................166
Downloading Stored Documents with Web Image Monitor.................................................................167
5. Appendix
Function Compatibility...................................................................................................................................169
Supplementary Information...........................................................................................................................171
Scan Size Limitations, by Function...........................................................................................................176
Settings Record Sheet....................................................................................................................................178
Magnification Ratio Chart.............................................................................................................................183
Measure Chart...............................................................................................................................................185
User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features)..............................................................................187
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................191

15
 How to Read This Manual

• For proper use of this product, be sure to read About This Machine first.
• Supplementary information about the copier mode is described in “Supplementary Information”.

• p.171 "Supplementary Information"

Symbols

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.

16
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations
Certain functions require special machine configuration and extra options as follows:
Fan Fold: Fan Folding Finisher, Cross Folding Finisher
Regular Size Fold: Cross Folding Finisher
Programmed Fold: Cross Folding Finisher

17
 Display
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an item by lightly pressing
them.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like . Keys appearing as
cannot be used.
Initial copy display

BKY057S

1. Use this area to specify the original type, original orientation, image density level, and other
settings.
2. Displays operational status and messages.
3. Displays the numbers of originals scanned, copies set, and copies made.
4. Use this area to select the fold function and related options.
5. Displays available functions. Press a function to display its menu.

Simplified Display

This section explains how to switch to the simplified display.

When you press the [Simplified Display] key, the screen changes from the initial display to the simplified
display.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.

18
 BKX024S

Example of a simplified display

BKY058S

1. [Key Color]
Press to increase screen contrast by changing the color of the keys.
This is available only for the simplified display.

• To return to the initial display, press the [Simplified Display] key again.
• Certain keys do not appear on the simplified display.

19
20
1. Placing Originals
This chapter describes original and copy output locations, the types of originals you can set, and how to
place originals.

1
Original and Copy Output Locations
Specify original and copy output locations before copying.

Original Output Locations

Two types of original output locations are available.

Original Upper Output
This is the basic original output location.
Originals are ejected onto the original stacker.
Original Rear Output
Originals are ejected onto the original output guides. When copying thick or hard originals, select
this output location.

Original upper output

Originals are ejected onto the original stacker.

1. Press [Top].

Originals are ejected onto the original stacker.

21
 1. Placing Originals

BKW019S

• If the original is larger than A1(D) , select original rear output.

• If the original is heavier than 157 g/m2 (41.8 lb.), select original rear output.
• If the original is plain paper not heavier than 52.3 g/m2 (13.9 lb.) or translucent paper not heavier
than 80 g/m2 (21.3 lb.), select original rear output.
• When copying a rolled original, prevent it curling up on the stacker by holding its leading edge as it
is ejected.

Original rear output

Originals are ejected onto the original output guides.

1. Press [Rear].

Originals are ejected onto the original output guides.

22
 Original and Copy Output Locations

BKV034S

Copy Output Locations

Two types of copy output locations are available.

Front
Prints are delivered through the front paper output exit at the front of the machine.
When copying sizes up to A1 , we recommend selecting front copy output.
Rear
Prints are delivered through the rear paper output exit at the back of the machine.
When copying A1 K or A0 K, select rear copy output.
The table below shows you how many sheets can be stacked.

Plain paper Translucent paper

Upper copy output (A1 (D) or smaller) 100 sheets 10 sheets

Lower copy output (A1 (D) or A0 (E) ) 10 sheets 1 sheet

• If copies exceed the upper limit, paper jams may occur. Remove the copies from the stacker.
• When copying onto film, hold the leading edge of the copied film, remove it from the stacker, and
then place it on a level surface.

• p.17 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations"

Front copy output

Prints are delivered through the front paper output exit.

23
 1. Placing Originals

1. Make sure [Front] is selected under Copy Output Location.

Prints are delivered through the front paper output exit.

BKW007S

Rear copy output

Prints are delivered through the rear paper output exit.

1. Select [Rear] under Copy Output Location.

Prints are delivered through the rear paper output exit.

24
 Original and Copy Output Locations

BKV033S

• When using thick paper, the last sheet to be ejected may remain in the output exit. If this happens,
remove it.

Adjusting the rear output

When using the rear output, adjust the hook position to the size of the copy.

BKW054S

25
 1. Placing Originals

Originals
This section describes the types of originals that can be placed, and missing image area.
1
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals

The following describes recommended paper sizes and non-compatible originals for this machine:
Metric version

Original location Original size Original weight

Original table Standard sizes: 20.9 - 157 g/m2

A0 , A1 , A2 , A3 , A4 ,B1 JIS , B2 JIS and 0.03 - 1 mm
, B3 JIS , B4 JIS thick originals

Custom sizes:
Length:182 - 15,000mm (Type 1)
Length:182 - 30,000mm (Type 2)
Width: 210 - 914 mm
(including B1 ISO , 625 mm × 880 mm , 440 mm ×
625 mm )
(Maximum width 950 mm)

JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard

ISO: International Organization for Standardization

26
 Originals

Inch version

Original location Original size Original weight

Original table Standard sizes: 5.6 - 41.8 lb. and

1.1 Mil - 40 Mil
1
• Engineering
thick originals
E (34" × 44") , D (22" × 34") ,
C (17" × 22") , B (11" × 17") , A (81/2" ×
11")
• Architecture
E (36" × 48") , 30" × 42" , D (24" × 36") ,C
(18" × 24") , B (12" × 18") , A (9" × 12")

• Other
81/2" × 12" , 81/2" × 13" , 81/2" × 14" ,
11" × 14" , 11" × 15" , 12" × 141/2" , 30" ×
21"
Custom sizes:
Length: 81/2" - 1181.2"
Width: 81/2" - 36"
(Maximum width: 37.4")

Originals that should be scanned using the carrier sheet

The following types of originals should be mounted on the carrier sheet. You should also use the carrier
sheet for important originals and for originals you will copy repeatedly.
• Cut and pasted originals
• Originals with fold lines
• Wrinkled or torn originals
• Waved originals
• Punched originals
• Originals with sticky tape or adhesive
• Pasted originals
• Originals with a damaged leading edge
• Originals with surfaces that attach to glass easily such as photographs
• Originals drawn in pencil

27
 1. Placing Originals

• Originals no thicker than 52.3g/m2 (14 lb.).

• p.36 "Setting the Carrier Sheet"

1
Non-compatible originals

The following types of originals can cause jams, or may itself be damaged.
• Originals other than those specified in “Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals”
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Bent, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper,
or conductive paper
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Thin and soft originals such as translucent paper
• Bound originals such as books
• Damp originals
• Badly curled originals
• Originals that vary in thickness
• Originals with sticky tape or adhesive
• Originals with thick leading edges
• Originals with wet ink or correction fluid
• Carbon-backed originals
• Originals not made of paper (such as glass, metal)
• Originals with a roll diameter smaller than 35 mm (1.4")
• Originals with a roll diameter larger than 110 mm (4.3")
Flatten curled originals so they fit within the range shown below.
• Front and back curl; R 60 mm (2.4") or more, height 10 mm (0.4") or less

28
 Originals

BKY020S

Originals that use more than 20% of the image area, may be faint.

Missing Image Area

Part of the original may not be copied as shown below (full-size copying on paper roll).

3 3 1

4 BKW008S

1. Feed Direction
2. Less than 8.0 mm (0.32 inch)
3. 2.0±2.0 mm (0.08±0.08 inch)
4. Less than 8.0 mm (0.32 inch) (excluding cutting error)

29
 1. Placing Originals

Placing Originals
This section describes the procedure for placing originals on the original table.
1
• Set one original at a time on the original table.
• Once an original start to feed in, do not push or pull it. This may damage the original.
• If the original's rear edge is badly curled, smooth it out with both hands before scanning. If the original
is inserted as is, it may be damaged.
• When inserting an original, push it lightly against the rollers. Pushing it with force may cause an original
jam.
• When inserting an original, be careful not to put the trailing edge into the entrance of the bypass tray.
This will cause an original jam.

• Place originals after any correction fluid or ink has completely dried. Not taking this precaution will
result in a dirtied scanning glass and blemished copies.
• Dust and residue from originals drawn with a pencil can result in a dirtied scanning glass and blemished
copies. We recommend using the carrier sheet for this type of original.

Placing Originals on the Original Table

Place originals on the original table.

1. Make sure “Ready” appears on the screen.

2. Adjust the original guides to the size and orientation of the original.
Make sure the original guides are flush against the original. Do not push the original guide side fence
with force.

BKW001S

30
 Placing Originals

3. Using both hands, carefully insert the original between the original guides, copy side down.
Place the original centrally, so that the space on either side of its edges is even.
Then push it carefully in, so that it makes light contact with the feed rollers.
Support the original with your hands until it feeds in. 1

BKW002S

• After inserting an original, do not try to handle it. Support it, if necessary, so as not to interrupt feeding.
• You can change the original feed delay setting if originals are repeatedly feeding in slanted, or if you
need to adjust the delay for the type of originals you are using. See “Original Feed Delay 1”, General
Settings Guide.

• p.21 "Original and Copy Output Locations"

• p.26 "Originals"

To stop originals feeding in

If the originals are feeding in slanted, or jamming, etc., press the [Scanner Stop] key to stop them feeding
in.

BKW003S

31
 1. Placing Originals

• When you press the [Scanner Stop] key, the original stops immediately, which can cause it to jam.
When this happens, see “Clearing Misfeeds”, Troubleshooting.
1 • When you have set original rear output as the original output location, the rear edge of the originals
is held at the output exit. To cancel this, press the [Scanner Stop] key. Only originals that are at least
450 mm long are held by their rear edges at the output exit.

Original Orientation

Place the original face down on the original table so that the top of the original feeds in first.

BKY010S

1. Original feed direction

When you cannot place the original as the above, you may not make copies as you want with particular
functions.
If this happens, change the orientation by selecting or .
The relationship between Original Orientation and the actual orientation of originals is as follows:

BKY011S

32
 Placing Originals

1. Original
2. Original on the original table
3. Original feed direction

1. Press [Special Original]. 1

2. Under [Original Orientation], select an original orientation that is suitable for your original.

• It is recommended that you use this function together with Auto Paper Select or Preset Reduce/Enlarge.

Placing Custom Size Originals

When placing custom size originals, specify the size of the originals.

1. Press [Special Original].

2. Press [Custom Size Original].

33
 1. Placing Originals

3. Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then press [ ].

4. Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press [ ].
5. Press [OK].

• On the Type 1, originals that are 182 - 15,000 mm (7.17" - 590.5") vertically and 210 - 914 mm
(8.27" -35.9") horizontally can be specified using this function.
• On the Type 2, originals that are 182 - 30,000 mm (7.17"-1181.1") vertically and 210 - 914 mm
(8.27" -35.9") horizontally can be specified using this function.
• If you do not specify the size, parts of the image may not be copied.
• If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then enter the value again.

Wide Scan

When Wide Scan is selected, the machine scans using a predetermined width, regardless of the actual
width of the original.
You can copy a custom size original without specifying its horizontal and vertical sizes.
If the paper size you want to copy onto is larger than that of the original, this function shifts the image to
the upper center of the paper.
If the paper size you want to copy onto is smaller than that of the original, this function copies the top center
part of the image.

34
 Placing Originals

BKY012D

1. Press [Special Original].

2. Press [Wide Scan].

• If you select Wide Scan, the scan width is determined by the sum of the selected paper size and a
specified reduction/enlargement ratio. The maximum width of Wide Scan is 914 mm (35.9").
• When originals are scanned and stored in Document Server using this function, the stored original
size is the paper size of the selected paper tray.
• Depending on the paper cut method you are using, some functions cannot be used with this function.
For more details, refer to “Function Compatibility”.

35
 1. Placing Originals

• p.169 "Function Compatibility"

1 Setting the Carrier Sheet

Use the carrier sheet when copying originals listed in “Originals that should be scanned using the carrier
sheet”, such as originals drawn in pencil, and pasted originals.

• When using the optional carrier sheet, set the original output location to original rear output. If the
original output location is set to original upper output, the original may be damaged.

1. Open the carrier sheet with the transparent sheet face up, and then insert the original also
face up.
Align the original with the fold of the carrier sheet.

BKV008S

2. Using both hands, hold the carrier sheet face down, and carefully insert the folded edge of
the carrier sheet into the insertion area.

BKW002S

• When using the carrier sheet with Synchro Cut, the paper is cut to the size of the carrier sheet.

36
 Placing Originals

• p.27 "Originals that should be scanned using the carrier sheet"

Setting the Original Hangers 1

The original hangers (optional) are useful when scanning two or more originals at a time.
Up to A1 (D) size originals can be placed on the hangers.
Attach each of the original hangers to the front of the machine.

BKW052S

Insert large originals, such as A1 (D) sheets, into the original hangers so they are in the landscape
orientation.

BKW053S

37
 1. Placing Originals

38
2. Basic Copying
This chapter describes the procedure for making copies in various modes.

Basic Procedure
This section describes the basic procedure for making copies. 2
• When User Code Authentication is set, enter your user code (up to eight digits) with the number keys
so that the machine accepts copy jobs. For details about Administrator Tools, see “System Settings”,
General Settings Guide.
• When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server
Authentication is set, enter your login user name and password so that the machine accepts copy
jobs. Ask the administrator for the login user name and password. For details, see “When the
Authentication Screen is Displayed”, About This Machine.

1. Make sure "Ready" appears on the screen.

If any other function is displayed, press the [Copy] key on the left side of the control panel.
Initial copy screen

2. Make sure no previous settings remain.

When there are previous settings remaining, press the [Clear Modes] key.
3. Set the output locations for originals and copies, and then prepare to use them.
4. Select an [Original Orientation] that matches the orientation of your originals.
5. Make the necessary settings.
6. Enter the number of copies with the number keys.
The maximum copy quantity that can be set is 99.
7. Adjust the original guides to the width of the original, and then place the original face down.
The original feeds into the machine automatically, and copying starts.
If [Press Start Key] is selected for [Feed Start Method], copying starts after you press the [Start] key.

39
 2. Basic Copying

• Always log off when you have finished using the machine to prevent unauthorized users from using
the machine.
• To stop the machine during a multi-copy run, press the [Clear/Stop] key after the original has fed in.
The machine stops when the current copy finishes. Press [Yes] to cancel the copy job; press [No] to
resume the interrupted copy job.
2 • To cancel all copy functions and return the machine to the default condition, press the [Clear Modes]
key.
• To clear entered values, press [Cancel] on the screen.
• To confirm settings, press [Check Modes].
• To stop the original feeding in, press the [Scanner Stop] key.
• If you register the settings using the program function, you can easily recall them by pressing the
[Program] key.
• The number of scanned originals is displayed in the top right corner of the screen.

Check Modes

You can confirm the current settings on the screen.

1. Press [Check Modes].

The Check Modes screen appears.

40
 Basic Procedure

Original Counter/Reset

The number of scanned originals is displayed in the top right corner of the screen.
This allows you to check the number of originals in a job, or if any sheets have been fed together, and the
number of copies that will be stored in the copy output tray.

Resetting the original counter

Reset the number of scanned originals displayed on the screen.

1. Press [Original] in the top right corner of the screen.

The number is reset to 0.

Auto Start

If you make settings and scan the originals while the messages “Scanning originals can be started.” and
“Select copy mode and Place original.” are displayed alternately, your copies will be made once the
machine is ready.

Interrupt Copy

Use this function if you want to interrupt a long copy job to make urgently needed copies.

41
 2. Basic Copying

1. Press the [Interrupt] key.

BKY049S

The interrupt key indicator lights.

The current copy is ejected, and the machine stops making copies.
2. Make the settings for an interrupt copy job.

3. Place the original you want to copy face down.

The original feeds into the machine, and copying starts automatically.
4. When copying is complete, remove the originals and copies.
5. Press the [Interrupt] key again.
The interrupt key indicator goes off.
6. Replace the originals that you were copying.
The original feeds into the machine, and copying resumes automatically. To cancel copying, press
the [Clear Modes] key.

• You cannot set Job Preset for Interrupt Copy.

• The number of originals is counted from “1” when you use Interrupt Copy.

42
 Basic Procedure

Job Preset

You can make settings for the next copy job during copying.
If a long copy job is in progress and you do not want to wait for it to finish, you can use this function to set
up the next copy job in advance. When the current copy job is finished, the next job will start automatically.

1. Press [New Job] when "Copying..." appears.

2

2. Be sure message "Ready" appears, and then make settings for the next copy job.
3. Place the original.
The original feeds automatically into the machine and is then scanned.
When the job preset is complete, a confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Press [Exit].
The initial copy display appears.
After the current copy job, the next copy job starts automatically.

• You can switch the display to the current copy job by pressing [To Copying Screen]. You can switch
the display to the preset job by pressing [To Reserv. Screen].
• Preset copy jobs are registered under job numbers in the Reserv. Screen.
• You can confirm and delete preset jobs. For details about the procedures, see “Managing Jobs”.

• p.88 "Managing Jobs"

43
 2. Basic Copying

Copying from the Bypass Tray

Use the bypass tray to copy onto paper sizes that cannot be loaded on the paper roll trays, or cut paper
tray.

2 • Paper that has a vertical length of 210 - 914.4 mm (8.27" - 36.00") and a horizontal length of 182
- 2000 mm (7.17" - 78.74") can be copied from the bypass tray.
• Insert the paper in the bypass tray lengthwise or sideways to fit it onto the feeding orientation.
• Insert the paper in the bypass tray lengthwise when you use A0 size paper.

1. Press [Bypass], and then press the [ ] key.

2. Select the size and type of the paper.

3. Press [OK].
4. Enter the number of copies with the number keys.
5. Place your original, and let it be scanned.

44
 Copying from the Bypass Tray

6. Adjust the bypass tray's paper guides to the size of the paper.

BKW004S

7. Insert the paper copy side up into the bypass tray.

The paper feeds into the machine automatically and copying starts.

BKW005S

• Insert the paper until you hear the beep.

• Place the original centrally, so that the space on either side of its edges is even. Then push it carefully
in, so that it makes light contact with the feed rollers. Support the paper with your hands until it feeds
in.
• Do not copy on both sides of the paper.
• Do not use paper already copied or printed on.
• To make multiple copies, insert an additional sheet after each feeds in.
• For details about paper type and orientation that can be loaded in the bypass tray, see “Copy Paper”,
About This Machine.

• p.97 "Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions"

• p.171 "Supplementary Information"

45
 2. Basic Copying

Copying onto Regular Size Paper

Makes copies onto regular size paper from the bypass tray.

1. Press [Bypass], and then press the [ ] key.

2. Make sure that [Regular Size] is selected.
2 3. Press [Select Size].

4. Select the paper size.

5. Press [OK] twice.

6. Place your original, and let it be scanned.
7. Adjust the bypass tray's paper guides to the size of the paper.
8. Insert the paper copy side up into the bypass tray.
The paper feeds into the machine automatically and copying starts.

Copying onto Custom Size Paper

Makes copies onto custom size paper from the bypass tray.

1. Press [Bypass], and then press the [ ] key.

46
 Copying from the Bypass Tray

2. Press [Custom Size].

3. Enter the horizontal size of the paper with the number keys, and then press [ ].

4. Enter the vertical size of the paper with the number keys, and then press [ ].
5. Press [OK].
6. Place your original, and let it be scanned.
7. Adjust the bypass tray's paper guides to the size of the paper.
8. Insert the paper copy side up into the bypass tray.

• If you make a mistake in step 3 or 4, press [Clear], and then enter the value again.

Registering a custom size

Register a custom paper size.

1. Press [Bypass], and then press the [ ] key.

2. Press [Custom Size].
3. Enter the horizontal size with the number keys, and then press [ ].
4. Enter the vertical size with the number keys, and then press [ ].

47
 2. Basic Copying

5. Press [Program].

The confirmation screen appears.

6. Press [Exit].

Recalling the registered custom size

Recalls the registered paper size.

1. Press [Bypass], and then press the [ ] key.

2. Press [Custom Size].
3. Press [Recall].

The registered size is displayed.

4. Press [OK].

Copying onto Special Paper

When copying onto special paper such as translucent paper or films, select the type and size of paper.

• Remove a copied special paper every time it is ejected.

48
 Copying from the Bypass Tray

1. Press [Bypass], and then press the [ ] key.

2. Select a paper type ([Translucent Paper] or [Film]) in the special paper settings.

3. Set the paper size.

4. Press [OK].
5. Place your original, and let it be scanned.
6. Adjust the bypass tray's paper guides to the size of the paper.
7. Insert the paper copy side up into the bypass tray.
The paper feeds into the machine automatically and copying starts.

• Printing on special paper may be slower than printing on plain paper.

49
 2. Basic Copying

Selecting the Original Type Setting

Select one of the following nine types to match your originals:
Text
For originals that contain mainly text or printed characters.

2 Drawing
For drawings that contain fine lines. Faint lines are clearly reproduced.
Text/Photo
For originals that contain both text and photographs or pictures.
Glossy Photo
The machine scans the original using the settings for pictures and photographs printed on glossy
photographic paper.
Printed Photo
The machine scans the original using the settings for pictures and photographs printed in magazines
and on other documents.
Copied Photo
The machine scans the original using the settings for pictures and color copies of photographs.
Background Lines
For images drawn on section paper (green sectioned graph paper) without copying the lines on the
paper. Blue lines on originals cannot be eliminated.
Patched Original
For originals made up of several pieces of smaller originals which differ in background density.
Selecting this mode tones down the dark background of originals.
Generation Copy
For originals that are copied. The copy image can be reproduced sharply and clearly.

1. Select the original type.

50
 Selecting the Original Type Setting

• To select [Glossy Photo], [Printed Photo], [Copied Photo], [Background Lines], [Patched Original], or
[Generation Copy], select [Others] first.

• If you select [Glossy Photo], [Printed Photo], or [Copied Photo] in [Others], Auto Density is cancelled.
• When you select [Patched Original], thick lines, text, or solid images in the original are recognized
as dark background that may not be copied.

51
 2. Basic Copying

Adjusting Copy Image Density

There are three types of adjustment available.
Auto image density
The machine automatically adjusts the image density by scanning the densities of originals. Dark

2 texture originals (such as newspaper or recycled paper) will be copied so that background will not
be reproduced.
Manual image density
You can adjust the density of the overall original in nine steps.
Combined auto and manual image density
Adjusts the density of an image only for dark texture originals.

Auto Image Density

The machine automatically adjusts the image density by scanning the densities of originals. Dark texture
originals (such as newspaper or recycled paper) will be copied so that background will not be reproduced.

1. Make sure that [Auto Density] is selected.

When [Auto Density] is not selected, press [Auto Density].

Manual Image Density

You can adjust the density of the overall original in nine steps.

1. When [Auto Density] is selected, press [Auto Density] to cancel it.

52
 Adjusting Copy Image Density

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the image density. The density indicator “ ” moves.

Combined Auto and Manual Image Density

Adjusts the density of an image only for dark texture originals.

1. Make sure [Auto Density] is selected.

When [Auto Density] is not selected, press [Auto Density].
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the density. The density indicator “ ” moves.

• If dark backgrounds still appear on copies, adjust the density using [ ].

Copy Quality

Adjusts image qualities.

The following three types of image adjustments are available:
Sharp / Soft
Adjusts the outline of an image.

53
 2. Basic Copying

Contrast
Adjusts the shades of an image.
Background Density
Adjusts the background density of an image.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2

2. Press [Copy Quality].

3. Adjust the settings.
4. Press [OK] twice.

• [Sharp / Soft], [Contrast], and [Background Density] can each be adjusted, however, their
adjustments can affect the level of other adjustment functions.
• The adjusted settings will be deleted and the initial values will be reset, when Auto Clear has been
performed, when the [Clear Modes] key has been pressed or when the power has been turned off.

Sharp / Soft
Adjusts the outline of an image.

1. Adjust the image quality by pressing [Soft] or [Sharp].

2. Press [OK].

54
 Adjusting Copy Image Density

Contrast
Adjusts the shades of an image.

1. Adjust the image quality by pressing [Low] or [High].

2. Press [OK].

Background Density
Adjusts the background density of an image.

1. Adjust the image quality by pressing [Lighter] or [Darker].

2. Press [OK].

• Adjustments should be made lighter when copying dark textured originals, such as newspaper or
recycled paper.

55
 2. Basic Copying

Selecting Copy Paper

There are two ways to select copy paper:
Auto Paper Select
The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on original size and

2 reproduction ratio.
Manual Paper Select
Choose the tray containing the paper you want to copy onto: paper roll tray, cut paper tray, or bypass
tray.
See the following lists for paper sizes and orientations that can be used with Auto Paper Select (when
copying at a ratio of 100%):
Metric version
A0 , A1 , A2 , A3 , A4 , B1 JIS , B2 JIS , B3 JIS , B4 JIS
Inch version
• Engineering
E (34" × 44") , D (22" × 34") , C (17" × 22") , B (11" × 17") ,
A (8 1/ 2" × 11") , 8 1/ 2" × 14"
• Architecture
E (36" × 48") , D (24" × 36") , C (18" × 24") , B (12" × 18") , A (9" × 12")
• Others
81/2" × 13" , 30" × 21" , 30" × 42"

• Only the paper trays set to [No Display] or [Recycled Paper] in Paper Type in Tray Paper Setting in
System Settings and also set to [Yes] in Apply Auto Paper Select can be selected in Auto Paper Select
mode.

• p.17 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations"

• p.44 "Copying from the Bypass Tray"
• p.171 "Supplementary Information"

Auto Paper Select

The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on the original size and the
reproduction ratio.

56
 Selecting Copy Paper

1. Make sure that [Auto Paper Select] is selected.

Trays with a key mark ( ) will not be automatically selected.

• If no paper suitable for the size and magnification you have specified is loaded in the paper trays,
load paper of the required size in a paper tray. Alternatively, you can select a suitable magnification
ratio for the paper currently loaded in the paper trays. After doing one of the above, set your original
again.
• Special size paper cannot be used with Auto Paper Select.

Manual Paper Select

Choose the tray containing the paper you want to copy onto: paper roll tray, cut paper tray, or bypass
tray.

1. Select the paper roll tray, cut paper tray, or bypass tray.
The indicator corresponding to the selected paper tray is highlighted.

57
 2. Basic Copying

Rotate Copy

If the original's width is different to that of the paper set in the paper roll tray, or the original's orientation
is different to that of the paper set in the cut paper tray, the machine rotates the original image by 90
degrees to fit it onto the copy paper.

BKY021D

• This function works when [Auto Paper Select] or [Auto Reduce / Enlarge] is selected. See “Auto Paper
Select” and “Auto Reduce/Enlarge”.
• The default setting for Auto Tray Switching is [With Image Rotation]. You cannot use Rotate Copy if
this setting is changed to [Without Image Rotation] or [Off]. See “Auto Tray Switching”, General
Settings Guide.
• You cannot use Rotate Copy when copying onto A0 (E), A4 (A), or B4 JIS size paper. In this case,
place your original in the orientation.

• p.44 "Copying from the Bypass Tray"

• p.56 "Auto Paper Select"
• p.65 "Auto Reduce/Enlarge"

58
 Setting the Length of Copy Paper Cut

Setting the Length of Copy Paper Cut

Specify the length to cut the paper loaded in the paper roll tray.
The following paper cut methods are available:
Synchro Cut
Cuts the paper at the same length as the original. If the copy is enlarged or reduced, the machine 2
calculates the appropriate length for the magnification ratio and cuts the paper.
Preset Cut
Cuts the paper at a preset size, regardless of the size of the original. You can use this to copy different
sized originals to the same size.
Variable Cut
Cuts the paper to the size entered.

• On the Type 1, the minimum cut length is 210 mm (8.27"), and the maximum length is 15,000 mm
(590.5") for plain paper of 841 mm (34" or 36") or more in width. For other paper, the maximum
length is 3600 mm (141.8"). If the length you specify exceeds the maximum, the paper will be fed in
at a slant, resulting in poor copy quality and wrinkled paper.
• On the Type 2, the minimum cut length is 210 mm (8.27"), and the maximum length is 30,000 mm
(1181.1") for plain paper of 841 mm (34" or 36") or more in width. For other paper, the maximum
length is 3600 mm (141.8"). If the length you specify exceeds the maximum, the paper will be fed in
at a slant, resulting in poor copy quality and wrinkled paper.
• You cannot cut the paper in the bypass tray.

• p.17 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations"

Synchro Cut

Cuts the paper at the same length as the original. If the copy is enlarged or reduced, the machine calculates
the appropriate length for the magnification ratio and cuts the paper.

1. Select a paper roll tray.

59
 2. Basic Copying

2. Select [Synchro Cut].

• Depending on the original length and paper type, copy paper length may be different from the
original.

Preset Cut

Cuts the paper at a preset size, regardless of the size of the original. You can use this to copy different
sized originals to the same size.

1. Select a preset cut size of the paper roll tray 1 or 2.

Metric version

Paper roll width Preset Preset

841 mm A0 A1

594 mm A1 A2

420 mm A2 A3

297 mm A3 A4

60
 Setting the Length of Copy Paper Cut

Paper roll width Preset Preset

210 mm A4 -

728 mm B1 JIS B2 JIS

515 mm B2 JIS B3 JIS

364 mm B3 JIS B4 JIS 2

257 mm B4 JIS -

914 mm 1219 mm 610 mm

880 mm 1189 mm 594 mm

800 mm 1189 mm 594 mm

680 mm 841 mm 420 mm

660 mm 841 mm 420 mm

490 mm 594 mm 297 mm

Inch version (Engineering)

Paper roll width Preset Preset

34 inch 34 × 44 22 × 34

22 inch 22 × 34 17 × 22

17 inch 17 × 22 11 × 17

11 inch 11 × 17 81/2 × 11

81/2 inch 81/2 × 11 81/2 × 14

Inch version (Architecture)

Paper roll width Preset Preset

36 inch / 914 mm 36 × 48 24 × 36

30 inch 30 × 42 21 × 30

24 inch 24 × 36 18 × 24

18 inch 18 × 24 12 × 18

61
 2. Basic Copying

Paper roll width Preset Preset

12 inch 12 × 18 9 × 12

9 inch 9 × 12 -

2 • The preset cut size differs depending on the paper roll width. It is cut in the following sizes or standard
lengths.

Variable Cut

Cuts the paper to the size entered.

1. Select [Variable Cut].

2. Enter the length with the number keys, and then press [ ].

3. Press [OK].
The entered length is displayed on the screen.
4. Select a paper roll tray.

• If you make a mistake, press [Clear] to set a new value.

62
 Setting the Length of Copy Paper Cut

• To cancel Variable Cut, press [Cancel].

63
 2. Basic Copying

Reducing or Enlarging Originals

You can select a preset ratio for copying.

BAS030S

Metric version
Enlargement ratios: 141.4%, 200.0%, 282.8%, 400.0%
Reduction ratios: 25.0%, 35.4%, 50.0%, 70.7%
Inch version
• Engineering
Enlargement ratios: 129.4%, 200.0%, 258.8%, 400.0%
Reduction ratios: 25.0%, 32.4%, 50.0%, 64.7%
• Architecture
Enlargement ratios: 133.3%, 200.0%, 266.7%, 400.0%
Reduction ratios: 25.0%, 33.3%, 50.0%, 66.7%

1. Press [Reduce / Enlarge].

64
 Reducing or Enlarging Originals

2. Select a ratio, and then press [OK].

The selected ratio appears on the display.

• Select one of the preset ratios based on the original size and paper size.
• For details about the relationship between the original and paper sizes for preset ratios, see
“Magnification Ratio Chart”.

• p.171 "Supplementary Information"

• p.183 "Magnification Ratio Chart"

Auto Reduce/Enlarge

The machine automatically detects the original size and then selects an appropriate reproduction ratio
based on the paper size you select.

BAS033S

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

This is useful to copy different size originals to the same size paper.

65
 2. Basic Copying

To ensure the print result you require is produced, specify Original Orientation before using Auto Reduce/
Enlarge.

BKY023D

The original sizes and orientations you can use with this function are as follows:
Metric version
A0 , A1 , A2 , A3 , A4 , B1JIS , B2JIS , B3JIS , B4JIS
Inch version
• Engineering
E (34" × 44") , D (22" × 34") , C (17" × 22") , B (11" × 17") , A (81/2" × 11") ,
81/2" × 14"
• Architecture
E (36" × 48") , D (24" × 36") , C (18" × 24") , B (12" × 18") , A (9" × 12")
• Others
81/2" × 13" , 30" × 21" , 30" × 42"

1. Press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge].

66
 Reducing or Enlarging Originals

2. Select the paper size.

3. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.

• The machine selects one of the following ratios:

• Metric version
400.0%, 282.8%, 200.0%, 141.4%, 100.0%, 70.7%, 50.0%, 35.4%, 25.0% 2
• Inch version (Engineering)
400.0%, 258.8%, 200.0%, 129.4%, 100.0%, 64.7%, 50.0%, 32.4%, 25.0%
• Inch version (Architecture)
400.0%, 266.7%, 200.0%, 133.3%, 100.0%, 66.7%, 50.0%, 33.3%, 25.0%
• Make sure the Original Orientation setting matches the actual orientation of your original.

User Auto Reduce/Enlarge

Use this function to copy to a selected size for each original size.
When the original is set, the machine automatically enlarges or reduces the image to fit the size of the copy
paper.
You can select the following combinations:
Metric version

Original size Copy size

A0 A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, B1 JIS, B2 JIS, B3 JIS, B4 JIS

A1

A2

A3

A4

B1 JIS

B2 JIS

B3 JIS

B4 JIS

67
 2. Basic Copying

Inch version

Original size Copy size

Engineering E (34" × 44") E (34" × 44"), D (22" × 34"), C (17" × 22"), B (11" × 17"),
A (81/2" × 11")
D (22" × 34")
2 C (17" × 22")

B (11" × 17")

A (81/2" × 11")

E (36" × 48")

D (26" × 36")
E (36" × 48"), D (26" × 36"), C (18" × 24"), B (12" × 18"),
Architecture C (18" × 24")
A (9" × 12")
B (12" × 18")

A (9" × 12")

1. Press [User Auto R/E].

2. Check that the combination selected for User Auto Reduce/Enlarge is the one you want.

• The default setting is to copy at the same size (full size). You can change the combination with Copier/
Document Server Features in User Tools.
• Make sure the Original Orientation setting matches the actual orientation of your original.
• You can specify the copy paper size in the range A0 to A4 or B1 to B4. However, you cannot change
the size of the page image on an A-series original to fit B-series copy paper or vice versa.

68
 Reducing or Enlarging Originals

• p.17 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations"

• p.32 "Original Orientation"

Preset Reduce/Enlarge
2
This function allows you to reduce or enlarge images by selecting a preset ratio.
You can register up to three frequently used reproduction ratios other than the preset Reduce/Enlarge
ratios.

BAS030S

Metric version
Enlargement ratios: 141.4%, 200.0%, 282.8%, 400.0%
Reduction ratios: 25.0%, 35.4%, 50.0%, 70.7%
Inch version
• Engineering
Enlargement ratios: 129.4%, 200.0%, 258.8%, 400.0%
Reduction ratios: 25.0%, 32.4%, 50.0%, 64.7%
• Architecture
Enlargement ratios: 133.3%, 200.0%, 266.7%, 400.0%
Reduction ratios: 25.0%, 33.3%, 50.0%, 66.7

69
 2. Basic Copying

1. Press [Reduce / Enlarge].

To select a preset ratio on the initial display, press the shortcut reduce/enlarge key.
2. Select a ratio, and then press [OK].

3. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.

• Select one of the preset ratios based on the original size and paper size.
• For details about the relationship between the original and paper sizes for preset ratios, see
“Magnification Ratio Chart”.

Zoom

You can change the reproduction ratio in increments of 0.1%.

70
 Reducing or Enlarging Originals

2
BAS032S

You can set the ratio in the following ways.

• Entering the ratio with the number keys
• Specifying the ratio with [ ] and [ ]

• p.171 "Supplementary Information"

Entering the ratio with the number keys

Enter a ratio using the number keys.

1. Press [Reduce / Enlarge].

2. Press [Number keys].

71
 2. Basic Copying

3. Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press [ ].

4. Press [OK] twice.

• Use the [.]key to enter a decimal point.

• To change the value, press [Clear], and then enter a new value.

Specifying the ratio with [ ] and [ ]

Specify a ratio using [ ] and [ ].

1. Press [Reduce / Enlarge].

2. Select a preset ratio which is close to the desired ratio.

72
 Reducing or Enlarging Originals

3. Adjust the ratio with [ ] and [ ].

Press [ ] or [ ] changes the ratio in increments of 0.1%. Pressing and holding down [ ] or [ ] changes
it in increments of 1%.
4. Press [OK].

• To change the value you specified, readjust it with [ ] and [ ].

73
 2. Basic Copying

Combined Copying
Combines several pages onto one side of a sheet.

One-Sided Combine
2 Combine several pages onto one side of a sheet.

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

There are three types of One-Sided Combine.
1 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side
Copies two 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.

BAS038S

1 Sided 4 Pages Combine 1 Side

Copies four 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.

BAS039S

1 Sided 8 Pages Combine 1 Side

Copies eight 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.

74
 Combined Copying

2
BAS040S

Orientation of the original and image position of combine

Portrait ( ) originals

BAS044S

Landscape ( ) originals

BAS045S

1. Press [Combine].

75
 2. Basic Copying

2. Select the number of originals to combine.

3. Select the paper size.

4. Press [OK].

76
 Finishing

Finishing
You can specify how to finish the prints. You can sort the prints by page number or copy order. If you have
installed the optional folding finisher, you can also fold the prints.

Sort 2
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.

• To use the Rotate Sort function, two paper trays loaded with paper of the same size and type, but in
different orientation ( ), are required.
• You cannot use the bypass tray with Rotate Sort.
Sort
Copies are assembled as sets in sequential order.

BAS053S

Rotate Sort
Every other copy set is rotated by 90 degrees ( ) and delivered to the copy tray.

BAS054S

1. Make necessary settings.

77
 2. Basic Copying

2. Press [Finishing].

3. Press [Sort].
4. Select [Sort] or [Rotate Sort].

5. Press [OK].
6. Enter the number of copy sets using the number keys.
7. Place your original, and let it be scanned.
Press the [ ] key after all the originals have been scanned.
The machine starts copying.

• To use Sample Copy, select [Press Start Key] under [Feed Start Method] in System Settings. You cannot
make sample copy when [Auto] is selected.
• To confirm the type of finishing, press the [Sample Copy] key in step 7.
• To cancel Sort or Rotate Sort, press [Clear].
• Special size paper cannot be used with Rotate Sort.

• p.17 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations"

• p.171 "Supplementary Information"

78
 Finishing

Sample Copy
Use this function to check the copy settings before making a long copy run.

• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected.
• To use Sample Copy, select [Press Start Key] under [Feed Start Method] in System Settings. You cannot
make sample copy when [Auto] is selected. 2
1. Select Sort and any other necessary functions, and then place the originals.

2. Press the [Sample Copy] key.

BKY050S

One copy set is delivered as a sample.

3. If the sample is acceptable, press [Continue].
The number of copies made is the number specified, minus one for the proof copy.

• If you press [Suspend] after checking the results, return to step 1 to adjust the copy settings as
necessary. Depending on the combination of functions, you may not be able to change some settings.

Changing the number of sets

You can change the number of copy sets during copying.

79
 2. Basic Copying

• This function can only be used when the Sort function is selected.

1. While "Copying..." is displayed, press the [Clear/Stop] key.

2. Press [Change Quantity].
3. Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys, and then press the [ ] key.
2

4. Press [Continue].
Copying starts again.

• The number of sets you can enter in step 3 differs depending on when the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed.

Fold

The fold function is optional.

Automatically folds copies after they are printed.

• If you select Fan Fold, you must select the rear copy output as the copy output location.
• For details about the Fold function, see the manuals for your folding finisher.
• Actual results might differ from the illustration. Depending on sheet length, fold widths will vary for
each panel.

Fan Fold
The sheet is folded several times parallel to its leading edge, enabling it be opened like a fan.

80
 Finishing

2
BKY027S

If the Fan Folding Finisher is installed, you can select a fold width of 140, 170, 210, or 297 mm (81/2",
9", 11", or 12").When [210mm(Margin Fold)] is selected, paper is folded so as to have a binding margin.
If the Cross Folding Finisher is installed, you can select a fold width of 140, 170, or 210 mm (81/2", 9",
or 11").
When [210mm(Margin Fold)] is selected, paper is folded so as to have a binding margin.

BKY028S

1. Press [Finishing].

2. Press [Fold Type].

3. Press [Fan Fold].

81
 2. Basic Copying

4. Select a fold width for Fan Fold.

5. Press [OK].

• p.17 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations"

Regular Size Fold (Cross-Fold)

The machine folds fan-folded prints again, crosswise into halves or thirds. These are called regular-size
folds (cross-folds).
The following types of regular-size fold (cross-fold) are available:
Standard Fold
This fold is usual for drawings. The folded size is A4 (81/2" × 11").

1
BKY031S

1. 297 mm (Engineering: 11 inch, Architecture: 12 inch)

2. 210 mm (Engineering: 8.5 inch, Architecture: 9 inch)
Narrow Std. Fold
This fold is for fitting prints into a ring binder pouch. The folded size is 170 - 297 mm (6.7" - 11.7").

82
 Finishing

1
BKY032S
2
1. 297 mm (Engineering: 11 inch, Architecture: 12 inch)
2. 170 mm (Engineering: 8.5 inch, Architecture: 9 inch)
Margin Fold
This fold is for prints with binding margins. The folded size is A4 (81/2" × 11").

BKW049S

1. Press [Finishing].

2. Press [Fold Type].

3. Press [Regular Size Fold].

83
 2. Basic Copying

4. Select the fold type.

5. Press [OK].

• p.17 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations"

2 Special Fold
You can specify a special fold, and then register that fold under “Special Fan 1”, “Special Fan 2”, “Special
Fold 1”, and “Special Fold 2”. For details about specifying special folds, contact your sales or service
representative.

Programmed Fold
You can register folds for standard-size prints according to print size. If you use this function, the registered
regular-size fold is automatically applied to standard-size prints.
You can register four types of programmed fold under No.1 to No.4.

1. Press [Finishing].

2. Press [Fold Type].

84
 Finishing

3. Press [Programmed Fold].

4. Select the fold width.

5. Press [OK].

• p.17 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations"

85
 2. Basic Copying

Storing Data in the Document Server

The Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the copy feature on the hard disk
of this machine. Thus you can print them later applying necessary conditions.

2 • Machine failure can result in data loss. Important data stored on the hard disk should be backed up.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage that might result from the loss of data.

1. Press [Store File].

2. Enter a file name, user name, or password if necessary.

3. Press [OK].
4. Make the scanning settings for the original.
5. Adjust the original guides to the width of the original, and then place the original face down.
The original feeds into the machine automatically, and copying starts. The scanned data is also stored
in the memory.

• To stop scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key. To resume a paused scanning job, press [Continue] in
the confirmation display. To delete scanned images and cancel the job, press [Stop].
• Press the [ ] key after all the originals have been scanned.

86
 Storing Data in the Document Server

• Data stored in the Document Server is set to be deleted after three days by the factory default. You
can specify the period after which the stored data is deleted automatically. For details about changing
settings, see “Administrator Tools”, General Settings Guide.
• To check if the document has been stored, press the [Document Server] key.
• If you want to store another document, do so after copying is complete.
• For details about the Document Server, see “Using the Document Server”.
• For details about printing stored documents, see “Printing a Stored Document”.
2
• For details about setting user name, file name, and password, see “Storing Data”.
• Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For details
about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.

• p.150 "Using the Document Server"

• p.159 "Printing Stored Documents"

87
 2. Basic Copying

Managing Jobs
Jobs printed using Copy, Document Server, or Printer mode are temporarily stored in the machine, and
then executed in order. The Job List function allows you to manage these jobs.
For example, you can cancel incorrect job settings or print an urgent document.

2
• You cannot use the Job List function when Interrupt Copy is active.
• Documents printed using the scanner function are not displayed in the job list.

Job List Screen

This section explains displays and icons that appear in the Job List screen.
The Job List screen varies depending on whether Job Order is selected with Print Priority for the System
Settings. For details about the setting procedure, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
When [Job Order] is not selected:
The job list is displayed for each of the functions.

BKY059S

When [Job Order] is selected:

The job list is displayed for all functions in the order of print jobs.

88
 Managing Jobs

2
BKY060S

1. Switches between job lists for each function.

2. Switches between [Current / Waiting Job List] and [Job History].
3. Displays reserved job numbers.
4. Displays the function used to print jobs.
: Job printed using copy function
: Job printed using printer function
: Job printed using Document Server function
: Job printed using DeskTopBinder
: Job printed using Web Image Monitor

Checking Jobs in the Job List

You can check the contents of jobs in the job list.

1. Press [Job List].

2. Select the job whose contents you want to check.
3. Press [Details], and then check the contents.

4. Press [Exit].

89
 2. Basic Copying

Changing the Order of Jobs

You can change the order of jobs in the job list.

1. Press [Job List].

2. Select the job whose order you want to change.
2 3. Press [Change Order].

4. Change the order using [Top], [Previous], or [Next].

5. Press [OK].

Holding Jobs

You can hold jobs that are queued or currently printing.

1. Press [Job List].

2. Select the job you want to hold.

90
 Managing Jobs

3. Press [Suspend Printing].

The selected job and the jobs that follow it are suspended. "Suspended" is displayed at the left of the
jobs in the job list that are suspended.

• To resume the suspended jobs, press [Resume Printing].

• This function is available only if [Job Order] is specified.

Deleting Jobs

You can delete a job that is queued or currently printing.

1. Press [Job List].

2. Select the job you want to delete.
To delete two or more print jobs, select them.
3. Press [Delete Reservation].

4. Press [OK].

Checking the Job History

You can view the history and contents of completed print jobs.

1. Press [Job List].

91
 2. Basic Copying

2. Press [Job History].

A list of completed print jobs appears.
3. Select the job whose contents you want to check.
4. Press [Details], and then check the contents.
5. Press [Exit].

92
 Registering Frequently Used Functions

Registering Frequently Used Functions

You can store frequently used copy job settings in the machine memory and recall them for future use.
You can store up to 10 programs.

• When a specified program is registered as the default, its values become the default settings, which 2
are displayed without pressing the [Program] key, when modes are cleared or reset, and after the
operation switch is turned on. See “Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions”.
• Stored paper settings are based on paper size. If multiple trays holding paper of the same size are
installed, the paper tray that is prioritized in the system settings will be selected first. See “System
Settings”, General Settings Guide.
• Programs are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing the [Clear Modes] key.

• p.97 "Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions"

Registering Functions in a Program

You can register functions in a program.

1. Edit the copy settings so all functions you want to store in a program are selected.
2. Press the [Program] key.

BKY047S

93
 2. Basic Copying

3. Press [Program].

4. Press the program number you want to store.

5. Enter the program name with the letter keys on the display panel.
You can enter up to 34 characters.

6. Press [OK].
The screen returns to the program screen, showing the program number followed by the program
name. The screen returns to the initial copy display after a short time.

• Program numbers with against them already have settings made for them.

Changing a Stored Program

Changes program settings.

1. Check the program settings.

2. Specify the contents of a program.
3. Press the [Program] key.
4. Press [Program].
5. Press the program number you want to change.

94
 Registering Frequently Used Functions

6. Press [Yes].
7. Enter the program name.
You can enter up to 34 characters.
8. Press [OK].
The screen returns to the program screen, showing the program number followed by the program
name. The screen returns to the initial copy display after a short time.
2
• To check the contents of a program, recall the program.
• When it is overwritten, the previous program is deleted.

Deleting a Stored Program

Erases the contents of a program.

1. Press the [Program] key.

2. Press [Delete].

3. Press the program number you want to delete.

4. Press [Yes].
The program is deleted, and the display returns to the initial copy display.

Recalling a Stored Program

Recalls a stored program to make copies using the stored settings.

1. Press the [Program] key.

95
 2. Basic Copying

2. Press [Recall].

3. Press the program number you want to recall.

The stored settings are displayed.

• Only programs with against them contain a program.

96
 Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions

Registering the Initial Display's Default Functions

This section describes how to program defaults for the initial display when modes are cleared or reset, or
immediately after the operation switch is turned on.
The default settings you can program are Paper Tray, Original Type, Density, Special Original, Original
Orientation, Edit / Stamp, Combine, Reduce / Enlarge, Finishing, Adjust Print Position, Copy Output
Location, Fold Type, paper cut method, and the number of copies. 2
1. Specify scan settings and any other settings you require on the initial display.
2. Press the [Program] key.

BKY047S

3. Press [Program as Defaults].

4. Press [Program].

97
 2. Basic Copying

5. When a confirmation dialog appears, press [Yes].

The current settings are programmed as defaults. The screen returns to the initial display.

• To restore the factory default settings on the initial display, press [Restore Factory Defaults].
• The default settings can be programmed separately for the normal screen and simplified display
2 screens.

98
3. Advanced Copying
This chapter describes the procedure for making copies in various modes.

Advanced Reduce/Enlarge Copying

This section describes the advanced functions for reducing or enlarging images.
For details about the basic reduce/enlarge copy functions, see “Reducing or Enlarging Images”.

3
• p.64 "Reducing or Enlarging Originals"

Size Magnification

This function calculates a reproduction ratio based on the lengths of the original and copy.

BAT067S

Measure and specify the lengths of the original and copy by comparing “A” with “a”.

1. Press [Reduce / Enlarge].

2. Press [Size Magnification].

99
 3. Advanced Copying

3. Enter the length of the original with the number keys, and then press [ ].

3
You can enter sizes between 1 to 9999 mm (0.1 to 99.9 inches) in increments of 1 mm (0.1 inch).
4. Enter the length of the copy with the number keys, and then press [ ].
5. Press [OK] twice.

• To change the value you entered, press the key you want to change, and then enter a new value.

Directional Magnification (%)

Specify the horizontal and vertical reproduction ratios, individually.

Copies can be reduced or enlarged at different reproduction ratios horizontally and vertically.

BAT068S

a: Horizontal ratio
b: Vertical ratio

Specifying the ratio with [ ] and [ ]

Specify a ratio using [ ] and [ ].

100
 Advanced Reduce/Enlarge Copying

1. Press [Reduce / Enlarge].

3
2. Press [Direct. Mag. %].
3. Press [[ ] [ ] keys].
4. Press [Horizontal].
5. Adjust the ratio using [ ] and [ ].

Pressing [ ] or [ ] changes the ratio in increments of 0.1%. Pressing and holding down [ ] or [ ]
changes it in increments of 1%.
6. Press [Vertical].
7. Adjust the ratio with [ ] and [ ].
8. Press [OK] twice.

• To change the value you entered, readjust it with [ ] and [ ].

Entering the ratio with the number keys

Enter a ratio using the number keys.

101
 3. Advanced Copying

1. Press [Reduce / Enlarge].

3
2. Press [Direct. Mag. %].
3. Press [Horizontal].

4. Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press [ ].
5. Press [Vertical].
6. Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press [ ].
7. Press [OK] twice.
8. Place the originals, and then press the [Start] key.

• To change the value you entered, press the key you want to change, and then enter a new value.

Directional Size Magnification (inch)

Specify the horizontal and vertical lengths of the original and copy image.
Copies can be reduced or enlarged at different reproduction ratios horizontally and vertically.

102
 Advanced Reduce/Enlarge Copying

BAT069S

1. Horizontal original size: A mm (inch) 3

2. Vertical original size: B mm (inch)
3. Horizontal copy size: a mm (inch)
4. Vertical copy size: b mm (inch)
Measure and specify the lengths of the original and copy by comparing “A” with “a” and “B” with “b”.

1. Press [Reduce / Enlarge].

2. Press [Dir. Size Mag. mm].

3. Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then press [ ].

4. Enter the horizontal size of the copy with the number keys, and then press [ ].
5. Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press [ ].
6. Enter the vertical size of the copy with the number keys, and then press [ ].

103
 3. Advanced Copying

7. Press [OK] twice.

• To change the value you entered, press the key you want to change, and then enter a new value.
• You can specify a paper size of 1 - 9999 mm (0.1" - 99.9") vertically and 1 - 914 mm (0.1" - 36")
horizontally in units of 1 mm (0.1").

Fine Magnification
3 The machine calculates the correction ratios to produce copies that are close to the actual image size.
For environmental reasons such as humid conditions, paper may expand or shrink. This can result in a
mismatch between the size of the original and copy.
This function uses the measurements of the original and the copy to calculate a ratio to produce copies that
are close to the actual size.
Measure the length and width of the original and the copy, and then calculate the correction ratio as
follows:

Copy before size adjustment

BKY013D

104
 Advanced Reduce/Enlarge Copying

1. Press [Reduce / Enlarge].

3
2. Press [Fine Magnification].
3. Adjust the horizontal ratio using [ ] and [ ].

4. Adjust the vertical ratio using [ ] and [ ].

5. Press [OK] twice.

• Fine Magnification is used for originals that have already been scanned. If you want to apply fine
magnification corrections to paper that has stretched due to the paper type or exposure to humid
conditions, see “Fine Ratio Adjustment: Copier”, General Settings Guide.
• You can also make these settings in “Fine Ratio Adjustment: Copier” under System Settings. If you
specified the ratio in both System Settings and this function, the resulting settings will be the sum of the
set value.
• When the bypass tray is selected, you can set Fine Magnification after scanning the original.

• p.171 "Supplementary Information"

105
 3. Advanced Copying

Stamps
Copies with the date, page numbers, etc.

Background Numbering

Use this function to have numbers printed on the background of copies.

If this function is used in conjunction with Sort, the same numbers are printed on each set of copies, helping
3 you keep track of confidential documents.

BAS070S

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Background Numbering].

106
 Stamps

4. Enter the number to start counting from with the number keys, and then press [ ].

3
You can enter a number between 1 and 9999.
5. Press [OK] twice.

• To change the value entered in step 4, press [Clear] to set a new value.
• You can combine this function with up to four other stamp functions.

Preset Stamp

Messages are stamped on copies.

BAT071S

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

• Only one message can be stamped at a time.
The following eight messages are available for Preset Stamp:
“COPY”, “URGENT”, “PRIORITY”, “For Your Info.”, “PRELIMINARY”, “For Internal Use Only”,
“CONFIDENTIAL”, “DRAFT”
Stamp position and original orientation
The stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you place the originals.

107
 3. Advanced Copying

BKY015D

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Preset Stamp].
4. Select the desired message.
You can change the position, size, and density of the stamp.

108
 Stamps

5. Press [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] to select the print page.

3
6. After making all settings, press [OK].
7. Press [OK].

• You can combine this function with up to four other stamp functions.
• You can change the priority of the selected stamp.

• p.32 "Original Orientation"

Changing the stamp position, size and density

Changes the stamp position, size and density.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Preset Stamp].
4. Press [Change] under Position / Size / Density.
5. Select the position, size, and density of the stamp, and then press [OK].

109
 3. Advanced Copying

User Stamp

Prints a scanned image on copies as a stamp. Letters or images you use frequently can be registered.

3
BAS073S

• You have to register a user stamp before using this function.

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.
• Only one message can be stamped each time.
Stamp position and original orientation
The user stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you place the originals.

BKY016D

110
 Stamps

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

3
2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [User Stamp].
4. Select the stamp you require.
You can change the stamp position.
5. Press [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] to select the print page.

6. After making all settings, press [OK].

7. Press [OK].

• You can combine this function with up to four other stamp functions.
• You can register up to 40 user stamps.
• When User Stamp is selected, it may take longer to print the first copy.
• To delete a stored user stamp, see “Deleting the user stamp”.

• p.32 "Original Orientation"

Changing the user stamp position

Changes the stamp position.

111
 3. Advanced Copying

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [User Stamp].
4. Press [Change] under Stamp Position.
5. Select the desired position, and then press [OK].

Registering the user stamp

Scans an image that is used as a user stamp.
The range of stamp images is 10 - 297 mm (0.4 - 11.7 inches) high and 10 - 432 mm (0.4 - 17.0 inches)
wide. However, if the value exceeds the maximum value of the area (5,000 mm2, 7.75 inch2), it is corrected
within the range of the area automatically.
Up to four frequently used images can be stored in memory.

BKY017D

1. Base point
2. Original feed direction
3. Original table

112
 Stamps

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.

3
BKY051S

2. Press [Copier / Document Server Features].

3. Press [Stamp].
4. Press [User Stamp].
5. Press [Program / Delete Stamp].
6. Press [Program], and then press the Select Stamp.
7. Press the stamp number you want to program.
8. Enter the user stamp name (up to ten characters) with the letter keys, and then press [OK].
9. Enter the horizontal size of the stamp with the number keys, and then press [ ].
10. Enter the vertical size of the stamp with the number keys, and then press [ ].
11. Place the original for user stamp on the exposure glass, and then press [Start Scanning].
The original will be scanned, and the stamp will be registered.
12. Press [Exit].
13. Press [Exit].
The display returns to the User Tools/Counter/Inquiry screen.
14. Press [Exit].
Exits settings and gets ready to copy.

113
 3. Advanced Copying

• Stamp numbers with already have settings in them. Stamp numbers that are not registered yet are
marked with "Not Programmed".
• If the stamp number is already being used, the machine will ask you if you want to overwrite it. Press
[Yes] or [Stop].
• You cannot restore the overwritten stamp.
• If the stamp is red or bright red, it may not be scanned clearly. To store a user stamp clearly, use a
black ink stamp, or make a copy and use that as the original.
3 • You can register up to 40 user stamps.
• For details about how to enter text, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.

Deleting the user stamp

Deletes an image registered as a user stamp.
You cannot restore a deleted stamp.

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.

BKY051S

2. Press [Copier / Document Server Features].

3. Press [Stamp].
4. Press [User Stamp].

114
 Stamps

5. Press [Program / Delete Stamp].

6. Press [Delete], and then press the Select Stamp.
7. Press the stamp number you want to delete.
8. Select [Yes], and then press [Exit].
9. Press [Exit].
The display returns to the User Tools/Counter/Inquiry screen.
10. Press [Exit].
Exits settings and gets ready to copy.
3
Date Stamp

Use this function to print dates on your copies.

BAT076S

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

You can select from the following styles:
• MM/DD/YYYY
• MM.DD.YYYY
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD.MM.YYYY
• YYYY.MM.DD
Stamp position and original orientation
The date stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you place the originals.

115
 3. Advanced Copying

BKY018D

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Date Stamp].
4. Select the stamp format.
You can change the style and position of the date.

116
 Stamps

5. Press [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] to select the print page.

3
6. After making all settings, press [OK].
7. Press [OK].

• You can combine this function with up to four other stamp functions.

• p.32 "Original Orientation"

Changing the format of date

Changes the format of date.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Date Stamp].
4. Press [Change Format] under Current Date.
5. Select the date format, and then press [OK].

117
 3. Advanced Copying

Changing the date stamp position

Changes the stamp position.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Date Stamp].
4. Press [Change] under Stamp Position.
5. Select the desired date stamp position, and then press [OK].
3

Page Numbering

Use this function to print page numbers on your copies.

BAS078S

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

There are six types of page numbering.
• P1,P2...
• 1/5,2/5...
• -1-,-2-...
• P.1,P.2...

118
 Stamps

• 1, 2...
• 1-1,1-2...
Stamp position and original orientation
The page stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you place your originals.

BKY019D

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Page Numbering].

119
 3. Advanced Copying

4. Select the page numbering format.

3
You can change the stamp position, pages to be stamped, and numbering.
5. After making all settings, press [OK].
6. Press [OK].

• You can combine this function with up to four other stamp functions.

Changing the stamp position

Changes the stamp position.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Page Numbering].
4. Press [Change] under Stamp Position.
5. Select the desired position, and then press [OK].

120
 Stamps

Specifying the first printing page and start number (“P1,P2...”, “-1-,-2-...”, “P.1,P.2...
”, “1,2... ”)
Explains the example when “P1, P2 …” is selected. The steps are the same for other cases.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Page Numbering].
4. Press [Change] under Change Numbering.
5. Press [First Printing Page], enter the original sheet number from which to start printing with 3
the number keys, and then press [ ].

6. Press [First Printing Number], enter the number of page from which to start numbering with
the number keys, and then press [ ].
The example below shows when the first printing page is “2” and the start number is “3”.

BAS080S

7. Press [Last Number], enter the number of the page at which to stop numbering with the
number keys, and then press [ ].
If you want to number all pages to the end, press [to the End].
8. When page designation is complete, press [OK].
9. Press [OK] twice.

• To change the numbers entered in steps 5 - 7, press [Clear], and then enter a new number.

121
 3. Advanced Copying

Specifying the first printing page and start number (“1/5,2/5...”)

Explains the procedures when “1/5,2/5...” is selected.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Page Numbering].
4. Press [Change] under Change Numbering.
5. Press [First Printing Page], enter the original sheet number from which to start printing with
3 the number keys, and then press [ ].

6. Press [First Printing Number], enter the number of page from which to start numbering with
the number keys, and then press [ ].
7. Press [Last Number], enter the number of page at which to stop numbering with the number
keys, and then press [ ].
Proceed to step 8 when not changing.
If you want to number all pages to the end, press [to the End].
The last number is the last page number to print. For example, if Total Pages is ten, if you want to print
up to seven pages and do not want to print from page 8 on, enter “7” for Last Number. Normally,
you do not need to enter the number.
8. Press [Total Pages], enter the total number of original pages with the number keys, and then
press [ ].
9. When page designation is complete, press [OK].
10. Press [OK] twice.

• To change the numbers entered in steps 5 - 8, press [Clear], and then enter a new number.
• To change the settings (the first printing page, the number of page from which to start numbering, or
total number of pages) after pressing [OK] in step 9, press [Change], and then enter the numbers
again.

122
 Stamps

• You can set a value from 1 to 9999 for [First Printing Page], [First Printing Number], [Last Number],
and [Total Pages].

Specifying the first printing page and start number (“1-1,1-2...”)

Explains the procedures when “1-1,1-2...” is selected.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Stamp].
3. Press [Page Numbering]. 3
4. Press [Change] under Change Numbering.
5. Press [First Printing Page], enter the original sheet number from which to start printing with
the number keys, and then press [ ].

6. Press [First Chapter No.], enter the chapter number from which to start numbering with the
number keys, and then press [ ].
7. Press [First Printing Number], enter the page number from which to start printing with the
number keys, and then press [ ].
8. When page designation is complete, press [OK].
9. Press [OK] twice.

• To change the numbers entered in steps 5 - 7, press [Clear], and then enter a new number.
• You can set a value from 1 to 9999 for [First Printing Page], [First Chapter No.], and [First Printing
Number].

123
 3. Advanced Copying

Advanced Copier Functions

This section describes the machine's advanced copy functions.

Erase Border (same width)

Erases the edge margin of the original image.

BKW013S

The default erase border setting is 10 mm (0.4").

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Erase].
3. Press [Erase Border].
4. Press [Same Width].
5. Set an erase border width with [ ] or [ ].
Pressing [ ] or [ ] changes the width in increments of 1 mm (0.1 inch).
Pressing and holding down the relevant key changes the width in increments of 10 mm (1 inch).

124
 Advanced Copier Functions

6. Press [OK] twice. 3

• To change the value entered in step 5, press [ ] and [ ] to set a new value.
• For details about the scan size limitations when using Erase Border together with the other functions,
see p.176 "Scan Size Limitations, by Function".

Erase Border (different width)

Erases the edge margins of the original image.

BKW013S

The default erase border setting is 10 mm (0.4").

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

125
 3. Advanced Copying

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

3
2. Press [Erase].
3. Press [Erase Border].
4. Press [Different Width].
5. Press the key for the border you want to change and set an erase width with [ ] and [ ].
Pressing [ ] or [ ] changes the width in increments of 1 mm (0.1 inch).

6. Press [OK] twice.

• To change the value entered in step 5, press [ ] and [ ] to set a new value.
• For details about the scan size limitations when using Erase Border together with the other functions,
see p.176 "Scan Size Limitations, by Function".

Erase Inside

Use this function to copy the original while erasing a specified area.

126
 Advanced Copier Functions

BAT091S

3
• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.
To specify the area you want to erase, you have to define the value of X1, Y1, X2, and Y2 on the original.
Measure the area you want to specify before entering the area settings.

BAT092S

X1, X2: 0 - 432 mm (0 - 17 inches)

Y1, Y2: 0 - 432 mm (0 - 17 inches)

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Erase].
3. Select one of the areas from [Erase Inside 1] to [Erase Inside 5].

127
 3. Advanced Copying

4. Enter the length of [X1] with the number keys, and then press [ ].

3
5. Enter the lengths of [X2], [Y1], and [Y2] in the same way, and then press [OK].
6. To specify multiple areas, specify areas 1 to 5, and then repeat steps 4 to 5.
7. Press [OK] twice.

• When using this function with magnification, the actual size will be the specified value multiplied by
the reproduction ratio.
• You can specify up to five areas.

Erase Outside

Use this function to copy the original while erasing outside of a specified area.

BAT093S

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

To specify the area you want to erase, you have to define the value of X1, Y1, X2, and Y2 on the original.
Measure the area you want to specify before entering the area settings.

128
 Advanced Copier Functions

BAT092S

3
X1, X2: 0 - 432 mm (0 - 17 inches)
Y1, Y2: 0 - 432 mm (0 - 17 inches)

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Erase].
3. Press [Erase Outside].
4. Enter the length of [X1] with the number keys, and then press [ ].

5. Enter the lengths of [X2], [Y1], and [Y2] in the same way, and then press [OK].
6. Press [OK] twice.

129
 3. Advanced Copying

• When using this function with magnification, the actual size will be the specified value multiplied by
the reproduction ratio.

Margin Adjustment

When Synchro Cut is selected, you can create a margin on the copy's leading and trailing edge.

BKY005D

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function. You can select the following types of margin for this
function:
• Top Margin: margin at the leading edge of the original (top of copy).
• Bottom Margin: margin at the trailing edge of the original (bottom of copy).

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

130
 Advanced Copier Functions

2. Press [Margin Adj.].

3. Press [Top Margin] or [Bottom Margin].

3
4. Use [ ] or [ ] to specify the margin, and then press [OK].
[Synchro Cut] is automatically selected.

• You can specify the margin from 0 to 200 mm (7.8") in 1 mm (0.1") increments. The default margin
is 20 mm (0.8").
• You can specify both the top and the bottom margins at a time.
• The copy length is the length automatically specified by Synchro Cut plus the margin specified.

Image Repeat

The original image is copied repeatedly.

BAS095S

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

The number of repeated images depends on the original size, copy paper size, and reproduction ratio.
For example, you can copy eight A4 (A) images to one sheet of A1 (D) size paper.

131
 3. Advanced Copying

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

3
2. Press [Edit Image].
3. Press [Image Repeat].
4. Press [OK].
5. Select the paper tray.

• You can insert separation lines (solid, broken, crop marks) between repeated images.
• When using Image Repeat with Adjust Print Position, the composite image is shifted.

Double Copies

One original image is copied twice on one sheet.

BAS098S

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

132
 Advanced Copier Functions

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

3
2. Press [Edit Image].
3. Press [Double Copies].
4. Press [OK].
5. Select the paper size.

• You can insert separation lines (solid, broken, crop marks) between two images.
• When using Double Copies, the copy paper must be twice as large as the original. When using
Reduce/Enlarge, consider the magnification ratio when selecting the paper size.

Positive/Negative

Copies an image inverted.

BAS100S

133
 3. Advanced Copying

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

3
2. Press [Edit Image].
3. Press [Positive / Negative].
4. Press [OK].
5. Select the paper tray.

Partial Copy

Use this function to copy only a specified portion of the original.

BKW045D

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

134
 Advanced Copier Functions

2. Press [Edit Image].

3. Press [Partial Copy].
4. Press [Y1], and then enter the scan start position (the length from the leading edge of the
original) with the number keys.

5. Press [ ].
6. Press [Y2], and then enter the copy size with the number keys.
7. Press [ ].
8. Press [OK] twice.

• To change the value, press [Clear], and then enter a new value.
• The copy size (Y2) should be at least 210 mm (8.3").
• On the Type 1, the maximum copy length (Y1 Y2) is 15,000 mm (590.5").
• On the Type 2, the maximum copy length (Y1 Y2) is 30,000 mm (1181.1").
• On the Type 1, if Y1 Y2 is greater than 15,000 mm (590.5"), the machine shortens Y2 to make Y1
Y2 less than the maximum.
• On the Type 2, if Y1 Y2 is greater than 30,000 mm (1181.1"), the machine shortens Y2 to make
Y1 Y2 less than the maximum.
• For Y2, specify the actual length that you require.

Mirror Image

Copies by reversing the image from left to right, as reflected in a mirror.

135
 3. Advanced Copying

BAS101S

3 1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Edit Image].

3. Press [Mirror Image].
4. Press [OK].

Format Overlay

Combines two images onto one copy.

You can also store frequently used format original in the machine memory and recall it for future use.

BKY007D

136
 Advanced Copier Functions

• You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.

There are two types of Format Overlay available.
Format Overlay
Combines two images onto one copy using the first original as the background.
Programmed Format Overlay
Uses a stored image as the background and combines it with a scanned image.

3
• p.171 "Supplementary Information"

Format Overlay
Combines two images onto one copy using the first original as the background.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Edit Image].

3. Press [Format Overlay].
4. Press [Format Overlay].

5. Make the necessary settings.

137
 3. Advanced Copying

6. Place the first original, and let it be scanned.

7. Place the second original, and let it be scanned.
The machine makes a composite copy of the first and second originals.
8. Place the third original, and let it be scanned.
The machine makes a composite copy of the first and third originals.
9. Place any further originals, as required.

3 Programmed Format Overlay

Uses a stored image as the background and combines it with a scanned image.
To use this function, you need to register the overlay format in advance.

1. Press [Edit / Stamp].

2. Press [Edit Image].

3. Press [Format Overlay].
4. Press [Programmed Format Overlay].
5. Select a stored format number.

6. Make the necessary settings.

7. Place your original, and let it be scanned.
The machine makes a copy overlaying the scanned original onto the stored format.

138
 Advanced Copier Functions

8. Place any further originals, as required.

The machine makes a copy overlaying the new original onto the stored format.

• p.139 "Storing a format"

• p.140 "Overwriting a stored format"
• p.141 "Deleting a stored format"

Storing a format 3
Stores a format for Programmed Format Overlay.
The maximum size of original to be stored is A0 (E). You cannot store long length originals.

1. Make sure the machine is ready to copy.

2. Press the [User Tools / Counter] key.

BKY051S

3. Press [Copier / Document Server Features].

4. Press [Edit], and then press [Program / Delete Format].

139
 3. Advanced Copying

5. Select a format number (1 to 4).

3
Format numbers with against them have already been stored.
6. Select the original orientation.
7. Place the original, and then press [Start Scanning].
The original is scanned and stored.
8. Press [Exit] twice.
Returns to the initial User Tools / Counter / Inquiry display.

Overwriting a stored format

Overwrites a format stored in memory.

• You cannot restore a format that has been overwritten.

1. Make sure the machine is ready to copy.

2. Press the [User Tools / Counter] key.
3. Press [Copier / Document Server Features].
4. Press [Edit], and then press [Program / Delete Format].
5. Select a format number you want to overwrite.
6. Press [Yes].
Press [Stop] if you do not want to overwrite the existing format.
7. Select the original orientation.
8. Place the original, and then press [Start Scanning].
The original is scanned and stored.
9. Press [Exit] twice.
Returns to the initial User Tools / Counter / Inquiry display.

140
 Advanced Copier Functions

Deleting a stored format

Deletes a format stored in memory.

• You cannot restore a format that has been deleted.

1. Make sure the machine is ready to copy.

2. Press the [User Tools / Counter] key.
3. Press [Copier / Document Server Features].
4. Press [Edit], and then press [Program / Delete Format].
3
5. Press [Delete], and then select the format number to be deleted.
6. Press [Yes].
Press [No] if you do not want to delete the existing format.
7. Press [Exit] twice.
Returns to the initial User Tools / Counter / Inquiry display.

Adjust Print Position

Use this function to move (shift) the copy image up, down, left, or right to create a margin. You can also
shift in a combination of up/down and left/right.

141
 3. Advanced Copying

BKY006D

You can select the following types of margin for this function:
• [ ] (Top): shifts towards the leading edge of the original.
• [ ] (Bottom): shifts towards the trailing edge of the original.
• [ ] (Left): shifts towards the left of the original.
• [ ] (Right): shifts towards the right of the original.

142
 Advanced Copier Functions

1. Press [Adjust Print Position].

3
2. Use [ ] or [ ] to specify the horizontal position.

3. Use [ ] or [ ] to specify the vertical position.

4. Press [OK].

• The default setting is Bottom 20 mm (0.8") and Right 20 mm (0.8").

• p.171 "Supplementary Information"

143
 3. Advanced Copying

144
4. Document Server
The Document Server enables you to store documents on the hard disk of this machine. Thus you can print
them later applying necessary conditions.

Relationship between Document Server and

Other Functions
State of the Document Server varies depending on the function used.
Copier functions
• Storing method: Copy/Document Server 4
• List display: Available
• Printing: Available
• Transmission: Unavailable
Printer functions
• Storing method: Personal computer
• List display: Available
• Printing: Available
• Transmission: Unavailable
Scanner functions
• Storing method: Scanner
• List display: Unavailable
When documents are stored with the scanner feature, you can confirm them from the scanner
feature screen. For details, see “Displaying the List of Stored Files”, Scanner Reference.
• Printing: Unavailable
• Transmission: Available
The data can be transferred by the scanner feature. For details, see “Sending a Stored File”,
Scanner Reference.

145
 4. Document Server

Document Server Display

Explains the screens and icons displayed in the Document Server function.
Document Server initial display

BKY061S

1. Displays operational status and messages.

2. Displays the title of the current screen.
3. Displays the numbers of originals stored into the memory, copies set, and copies made.
4. Displays keys for the operation.
5. Displays an icon that indicates the function used to stored the document.
6. Displays keys for switching the display between list and thumbnails.
The following icons appear in the list of the Document Server to indicate the function used to store a
document.

Function Copier Printer

Icons

Thumbnail screen
In thumbnail view, miniature images of the stored documents are displayed. This is useful for checking
a document's content.

146
 Document Server Display

• All the stored documents may not be displayed depending on the security function specified.

Simplified Display 4
This section explains how to switch to the simplified display.
When you press the [Simplified Display] key, the screen changes from the initial display to the simplified
display.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.

BKX024S

Simplified Document Server Screen

BKY062S

147
 4. Document Server

1. [Key Color]
Press to increase screen contrast by changing the color of the keys.
This is available only for the simplified display.

• To return to the initial display, press the [Simplified Display] key again.
• Certain keys do not appear on the simplified display.

Preview Display

This section explains the items that appear on the preview display and how to preview stored documents.
4 To preview stored documents, select the documents you want to preview on the Document Server initial
display, and then press [Preview]. The preview display denotes the screen that allows confirming contents
of the scanned documents.
Preview Display

BKY063S

1. [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Moves the display area in the direction indicated by the arrow.
2. [Zoom Out], [Zoom In]
Scales the displayed page down or up.
3. [Exit]
Closes the preview display.
4. Display File
Displays the file name.
If you have selected two or more files for preview, press [Switch] to switch between them.

148
 Document Server Display

5. [Switch]
If you have selected two or more files for preview, press this to switch between them.
6. Display Page
Displays the number of the currently displayed page, total number of pages, and page size.
7. [Switch]
Flips the page of the selected file.
8. Preview Area
Stored scan files for originals larger than A2 can be previewed using the zoom control on the preview
display.
9. [Select Area]
You can specify the preview area.
10. Display Position
4
Indicates the location of the displayed preview image when the image is enlarged.

• When the preview is already selected from another function, the preview screen function may become
unusable.
• The preview function is not available if the stored file has been corrupted. Scan and save the file again.
• Only documents with a maximum paper size of that are smaller than 914.4 × 1219.2 mm (36" ×
48") can be previewed.

149
 4. Document Server

Using the Document Server

Following describes how to use the Document Server.

Storing Data

Following describes the procedure for storing documents on the Document Server.

• Data stored in the machine might be lost if some kind of failure occurs. The manufacturer shall not be
responsible for any damage resulting from loss of data.
4 • Be careful not to let anyone know your password, especially when entering a password or recording
it. Keep any record of your password in a secure place.
• Avoid using a single number or consecutive numbers for a password such as “0000” or “1234”,
since the numbers like this are easy to guess, so using them will not provide a worthwhile level of
security.
• A document accessed with a correct password remains selected even after operations are complete,
and it can be accessed by other users. After the operation, be sure to press the [Clear Modes] key to
cancel the document selection.
• The user name registered to a stored document in the Document Server is to identify the document
creator and type. It is not to protect confidential documents from others.
• When scanning documents by the scanner, make sure that all other operations are ended.
File Name
A document name such as “COPY0001” and “COPY0002” is automatically attached to the scanned
document. You can change the document name.
User Name
You can register a user name to identify the user or user group that stored the documents. To assign
it, select the user name registered in the Address Book, or enter the name directly.
Password
To prevent unauthorized printing, you can set a password for any stored document. A protected
document can only be accessed if its password is entered. If a password is set for the documents, the
key icon appears next to the documents.

150
 Using the Document Server

1. Press the [Document Server] key.

BKY048S

2. Press [Scan Original].

4

3. Enter a user name, file name, and password, if necessary.

When not changing a file name, the name will be automatically set.
4. Specify the original scanning conditions.
5. Place the original.
The original feeds into the machine automatically.
If [Press Start Key] is selected for [Feed Start Method], scanning starts when you press the [Start] key.
6. Press [Finish Scanning] after all documents are scanned.
The original is scanned. The document is saved in the Document Server.

• Enter the password in the range of four and eight digits.

• If a password is set, the key icon appears on the left side of the file name.
• After scanning, a list of stored documents will be displayed. If the list does not appear, press [Scanning
Complete].
• Data stored in the Document Server is set to be deleted after three days (72 hours) by the factory
default. You can specify the period after which the stored data is deleted automatically under Auto
Delete File in Document Server in User Tools. See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.

151
 4. Document Server

• If you do not want stored documents to be automatically deleted, select [Off] in Auto Delete File in
Document Server before storing a document. If you select [On] later, data stored after will be
automatically deleted.
• When storing another document in the Document Server after storing a document from the copy
feature, be sure that its copy is completed.
• Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For details
about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.
• For details about how to enter text, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.

Specifying a User Name

4 You can specify a user name for the stored file.

1. Press [Scan Original].

2. Press [User Name].

A list of user names appears.

3. Select a user name, and then press [OK].
The user names shown are names that were registered in the Address Book. To specify a name not
shown in the display, press [Manual Entry], and then enter a user name.

Specifying a File Name

You can change the name of a stored document.

1. Press [Scan Original].

152
 Using the Document Server

2. Press [File Name].

The soft keyboard appears.

3. Press [Delete All] to delete the document name to be automatically set. 4
Pressing [Backspace] allows you to delete up to any desired position.
4. Enter a document name, and then press [OK].

• You can enter up to 20 characters for a document name. In the list, however, up to 16 characters are
displayed as the document name. If above limits are exceeded, the list will display up to 15 characters
for the document name.

Specifying a Password
You can specify a password for the stored document.

1. Press [Scan Original].

2. Press [Password].

153
 4. Document Server

3. Enter a password with the number keys, and then press [OK].

You can use four to eight digits for the password.

4 4. For double-check, enter the password again, and then press [OK].

Changing the User Name of a Stored Document

You can change the user name for a stored document.

1. Select the document whose user name you want to change.

If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].

2. Press [File Management].

154
 Using the Document Server

3. Press [Change User Name].

4. Enter a new user name, and then press [OK].

5. Press [OK]. 4
• To cancel the selection, press the selected (highlighted) key.
• Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For details
about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.
• For details about how to enter text, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.

Changing the File Name of a Stored Document

You can change the file name of a stored document.

1. Select the document whose name you want to change.

If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].
2. Press [File Management].
3. Press [Change File Name].

4. Enter a new file name, and then press [OK].

5. Press [OK].

155
 4. Document Server

• To cancel the selection, press the selected (highlighted) key.

• Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For details
about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.
• For details about how to enter text, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.

Changing the Password of a Stored Document

You can change the password of a stored document.

1. Select the document whose password you want to change.

4 If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].
2. Press [File Management].
3. Press [Change Password].

4. Enter a new password, and then press [OK].

5. For double-check, enter the password again and then press [OK].
6. Press [OK].

• To cancel the selection, press the selected (highlighted) key.

• Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For details
about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.
• For details about how to enter text, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.

Checking the Details of a Stored Document

You can confirm the details of a stored document.

156
 Using the Document Server

1. Select the document whose details are to be displayed.

If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].

2. Press [Details]. 4
Details of the document will be displayed.

• If you have selected two or more documents, press [ ] or [ ] to view their information.
• To cancel the selection, press the selected (highlighted) key.
• Pressing [Exit] restores the document selection screen.

Searching for Stored Documents

Searches for stored documents by user name or file name.

You can rearrange the currently chronologically ordered documents in any desired order.
Searching by file name
Searches for stored documents by file name.
Searching by user name
Searches for stored documents by user name.

157
 4. Document Server

• DeskTopBinder Lite enables searching and reordering of stored documents from computers.
• For details about DeskTopBinder Lite, see Instruction Manual and Help of DeskTopBinder Lite.

Searching by file name

Searches for stored documents by file name.

1. Press [File Name].

2. Enter the document name to be searched, and then press [OK].

Document names that match completely from the starting character will be searched and displayed
on the screen.

• Pressing [Display All] displays all stored documents.

Searching by user name

Searches for stored documents by user name.

158
 Using the Document Server

1. Press [User Name].

2. When specifying a registered user name, select it.

3. When the user name is not registered, press [Manual Entry], and then enter it from the input 4
screen to be displayed. Then press [OK].

4. Press [OK].
User names that match completely from the starting character will be searched and displayed on the
screen.

• Pressing [Display All] displays all stored documents.

Printing Stored Documents

Prints stored documents.

Web Image Monitor allows you to print documents stored in the Document Server from your computer.

1. Select a document to be printed.

If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].
2. When printing two or more documents at a time, repeat step 1.
Up to 30 documents can be printed.

159
 4. Document Server

3. When specifying printing conditions, press [To Printing Screen].

The printing condition screen will appear. The user name, file name, and printing order of the document
will be displayed.

4
4. Enter the number of print copies with the number keys.

The maximum quantity that can be set is 99.

5. Press the [Start] key.
Printing will be started.

• You can search the target document using [User Name] or [File Name] situated in the left side of the
screen.
• You can sort the documents by user name, file name, or creation date. Press the item to be used for
the sorting on the top of the list.
• Some of the selected documents may not be printed due to the difference in the size or resolution.
• When changing the printing order, cancel the highlight and then specify the order correctly.
• Pressing the [Clear Modes] key cancels every selection.
• Pressing [Order] displays the selected documents in the printing order.
• The copy and printer features hold the specified printing conditions after the operation is over and
apply them at the next printing.

160
 Using the Document Server

• When two or more documents are specified, the printing conditions are stored on the first document
but not on the succeeding documents.
• Following settings are available for the printing conditions. For respective printing results, see “Basic
Copying” and “Advanced Copying”.
• Reduce/Enlarge (Zoom, Fine Magnification, Auto Reduce/Enlarge)
• Stamp (Background Numbering, Preset Stamp, User Stamp, Date Stamp, Page Numbering)
• Adjust Print Position
• Finishing (Sort, Rotate Sort, Fold)
• Variable Cut
• Print Output Location
• Image Density 4
• When printing two or more copies while selecting the sort function, you can confirm the finish by
printing only one copy.
• When printing two or more documents at a time, you can print them as a single continuous document
by specifying the order of their printing.
• When printing two or more documents at a time, the printing conditions set for the first document are
applied to all the remaining documents.
• When two or more documents are selected, press [ ] [ ] to confirm the user name, document name
and printing order of the document.
• Pressing [Select File] restores the document selection screen.
• You can change the maximum print quantity under Max. Copy Quantity in User Tools. For details
about Max. Copy Quantity, see “Copier/Document Server Features”, General Settings Guide.
• Web Image Monitor allows you to print a document stored in the Document Server from your
computer. For the Web Image Monitor starting procedure, “Displaying a Stored Document with Web
Image Monitor”.

Interrupting a print job

Interrupts a print job.

1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.

2. Press [Stop].

Changing the number of sets

You can change the number of sets during printing.

161
 4. Document Server

• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected in the printing conditions.

1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.

2. Press [Change Quantity].
3. Enter the number of sets anew with the number keys.

4. Press the [ ] key.

5. Press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.

• The number of sets you can enter in step 3 differs depending on when the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed.

Sample Print
When the number of sets is massive, you can print a single set in advance to check the printing order and
the printing conditions of the selected documents.

• This function can be used only when the Sort function is selected in the printing conditions.

1. Select the document to be printed.

162
 Using the Document Server

If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].

2. Press the [Sample Copy] key.
Only one set will be printed.
3. Press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.

• To cancel the printing, press [Suspend]. The print screen will appear, enabling to set another item.

Printing the first page

In order to confirm the print results, you can print the first page alone of the document selected on the Select 4
File screen.
When two or more documents are selected, the first page of the respective documents is printed.

1. Select the document to be printed.

If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].
2. Press [Print Specified Page].
3. Press [1st Page].

4. Press the [Start] key.

Printing a specified page

You can print the specified page alone of the document selected on the Select File screen.

1. Select the document to be printed.

If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].
2. Press [Print Specified Page].
3. Press [Specified Page].

163
 4. Document Server

4. Specify the page to be printed with the number keys, and then press [ ].

5. Press the [Start] key.

4
• To change the value you entered, press the key you want to change, and then enter a new value.

Printing a specified range

You can print the pages in the specified range alone of the document selected on the Select File screen.

1. Select the document to be printed.

If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].
2. Press [Print Specified Page].
3. Press [Specify Range].
4. Specify the printing start page with the number keys, and then press [ ].

5. Specify the printing end page with the number keys, and then press [ ].
6. Press the [Start] key.

• To change the value you entered, press the key you want to change, and then enter a new value.

164
 Using the Document Server

Deleting a Stored Document

Deletes a stored document.

• The Document Server can store up to 3000 documents. As the number of stored documents reaches
3000, storing of a new document becomes unavailable. Thus, you should delete unnecessary
documents as much as practicable.

1. Select the document to be deleted.

If a password is set, enter it, and then press [OK].
2. Press [Delete File].
4

3. Press [Yes].

• You can delete all documents stored in the Document Server under Delete All Files in Document Server
in User Tools. For details about Delete All Files in Document Server, see “System Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
• Web Image Monitor allows you to print a document stored in the Document Server from your
computer.
• It is also possible to select two or more documents and delete them.
• You can search the target document using [File Name] or [User Name] situated in the left side of the
screen.
• You can sort the documents by user name, file name, or creation date. Press the item to be used for
the sorting on the top of the list.
• When you could not identify the target document from the document name, print the first page alone
of the document in order to confirm the print results.
• To cancel the selection, press the selected (highlighted) key.
• For details about how to start Web Image Monitor, see “Displaying a Document in Document Server
with Web Image Monitor”.

165
 4. Document Server

Print Backup

Backs up documents in the Document Server to an external device.

You can select a file format (PDF, JPEG, TIFF) for the backup data.

• You cannot back up a document that is currently being used by another function.

1. Select the document you want to back up.

If a password has been set for the document, enter it, and then press [OK].
2. Press [File Management].

4 3. Press [Print Backup].

4. Press [Yes].
You can select the file format, resolution, and the recipient name.
5. Press [OK].

• You can specify the default settings under Print Backup: Default User Name, Print Backup: Default
Format, and Print Backup: Default Resolution in User Tools. For details, see “System Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
• If you select PDF (Single Page) or PDF (Multi-page), you can make encoding and privilege settings
under Security Settings.

Displaying Stored Documents with Web Image Monitor

You can display stored documents in the Document Server on the computer screen with Web Image
Monitor.

1. Start a Web browser.

2. Enter “http://(IPv4 address, IPv6 address or host name of this machine)/” in the address
bar.
When entering an IPv4 address, do not begin segments with zeros.
For example: If the address is “192.168.001.010”, you must enter it as “192.168.1.10” to connect
to the machine.
The top page of Web Image Monitor will be displayed.
3. Click [Document Server].
The list of documents in the Document Server will be displayed.

166
 Using the Document Server

4. Click of the document you want to confirm.

Information of the document will be displayed.
5. Confirm contents of the document.

• You can change the format of the list. Click the (Thumbnails), (Icons), or (Details).
• When you want to enlarge the preview display, click [Enlarge Image].

Downloading Stored Documents with Web Image Monitor

You can download stored documents to the computer with Web Image Monitor.

1. Start a Web browser.

4
2. Enter “http://(IPv4 address, IPv6 address or host name of this machine)/” in the address
bar.
When entering an IPv4 address, do not begin segments with zeros.
For example: If the address is “192.168.001.010”, you must enter it as “192.168.1.10” to connect
to the machine.
Top page of Web Image Monitor will be displayed.
3. Click [Document Server].
The list of documents in the Document Server will be displayed.
4. Click of the document you want to download.
5. Select [PDF] or [Multi-page TIFF] for the file format.
The data will be downloaded.
6. Click [OK].

• You can change the format of the list. Click the (Thumbnails), (Icons), or (Details).
• You cannot select [Multi-page TIFF] for a document being stored with the copy or printer.

167
 4. Document Server

168
5. Appendix
This chapter describes the copy machine's specifications and the function compatibility.

Function Compatibility
The combination chart given below shows which modes can be used together.
Blank: These modes can be used together.
×: These modes cannot be used together. The first mode selected will be the mode you are working in.
: These modes cannot be used together. The second mode selected will be the mode you are working
in.
The following shows the combinations of functions:

*1 When there is no appropriate preset cut size paper in the selected tray, the function selected first has priority.
*2 When Directional Magnification (%) or Directional Magnification (inch) is selected, the function selected first
has priority.

169
 5. Appendix

*3 When Directional Magnification (%) or Directional Magnification (inch) is selected, the function selected second
has priority.

170
 Supplementary Information

Supplementary Information
Following describes the detailed specifications of the respective functions.
Job Preset
• When the paper size specified in Job Preset is as the same as that of the copy job in progress,
the number of sheets that can be set is as follows:
A0 (E): 100 sheets
A1 (D): 100 sheets
A2 (C): 200 sheets
A3 (B): 400 sheets
A4 (A): 400 sheets
• The maximum number of jobs that can be preset is eight.
• You might not be able to specify eight preset jobs if your originals are large. 5
Selecting Copy Paper
• If you change the paper type, copying may take longer to start.
• When Auto Paper Select is selected, copying may take slightly longer since the machine selects
the copy paper after scanning the original.
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25.0-400.0%.
• You can select one of eight preset ratios (four enlargement ratios, four reduction ratios).
• Following shows the relation between the original size and paper size at respective scaling
factors.
• Metric version
400.0% (Area ratio 16 times): A4 A0
282.8% (Area ratio 8 times): A3 A0, A4 A1, B4 JIS B1 JIS
200.0% (Area ratio 4 times): A2 A0, A3 A1, A4 A2, B3 JIS B1 JIS, B4 JIS B2 JIS
141.4% (Area ratio 2 times): A1 A0, A2 A1, A3 A2, A4 A3, B2 JIS B1 JIS, B3 JIS
B2 JIS, B4 JIS B3 JIS
70.7% (Area ratio 1/2 times): A0 A1, A1 A2, A2 A3, A3 A4, B1 JIS B2 JIS, B2
JIS B3 JIS, B3 JIS B4 JIS
50.0% (Area ratio 1/4 times): A0 A2, A1 A3, A2 A4, B1 JIS B3 JIS, B2 JIS B4 JIS
35.4%: A0 A3, A1 A4, B1 JIS B4 JIS
25.0%: A0 A4
• Inch version (Engineering)

171
 5. Appendix

400.0% (Area ratio 16 times): A E

258.8%: A D, B E
200.0% (Area ratio 4 times): A C, B D, C E
129.4%: A B, B C, C D, D E
64.7%: B A, C B, D C, E D
50.0% (Area ratio 1/ 4 times): C A, D B, E C
32.4%: D A, E B
25.0%: E A
• Inch version (Architecture)
400.0% (Area ratio 16 times): A E
266.7%: A D, B E
200.0% (Area ratio 4 times): A C, B D, C E
5 133.3%: A B, B C, C D, D E
66.7%: B A, C B, D C, E D
50.0% (Area ratio 1/ 4 times): C A, D B, E C
33.3%: D A, E B
25.0%: E A
• You can select a ratio regardless of original or paper size, or paper roll cut method. With certain
ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will appear.
Zoom
• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25.0-400.0%.
• You can select a ratio regardless of original or paper size, or paper roll cut method. With certain
ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will appear.
Size Magnification
• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25.0-400.0%.
• If the calculated ratio is over the maximum or under the minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted
to within available range. However, with some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied
or margins will appear on copies.
Directional Magnification (%)
• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25.0-400.0%.
• You can enter a ratio regardless of original or paper size, or paper roll cut method. With certain
ratios, parts of the image might not copy or margins will appear.
• You cannot use Directional Magnification (%) if Auto Paper Select is selected.

172
 Supplementary Information

Directional Magnification (inch)

• The reproduction ratios automatically selected by the machine are 25.0 - 400.0%.
• If the calculated ratio is over the maximum or under the minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted
within the available range. With certain ratios, parts of the image might not copy or margins will
appear.
• You cannot use Directional Magnification (inch) if Auto Paper Select is selected.
Fine Magnification
• Depending on the image patterns of the originals, moiré patterns may be noticeable, or the
image quality may deteriorate.
Combine
• The machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically. This reproduction ratio depends on
copy paper sizes and the number of originals.
• If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted to within available
range. However, with some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied. 5
• You cannot use custom size paper.
• If the orientation of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the machine will
automatically rotate the image by 90 degrees to make copies properly.
• If the number of originals placed is less than the number specified for Combine, the last page
segment is left blank as shown.

BKW044D

Erase Border
• You can specify the width of the erased border margins from 2 to 99 mm (0.1" to 3.9") in
increments of 1 mm (0.1").
Erase Inside
• By combining “Erase Inside 1”-“Erase Inside 5”, you can erase up to 5 areas at the same time.
Margin Adjustment
• You can specify margins from 0 to 200 mm (0 to 7.9") in increments of 1 mm (0.1").
• If you set the margin too long for the original, parts of the image might not be copied.
Background Numbering
• A pattern-like image may appear in the area where an original’s image overlaps the background
number.

173
 5. Appendix

Preset Stamp
• You can stamp onto paper sizes up to A0 (E).
• You can change the default settings of the stamp with User Tools. Depending on settings, image
density may change.
• Depending on paper size, if you change the stamp size, parts of the stamp might not be printed.
• When you set the stamp position to “Bottom Left”, “Bottom Center”, or “Bottom Right”, and then
use Rotate Sort or Rotate Copy, the stamp position may shift.
User Stamp
• You can stamp onto paper sizes up to A0 (E).
Date Stamp
• You can stamp onto paper sizes up to A0 (E).
• When using Combine mode, the date stamp is printed as follows:

BKY039S

Page Numbering
• You can stamp onto paper sizes up to A0 (E).
• When using Combine mode, page numbers are printed as follows:
[Per Original] is selected in User Tools:

GCANPE0E

[Per Copy] is selected in User Tools:

GCANPE2E

Image Repeat
• Depending on the paper size, ratio, and orientation, parts of repeated images may not be
copied.

174
 Supplementary Information

• You can use Image Repeat for paper sizes up to A0 (E).

• When using Image Repeat with Adjust Print Position together, the repeated images will be shifted
as a whole.
Double Copies
• You can copy an image up to A1 (D) with Double Copies. You can use paper sizes up to A0
(E) .
Format Overlay
• When the sizes of the format (background original) and original to be overlaid on the format
are different, the image is created at the size of the overlaid original.
• You can use Format Overlay for paper sizes up to A0 (E).
• When scanning a format (background original), the output image may be blurred. If this
happens, copy the format, and then use it as the background original.
• When using Format Overlay, image quality may deteriorate.
• You cannot change the image density of a format (background original). To achieve a desired
5
image density, scan an original with the image density changed beforehand.
Adjust Print Position
• You can shift the image from 0 to 200 mm in 1 mm increments (0 to 7.9" in 0.1" increments).
• When using Stamp and Adjust Print Position together, the stamp position does not move.
• You can use Adjust Print Position for paper sizes up to A0 (E).
• If you set the margin too long for the original, parts of the image might not be copied.
Sort, Rotate Sort
• You can use Sort for copy sizes up to A0 (E).
• You can use Rotate Sort for copy sizes up to A1 (D).
• The number of originals that can be scanned for Sort and Rotate Sort is as follows:
A0 (E): 100 sheets
A1 (D): 150 sheets
A2 (C): 200 sheets
A3 (B): 400 sheets
• You can use the following paper sizes with Rotate Sort:
• Metric version
420 mm × 297 mm (A3)
594 mm × 420 mm (A2)
841 mm × 594 mm (A1)
515 mm × 364 mm (B3 JIS)

175
 5. Appendix

728 mm × 515 mm (B2 JIS)

• Inch version (Engineering)
11" × 17" (B)
17" × 22" (C)
22" × 34" (D)
• Inch version (Architecture)
12" × 18" (B)
18" × 24" (C)
24" × 36" (D)

Scan Size Limitations, by Function

5 The following chart shows scan size limitations for the Adjust Print Position, Margin Adjustment, Edit, and
Stamp functions.

Function Scan size limitation

Adjust Print Position A0 (E) or smaller

Margin Adjustment 15 m or smaller

Format Overlay A0 (E) or smaller

Erase Erase Inside A0 (E) or smaller, 5 locations

Erase Erase Outside A0 (E) or smaller

Erase Erase Border A0 (E) or smaller

Erase Inside, Erase Border, and

Erase A0 (E) or smaller
Format Overlay Combinations

Erase Outside and Format Overlay

Erase A0 (E) or smaller
Combinations

Positive/Negative 15 m or smaller

Mirror Image 15 m or smaller

Double Copies A1 (D) (when A0 (E) paper is selected)

Image
with no other modes A0 (E) or smaller
Repeat

176
 Supplementary Information

Function Scan size limitation

Image
with Erase Border A0 (E) or smaller
Repeat

Image
with Format Overlay A0 (E) or smaller
Repeat

Stamp A0 (E) or smaller

177
 5. Appendix

Settings Record Sheet

Program Record Sheet

AHD014S

Print this sheet to keep a record of your program settings.

178
 Settings Record Sheet

Stored Format Record Sheet

AHD015S

179
 5. Appendix

Print this sheet to keep a record of your format settings.

180
 Settings Record Sheet

User Stamp Record Sheet

BKY041S

181
 5. Appendix

Print this sheet to keep a record of your user stamps.

182
 Magnification Ratio Chart

Magnification Ratio Chart

Metric version (A series)

Copy size

% A0 A1 A2 A3 A4

A0 100.0 70.7 50.0 35.4 25.0

Original size

A1 141.4 100.0 70.7 50.0 35.4

A2 200.0 141.4 100.0 70.7 50.0

A3 282.8 200.0 141.4 100.0 70.7

5
A4 400.0 282.8 200.0 141.4 100.0

Metric version (B series)

Copy size

% B1 JIS B2 JIS B3 JIS B4 JIS

B1 JIS 100.0 70.7 50.0 35.4

Original size

B2 JIS 141.4 100.0 70.7 50.0

B3 JIS 200.0 141.4 100.0 70.7

B4 JIS 282.8 200.0 141.4 100.0

183
 5. Appendix

Inch version (Engineering)

Copy size

% E D C B A

E 100.0 64.7 50.0 32.4 25.0

Original size

D 129.4 100.0 64.7 50.0 32.4

C 200.0 129.4 100.0 64.7 50.0

B 258.8 200.0 129.4 100.0 64.7

5 A 400.0 258.8 200.0 129.4 100.0

Inch version (Architecture)

Copy size

% E D C B A

E 100.0 66.7 50.0 33.3 25.0

Original size

D 133.3 100.0 66.7 50.0 33.3

C 200.0 133.3 100.0 66.7 50.0

B 266.7 200.0 133.3 100.0 66.7

A 400.0 266.7 200.0 133.3 100.0

184
 Measure Chart

Measure Chart
Metric version

Width × Length (mm)

A0 841 × 1189

A1 594 × 841

A2 420 × 594

A3 297 × 420

A4 210 × 297

B1 JIS 728 × 1030

5
B2 JIS 515 × 728

B3 JIS 364 × 515

B4 JIS 257 × 364

B1 ISO 707 × 1000

Inch version (Engineering)

Width × Length (inch)

E 34 × 44

D 22 × 34

C 17 × 22

B 11 × 17

A 81/2 × 11

Inch version (Architecture)

Width × Length (inch)

E 36 × 48

D 24 × 36

185
 5. Appendix

Width × Length (inch)

C 18 × 24

B 12 × 18

A 9 × 12

186
 User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features)

User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server

Features)
This section describes items that can be specified on the Copier/Document Server Features screen. The
Copier/Document Server Features screen can be displayed by pressing the [User Tools/Counter] key. For
details about how to set up these items, see General Settings Guide.
General Features

Item Description

Auto Image Density You can set whether Auto Image Density is “On” or “Off” when the
Priority machine is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.

Original Photo Type When you select “Text / Photo” or “Photo” in “Original Type Priority”,
Priority you can change the settings of the selected original type. 5
Max. Copy Quantity The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 99.

Auto Tray Switching If you load paper of the same size in two or more trays, the machine
automatically shifts to the other when the first tray runs out of paper
(when Auto Paper Select is selected.) This function is called “Auto Tray
Switching”. This setting specifies whether to use Auto Tray Switching
or not.

Job End Call Choose whether or not the beeper sounds when copying is complete.

Reproduction Ratio

Item Description

User Reduce/Enlarge You can register up to three frequently used Reduce/Enlarge ratios
Ratio other than the fixed Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have them shown on
the initial display. You can also change registered Reduce/Enlarge
ratios.

Reproduction Ratio Specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear if [Reduce /
Enlarge] is pressed on the copier screen.

Reduce / Enlarge Ratio You can set the ratio that has priority when [Reduce / Enlarge] is
Priority pressed.

User Auto Reduce / Define a user auto reduce/enlarge ratio for each document size when
Enlarge:A0-A4, B1 JIS-B4 copying with the User Auto Reduce / Enlarge feature.
JIS

187
 5. Appendix

Edit

Item Description

Adjust Position Specify the default setting for Print Position Adjustment.

Erase Border Width Specify the width of erased border margins with this function.

Erase Original Shadow in In Combine mode, you can specify whether to erase a 3 mm, 0.1 inch
Combine boundary margin around all four edges of each original.

Image Repeat Separation You can select a separation line using the Image Repeat function from:
Line None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.

Double Copies You can select a separation line using the Double Copies function from:
Separation Line None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.

5 Separation Line in
Combine
You can select a separation line using the Combine function from:
None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.

Copy Order in Combine You can set the copy order in Combine mode to Left to Right or Top to
Bottom.

Program / Delete Format Store a format (background) image for use with Format Overlay.
You can store up to four formats.

Margin Adjustment Priority Specify the default setting for the margin size.

Partial Copy Size Specify the default settings of the start position (Y1) and the copy size
(Y2).

Stamp

Item Description

Background Numbering

Size You can set the size of the numbers.

Density You can set the density of the numbers.

Preset Stamp

Stamp Language You can select the language of the message printed in Stamp mode.

Stamp Priority You can select the stamp type given priority when [Preset Stamp] is
pressed.

188
 User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features)

Item Description

Stamp Format Specify how each of stamps is printed.

User Stamp

Program / Delete Stamp You can register, change, or delete user stamps.

Stamp Format: 1 to 40 Specify how each of registered User Stamps 1 to 40 is printed.

Date Stamp

Format You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.

Font You can select the Date Stamp font.

Size You can set the Date Stamp size.

Superimpose You can have the Date Stamp printed in white when it overlaps black 5
parts of the image.

Stamp Setting Specify how Date Stamp is printed.

Page Numbering

Stamp Format You can select the page number format given priority when [Page
Numbering] is pressed.

Font You can select the page number printed in Page Numbering mode.

Size You can set the size of the stamp printed in Page Numbering mode.

Page Numbering in You can set page numbering when using the Combine function and
Combine the Page Numbering function together.

Stamp Position: P1,P2... Specify how each of stamp is printed.

Stamp Position: Specify how each of stamp is printed.

1/5,2/5...

Stamp Position: -1-,-2-... Specify how each of stamp is printed.

Stamp Position: P.1,P.2... Specify how each of stamp is printed.

Stamp Position: 1,2... Specify how each of stamp is printed.

Stamp Position: 1-1,1-2... Specify how each of stamp is printed.

Superimpose You can have page numbers printed in white when it overlaps black
parts of the image.

189
 5. Appendix

Input / Output

Item Description

Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Specify to continue copying when paper of the required orientation
Continue has run out during rotate sort.

Simplified Display: fold You can specify which fold types and fold options appear on the initial
function/ related option copier screen when the user selects the simplified display. This setting
is available only if a folding finisher is installed.

Simplified Screen: You can select which key is displayed with higher priority for
Fold Type/Fold Option “Fold Type/Fold Option” on the Simplified Screen.

Administrator Tools

5 Item Description

Menu Protect You can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the user tools.

190
INDEX
A D
Adjust Print Position................................6, 141, 175 Date......................................................................117
Adjusting copy image density..............................52 Date format..........................................................117
Adjusting Image.......................................................5 Date Stamp...........................................10, 115, 174
Adjusting the rear output.......................................25 Default settings.......................................................97
Administrator Tools.............................................190 Deleting a stored document...............................165
Auto Image Density...............................................52 Deleting a stored format.....................................141
Auto Paper Select..................................................56 Deleting a stored program...................................95
Auto Reduce/Enlarge.......................................3, 65 Deleting jobs..........................................................91
Auto Start...............................................................41 Deleting the user stamp.......................................114
B Directional Magnification...................................100
Directional Magnification (%)...................100, 172
Background Density..............................................55 Directional Size Magnification (inch).......102, 173
Background Lines..................................................50 Display...................................................................18
Background Numbering........................9, 106, 173 Displaying stored documents.............................166
Basic Copying.......................................................39 Document Server..........................................86, 145
Basic procedure....................................................39 Document Server Display...................................146
Bypass tray......................................................44, 46 Double Copies.......................................8, 132, 175
C Downloading stored documents........................167
Drawing..................................................................50
carrier sheet...........................................................27
Carrier sheet..........................................................36 E
Changing a stored program................................. 94 Edit........................................................................188
Changing the file name......................................155 Enlarging originals by specifying the paper size....
Changing the number of sets.......................79, 161 ..................................................................................3
Changing the order of jobs..................................90 Entering the ratio with the number keys...............71
Changing the password.....................................156 Envelopes.................................................................5
Check Modes........................................................40 Erase Border..................................5, 124, 125, 173
Checking Jobs in the Job List.................................89 Erase Inside.............................................5, 126, 173
Checking the details of a stored document.......156 Erase Outside..................................................6, 128
Checking the job history.......................................91 F
Combine....................................................4, 74, 173
Combined auto and manual image density........53 Fan Fold.................................................................80
Contrast..................................................................55 Fine Magnification.....................................104, 173
Copied Photo.........................................................50 Finishing.................................................................77
Copier functions..........................................124, 145 First Printing Number.........................121, 122, 123
Copy Output Locations.........................................23 First Printing Page...............................121, 122, 123
Copy Quality.........................................................53 Fold.........................................................................80
Copying.................................................................39 Format Overlay.............................9, 136, 137, 175
Copying from the bypass tray..............................44 Frequently used functions...............................11, 93
Copying onto Special Paper................................48 Front........................................................................23
Custom size paper.................................................46 Front copy output...................................................23
Function compatibility.........................................169

191
 G Options................................................................... 17
Original and Copy Output Locations..................21
General Features.................................................187
Original Counter/Reset........................................41
Generation Copy..................................................50
Original orientation............30, 107, 110, 115, 118
Glossy Photo..........................................................50
Original Output Locations....................................21
H Original rear output..............................................22
Holding jobs..........................................................90 Original size..........................................................26
How to read this manual.......................................16 Original upper output...........................................21
Original weight...................................................... 26
I Originals................................................................26
Image density........................................................52 Overwriting a stored format...............................140
Image Repeat.........................................7, 131, 174 P
Initial display....................................11, 18, 97, 146
Input / Output.....................................................190 Page Numbering..................................11, 118, 174
Interrupt Copy........................................................41 Partial Copy.....................................................8, 134
Interrupting a print job........................................161 Patched Original...................................................50
Invert.....................................................................133 Placing Custom Size Originals.............................33
Placing originals....................................................30
J Positive/Negative...........................................8, 133
Job List screen........................................................88 Preset Cut...............................................................60
Job Order...............................................................88 Preset Reduce/Enlarge................................69, 171
Job Preset......................................................43, 171 Preset Stamp.........................................10, 107, 174
L Preview Display...................................................148
Print Backup.........................................................166
Last Number................................................121, 122 Printed Photo..........................................................50
M Printer functions...................................................145
Printing a specified page....................................163
Magnification Ratio Chart..................................183
Printing a specified range...................................164
Managing jobs......................................................88
Printing stored documents...................................159
Manual Image Density..........................................52
Printing the first page..........................................163
Manual Paper Select............................................57
Program...........................................................93, 97
Manuals for this machine........................................1
Programmed Fold..................................................84
Margin Adjustment.................................6, 130, 173
Programmed Format Overlay............................138
Margin Fold...........................................................83
Programming defaults...........................................11
Measure Chart....................................................185
Mirror Image...................................................9, 135 R
Missing image area..............................................29 Rear........................................................................23
N Rear copy output...................................................24
Recalling a stored program..................................95
Narrow Std. Fold................................................... 82
Recalling the registered custom size....................48
New job.................................................................43
Recommended originals.......................................26
Non-compatible originals.....................................28
Reduce/Enlarge....................................................99
O Reducing or Enlarging Originals.......................... 64
One-Sided Combine.........................................4, 74

192
Reducing originals by specifying the paper size..... Stamp size...........................................................109
..................................................................................3 Standard Fold........................................................82
Registering a custom size......................................47 Storing a format...................................................139
Registering functions..............................................93 Storing data.........................................................150
Registering the user stamp..................................112 Storing data in the Document Server...................86
Regular Size Fold (Cross-Fold)............................82 Supplementary information................................171
Regular size paper................................................46 Symbols..................................................................16
Repeat..................................................................131 Synchro Cut...........................................................59
Reproduction Ratio..............................................187
T
Rotate Copy...........................................................58
Rotate Sort.........................................................3, 77 Text.........................................................................50
S Text/Photo.............................................................50
Thick paper..............................................................5
Sample Copy.........................................................79 To stop originals feeding in..................................31
Sample Print.........................................................162
U
Saving paper...........................................................4
Scan Size Limitations...........................................176 User Auto Reduce/Enlarge..................................67
Scanner functions................................................145 User Stamp..................................10, 110, 114, 174
Searching by file name.......................................158 V
Searching by user name.....................................158
Searching for stored documents........................157 Variable Cut...........................................................62
Selecting a preset ratio.........................................69 W
Selecting copy paper.....................................56, 57 Web Image Monitor..................................166, 167
Selecting Copy Paper.........................................171 What you can do with this machine.......................3
Selecting the Original Type Setting.....................50 Whole Area Repeat............................................131
Setting the Carrier Sheet.......................................36 Wide Scan.............................................................34
Setting the Length of Copy Paper Cut..................59
Setting the Original Hangers................................37 Z
Settings Record Sheet.........................................178 Zoom.............................................................70, 172
Sharp / Soft...........................................................54
Shift Sort.................................................................17
Simplified Display.........................................18, 147
Size Magnification.......................................99, 172
Sort.....................................................................3, 77
Sort, Rotate Sort..................................................175
Special Fold...........................................................84
Specifying a file name........................................152
Specifying a password.......................................153
Specifying a user name......................................152
Specifying the reproduction ratio..............100, 101
Stamp......................................................9, 106, 188
Stamp density......................................................109
Stamp position........107, 109, 110, 111, 115, 118,
120

193
 MEMO

194
MEMO

195
 MEMO

196 EN USA D046-7603

Trademarks

Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, Acrobat Reader, PostScript, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective
companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

Copyright © 2008
 Operating Instructions Copy/Document Server Reference

Type for 5100WD/GWD5100/LW5100/Aficio MP W5100

Type for 7140WD/GWD7140/LW7140/Aficio MP W7140
EN USA D046-7603
 Operating Instructions
Printer Reference

1 Preparing the Machine

2 Setting Up the Printer Driver
3 Other Print Operations
4 Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files
5 Saving and Printing Using the Document Server
6 Appendix
7
8
9
10
11

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information
in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your safety and
benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy place for quick reference.
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its completeness or
accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your
legal advisor.

Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

Notes
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, your machine may include certain options as standard. For details, please
contact your local dealer.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.

• Media differ according to manual.

• The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
• For details about the functions of RW-7140, refer to the manuals for this option.
About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also explains the control panel,
preparation procedures for using the machine, how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs
provided.
Trouble Shooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace paper, toner, and other
consumables.
Copy/Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for
explanations on how to place originals.
Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software
provided.
General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering e-mail addresses, and
user codes. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect the machine.
Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that you can use to
prevent unauthorized use of the machine, data tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced
security, we recommend that you first make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.

1
 • Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator using Web Image Monitor.
For details, see "Setting Up the Machine", Security Reference.
Be sure to read this manual when setting the enhanced security functions, or user and administrator
authentication.
PostScript 3 Supplement
Explains how to set up and use PostScript 3.
UNIX Supplement
For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized dealer.
This manual includes descriptions of functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
Information
Contains general notes on the machine, and information about the trademarks of product names used
in the manuals.
Other manuals
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide

• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.

• The following software products are referred to using general names:

Product name General name

DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder

DeskTopBinder
Professional *1

*1 Optional

2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine.................................................................................................................................1
How to Read This Manual.................................................................................................................................6
Symbols...........................................................................................................................................................6
Model-Specific Information...............................................................................................................................7
Display Panel......................................................................................................................................................8
Initial Display..................................................................................................................................................8
Simplified Display...........................................................................................................................................9
Job List...............................................................................................................................................................11
Job List Screen..............................................................................................................................................11
Checking Jobs in the Job List.......................................................................................................................12
Changing the Order of Jobs.......................................................................................................................13
Holding Jobs................................................................................................................................................13
Deleting Jobs................................................................................................................................................14
Checking the Job History.............................................................................................................................14
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray...................................................................................................................15
Setting the Paper Size Using the Control Panel.........................................................................................16
Setting Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel.................................................................................18
Setting Translucent Paper or Film Using the Control Panel.......................................................................19
1. Preparing the Machine
Confirming the Connection Method...............................................................................................................23
Network Connection...................................................................................................................................23
Local Connection.........................................................................................................................................25
Installing the Printer Driver...............................................................................................................................26
Quick Install..................................................................................................................................................26
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port........................................................................................27
Using as a Windows Network Printer............................................................................................................37
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer.......................................................................................39
Form Feed.....................................................................................................................................................40
Banner Page.................................................................................................................................................40
Printing after Resetting the Printer................................................................................................................41
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB............................................................................................................42
Windows 2000 - USB.................................................................................................................................42
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 - USB.........................................................................43

3
 Windows Vista - USB..................................................................................................................................44
Printing with Parallel Connection....................................................................................................................46
Making Option Settings for the Printer...........................................................................................................48
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication.............................................................................................48
If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled...............................................................................................49
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0......................................................................................50
2. Setting Up the Printer Driver
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties..........................................................................................................51
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties...................................................................................51
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 - Accessing the Printer Properties...........................53
Windows Vista - Accessing the Printer Properties.....................................................................................54
3. Other Print Operations
Printing a PDF File Directly...............................................................................................................................57
Printing Method............................................................................................................................................57
Using DeskTopBinder Lite............................................................................................................................57
PDF Direct Print Properties...........................................................................................................................60
Using Commands.........................................................................................................................................61
Using the Print Job Function.............................................................................................................................62
Selecting the Initial Print Job List..................................................................................................................65
Printing from the Print Job Screen....................................................................................................................67
Sample Print..................................................................................................................................................67
Locked Print..................................................................................................................................................70
Hold Print......................................................................................................................................................73
Stored Print...................................................................................................................................................76
Printing from the Jobs Per User ID Screen......................................................................................................81
Printing the Selected Print Job.....................................................................................................................81
Printing All Print Jobs....................................................................................................................................82
Canceling a Print Job.......................................................................................................................................85
Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel..........................................................................................85
Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer...............................................................................85
Checking the Error Log....................................................................................................................................87
Spool Printing...................................................................................................................................................89
Printing with the Folding Finisher.....................................................................................................................90

4
 Fold Types....................................................................................................................................................91
Folding Finisher Cautions............................................................................................................................91
Collate..........................................................................................................................................................93
4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files
Printable Files....................................................................................................................................................95
To Print...............................................................................................................................................................96
Using Web Printing Tool.............................................................................................................................96
Using From the Printing Commands...........................................................................................................99
Print Settings for GL/2 & TIFF Filter..............................................................................................................102
Adjusting the Print Settings for GL/2 & TIFF Filter...................................................................................102
General Settings........................................................................................................................................103
GL/2 Print Settings....................................................................................................................................105
TIFF Print Settings.......................................................................................................................................107
Using the HDI Driver for AutoCAD...............................................................................................................108
Setup CD-ROM.........................................................................................................................................108
Installing the HDI Driver............................................................................................................................109
Displaying and Printing Help....................................................................................................................110
Printable GL/2 Files......................................................................................................................................112
HP-GL Specifications.................................................................................................................................112
HP-GL/2 Specifications............................................................................................................................117
HP-RTL Specifications................................................................................................................................121
Printable TIFF Files..........................................................................................................................................123
TIFF Data Specifications............................................................................................................................123
Printable CALS Files.......................................................................................................................................128
CALS Data Specifications.........................................................................................................................128
5. Saving and Printing Using the Document Server
Accessing the Document Server...................................................................................................................131
6. Appendix
Specifications.................................................................................................................................................133
Printer Features Menu....................................................................................................................................135
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................139

5
 How to Read This Manual
Symbols

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.

6
Model-Specific Information
In this manual, model-specific information is indicated by the following marks:

Indicates information that is specific to the 220 to 240 V model.

Indicates information that is specific to the 208 to 240 V model.

• Check the label on the right side of the machine to identify the model.

BLX010S

• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is the
220 to 240 V model, refer to the metric units. If your printer is the 208 to 240 V model, refer to the
inch units.

7
 Display Panel
This section describes configuration using the display panel when the printer function is selected.

Initial Display

• The machine switches to offline when you make settings in online mode. After you complete the setting,
the machine switches to online automatically.
• If you make a setting when the machine is offline, it will stay offline afterwards.
• The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an item by pressing it
lightly.
• When you select or specify an item on the control panel, it becomes highlighted.
• Keys dimmed (for example, ) cannot be used.

2
8

3
4

5 6 7
BLX006S

1. Operational status or messages

Displays current machine status, such as "Ready", "Offline", and "Printing...". Information about the print job (user
ID and document name) appears in this section.
2. [ Online] / [ Offline]
Press to switch the machine between online and offline.
When the machine is online, it can receive data from the computer.
When the machine is offline, it cannot receive data from the computer.
3. [Form Feed]
Press to print all the data left in the machine's input buffer.
• When the machine is online, the status appears dimly.
• This function is not available with the RPCS printer language.

8
 4. [Job Reset]
Press to cancel the current print job.
If you press it when the machine is offline and Hex Dump is selected, Hex Dump is canceled.
5. [Print Jobs]
Press to display print jobs sent from a computer.
6. [Error Log]
Press to display the error logs of print jobs sent from a computer.
7. [Spooling Job List]
Press to display spooled jobs.
8. Paper Tray Status indicators
The paper tray settings appear.

• When the power is turned on, the copier display is shown. This is a factory default. This initial setting
can be changed. For details, see "System Settings", General Settings Guide.

Simplified Display

This section explains how to switch to the simplified display.

When you press the [Simplified Display] key, the screen changes from the initial display to the simplified
display. Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.

BLX001S

9
 Example of a simplified display

• To return to the initial display, press the [Simplified Display] key again.
• Certain keys do not appear on the simplified display.

10
Job List
Jobs printed using Copy, Document Server, or Printer mode are temporarily stored in the machine, and
then executed in order. The Job List function allows you to manage these jobs.
For example, you can cancel incorrect job settings or print an urgent document.

• You cannot use the Job List function when Interrupt Copy is active.
• Documents printed using the facsimile function and scanner function are not displayed in the Job List.

Job List Screen

This section explains displays and icons that appear in the Job List screen.
The Job List screen varies depending on whether Job Order is selected with Print Priority for the System
Settings. For details about setting procedure, see "System Settings", General Settings Guide.
When [Job Order] is not selected:
The job list is displayed for each of the functions.

BLX012S

When [Job Order] is selected:

The job list is displayed for all functions in the order of print jobs.

11
 BLX011S

1. Switches between job lists for each function.

2. Switches between [Current / Waiting Job List] and [Job History].
3. Displays reserved job numbers.
4. Displays the function used to print jobs.
: Job printed using copy function
: Job printed using printer function
: Job printed using Document Server function
: Job printed using DeskTopBinder
: Job printed using Web Image Monitor

Checking Jobs in the Job List

You can check the contents of jobs in the job list.

1. Press [Job List].

2. Select a job whose contents you want to check.

3. Press [Details], and then check the contents.

4. Press [Exit].

12
Changing the Order of Jobs

You can change the order of jobs in the job list.

1. Press [Job List].

2. Select a job whose order you want to change.

3. Press [Change Order].

4. Change the order using [Top], [Previous], or [Next].

5. Press [OK].

Holding Jobs

You can hold jobs that are queued or currently printing.

1. Press [Job List].

2. Select a job you want to hold.

13
 3. Press [Suspend Printing].
The selected job and the jobs that follow it are suspended. "Suspended" is displayed at the left of the
jobs in the job list that are suspended.

• To resume the suspended jobs, press [Resume Printing].

• This function is available only if [Job Order] is specified.

Deleting Jobs

You can delete a job that is queued or currently printing.

1. Press [Job List].

2. Select a job you want to delete.

To delete multiple print jobs, select all print jobs you want to delete.
3. Press [Delete Reservation].
4. Press [OK].

Checking the Job History

You can view the history and contents of completed print jobs.

1. Press [Job List].

2. Press [Job History].
A list of completed print jobs appears.
3. Select a job whose contents you want to check.
4. Press [Details], and then check the contents.
5. Press [Exit].

14
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray
This section gives instructions for setting paper on the bypass tray.
For details about paper size and paper type, see "Paper Size and Paper Type", About This Machine.

• Paper sizes that can be loaded onto the bypass tray are 182 - 2000 mm (7.17 - 78.74 in.) vertical,
and 210 - 914.4 mm (8.27 - 36 in.) horizontal.
• Insert the paper in the bypass tray lengthwise or sideways to fit it onto the feeding orientation.
• The following functions are disabled when printing from the bypass tray:
• Auto Tray Select
• Auto Tray Switching
• Folding(when the optional folding finisher installed)

1. Set the paper size using the printer driver or control panel.
2. Adjust the bypass tray's paper guides to the size of the paper.
If the paper size of the paper guide and the paper do not match, skewing and misfeeds might occur.

BKW004S

3. Send the print job to the machine.

4. Gently push the paper face up into the bypass tray until the beeper sounds.
Place the paper centrally, so that the space on either side of its edges is even.
Then push it carefully in, so that it makes light contact with the feed rollers.
Support the paper with your hands until it feeds in.
The paper feeds into the machine automatically and printing starts.

15
 BKW005S

5. Check that the paper is properly fed.

• When the Panel Key Sound is turned off, it will not sound if you insert paper into the bypass tray. For
details about Panel Key Sound, see "System Settings", General Settings Guide.
• When loading translucent paper or film, set paper size and paper type.
• If you are printing multiple pages, feed the next sheet.
• Do not print on both sides of the paper.
• Do not use paper already copied or printed on.
• For details about paper type and orientation that can be loaded in the bypass tray, see "Copy Paper",
About This Machine.
• To set a rolled paper, pull out the lower output auxiliary guide to the front, and then place the rolled
paper on it.
• For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help.

Setting the Paper Size Using the Control Panel

Follow the procedure below to set the machine using the control panel when loading standard size paper
onto the bypass tray.

• The following procedures are not required if you select [Driver / Command] from [Bypass Tray Setting
Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see "Printer Features", General Settings Guide). In that case,
set the paper size using the printer driver.
• Under [Printer Features], [System], if you set [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] to [Driver / Command],
paper size settings made on the printer driver must match those made on the control panel. If they do
not match, an error message appears and printing stops if [Printer Features], [System], [Auto Continue]
is not set. For details about [Printer Features] settings, see General Settings Guide.

16
1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the control panel.

BLX002S

2. Press [System Settings].

3. Press the [Tray Paper Settings] tab.

4. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].

5. Select the paper size.

6. Press [OK].
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
The initial screen appears.

• When loading thick paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies, set paper size and paper type.

17
 • For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help.

Setting Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel

Follow the procedure below to set the machine using the control panel when loading custom size paper
onto the bypass tray.

• Paper sizes that can be loaded onto the bypass tray are 182 - 2000 mm (7.17 - 78.74 in.) vertical,
and 210 - 914.4 mm (8.27 - 36 in.) horizontal.
• The following procedures are not required if you select [Driver / Command] from [Bypass Tray Setting
Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see "Printer Features", General Settings Guide). In that case,
set the paper size using the printer driver.
• If you select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features]
(see "Printer Features", General Settings Guide), the settings made using the control panel have priority
over the printer driver settings.
• If the printer driver is not used, select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System]
of [Printer Features] (see "Printer Features", General Settings Guide). Set paper size using the control
panel.

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the control panel.

BLX002S

2. Press [System Settings].

3. Press the [Tray Paper Settings] tab.
4. Press [Printer Bypass Paper Size].

18
 5. Press [Custom Size].

If a custom size is already set, press [Change Size].

6. Press [Vertical], enter the vertical size of the paper using the number keys, and then press
the [ ] key.

7. Press [Horizontal], enter the horizontal size of the paper using the number keys, and then
press the [ ] key.
8. Press [OK].
The paper sizes entered are displayed.
9. Press [OK].
10. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
The initial screen appears.

• When loading thick paper, thin paper, or OHP transparencies, set paper size and paper type.
• For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help.

Setting Translucent Paper or Film Using the Control Panel

Follow the procedure below to set the machine using the control panel when loading thick paper, thin
paper, or OHP transparencies onto the bypass tray.

19
 • The following procedures are not required if you select [Driver / Command] from [Bypass Tray Setting
Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see "Printer Features", General Settings Guide). In that case,
set the paper size using the printer driver.
• If you select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features]
(see "Printer Features", General Settings Guide), the settings made using the control panel have priority
over the printer driver settings.
• If the printer driver is not used, select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray Setting Priority] in [System]
of [Printer Features] (see "Printer Features", General Settings Guide). Set the paper size using the
control panel.

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the control panel.

BLX002S

2. Press [System Settings].

3. Press the [Tray Paper Settings] tab.
4. Press [ Next] to scroll through the list.
5. Press [Paper Type: Paper Bypass].

20
6. Press [Translucent Paper] or [Film] on the [Paper Type] area when loading translucent paper
or film.

7. Press [OK].
The paper type selected is displayed.
8. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
The initial screen appears.

• The settings made will remain valid until they are reset again. After printing on translucent paper or
film, make sure to clear settings for the next user.
• For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help.

21
22
1. Preparing the Machine
This chapter describes how to connect this machine to your computer, and install the printer driver.

1
Confirming the Connection Method
This machine supports network and local connection.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the machine is connected. Follow the driver installation
procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.

Network Connection

This machine can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.

Using this machine as the Windows printing port

Network connections can be established through Ethernet, and Wireless LAN.
Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating system version and
connection method used.

BLX004S

Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2

Connection Method Available Ports

• Ethernet • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

23
 1. Preparing the Machine

Connection Method Available Ports

• Wireless LAN • Standard TCP/IP port
• LPR port
1
Windows Vista

Connection Method Available Ports

• Ethernet • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

• Wireless LAN • Standard TCP/IP port
• LPR port
• WSD port

• See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of port.
• For details about SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, see "Installing the Printer Driver".
• For details about Standard TCP/IP port, see "Installing the Printer Driver".
• For details about LPR port, see "Installing the Printer Driver".
• For details about WSD port, see "Installing the Printer Driver".

• p.26 "Installing the Printer Driver"

Using as a network printer

This machine can be used as the Windows network printer, the NetWare print server, or the NetWare
remote printer.

24
 Confirming the Connection Method

BLX005S

• In an IPv6 environment, NetWare servers cannot be used.

• See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of network printer.
• For details about Windows network printer, see "Using as a Windows Network Printer".
• For details about NetWare print server and remote printer, see "Using as a NetWare Print Server /
Remote Printer".

• p.37 "Using as a Windows Network Printer"

• p.39 "Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer"

Local Connection

Local connections can be established via parallel and USB connections.

• See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each method of connections.
• For details about USB connections, see "Installing the Printer Driver Using USB".
• For details about parallel connections, see "Printing with Parallel Connection".

• p.42 "Installing the Printer Driver Using USB"

• p.46 "Printing with Parallel Connection"

25
 1. Preparing the Machine

Installing the Printer Driver

This section explains how to install the printer driver. There are two ways to install the printer driver: using
1 Quick Install, which installs the settings at once, or installing the appropriate driver according to the port
you want to use.
Downloading the Printer Driver
You can install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with this machine or download it from
the supplier's Web site.
If your operating system is Windows XP Pro x64 or Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 x64, you must
download the printer driver from the supplier's Web site. Select this machine and the operating system
you are using, and then download it.

Quick Install

Users of Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 can install this software
easily using the supplied CD-ROM.
Using Quick Install, the RPCS printer driver, DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client are installed
under network environment, and the TCP/IP port will be set.

• To install the printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server 2003 / 2003
R2, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
• If you connect using USB, see "Installing the Printer Driver Using USB" and install the printer driver.

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
4. Click [Quick Install].
The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
5. After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
For network connection via TCP/IP, select the machine whose IP address is displayed in [Connect
To].
For parallel connection, select the machine whose printer port is displayed in [Connect To].

26
 Installing the Printer Driver

7. Click [Install].
The printer driver installation starts.
8. Click [Finish].
A message about restarting the computer appears. Restart the computer to complete installation. 1
9. Click [Exit] in the first dialog box of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.

• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch "Setup.exe" on
the CD-ROM root directory.
• Select a machine to whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To] to install SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client when using TCP/IP.
• Quick Install is not available unless bidirectional communication between the machine and computer
is enabled via parallel connection. For details about bidirectional communication between the
machine and computer, see "Making Option Settings for the Printer".

• p.42 "Installing the Printer Driver Using USB"

• p.48 "Making Option Settings for the Printer"

Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port

Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

• To install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server
2003 / 2003 R2, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an
Administrator.
• Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the printer driver when using the
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.

27
 1. Preparing the Machine

4. Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client].

5. The message to quit all other applications appears. Quit all applications, and then click [Next
>].

1 6. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading through its contents, click [Yes].
7. Click [Full install] or [Custom install].
[Full install] installs all required applications: DeskTopBinder Lite and SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client.
[Custom install] installs selected applications.
8. Follow the instructions on the display and then click [Next >] to proceed to the next step.
9. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and click [Complete].
Restart the computer to complete installation.

• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch "Setup.exe" on
the CD-ROM root directory.

Changing the port settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to change the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout,
recovery/parallel printing, and printer groups.

Windows 2000:

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

The [Printers] window appears.
2. Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
3. On the [Ports] tab, click [Configure Port].
The [Configuration] dialog box appears.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2:

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
2. Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
3. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Configuration] dialog box appears.

28
 Installing the Printer Driver

Windows Vista:

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].

The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. Click [Printer]. 1
The [Printers] window appears.
3. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties].
4. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Configuration:] dialog box appears.

• For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.

• User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.
• If no settings on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab are available, follow the procedure below.
1. Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
2. Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon
on the task tray.
3. Point to [Properties], and then click [Extended Features Settings].
4. Select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box.
5. Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
• For details about these settings, see "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client", Network Guide, or
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

Installing the RPCS printer driver (TCP/IP)

• To install this printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server 2003 / 2003
R2, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or
Power Users group member.

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
4. Click [RPCS Printer Drivers].

29
 1. Preparing the Machine

5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
1 You can select several printer drivers.
7. Click [Next >].
8. Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
9. Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system, printer
model, and port.
10. Click [Port], and then click [Add].
11. Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
12. Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
13. Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a machine not listed
here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address or host name of the machine.
14. Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].
15. Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols can be entered.
16. Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
17. Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
18. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].

• Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check statistics about
the number of sheets which each user prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch "Setup.exe" on
the CD-ROM root directory.
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See "When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver", Trouble Shooting.

30
 Installing the Printer Driver

Installing the RPCS printer driver (IPP)

• To install printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2,
you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power 1
Users group member.

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
4. Click [RPCS Printer Drivers].
5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
7. Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
8. Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system, printer
model, and port.
9. Click [Port], and then click [Add].
10. Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
11. Click [IPP].
12. In the [Printer URL] box, enter "http://printer's IP address/printer" as the printer's address.
If the server authentication is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter
"https://printer's IP address/printer" (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://printer's IP address/ipp" as the printer's address.
13. Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the
one of any existing ports.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port
name.

31
 1. Preparing the Machine

14. Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.

For details about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
15. Click [OK].
1 16. Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].
17. Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols can be entered.
18. Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
19. Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
20. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.

• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case, launch "Setup.exe" on the
CD-ROM root directory.
• Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check the number
of sheets each user prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See "When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver", TroubleShooting.

Using the Standard TCP/IP port

This describes how to install the RPCS printer driver using the TCP/IP port.

• To install this printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server 2003 / 2003
R2, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or
Power Users group member.
• In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP Port. Use the SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client port.

Installing the RPCS Printer Driver

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.

32
 Installing the Printer Driver

3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].

The default interface language is English.
4. Click [RPCS Printer Driver].
5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. 1
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
7. Click [Next >].
8. Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
9. Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system, printer
model, and port.
10. Click [Port], and then click [Add].
11. Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [OK].
Configure the Standard TCP/IP port settings, and then see Windows Help if [Standard TCP/IP Port]
does not appear.
12. Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
13. Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
The [Port Name] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name if necessary.
When the device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter Driver C Model".
14. Click [Next >].
15. Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
The installation start dialog box reappears.
16. Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].
17. Configure the default printer as necessary.
18. Click [Continue].
The printer driver installation starts.
19. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.

• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.

33
 1. Preparing the Machine

• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case, launch "Setup.exe" on the
CD-ROM root directory.
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you

1 cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See "When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver", TroubleShooting.

Using the LPR port

This describes how to install the RPCS printer driver using the LPR port.

• To install this printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server 2003 / 2003
R2, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or
Power Users group member.

Installing the RPCS Printer Driver

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
4. Click [RPCS Printer Drivers].
5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
7. Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
8. Click [Next >].
9. Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system, printer
model, and port.
10. Click [Port], and then click [Add].
11. Click [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
If [LPR Port] does not appear, see Windows Help and install it.
12. Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box.

34
 Installing the Printer Driver

13. Enter "lp" in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then click [OK].
The port is added.
14. Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].
15. Configure the default printer as necessary. 1
16. Click [Continue].
The printer driver installation starts.
17. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.

• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case, launch "Setup.exe" on the
CD-ROM root directory.
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See "When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver", TroubleShooting.

Using the WSD port

This section explains installation when using the WSD port.

• The WSD port can be used only under Windows Vista.

• To install under Windows Vista, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log
on as an Administrator.
• If the machine is connected using the WSD port, bi-directional communication is not possible. For
details about bi-directional communication, see "Making Option Settings for the Printer".
• You can connect to the machine only if both the machine and computer are on the same network
segment, or Windows Vista "Network discovery" is enabled. For details, see Windows Help.

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. On the [Start] menu, click [Network].
The [Network] window appears, and the device search begins automatically.
3. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Install].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
The [Found New Hardware] dialog box appears.

35
 1. Preparing the Machine

4. Click [Locate and install driver software (Recommended)].

If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
5. Click [Don't search online].
1 6. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
7. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the computer's CD-ROM drive.
If the [AutoPlay] dialog box appears, click the [close] button and then proceed to step 8.
8. Click [Browse...], and then specify a location for the printer driver.
If the CD-ROM drive letter is D, the printer driver's source files are stored in "D:\DRIVERS\RPCS
\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1".
9. Click [Next].
If the [Windows can't verify the publisher of this driver software] message appears, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
10. Click [Close].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "WSD" port is added to the [Printers]
window.

• The port name that follows "WSD" uses random character strings. It cannot be changed freely.
• To stop the installation, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When re-installing the WSD
Port, right-click the machine's icon in the [Network] window, and then click [Uninstall].

• p.48 "Making Option Settings for the Printer"

36
 Using as a Windows Network Printer

Using as a Windows Network Printer

This describes how to install the RPCS printer driver when using the printer as a Windows network printer.
To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting "Network printer server", and then select the 1
Windows 2000 / XP / Vista or Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 shared printer.
This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000 /
XP / Vista or Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 print server. Do not begin the following procedure before
the client is set up and configured correctly.

• To install the printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server 2003 / 2003
R2, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or
Power Users group member.
• If you print with a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, Recovery
Printing and Parallel Printing cannot be used from the client.
• If you print under Windows XP / Vista or Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 print server, notification
functions of SmartDeviceMonitor may not be used with the client.

Installing the RPCS Printer Driver

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
4. Click [RPCS Printer Driver].
5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
7. Click [Next >].
8. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer models you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
9. Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system, printer
model, and port.
10. Click [Port], and then click [Add].

37
 1. Preparing the Machine

11. Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].

12. Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Browse for Printer]
window.

1 13. Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
14. Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].
15. Configure the user code as necessary.
For an RPCS printer driver, a user code can be set after the printer driver installation.
For details about user code, see the printer driver Help.
16. Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
17. Click [Continue].
The printer driver installation starts.
18. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.

• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case, launch "Setup.exe" on the
CD-ROM root directory.
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run.
• If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See "When a Message Appears during
Installation of the Printer Driver", TroubleShooting.

38
 Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer

Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote

Printer
This describes how to set up the Windows computer used as the NetWare client.
1

• To install this printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server 2003 / 2003
R2, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or
Power Users group member.
• In an IPv6 environment, NetWare servers cannot be used.
The following explanation assumes NetWare Client is installed on the client computer and the NetWare
server environment is correctly set up. Install all necessary client applications before following this
procedure.
Set up the printer driver while logging on to the NetWare file server.

1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case, launch "Setup.exe" on the
CD-ROM root directory.
2. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
3. Click [RPCS Printer Drivers].
4. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
5. Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
6. Click [Next >].
7. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
8. Double - click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system, printer
model, and port.
9. Click [Port], and then click [Add].
10. Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
11. Double - click the name of the NetWare file server on the network tree.
The created queue is displayed.

39
 1. Preparing the Machine

12. Select the print queue, and then click [OK].

13. Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].
14. Click [Continue].
1 The printer driver installation starts.
15. Click [Finish] in the [Select Program] dialog box.
16. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
17. After restarting the computer, launch the [Printers and Faxes] window, and then open the
printer properties.
18. On the [NetWare setting] tab, clear the [Form Feed] and [Enable Banner] check boxes.
Do not select these check boxes since they are automatically selected by the printer driver. If you
select the check boxes, the printer may not print correctly.
19. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.

• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
• The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using SmartDeviceMonitor or Telnet.

Form Feed

Do not use NetWare to configure form feed. Form feed is controlled by the printer driver on Windows. If
NetWare form feed is configured, the printer may not print properly.
Follow the procedure below to disable form feed according to the operating system used:
• Under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista or Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2, clear the [Form feed]
check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

Banner Page

Do not use NetWare to configure a banner page.

Follow the procedure below to disable banner pages according to the operating system used:
• Under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista or Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2, clear the [Enable banner]
check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

40
 Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer

Printing after Resetting the Printer

Printer to print server connection requires 30 - 40 seconds to resume after the printer is reset. During this
period, jobs may be accepted (depending on NetWare specifications) but not printed.
1
To print after resetting the printer as the remote printer, check on the print server that the remote printer is
disconnected, or wait for two minutes before trying to print.

41
 1. Preparing the Machine

Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.
1 Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are in
progress.
You can use the printer driver included on the CD-ROM provided with this machine, or can download it
from the supplier's Web site.

Windows 2000 - USB

• To install a printer driver, you must have Administrator privilege. Log on using an account that has
Administrator privilege.
When USB is first used, Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed
automatically.
If the printer driver is already installed and plug-and-play is enabled, the icon of the printer connected to
the "USB" port appears in the [Printers] window.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
If the printer driver is not already installed, follow the printer's plug-and-play instructions to install it from
the provided CD-ROM.

1. Connect the machine to the computer using a USB cable.

Connect the USB cable firmly.
2. In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, click [Search for a suitable driver for my
device (recommended)], and then click [Next >].
3. Select the [Specify location] check box, and then click [Next >].
4. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
To disable Auto Run, press the left [Shift] key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it
pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
5. Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver are stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:
• RPCS
D: DRIVERS RPCS XP_VISTA (Language) DISK1
• PostScript 3
D: DRIVERS PS XP_VISTA (Language) DISK1

42
 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

6. Check the printer driver location, and then click [OK].

7. Click [Next >].
8. Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed, and plug and play is enabled, the icon of the printer 1
connected to the "USB001" port appears in the [Printers] window.

• The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers that the computer is connected
to.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 - USB

• To install a printer driver, you must have Administrators privilege. Log on using an account that has
Administrators privilege.
When USB is first used, Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed
automatically.
If the printer driver is already installed and plug-and-play is enabled, the icon of the printer connected to
the "USB" port appears in the [Printers and Faxes] window.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
If the printer driver is not already installed, follow the printer's plug-and-play instructions to install it from
the provided CD-ROM.

1. Connect the machine to the computer using a USB cable.

Connect the USB cable firmly.
2. In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, click [Install the software automatically
(Recommended)], and then click [Next >].
3. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
To disable Auto Run, press the left [Shift] key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it
pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
4. Select the [Include this location in the search] check box under [Search for the best driver in
these location], and then click [Browse] to select the printer driver location.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:
• RPCS
D: DRIVERS RPCS XP_VISTA (Language) DISK1
• PostScript 3

43
 1. Preparing the Machine

D: DRIVERS PS XP_VISTA (Language) DISK1

5. Check the printer driver location, and then click [Next >].
6. Click [Continue].
1 7. Click [Finish].
If the installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port appears in the
[Printers and Faxes] window.

• The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers that the computer is connected
to.

Windows Vista - USB

• To install a printer driver, you must have Administrators privilege. Log on using an account that has
Administrators privilege.
If the printer driver is already installed and plug-and-play is enabled, the icon of the printer connected to
the "USB" port appears in the [Printers] window.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
If the printer driver is not already installed, follow the printer's plug-and-play instructions to install it from
the provided CD-ROM.

1. Connect the machine to the computer using a USB cable.

Connect the USB cable firmly.
The [Found New Hardware] dialog box appears.
2. Click [Locate and install driver software (Recommended)].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
3. Click [Don't search online].
A message prompting you to insert the provided CD-ROM appears.
4. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the computer's CD-ROM drive.
The printer driver search begins, and a list of printer drivers appears.
5. Select the printer driver you want to use, and then click [Next].
If the [Windows can't verify the publisher of this driver software] message appears, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
6. Click [Close].
If the installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port appears in the
[Printers] window.

44
 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

• The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers that the computer is connected
to.
1

45
 1. Preparing the Machine

Printing with Parallel Connection

This describes how to install the RPCS printer driver when using the parallel port.
1 To use a machine connected using a parallel interface, click [LPT1] when installing the printer driver.

• To install this printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista and Windows Server 2003 / 2003
R2, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or
Power Users group member.

Installing the RPCS Printer Driver

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
4. Click [RPCS Printer Drivers].
5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
7. Click [Next >].
8. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
9. Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system, printer
model, and port.
10. Check that [LPT1:] is shown in [Port].
11. Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
12. Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
13. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.

46
 Printing with Parallel Connection

• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case, launch "Setup.exe" on the
CD-ROM root directory. 1
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See "Massages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver", Trouble Shooting.

47
 1. Preparing the Machine

Making Option Settings for the Printer

Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional communication is disabled.
1
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication

Bidirectional communication allows information about paper size and feed direction settings to be
automatically sent to the printer. You can check machine status from your computer.
• Bidirectional communication is supported by Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server
2003 / 2003 R2.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional communication is enabled under Windows 2000,
the [Change Accessories] tab is unavailable.

• The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional communication and updates the machine status
automatically.
To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
When connected with parallel cables
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must support bidirectional communication.
• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cables and parallel
connectors.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer
pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS printer driver.
When connected with the network
• The machine must support bidirectional communication.
• The standard TCP/IP port must be used.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS printer driver.
• In addition to the above, following conditions must also be met:
• The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port and the TCP/IP protocol must be used. When using
the IPP protocol, the IPP port name must include the IP address.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS printer driver.

48
 Making Option Settings for the Printer

When connected with USB

• The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable (for
Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2).
• The computer must support bidirectional communication. 1
• Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the supplied CD-ROM.

If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled

Set up option settings when bidirectional communication is disabled.

• Under Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, and Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2, Manage Printers
permission is required to change the printer properties in the [Printers] folder. Log on as an
Administrators or Power Users group member.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
When using Windows 2000, point to [Settings] on the [Start] menu, and then click [Printers]. The
[Printers] window appears.
When using Windows Vista, click [Control Panel] on the [start] menu, and then click [Printer]. The
[Printers] window appears.
2. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
When using Windows Vista, right-click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click the
[Properties].
4. Click the [Change Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Change Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection is enabled. In this
case, no change is necessary for option settings.
If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab.
5. Select options installed from the [Select printer options:] area, and then make the necessary
settings.
6. Select the total amount of the memory in [Total memory:] when the optional SDRAM module
is added.
7. Under [Paper source tray settings:], click the tray to be used, and then select the appropriate
size, position, and type for the tray. Select the [Do not use Auto Tray Select] check box to
exclude the tray from the targets of automatic tray selection.
8. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.

49
 1. Preparing the Machine

Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or

7.0
1 Under Windows 2000 / XP, or Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 with Adobe PageMaker, you need to
copy PPD files to the PageMaker folder.
PPD files have the .ppd extension in the folder "DRIVERS PS XP_VISTA (Language) DISK1" on the CD-
ROM.
The "XP_VISTA" folder inside the "PS" folder is for Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003 / 2003
R2. Use the folder that is appropriate for the operating system you are currently using.
The third folder "(Language)" may be substituted by an appropriate language name.
Copy the .ppd file to the PageMaker folder.
• For PageMaker 6.0 default installation
The directory is "C: PM6 RSRC PPD4".
• For PageMaker 6.5 default installation
The directory is "C: PM65 RSRC USENGLISH PPD4".
The "USENGLISH" may vary depending on your language selection.
• For PageMaker 7.0 default installation
The directory is "C: PM7 RSRC USENGLISH PPD4".
The "USENGLISH" may vary depending on your language selection.

• If the driver is not set correctly after copying the ".ppd" file, printing may not be performed properly.
• When using PageMaker, the optional features that can be selected by the printer driver will not be
active. The following procedure describes how to activate the optional printer features.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print Document] dialog box appears.
2. Make the necessary settings in the [Features] box.

50
2. Setting Up the Printer Driver
This chapter explains the printer properties and how to make changes to the printer settings.

RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two dialog box types of the [Printer Properties] dialog box. 2
"Multi-tab" is used as an example in this manual. For details about changing the dialog box types, see the
printer driver Help.
Multi-tab
This dialog box type is designed for users who often change print settings to perform various printing
operations.
Custom Setting
This dialog box type is designed for users who rarely change print settings. This type of dialog box
may vary depending on the installed options.

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

This describes how to launch printer driver's properties.

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

• To change the printer's default settings (including settings for options), log on using an account that
has Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have
Manage Printers permission by default.
• You cannot change the printer default settings for individual users. Settings made in the [Printer
Properties] dialog box are applied to all users.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

The [Printers] window appears.
2. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.
When you open the [Printer Properties] dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, a confirmation message appears. After you click [OK], the [Printer Properties] dialog box
appears.
4. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].

51
 2. Setting Up the Printer Driver

• The settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - printing preferences

2
• You cannot change the printer default settings for individual users. Settings made in the [Printer
Properties] dialog box are applied to all users.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

The [Printers] window appears.
2. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
4. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].

• The settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that
application. The following procedure explains making printer settings for Windows 2000 WordPad as an
example of how to make printer settings for a specific application.

1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

The [Print] dialog box appears.
2. Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
3. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].

• Procedures for opening the [Printing Preferences] dialog box vary depending on the application. For
details, see the manuals provided with the application.
• Any settings you make using this procedure apply to the current application only.
• General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of an application. Settings
made here are used the defaults when printing from the application.

52
 RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties

• For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

2
• To change the printer's default settings (including settings for options), log on using an account that
has Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have
Manage Printers permission by default.
• You cannot change the printer default settings for individual users. Settings made in the [Printer
Properties] dialog box are applied to all users.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
2. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.
When you open the [Printer Properties] dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, a confirmation message appears. After you click [OK], the [Printer Properties] dialog box
appears.
4. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].

• The settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - printing preferences

• You cannot change the printer default settings for individual users. Settings made in the [Printer
Properties] dialog box are applied to all users.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
2. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.

53
 2. Setting Up the Printer Driver

4. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].

• The settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.

2 Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that
application. The following procedure explains making printer settings for Windows XP WordPad as an
example of how to make printer settings for a specific application.

1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

The [Print] dialog box appears.
2. In the [Select Printer] list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
4. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].

• Procedures for opening the [Printing Preferences] dialog box vary depending on the application. For
details, see the manuals provided with the application.
• Any settings you make using this procedure apply to the current application only.
• General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of an application. Settings
made here are used the defaults when printing from the application.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows Vista - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

• To change the printer's default settings (including settings for options), log on using an account that
has Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators group have Manage Printers
permission by default.
• You cannot change the printer default settings for individual users. Settings made in the [Printer
Properties] dialog box are applied to all users.

54
 RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].

The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. In "Hardware and Sound", click [Printer].
3. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties].
The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.
When you open the [Printer Properties] dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer 2
driver, a confirmation message appears. After you click [OK], the [Printer Properties] dialog box
appears.
4. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].

• The settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - printing preferences

• You cannot change the printer default settings for individual users. Settings made in the [Pinter
Preferences] dialog box are applied to all users.

1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].

The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. In "Hardware and Sound", click [Printer].
3. Right click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
4. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].

• The settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that
application. The following procedure explains making printer settings for Windows Vista WordPad as an
example of how to make printer settings for a specific application.

55
 2. Setting Up the Printer Driver

1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

The [Print] dialog box appears.
2. In the [Select Printer] list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.

2 4. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].

• Procedures for opening the [Printing Preferences] dialog box vary depending on the application. For
details, see the manuals provided with the application.
• Any settings you make using this procedure apply to the current application only.
• General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of an application. Settings
made here are used the defaults when printing from the application.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.

56
3. Other Print Operations
This chapter explains the various printing functions, including Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, Stored
Print, and PDF Direct Print.

Printing a PDF File Directly

You can send PDF files directly to the machine for printing, without having to open a PDF application.

3
• This function is possible only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
• This function is possible for genuine Adobe PDF files only.
• Version 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.6 PDF files are compatible.
• PDF files created using PDF version 1.5 Crypt Filter functions or more than eight DeviceN Color Space
components cannot be printed.
• PDF files created using PDF version 1.6 watermark note functions or extended optional contents cannot
be printed.
• PDF version 1.7 (Acrobat 8.0) files created without any functions that are exclusive to PDF version
1.7 can be printed.
• Due to reasons such as insufficient memory, some types of high compression PDF files might not be
printable.

• Paper size errors may occur when printing on custom size paper.

Printing Method

There are the two methods of printing the PDF files directly, either using the DeskTopBinder Lite, or entering
commands.

Using DeskTopBinder Lite

Installing DeskTopBinder Lite

Follow the procedure below to install DeskTopBinder Lite.

1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the "Scanner Driver and Utilities" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.

57
 3. Other Print Operations

Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe",
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
3. Click [DeskTopBinder Lite].
The [DeskTopBinder Lite] dialog box appears.
4. Click [DeskTopBinder Lite], and then click [OK].
5. Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTopBinder Lite.
If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTopBinder Lite, restart the computer
and continue the configuration.
3
DeskTopBinder Lite enhancements
Follow the DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement procedure to print PDF files directly.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and then click [Extended
Features Wizard].
The [Extended Features Wizard] dialog box appears.
2. Click [Start], and then click [Next>] repeatedly until the [Printing Function2] dialog box
appears.
3. In the [Printing Function2] dialog box, click [Add...].
The [PDF Direct Print Properties] dialog box appears.
4. Select the driver for this machine, and then click [OK].
The [PDF Direct Print Properties] dialog box closes.
5. Click [Next>] repeatedly until [Finish] appears.
6. Click [Finish].

Function Palette
The Function palette contains buttons for functions that are already configured through DeskTopBinder
Lite enhancement. Using these buttons, you can print Windows files, preview printouts, convert images,
and register scanners for documents without having to open DeskTopBinder Lite. You can also use these
functions simply by dragging a target file to the button corresponding to the required function and dropping
it there.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and then click [Function
Palette].
An icon for the Function palette is added to the task tray displayed at the bottom right of the screen.
2. Right-click the new icon that has been added to the task tray, and then click [Properties...].
The [Properties] dialog box appears.

58
 Printing a PDF File Directly

3. Click the [Contents] tab, select the [PDF Direct Print] check box at the center, and then click
[OK].
The [Properties] screen closes and the [PDF Direct Print] icon is added to the palette.

PDF Direct Printing

Follow the procedure below to print PDF files directly.

1. Drag the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon on the Function Palette and
drop it there. 3
The [Output File List-PDF Direct Print] dialog box appears.
2. Highlight the PDF file you want to print, and then click [OK].
The PDF file is printed.

Printing PDF Password-Protected Documents

Follow the procedure below to print password-protected PDF files.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and then click [Extended
Features Wizard].
The [Extended Features Wizard] dialog box appears.
2. Click [Start], and then click [Next>] repeatedly until the [Printing Function2] dialog box
appears.
3. In the [Printing Function2] dialog box, click [Properties...].
The [PDF Direct Print Properties] dialog box appears.
4. Select the [Use PDF Password] check box at the bottom right of the dialog box, and then
click [OK].
5. Click [Next>] repeatedly until [Finish] appears.
6. Click [Finish].
The [Extended Features Wizard] dialog box closes.
7. Drag the PDF file you want to print over the PDF Direct Printing icon on the Function Palette
and drop it there.
The [Output File List - PDF Direct Print] dialog box appears.
8. Click on the PDF file you want to print, making it appear highlighted, and then click [OK].
The [PDF Direct Print Properties] dialog box appears.
9. In the [PDF password:] box at the bottom right of the dialog box, enter the password for
the PDF file you want to print, and then click [OK].
The password-protected PDF file is printed.

59
 3. Other Print Operations

• Before printing a password-protected PDF file, perform one of the followings:

• In the [PDF Direct Print Properties] dialog box, enter the password for the PDF file you want to
print
• Specify a password for the PDF file by selecting [Change PDF Password] in the [PDF Menu] on
the machine's control panel.
• If a [PDF Group Password] for the [PDF Menu] has been specified using DeskTopBinder Lite or the
machine's control panel, the same group password must be set on the other also.
3
PDF Direct Print Properties

1 6
2
3 7
8

9
4
10
11
12
13
5

BLX007S

1. Setting name:
Displays the plug-in configuration name (up to 63 single byte characters)
2. Change Icon...
Changes the icon displayed on the tool bar.
3. Printer:
Displays a list of RPCS drivers that support PDF direct printing.
4. Layout
Prints multiple pages on a single sheet.
5. Display this dialog box before printing
Appears in PDF direct printing mode if this check box is selected.
6. Orientation:
Specify the original's orientation.
7. Number of copies
Specify the number of copies to print.

60
 Printing a PDF File Directly

8. Collate
Sorts printed sheets.
9. Range:
Specify which paper to print.
10. Printout paper size:
Specify the paper size you want copies to be printed onto.
11. Resolution:
Specify a print resolution.
12. PDF password: 3
Enter the password for password-protected PDF files. A password-protected PDF file cannot be printed unless its
password is entered here.
13. Group password:
If a group password is assigned to DeskTopBinder Lite and this machine, enter the group password in this field.
The group password must be entered for printing to start.

Using Commands

You can print PDF files directly, using commands such as "ftp", "sftp", and "lpr".
For details about UNIX commands, see UNIX Supplement.

61
 3. Other Print Operations

Using the Print Job Function

This describes how to print files stored in the machine.
The following types of printing can be selected using the printer driver: Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold
Print, and Stored Print.
You can print or delete the print jobs stored in the machine which is sent from computers.
If you select Sample Print, Locked Print, and Hold Print, the print files stored in the machine are deleted
after printing is completed. If you select Stored Print, the files remain in the machine even after printing is
3 finished.
If you press [Print Jobs] on the Printer screen, the Complete List or the List Per User ID screen appears
depending on which list type you select from [Initial Print Job List].

Complete List
If you select [Complete List] from [Initial Print Job List], the following screen appears:
16

15
14
13
1 12
2
3
4
5 11
6 10
7 9

8
BAC007S

1. [Jobs Per User ID]

Displays List Per User ID.
2. [Complete List]
Displays all files stored in the machine.
3. [Locked Print Job List]

62
 Using the Print Job Function

Displays only Locked Print files stored in the machine.

4. [Sample Print Job List]
Displays only Sample Print files stored in the machine.
5. [Hold Print Job List]
Displays only Hold Print files stored in the machine.
6. [Stored Print Job List]
Displays only Stored Print files stored in the machine.
7. [Details]
3
Displays details about a selected file.
8. [ Previous] / [ Next]
If the list of files does not fit on the screen, scroll up or down to view the list.
9. [Delete]
Deletes a selected file.
10. [Print]
Prints a selected file.
11. [Change Password]
Changes or deletes the password of a file if a password is set. To change the password, press [Change
Password], enter the current password, and then enter the new password on the confirmation screen.
To delete the password, press [Change Password], leave the entering/confirming a new password
box blank, and then press [OK].
You can also set passwords to the Stored Print files that do not currently have passwords.
12. [Clear All]
Clears all selections.
13. [Select All Jobs]
Selects all files stored in the machine.
14. Selected:
Displays number of the files selected.
15. [Exit]
Returns to the Printer screen.
16. User ID, Date / Time: , and File Name: display
Displays the time when the instruction to print the stored files was entered, the User IDs, and the file
names.
List Per User ID
If you select [List Per User ID] from [Initial Print Job List], the following screen appears:

63
 3. Other Print Operations

1 2

4
5

3
7
BAC008S

1. User ID
Displays the User IDs who sent files to the machine.
2. [Clear]
Clears a selection.
3. [Exit]
Returns to the Printer screen.
4. [Complete List]
Displays all print jobs.
5. [List Per User ID]
Displays the print job list of each ID.
6. [Print All Jobs]
Prints all selected type of files sent by the user ID.
7. [ Previous] / [ Next]
If the list of files does not fit on the screen, scroll up or down to view the list.

• Multiple files can be selected on the Print Jobs screen. To clear selection, press the selected print jobs
again.
• The display is not updated if a new file is stored while the list of stored files is displayed. To update
the display, press [Exit] to return to the Printer screen, and then press [Print Jobs] again.
• If a large number of print jobs is stored in the machine, processing may slow temporarily, depending
on which functions are used.
• If you press [List Per User ID] in the Complete List screen, the screen switches to the List Per User ID
screen where [Back] appears at the bottom right. Press [Back] to switch to the Complete List screen.
• For details about Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print, see "Printing from the Print
Job Screen".

64
 Using the Print Job Function

• p.67 "Printing from the Print Job Screen"

Selecting the Initial Print Job List

Follow the procedure below to set the initial Print Jobs screen, and to show it.

Selecting the Initial Print Job List

3
1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.

BLX002S

2. Press [Printer Features].

The Printer Features menu appears.
3. On the [System] tab, press [Initial Print Job List].
4. Select either [Complete List] or [List Per User ID].

After configuring the settings, the selected type of print job list is displayed.

65
 3. Other Print Operations

Displaying a Print Job List

1. Press the [Printer] key.

3
BLX003S

2. Press [Print Jobs].

Either the Complete List or List Per User ID screen appears.

66
 Printing from the Print Job Screen

Printing from the Print Job Screen

This describes about Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.

Sample Print

Use this function to print only the first set of a multiple-set print job. After you have checked the result,
remaining sets can be printed or canceled using the machine's control panel. This can reduce misprints due
to mistakes in contents or settings. 3
• A Sample Print file cannot be stored if:
• the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print files in the machine
is over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)
• the file contains over 1,000 pages.
• the machine's sent or stored files total over 3,000 pages. (The total varies depending on the size
of the files.)

• If a Sample Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the control panel.
• Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents in the machine remain. However, the [Auto
Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] settings are applied first.
• If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. By
default, Sample Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If a collate option is selected
from the application's [Print] dialog box, more prints than intended may be produced.
• If the first set of the Sample Print files is not as you expected and you do not want to print remaining
sets, delete the Sample Print file using the control panel. If you print the remaining sets of the Sample
Print file, the job in the machine is deleted automatically.
• For details about the error log on the control panel, see "Checking the Error Log".
• For details about the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] and [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs], see
"Printer Features", General Settings Guide.

• p.87 "Checking the Error Log"

Printing a Sample Print file

The following procedure describes how to print a Sample Print file with the RPCS printer driver. For details
about how to print a Sample Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see PostScript 3 Supplement
included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.

67
 3. Other Print Operations

• Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this function.
• If you are using Mac OS X, you need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher version to use this function.

1. Configure Sample Print in the printer driver's properties.

For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the relevant Help files.
2. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
Make sure to set more than two copies.
3 The Sample Print job is sent to the machine, and the first set is printed.
3. On the machine's control panel, press the [Printer] key to display the Printer screen.
4. Press [Print Jobs].

A list of print files stored in the machine appears.

5. Press [Sample Print Job List].

A list of Sample Print files stored in the machine appears.

Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.

68
 Printing from the Print Job Screen

6. Select the file you want to print, and press [Print].

7. Enter the new number of sets using the number keys. 3

You can enter up to 99 sets.

Press the [Clear/Stop] to correct any entry mistakes.
8. Press [Yes].
The remaining sets are printed.
Press [No] to cancel printing.

• If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be printed.
• If you select multiple documents and do not specify the number of sets on the confirmation screen,
one set less than the number specified on the computer is printed for every selected document. If the
number of sets specified on the computer is "1", one set each is printed for every document.
• When printing accumulated sample print documents, you cannot change the numbers of sets.
• When printing is completed, the stored file will be deleted.
• To stop printing after printing has started, press [Exit] until the Printer screen appears, and then press
[Job Reset]. The file will be deleted.

Deleting Sample Print files

If you are not satisfied with the sample printout, you can delete the Sample Print file, revise it and print it
again until the settings are suitable.

69
 3. Other Print Operations

1. Press the [Printer] key to display the Printer screen.

2. Press [Print Jobs].
A list of the print files stored in the machine appears.
3. Press [Sample Print Job List].
A list of Sample Print files stored in the machine appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
4. Select the file you want to delete, and then press [Delete].

3 The delete confirmation screen appears.

5. Press [Yes] to delete the file.
The selected file is deleted.

• If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].

• If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be deleted.

Locked Print

Use this function to maintain privacy when printing confidential documents on the machine over a shared
network. Usually, it is possible to print data using the control panel once it is stored in this machine. When
using Locked Print, it is not possible to print unless a password is entered on the machine's control panel.
Your confidential documents will be safe from being viewed by other people.

• A Locked Print file cannot be stored if:

• the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print files in the machine
is over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)
• the file contains over 1,000 pages.
• the machine's sent or stored files total over 3,000 pages. (The total varies depending on the size
of the files.)

• If a Locked Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the control panel.
• Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents remain. However, the [Auto Delete Temporary
Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] settings are applied first.
• If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. Locked
Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver as default. If a collate option is selected in
the application print dialog box, more sets than intended may be printed.
• After the Locked Print file is printed, the job is automatically deleted.

70
 Printing from the Print Job Screen

• For details about the error log on the control panel, see "Checking the Error Log".
• For details about the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] and [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs], see
"Printer Features", General Settings Guide.

• p.87 "Checking the Error Log"

Printing a Locked Print file

The following procedure describes how to print a Locked Print file with the RPCS printer driver. For details 3
about how to print a Locked Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see PostScript 3 Supplement
included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.

• Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this function.
• If you are using Mac OS X, you need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher to use this function.

1. Configure the Locked Print in the printer driver's properties.

For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the corresponding Help files.
2. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
The Locked Print job is sent to the machine.
3. On the machine's control panel, press the [Printer] key to display the Printer screen.
4. Press [Print Jobs].

A list of print files stored in the machine appears.

71
 3. Other Print Operations

5. Press [Locked Print Job List].

3 A list of Locked Print files stored in the machine appears.

Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
6. Select the file you want to print, and then press [Print].

The password screen appears.

7. Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].

The print confirmation screen appears.

A confirmation screen will appear if the password is not entered correctly. Press [Exit] to enter the
password again.
If multiple print files are selected, the machine prints files that correspond to the entered password.
The number of files to be printed is displayed on the confirmation screen.
If you forgot your password, ask your file administrator for help.
8. Press [Yes].
The locked file is printed.

72
 Printing from the Print Job Screen

Press [No] to cancel printing.

• When printing is completed, the stored file will be deleted.

• To stop printing after printing has started, press [Exit] until the Printer screen appears, and then press
[Job Reset]. The file will be deleted.

Deleting Locked Print files

1. Press the [Printer] key to display the Printer screen. 3

2. Press [Print Jobs].
3. Press [Locked Print Job List].
A list of Locked Print files stored appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
4. Select the file you want to delete, and then press [Delete].
The password screen is displayed.
5. Enter the password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
A confirmation screen will appear if the password is not entered correctly. Press [Exit] to enter the
password again.
If you forget your password, ask your file administrator for help.
6. Press [Yes].
The selected file is deleted.
If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].

• If multiple print files are selected, the machine deletes files that correspond to the entered password.
The number of files to be deleted is displayed on the confirmation screen.

Hold Print

Use this function to temporarily hold a file in the machine, and print it from the computer or the machine's
control panel later.

• A Hold Print file cannot be stored if:

• the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print files in the machine
is over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)

73
 3. Other Print Operations

• the file contains over 1,000 pages.

• the machine's sent or stored files total over 3,000 pages. (The total varies depending on the size
of the files.)

• If a Hold Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the control panel.
• Even after you turn off the machine, stored documents in the machine remain. However, the [Auto
Delete Temporary Print Jobs] or [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] settings are applied first.
• If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. By
3 default, Hold Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If a collate option is selected
from the application's Print dialog box, more prints than intended may be produced.
• For details about the error log on the control panel, see "Checking the Error Log"
• For details about the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] and [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs], see
"Printer Features", General Settings Guide.

• p.87 "Checking the Error Log"

Printing a Hold Print file

The following procedure describes how to print a Hold Print file with the RPCS printer driver. For details
about how to print a Hold Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see Postscript 3 Supplement included
as a PDF file in the supplied CD-ROM.

• Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this function.
• If you are using Mac OS X, you need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher to use this function.

1. Configure Hold Print in the printer driver's properties.

For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the relevant Help files.
2. Click [Details...], and then enter a User ID in the [User ID:] box.
3. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
The Hold Print job is sent to the machine and stored.
4. On the machine's control panel, press the [Printer] key to display the printer screen.

74
 Printing from the Print Job Screen

5. Press [Print Jobs].

3
6. Press [Hold Print Job List].

A list of Hold print files stored in the machine appears.

Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
7. Select the file you want to print, and press [Print].

The confirmation screen appears.

8. Press [Yes].
The Hold Print file is printed.
Press [No] to cancel printing.

• When printing is completed, the stored file is deleted.

• To stop printing after printing has started, press [Exit] until the Printer screen appears, and then press
[Job Reset]. The file will be deleted.

75
 3. Other Print Operations

• If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be printed.
• For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help.
• You can also print or delete a Hold Print file from Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image
Monitor Help.

Deleting Hold Print files

1. Press the [Printer] key to display the Printer screen.

3 2. Press [Print Jobs].
A list of print files stored in the machine appears.
3. Press [Hold Print Job List].
A list of Hold Print files stored in the machine appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
4. Select the file you want to delete, and then press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
5. Press [Yes] to delete the file.
The selected file is deleted.
If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].

• If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be deleted.

Stored Print

Use this function to store a file in the machine, and then print it from the computer or the machine's control
panel later.
Jobs are not deleted after they are printed, so the same job need not be re-sent in order to print multiple
copies.

• A Stored Print file cannot be stored if:

• the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print files in the machine
is over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)
• the file contains over 1,000 pages.
• the machine's sent or stored files total over 3,000 pages. (The total varies depending on the size
of the files.)

76
 Printing from the Print Job Screen

• If a Stored Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the control panel. Even after
you turn off the machine, stored documents remain. However, the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs]
or [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs] settings are applied first (see "Printer Features", General Settings
Guide).
• If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. By
default, Stored Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If a collate option is selected
from the application's Print dialog box, more prints than intended may be produced. You can
optionally set a document title and a password of a Stored Print file. For details about a password
setting, see the printer driver Help. 3
• For details about the error log on the control panel, see "Checking the Error Log".
• For details about the [Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs] and [Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs], see
"Printer Features", General Settings Guide.

• p.87 "Checking the Error Log"

Printing a Stored Print file

The following procedure describes how to print a Stored Print file with the RPCS printer driver. For details
about how to print a Stored Print file with the PostScript 3 printer driver, see Postscript 3 Supplement included
as a PDF file on the supplied CD-ROM.

• Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this function.
• If you are using Mac OS X, you need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher to use this function.

1. Configure Stored Print in the printer driver's properties.

You can select two methods of Stored Print:
• [Stored Print]
Stores the file in the printer and prints it later using the control panel.
• [Store and Normal Print]
Prints the file at once and also stores the file in the machine.
For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the relevant Help files.
2. Click [Details...], and then enter a User ID in the [User ID:] box.
You can also set a password. The same password must be entered when printing or deleting.
3. Start printing from the application's [Print] dialog box.
The Stored Print job is sent to the machine and stored.
4. On the machine's control panel, press the [Printer] key to display the Printer screen.

77
 3. Other Print Operations

5. Press [Print Jobs].

3
6. Press [Stored Print Job List].

A list of Stored Print files stored in the machine appears.

7. Select the file you want to print, and press [Print].

The confirmation screen appears.

If you set a password in the printer driver, a password confirmation screen appears. Enter the
password.
If multiple print files are selected, and some of these require a password, the machine prints files that
correspond to the entered password and files that do not require a password. The number of files to
be printed is displayed on the confirmation screen.
If you forgot your password, ask your file administrator for help.

78
 Printing from the Print Job Screen

8. Enter the number of sets using the number keys.

You can enter up to 99 sets. 3

Press the [Clear/Stop] key to correct any entry mistakes.
9. Press [Yes].
The Stored Print file is printed.
Press [No] to cancel printing.

• If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be printed. If
you select multiple documents, set numbers are determined based on the smallest set number specified
for a selected document.
• When printing accumulated stored print documents, you cannot change the numbers of sets.
• To stop printing after printing has started, press [Exit] until the Printer screen appears, and then press
[Job Reset]. A Stored Print file is not deleted even if [Job Reset] is pressed.
• The Stored Print file that sent to the machine is not deleted unless you delete a file or select [Auto Delete
Stored Print Jobs] (see "Printer Features", General Settings Guide).
• For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help.
• You can also print or delete a Stored Print file from Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image
Monitor Help.

Deleting Stored Print files

1. Press the [Printer] key to display the Printer screen.

2. Press [Print Jobs].
A list of print files stored in the machine appears.
3. Press [Stored Print Job List].
A list of Stored Print files stored in the machine appears.
Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.

79
 3. Other Print Operations

4. Select the file you want to delete, and press [Delete].

The delete confirmation screen appears.
If you set the password in the printer driver, enter the password to delete.
If multiple print files are selected, and some of these require a password, the machine deletes files
correspond to the entered password and files that do not require a password. The number of files to
be deleted is displayed on the confirmation screen.
If you forgot your password, ask your file administrator for help.
5. Press [Yes] to delete the file.
3 The selected file is deleted.
If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].

• If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be deleted.

80
 Printing from the Jobs Per User ID Screen

Printing from the Jobs Per User ID Screen

This describes how to print the files saved in the machine from the User ID screen.

Printing the Selected Print Job

1. Press the [Printer] key.

The Printer screen appears.
2. On the Printer screen, press [Print Jobs].
3

A list of user IDs whose files are stored in the machine appears.
3. Press the user ID whose file you want to print.

You cannot select multiple user IDs at the same time.

Press [ Previous] or [ Next] to scroll through the list.
Press [Clear] to cancel a selection.

81
 3. Other Print Operations

4. Press [List Per User ID].

3
The print job list of the selected user ID appears.
5. Select the desired print jobs.

To cancel a selection, press the highlighted print job again. To clear all selections, press [Clear All].
6. Press [Print].
The confirmation screen appears.
7. Press [Yes].
The selected files are printed.

• If you select multiple files, the confirmation screen displays the total number of files to be printed.

Printing All Print Jobs

1. Press the [Printer] key.

The Printer screen appears.
On the Printer screen, press [Print Jobs].

82
 Printing from the Jobs Per User ID Screen

A list of user IDs whose files are stored in the machine appears. 3
2. Press the user ID whose file you want to print.

You cannot select multiple user IDs at the same time.

Press [ Previous] or [ Next] to scroll through the list.
Press [Clear] to cancel a selection.
3. Press [Print All Jobs].

If the selected user ID has multiple types of print jobs, the selection screen of the print job type appears.

83
 3. Other Print Operations

4. Select the desired print job type, and then press [OK].

3 The confirmation screen appears.

The confirmation screen does not appear if the selected ID has only one type of print job.
5. Press [Yes].
The selected files are printed.

• After printing is completed, Sample Print, Locked Print, and Hold Print files are deleted.
• You cannot select a print job that is not stored under the selected user ID.
• If you select multiple Sample Print files and do not specify the number of sets on the confirmation
screen, one set less than the number specified on the computer is printed for every selected document.
If the number of sets specified on the computer is "1", one set each is printed for every document.
• If you select Stored Print, the number you set on the confirmation screen is applied to all files of the
selected print job type. If you do not set a quantity, the minimum number is applied to all files.
• If you select Locked Print, enter the correct password. If there are multiple passwords, the machine
prints only files that correspond to the entered password.
• If you select Stored Print files, and some of these require a password, the machine prints files that
correspond to the entered password and files that do not require a password.
• The confirmation screen displays the total number of files that have the selected user ID to be printed.

84
 Canceling a Print Job

Canceling a Print Job

This section gives instruction to stop printing from the computer or the control panel.

Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel

1. Press the [Printer] key.

The Printer screen appears.
2. Press [Job Reset].
3

3. Press [Reset the Job] or [Reset All Jobs].

• [Reset the Job]: cancels the print job currently being processed.
• [Reset All Jobs]: cancels all jobs in the print queue.
• [Resume Printing]: resumes printing print jobs.
A confirmation message appears.
4. Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.
5. Press [No] to return to the previous display.

Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer

You can cancel a print job from the computer if transferring print jobs is not completed.

85
 3. Other Print Operations

1. Double click the printer icon on the Windows task tray.

A window appears, showing all print jobs currently queued for printing. Check the current status of
the job you want to cancel.
2. Select the name of the job you want to cancel.
3. On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel].
4. Press the [Printer] key on the machine's control panel.

3 • If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's
print jobs.
• If the machine is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, sent print jobs may be canceled
if [Reset All Jobs] is pressed while "Waiting for print data..." is on the control panel. After the interval
set in [I/O Timeout] in Printer Features has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print job sent from
a different client computer will not be canceled in this case.
• Under Windows XP / Vista, or Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2, click [Cancel] on the [Document]
menu.
• Under Windows 2000, you can also open the print job queue window by double - clicking the
machine icon in the [Printers] machine window (the [Printers and Faxes] window under Windows XP
and Windows Server 2003/2003 R2).
• You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed. For this reason, printing may continue
for a few pages after you press [Job Reset].
• A print job containing a large volume of data may take considerable time to stop.

86
 Checking the Error Log

Checking the Error Log

If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors by checking the error log
on the control panel.

• The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added when there are 30 errors
already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the oldest error belongs to one of the following
print jobs, it is not deleted. The error is stored separately until the number of those errors reaches 30.
You can check any of these print jobs for error log information. 3
• Sample Print
• Locked Print
• Hold Print
• Stored Print
• If the main power switch is turned off, the error log is deleted.

1. Press the [Printer] key.

The Printer screen appears.
2. Press [Error Log].

An error log list appears.

Depending on the security settings, certain errors may not be displayed.
3. Press the desired job list.
You can select job list from [Complete List], [Locked Print Job List], [Sample Print Job List], [Hold Print
Job List], or [Stored Print Job List].
4. Select the print file you want to check, and then press [Details].
A detailed error log appears.
Press [ Previous] or [ Next] to scroll the error files.

87
 3. Other Print Operations

• Press [Exit] after checking the log.

• Press [Back to List] to return to the error log list.
• To print files that appear in the error log, resend them after stored files have been printed or deleted.
• [Error Log] is not available in simplified display mode. To view the error log, you must first switch to
normal display mode by pressing [Simplified Display] to turn into the normal display mode.

88
 Spool Printing

Spool Printing
Spool Printing allows print jobs transferred from a computer to be temporarily stored, and then prints them
after they are transferred. This shortens printing time as it maximizes printer efficiency.

• During Spool Printing, the hard disk is accessed and the Data In indicator blinks. Turning off the
computer or machine during Spool Printing can damage the hard disk. Also, if the computer or machine
is turned off during Spool Printing, spooled jobs will be deleted. Therefore, do not turn the power of
the computer or machine off during Spool Printing. 3
• If data is sent to the machine using other protocols besides "diprint", "lpr", "ipp", "ftp", "sftp", "smb",
and "ws-printer", Spool Printing cannot be performed.
Setting Spool Printing
Spool Printing can be set using telnet or Web Image Monitor.
• Using Web Image Monitor
For details, see Network Guide or Help for more information.
• Using telnet
Type in "spoolsw spool on" to set Spool Printing.
For details, see Network Guide for more information about telnet.
Viewing a list of spool jobs on the control panel
If Spool Printing is set, a list of spooled jobs can be viewed on the control panel screen.
Press the [Printer] key, and then press [Spooling Job List]. A list of spooled jobs appears.
• Deleting jobs
Select files to be deleted, and then press [Delete].
Viewing/Deleting spool jobs in Web Image Monitor
Start Web Image Monitor and enter the machine's IP address in the address bar. This displays the top
page.
For details, see Network Guide.

• Up to a maximum of 150 jobs at once can be spool printed.

• If Spool Printing is not set, you cannot select [Spooling Job List].
• Printing the first page with Spool Printing will be slow.
• The computer requires less print processing time when large amounts of data are spooled.
• Stored spool jobs can be viewed or deleted using Web Image Monitor.

89
 3. Other Print Operations

Printing with the Folding Finisher

You can fold printed paper by installing the optional folding finisher. Make sure you read the following
precautions when using the optional folding finisher.

• Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional communication is
disabled.
• Be sure to set the paper size and paper orientation in the printer driver when using combined printing
3 (layout).
• If you are feeding paper from the bypass tray, you cannot use the folding finisher function.
Connecting to the optional folding finisher unit
You cannot use the optional folding finisher unit under the following conditions or settings:
• The optional folding finisher unit is not attached to this machine.
• The bypass tray is selected for the feeding tray.
• The paper size and orientation is not properly set.
• [Film] and [Translucent Paper] is selected for the paper type.
• The Folding Finisher Tray is not selected as the paper output tray.
• The [Normal Print] is not selected as the printing method.

• Depending on the application, print settings may not be enabled and printed output may not be as
expected.
• When setting Collate in the printer driver, make sure that the Collate check box is cleared in the
application's [Print] dialog box. If Collate is enabled in the application, printing will not be as intended.
• When printing restarts after removing jammed paper, the printing position may be different,
depending on the location of the jam.
• If the paper jam occurred in the optional finisher, printing will restart from the top page of the
data currently being printed, or from the page where the paper jam occurred.
• If the paper jam occurred in the machine, printing will restart from the page where the paper
jam occurred.
• Even if the paper jam occurred in the machine, the error will not be cleared unless the cover of
the finisher is opened and closed.
• For details about combined printing (layout), see the printer driver Help.
• For details about optional folding finisher, see "Appendix", About This Machine.
• To remove paper misfeeds, see "Clearing Misfeeds", Trouble Shooting.

90
 Printing with the Folding Finisher

Fold Types

This section explains fold types to take when using the folding finisher.
You can select types of fold are as follows:
Fan Fold
Applies horizontal zigzag folds relative to paper feed orientation. Select a panel width (the width of
the fold) in the list.
• Fan fold with Margin
Applies horizontal zigzag folds to create a filing margin. You can specify the filing margin on 3
the folding finisher. When folded, the sheet width is 210 mm / 8.5 in.
• Special Fan Fold 1 / Special Fan Fold 2
Two frequently used special folds are preset on the folding finisher.
Standard Fold
Applies both horizontal and vertical zigzag folds relative to paper feed orientation. When folded,
the sheet size is A4, 11 8.5 in, 12 9 in.
Margin Fold
Applies folds to create a filing margin. When folded, the sheet size is A4, 11 8.5 in, 12 9 in.
Narrow Standard Fold ( )
Applies folds for inserting sheets into A4 filing pockets. When folded, the sheet size is 297 170
mm.
Programmed Fold
Allows you to pre-specify a fold for each standard size on the folding finisher. Specify the fold
combination that you require in the list. The folding finisher detects the size of the paper and applies
the specified fold.
Special Fold
There are two frequently used special folds preset on the folding finisher.
Do Not Fold
No folding is applied to sheets that are output from the Folding Finisher Tray.

Folding Finisher Cautions

This section explains about the fold precautions.

91
 3. Other Print Operations

Folding type and orientation

Fold Type Paper Size

A0 , B1 , A1 , B2 , A2 , B3 ,
A3 , B4 , 36 " 48 " , 34 " 44 " , 30 "
42 " , 24 " 36 " , 22 " 34 " , 21 "
30 " , 18 " 24 " , 17 " 22 " , 12
Fan Fold
" 18 " , 11 " 17 " , 8 /2 " 14 " , 81/
1

2 " 13 " , Custom Size: approx. 210 - 914.4

3 mm (8.27 - 36 in) wide; fold width 30 fold
panels (equivalent) long.

Output can be made on all paper sizes

supported on this machine.
Custom Size:
• 10 ppm models
approximately 210 - 914.4 mm (8.27 - 36
Not Fold inches) in width, and 210 - 15000 mm
(8.27 - 590.55 inches) in length.
• 14 ppm models
approximately 210 - 914.4 mm (8.27 - 36
inches) in width, and 210 - 30000 mm
(8.27 - 1181.10 inches) in length.

When the folding is cancelled

• When the output is from the bypass tray
• When the folding type and orientation is not properly set.
• When a paper type that cannot be folded is selected.
• When the Folding Finisher Tray is not selected for the paper output tray.
• When [Normal Print] is not selected for the printing method.

• If the optional folding finisher is connected but the fold settings are incorrect, you might not be able
to make settings for the optional device using the printer driver.
• Printing starts only after jobs from other functions (such as the copier) that are using the folding finisher
have finished.
• Depending on the application you are using, printer settings might not be applied and printing might
not be as required.

92
 Printing with the Folding Finisher

Collate

When printing multiple documents such as handouts for meetings, you can separate sets into order. This
function is known as "Collate". Collate stores data transmitted from a computer to the machine memory or
hard disk drive. The followings are the three types of Collate:

• If Auto Continue occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.

• If forced printing occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.
• When setting Collate in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate option is not selected in 3
the application's print settings. If a collate option is selected, printing will not be as intended.
Collate Types
• Collate
Printed output is assembled as sets in sequential order.

BAC016S

• Rotating Collate
Every other print set is rotated by 90 degrees.

BAC017S

When Rotate Collate is cancelled

If the following functions are selected, Collate or Shift Collate will be applied even if Rotating Collate
is selected:
• If jobs containing pages of various sizes are set.
• When output tray is specified.
• If custom size paper is set.

• When Rotating Collate has been selected, printing speed will be slower than with other collate
functions.

93
 3. Other Print Operations

• Set Collate and Rotating collate when using the RPCS printer driver.
• Separation sheets cannot be inserted if "Slip Sheet" is specified.
• Follow the procedure below when using a printer driver other than the RPCS:
• Set Collate and Rotating Collate in the printer driver.
• If you cannot make Shift Collate even with the optional finisher installed, options may not be set
up correctly in the printer driver. Correct the printer driver's option settings.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.

94
4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files
This chapter describes the functions and settings of the GL/2 and TIFF Filter. It also explains how to install
the HDI Driver.

Printable Files
This machine can print GL/2 and TIFF/CALS files.
GL/2
Complies with the Pen Plotter command set HP-GL (Hewlett Packard's Graphics Language), the Raster
Plotter command set HP-GL/2 (Hewlett Packard's Graphics Language Standard), and HP-RTL (HP's
Raster Transfer Language) developed by HP (Hewlett Packard). 4
HP-GL emulates the HP-GL commands of HP7550A.
HP-GL/2 and HP-RTL emulate the HP-GL/2 commands of HP DesignJet 600.
You can print from CAD applications that use HP-GL and HP-GL/2 commands.

• For details about specification of printable files, see "Printable GL/2 Files".

• p.112 "Printable GL/2 Files"

TIFF/CALS
Print TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) format bitmap files from UNIX workstations and DOS/V
computers.
TIFF/CALS files are rastorized by the machine. "Rastorization" refers to the process of printing dot by
dot from the bitmap image. This process does not require a printer driver so printing can be set from
either the machine or the Web browser.

• You can print GL/2 and TIFF/CALS files using PostScript 3.

• For details about specification of printable files, see "Printable TIFF Files".

• p.123 "Printable TIFF Files"

• p.128 "Printable CALS Files"

95
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

To Print
The print settings made by other supplier's GL/2 and HDI drivers cannot be inherited.
When printing from GL/2 and TIFF Filter, "Auto Paper Select" becomes disabled, and a paper size different
to that specified in the data might be requested.
If you print a black and white (monochrome) image at a resolution that the machine does not support, the
print image might contain streaks or moiré patterns.
Follow the procedures below to print GL/2 and TIFF/CALS files from the machine.
• Using Web Printing Tool
GL/2 and TIFF/CALS files
4 • Using HDI Driver
GL/2 files
• Using the printing commands
GL/2 and TIFF/CALS files

• For details about print commands, see "Printing Commands", Network Guide.

Using Web Printing Tool

About Web Printing Tool

Web Printing Tool allows you to print files, make print settings, and acquire system logs, via a Web browser.
Recommended Web browsers are as follows:
• Windows:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0.28 or a later version
FireFox 1.5.0 or a later version
• Macintosh:
Safari 2.0 or a later version
FireFox 1.5.0 or a later version
Java applet
Web Printing Tool requires Java Runtime Environment. Download it from the following web site:
http://www.java.com/
• About the certificate
• If you start Web Printing Tool, a dialog box about issuing the certificate appears. Click [Run].

96
 To Print

• Select the [Always trust content from this publisher.] check box. No warning will be shown after
starting Web Printing Tool.
• If you click [Cancel], Web Printing Tool will not start. Close the Web browser, and then restart
Web Printing Tool.
• The certificate becomes effective after the [Security] setting under [Advanced] on the Java control
panel is set as follows:
• Allow user to grant permissions to signed content
• Allow user to grant permissions to content from an untrusted authority
• The default Java Runtime setting is effective.
• Compatible languages:
Web Printing Tool does not change the language settings of this machine. If necessary, change the
language using the Web browser.
4

• Make the JavaScript, and Java applet following settings (required):

• Enable JavaScript.
• Install Java Runtime Environment (JRE 1.5 or later version.) and enable applet.
• Pop up blocking may not be set, depending on the Web browser you are using. If this is the
case, the Help file will not be properly displayed.
• If you are using Java Runtime Environment version 1.6.0 - 1.6.0_03, and the [Temporary Internet
Files] is enabled, Web Printing Tool might not start properly. If this is the case, delete the temporary
files, and then disable "Temporary Internet Files" in the Java Control Panel. To open the Java control
panel, click [Control Panel] on the [Start] menu, and then click [Java].
• If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Contact your administrator for
information about the settings.
• We recommend using Web Printing Tool in the same network.
• You cannot access to the machine from outside the firewall.
• When using the machine under DHCP, the IP address may be automatically changed by the DHCP
server settings. Enable DDNS setting on the machine, and then connect using the machine's host name.
• Alternatively, set a static IP address to the DHCP server.
• When you are using Firefox, fonts and colors may be different, or tables may be out of shape.
• When using a host name under Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 with IPv6 protocol, perform host
name resolution using an external DNS server. The host file cannot be used.

Displaying top page

This section explains the how to display Web Printing Tool.

97
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

1. Start your Web browser.

2. Enter "http://(machine's address)/webprint/index.html" in the address bar of a Web
browser.
Top Page of Web Printing Tool appears.
If the machine's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server, you can enter it.

BLX008S

1. Header area
The area at the top of the Web Printing Tool page is called the header area. The following items appear
in the header area.

[Help] button
Click to display Help.

[Version Information] button

Click to display Web Printing Tool versition information.

[GL/2 & TIFF Initial Configuration] button

Click to display the [GL/2 & TIFF Initial Configuration] page.

[System Log] button

Click to display the [System Log] page.
2. GL/2 & TIFF Print Settings
The area at the top of the Web Printing Tool page is the GL/2 & TIFF Print Settings area.

• To open the [GL/2 & TIFF Initial Configuration] or [System Log] page, you must enter the administrator
password.
• For details, see Web Printing Tool's Help.

98
 To Print

Basic operations of Web Printing Tool

1. In the menu area to the left, click the menu item corresponding to the function you want to
know about.
The page for the selected menu item appears in the work area to the right.
2. Use the displayed page to make settings for printing.

About password authentication

• The password authentication is required to display the [GL/2 & TIFF Initial Configuration] page or
[System Log] page.
• Click the link in the header area. Enter the password in the authentication dialog box that appears. 4
• If you enter an invalid password, authentication fails and an error message appears. Click [OK] in
the message box, and then enter the password again. If you enter an invalid password three times,
the top page of Web Printing Tool appears. Click the link in the header area to attempt authentication
again.
• Password authentication is effective until the [GL/2 & TIFF Initial Configuration] page or [System Log]
page is closed.
• You can use either Web Printing Tool or the control panel to set GL/2 and TIFF Initial Configuration.
The settings are the same for both Web Printing Tool and the control panel.

• For details about the login password, see Security Reference.

How to use help

While using Web Printing Tool, you can view explanations about operations of the currently displayed
page and the meaning of individual settings and items.
• To view Help top page: click the button in the header area.
• To view Web Printing Tool Help page: click the button in GL/2 and TIFF Print Settings area.
• To close Help: click the [Close] button inside the Help window.

Using From the Printing Commands

The following explains printing operations using the "lpr", "rcp", and "ftp" commands.

• Match the data format of the file to be printed with the emulation mode of the printer.

99
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

• If the message "print requests full" appears, no print jobs can be accepted. Try again when sessions
end. For each command, the amount of possible sessions is indicated as follows:
• lpr: 5 (When the spool printing function is available: 10)
• rcp, rsh: 5
• ftp: 3
• Enter the file name in a format including the path from the directory executing commands.

lpr
When specifying a printer by IP address

4 c:> lpr –S(printer's IP address) [-ol] \(pass name)\(file name)

When using a host name instead of an IP address
c:> lpr –S(printer's host name) [-ol] \(pass name)\(file name)
When printing a binary file, add the "-ol" option (lowercase O, and lowercase L).
When using a printer with the host name “host” to print a PostScript file named "file 1" located in the
“C:PRINT” directory, the command line is as follows:
c:> lpr -Shost –Pfiletype=RPS -ol C:\PRINT\file1

rcp
First, register the printer's host name in the hosts file.
c:> rcp [-b] \(pass name)\(file name) [(pass name)\(file name)...] (printer's host
name):
When using a printer with the host name “host” to print a file named "file 1" or "file 2" located in the
"C:PRINT" directory, the command line is as follows:
c:> rcp -b C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2 host:

• In file names, "*" and "?" can be used as wild cards.

• When printing a binary file, add the "-b" option.
• For details about a host name instead of an IPv4 address, see "Special Operations under Windows",
Network Guide.

ftp
Use the "put" or "mput" command according to the number of files to be printed.

100
 To Print

When one file is printed

ftp> put \(pass name)\(file name)
When multiple files are printed
ftp> mput \(pass name)\(file name) [\(pass name)\(file name)...]
Follow the procedure below to print using the "ftp" command.

1. Formulate the printer's IP address or the host name of the hosts file printer as an argument
and use the "ftp" command.
% ftp printer's IP address
2. Enter the user name and password, and then press the [Enter] key.
For details about the user name and password, consult your network administrator.
User:
4
Password:
When user authentication is set, enter a login user name and password.
3. When printing a binary file, set the file mode to binary.
ftp> bin
When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.
4. Specify files to be printed.
The following shows the examples of printing a file named "file 1" in the "C:PRINT" directory and
printing file 1 and file 2.
ftp> put C:\PRINT\file1
ftp> mput C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2
5. Quit ftp.
ftp> bye

• "=", ",", "_", and ";" cannot be used for filenames. File names will be read as option strings.
• For "mput" command, option can not be defined.
• For "mput" command, "*" and "?" can be used as wild cards in file names.
• When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.

101
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Print Settings for GL/2 & TIFF Filter

This section explains the GL/2 & TIFF Filter settings that you can set using the control panel. GL/2 & TIFF
Filter settings are applied to GL/2 and TIFF files printed from Web Printing Tool and the printing commands.
Priority of Settings
• Settings changed using the control panel take priority.
• You cannot change GL/2 & TIFF Filter initial configuration made using Web Printing Tool, if the
setting was changed using the control panel and is currently in effect.
• GL/2 & TIFF Filter is ineffective during the printing of GL/2 files using the HDI driver. Settings
made using an application have priority over GL/2 & TIFF Filter settings.

4
• The settings are the same for both Web Printing Tool and the control panel.
• For details about making settings using Web Printing Tool, see Web Printing Tool Help.

Adjusting the Print Settings for GL/2 & TIFF Filter

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the control panel.

BLX002S

2. Press [Extended Feature Settings].

3. Press [GL/2 & TIFF].
4. Press the setting you want to make.
• General Settings
Can be applied regardless of data format.
• GL/2 Print Settings
Can be applied to GL/GL2 data only.
• TIFF/CALS Print Settings
Can be applied to TIFF/CALS data only.

102
 Print Settings for GL/2 & TIFF Filter

5. Configure the settings.

6. When you have finished making settings, press [Exit].
Print Settings for GL/2 & TIFF is displayed.
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
The initial screen appears.

General Settings

Specify basic print settings.

Paper Tray Setting
Select which input tray to use for printing. If you select "Auto Paper Select" the machine automatically 4
selects an input tray based on the paper size and type specified by the job.
Margin Tolerance
Specify an area of allowance for the gap between the print area and the paper size when using "Auto
Paper Select".
Output Exit
Specify the output tray for printed paper.
Auto Tray Switching
Enables the machine to switch automatically from an emptied paper tray to another tray that contains
the same size, orientation, and type of paper, without interrupting the job.
Paper Type
Select a paper type.
Cut Method
Select the paper cut method. When roll paper is selected for input tray, the cut method is enabled.
• Preset Cut ( )
Cuts the roll paper to a standard size that fits the width of the sheets that are set in the paper tray.
Example: If 594 mm wide sheets are set in Tray 1 and 841 mm wide sheets in Tray 2, an image
measuring 590 840 mm will be printed on a standard size cut sheet measuring 841 594
mm or 594 841 mm . Note that the input tray's settings might change the orientation of
the printed sheet.
• Preset Cut ( )
Cuts the roll paper to a standard size that fits the width of the sheets that are set in the paper tray.
Example: If 24 in wide sheets are set in Tray 1 and 36 in wide sheets in Tray 2, an image
measuring 23 35 in will be printed on a standard size cut sheet measuring 36 24 in or
24 36 in . Note that the input tray's settings might change the orientation of the printed sheet.

103
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

• If you specify [Auto Paper Select] for [Paper Tray Setting], the roll paper that requires the
shortest cut is selected. However, if the print job is an image that exceeds 36 48 in, the
job is cancel.
• If you specify the input tray for [Paper Tray Setting], the image area that does not fit inside
the standard size is not printed.
• Synchro Cut ( )
Cuts the roll paper according to the width of the sheets that are set in the paper tray and the
length of the image.
Example: If 594 mm wide sheets are set in Tray 1 and 841 mm wide sheets in Tray 2, an image
measuring 590 840 mm will be printed on a cut sheet measuring 841 590 mm or 594
4 840 mm . Note that the input tray's settings might change the orientation of the printed sheet.
Use this method to print images that exceed the standard size, such as an 841 1220 mm
image.
• Synchro Cut ( )
Cuts the roll paper according to the width of the sheets that are set in the paper tray and the
length of the image.
Example: If 24 in wide sheets are set in Tray 1 and 841 mm wide sheets in Tray 2, an image
measuring 23 35 in will be printed on a cut sheet measuring 36 23 in or 24 35 in .
Note that the input tray's settings might change the orientation of the printed sheet. Use this
method to print images that exceed the standard size, such as an 36 49 in image.

• If you specify [Auto Tray Select] for [Paper Tray Setting], the tray with the roll paper that
requires the shortest cut is selected.
• If both the width and length of the data exceed 36 in, sheet's long edge is cut to the maximum
36 in.
• If you specify the input tray for [Paper Tray Setting], the sheet is cut to the long edge length.
If the image exceeds the cut sheet size, the image area that does not fit inside the cut size
is not printed.
Reduce / Enlarge
Specify a scaling mode to reduce or enlarge the print size of documents.
Magnification Ratio
Specify the ratio when Magnification Ratio is selected for "Reduce / Enlarge".
Margin Adjustment
Specify the inside margin around the originals. The margin is 0 to 100 mm in 1 mm (0 to 4.00 " in
0.10 ") increments.

104
 Print Settings for GL/2 & TIFF Filter

Extraction
Specify whether to uncompress and extract compressed job data before printing it. Selecting this
option reduces print errors due to corrupted archives, but slows the print process slightly.
Mirror Image
Prints images with left and right reversed.
Positive / Negative
Prints images with black and white inverted.
Dithering
Select a dither pattern appropriate for the print image.

• If you select [Auto] or [DTP] for this setting, the image is printed using [Photograph].
4
Original Ratio Fine Adjustment: Horizontal
Adjusts the horizontal size difference between original data and printed image for scaled drawings
that must be accurately printed. The ratio range is 99.0 - 101.0%, which you can adjust in increments
of 0.01%.
Original Ratio Fine Adjustment: Vertical
Adjusts the vertical size difference between original data and printed image for scaled drawings that
must be accurately printed. The ratio range is 99.0 - 101.0%, which you can adjust in increments of
0.01%.
Directional Magnification 1 - Directional Magnification 10
Specify the vertical and horizontal value when Magnification Ratio is selected for "Reduce / Enlarge".
Paper Folding
If the folding finisher is installed, select a paper folding method.
Rotate by 180 Degrees
Rotate image by 180 degrees when printing.

GL/2 Print Settings

Specify print settings of HP-GL and HP-GL/2 data.

Hard Clip
Enables and disables output hard clip limits given by PS commands. If "Off" is selected, the actual
drawing area will be the printed area.
Centring (Centering)
Print images at the centre of the hard clip area.

105
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

SP Command
Specify whether to eject paper at receipt of "SP;" and "SP0;" command.
Transparency Mode
Specify the transparent processing mode by MC command and TR command.
• Always Active
Always activates MC/TR commands in HP-GL2 data come into effect.
• Use File Defaults
Follows MC/TR commands in HP-GL2 data.
• Always Inactive

4 Ignores MC/TR commands in HP-GL2 data forcibly.

Source Transparency Mode
Specify the transparent processing method by "Source Transparency Mode (ESC*v#N)".
• Always Active
Always activates ESC*v#N commands in RTL data come into effect.
• Use File Defaults
Follows ESC*v#N commands in RTL data.
• Always Inactive
Ignores ESC*v#N commands in RTL data forcibly.
Adjust X Offset
Specify X-axis offset for origin of the drawing area in 1 mm (0.10 ") increments within the range
between -199 and 199 mm (-8 and 8 ").
Adjust Y Offset
Specify Y-axis offset for origin of the drawing area in 1 mm (0.10 ") increments within the range
between -199 and 199 mm (-8 and 8 ").
Brightness
Adjust brightness for RGB-color and grayscale image data. Higher brightness value lightens the entire
image while lower brightness value darkens the image.
Pen Width
Select whether to use file defaults settings, or to specify width for each pen.
Pen Density
Select whether to use file defaults settings, or to specify density for each pen.
Pen 0 Custom Settings - Pen 15 Custom Settings
Specify width and/or density for each pen when the "Use File Defaults" option is selected. Pen Width
can be selected from the list of 0.00 - 12.00 mm, however actual width of printed image could be

106
 Print Settings for GL/2 & TIFF Filter

slightly different from the specified width because lines are printed in dots. Pen Density can be specified
in 10% increments within the range between 0 and 100%.

TIFF Print Settings

Specify print settings of TIFF and CALS data.

Centring (Centering)
Print drawing area at the center of the paper.
Adjust X Offset
Specify X-axis offset for origin of the drawing area in 1 mm (0.10 ") increments within the range
between -199 and 199 mm (-8 and 8 "). 4
Adjust Y Offset
Specify Y-axis offset for origin of the drawing area in 1 mm (0.10 ") increments within the range
between -199 and 199 mm (-8 and 8 ").
Brightness
Adjust brightness for RGB-color and grayscale image data. Higher brightness value lightens the entire
image while lower brightness value darkens the image.

107
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Using the HDI Driver for AutoCAD

You cannot use the HDI driver to select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of paper on the bypass tray.
If you use the HDI driver to print onto standard size paper, alert messages will not appear, even if the
paper orientation set in the print data does not match the orientation of the paper in the tray.

Setup CD-ROM

The HDI driver for the AutoCAD 2000 series is provided to work specifically with the AutoCAD 2000 series
of CAD applications.

4 Using the HDI driver reduces data size during print out, enabling faster print out.
Also, the HDI driver is specially designed for use in environments where Auto-CAD 2000 applications are
running.

• If you are already using a printer of the same maker, you cannot use different HDI drivers
simultaneously.
• If you still want to install the HDI driver, delete the older HDI driver. To use the HDI driver, you must
install it beforehand. The HDI driver is stored on the CD-ROM provided with the machine.

• The Installation CD-ROM contains a Readme file that you must read. It contains important information
about the HDI driver and notes on using the application.
• The Readme file is in the "DRIVERS\HDI\AC200X\(Language)" folder on the Installation CD-ROM.
If you use the AutoCAD 2008, the Readme file is in the "DRIVERS\HDI\AC2008\(Your OS Edition)
\ (Language)" folder.
• This section assumes the user has full knowledge of Windows functions and procedures. For details
about Windows, see the Windows manual.
• This section assumes the machine is connected to the single computer. The screens you see on your
machine might not be the same as those shown in this manual, depending on the environment you
are using.
• The "Driver" folder contains folders other than the "HDI" folders. This emulation can only use HDI and
printer drivers that are stored in the "HDI" folders.

CD-ROM Folders
The CD-ROM contains following folders and files:

DRIVERS HDI AC2000

108
 Using the HDI Driver for AutoCAD

AC2000i

AC2002

AC2004

AC2007

x64
AC2008
x86

Contains HDI drivers for AutoCAD applications and the Readme files.
4
Installing the HDI Driver

The following explains how to install the HDI driver under Windows 2000. All the procedures are the same
for Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows XP/Vista (64bit), Windows Server 2003/2003 R2, and
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 (64bit).

• AutoCAD applications must be installed before you install the HDI driver.
• This section explains installation using AutoCAD 2008.
• Quit all applications currently running before beginning the HDI driver installation.

1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.
2. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].
3. Double-click [Autodesk Plotter Manager].
[Autodesk Plotter Manager] appears only if there is the AutoCAD 2000 series application already
installed.
4. Double-click [Add-A-Plotter Wizard].
5. Click [Next >].
6. Click [Next >].
7. Click [Have Disk].
8. Select [CD-ROM] in [My Computer].
Check that the CD-ROM provided with the machine is shown.
9. Double-click [DRIVERS], and then double-click [HDI].

109
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

10. Click the file that matches the AutoCAD application you want to use.
AC2000: AutoCAD 2000/AutoCAD LT2000
AC2000i: AutoCAD 2000i/AutoCAD LT2000i
AC2002: AutoCAD 2002/AutoCAD LT2002
AC2004: AutoCAD 2004/AutoCAD LT2004/AutoCAD 2005/
AutoCAD LT2005/AutoCAD 2006/AutoCAD LT2006
AC2007: AutoCAD 2007/AutoCAD LT2007
AC2008: AutoCAD 2008/AutoCAD LT2008
Check the driver you selected matches the AutoCAD version you want to use. If they do not match,
an error screen appears. See the HDI driver's Readme if this occurs.
4 11. Select the driver you want to install, and then click [Open].
12. In "Manufacturers", select the manufacturer. Then, in "Models", select the printer driver.
Then click [Next >].
13. Click [Next >].
14. Select [Port], then select the port you want to use, and then click [Next >].
Select the network port you want to use in the [Port] option button. If a local port is selected, printing
may not be performed properly.
15. Confirm the plotter name you want to use is selected, and then click [Next >].
Installation is complete. If the installation is successful, the HDI driver is added to the [AutoDesk Plotter
Settings (Plotter window)] window, and it can be selected from [Printing Devices] during printing. For
details about screens and printing procedures, see the online Help. To display the online Help, click
[Help] on the printer driver screen.
16. Click [Finish].

Displaying and Printing Help

Displaying Help
This section explains installation using AutoCAD 2008.

1. On the [File] menu, click [Plot...].

The [Plot...] dialog box appears.
2. Check the HDI driver you want to use appears in the [Name:] list in the "Printer/plotter"
area, and then click [Properties...].
3. Click [Custom Properties] on the [Device and Document Settings] tab.
The [Custom Properties] button appears under the screen.

110
 Using the HDI Driver for AutoCAD

4. Click [Custom Properties...].

5. The Help screen appears if you click [Help].

Printing Help
Printing by Book
If you select the book icon, you can print several topics at once.
Select the book icon in the [Help Topics] dialog box, and then click [Print...].
Printing by Topic
There are two methods of printing by topic:
• Select the topic icon in the [Help Topics] dialog box, and then click [Print...]. 4
• Display the topic you want to print, and then click [Print...].

111
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Printable GL/2 Files

HP-GL Specifications

The GL/2 & TIFF filter modules that are included in GL/2 & TIFF filter products emulate the HP-GL commands
of HP7550A. However, the command syntax differs (as shown below) according to the settings of the GL/
2 and TIFF modules.

HP-GL command syntax

4 The syntax of HP-GL commands is as follows: a section containing two alphabetical characters, a parameter
section (certain commands only), and a terminator section.
If you specify multiple parameters at the end, a separator must be inserted between each parameter.
The HP-GL/2 filter can use the separators and terminators shown below.

Syntax Elements Format and Range

Separator comma or space

Terminator ; or LF or another command

Integer parameter -999999999 to +999999999

Real number parameter -999999999. 999999999 to +999999999.999999999

Plotter setup commands

The HP-GL/2 filter does not support the following plotter setup command and will ignore it if it is included:

Command Description

GM Changes buffer sizes, but not the size of the input or output buffer.

Commands for plotting Circles, Ovals, and Multiple Shapes

The HP-GL/2 filter does not support the following Circles/Ovals/Multiple Shapes plotting commands and
will ignore them if they are included:

Command Description

UF Specifies the fill pattern at parallel interval.

112
 Printable GL/2 Files

Command Description

PT Specifies the overprint interval.

Commands for plotting basic characters

The HP-GL/2 filter does not support the following basic character plotting commands and will ignore them
if they are included:

Command Description

DU Uses the user unit to specify the character plotting direction.

SU Uses the user unit to specify the character size.

4
BL Stores character strings for labeling in the label buffer.

OL Obtains information from output capable character strings in the buffer.

IC Obtains the location of certain ASCII character inside the NCP cell.

Outputs the co-ordinates of the upper right and lower left corners
OB
around the character on receipt of this command.

Uses the 7240/7245 plotter to underline or change the character

LE
width under character set 20 to 28.

PB Plots the content of the label buffer.

Commands for extended character sets

The HP-GL/2 filter supports the following character sets: Standard ASCII (0); kanji (101); and 8, 18, and
43 (katakana). The HP-GL/2 filter does not support the commands for multiple character sets and making
optional characters:

Command Description

CM Specifies modes for selecting the character set and using it.

DS Specifies the character set selected by parameter at the character slot.

Calls up the character slot (G0 - G3) on the right half (GR) or left half
IV
(GL) of the code table.

Specifies smoothness of characters when the character set when a

CC
character set between 10 to 19 and 40 to 49 is selected.

113
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Command Description

UC Plots symbols not defined in the character set.

Commands for changing the plotting domain

The HP-GL/2 filter does not support the following commands for changing the plotting domain according
to the HP plotter and will ignore them if they are included:

Command Description

Enables the left down and right down coordinates of the window to be
4 OW
output.

Plotter control commands

The HP-GL/2 filter does not support the following commands for plotter control according to the HP plotter
and will ignore them if they are included:

Command Description

AP Specifies the automatic pen function.

FS Specifies the pen pressure.

AS Specifies the pen acceleration.

VS Specifies the maximum speed when the pen is lowered.

Automatically adjusts the speed of the pen when it is lowered to the

VA
speed at which the computer sends the coordinates.

VN Used when disabling the VA command.

GP Used when collecting pens of the same type and color into one group.

SG Selects the group specified by the GP command.

CV Controls the curve line generator.

AF Feeds paper only when something is being plotted on the current paper.

Feeds half of the paper only when something is being plotted on the
AH
current paper.

EC Controls the paper cut function.

114
 Printable GL/2 Files

Command Description

NR Puts the plotter into the "NOT READY" state.

Stores the HP-GL command following this command to the replot buffer
BF
until the RP command is received.

RP Re-plots data using the data in the re-plot buffer.

Displays messages on the plotter's front panel LCD, and applies the
WD
plotter's keyboard mode.

KY Assigns the programmed status to the plotter's front panel function key.

OK
Enables the number of the first pressed front panel function key to be 4
output.

Specifies the group count number used in response to the OG

GC
command.

OG Enables the current group account information to be output.

BP Sounds the plotter's beeper.

Digitization commands
The HP-GL/2 filter does not support the following digitization related commands and will ignore them if
they are included:

Command Description

DP Sets the plotter to digitize mode.

Enables the last co-ordinates of digitized positions and the pen state
OD
preceding this command to be output.

DC Cancels digitize mode.

Commands for obtaining plotter information

The HP-GL/2 filter does not support the following commands for obtaining information from the plotter
and will ignore them if they are included:

Command Description

IM Sets conditions for notifying the host computer of HP-GL errors.

115
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Command Description

OA Enables the pen's coordinates to be output.

Enables the co-ordinates and condition of the pen during the last
OC
effective command to be output.

RC Enables the cursor's coordinates and status to be output.

Enables the value of the initial error made before this command was
OE
executed to be output.

Enables the value of the plotter unit by 1 mm at each coordinate to be

OF
4 output.

OI Enables the character strings that distinguish each plotter to be output.

OO Enables the eight option parameters to be output.

OS Enables the plotter's status to be output in decimal form.

Enables the carousel's shape and operating conditions of the stool to

OT
be output.

Line attribute commands

The HP-GL/2 filter does not support the following attributes for the line attribute setting commands and will
ignore them if they are included:

Command Description

End of the line

Makes the ends of lines rounded.
Triangle (Value = 3)

Line joint (Type = 2)

Makes joints circular.
Triangle Joint (Value = 3)

HP-GL/2 filter coordinates

Like other HP plotters, the HP-GL/2 plots using single 0.025 mm units. When plotting on paper however,
the printer's or plotter's resolution determines the plot units.
The following explanation covers the HP-GL/2 filter's start coordinates, plotting origin, and scaling point.

116
 Printable GL/2 Files

BLX009S
4
The HP-GL/2 filter uses the initial coordinates, plotting origin, and scaling point to begin processing input
data. Input data that has minus coordinates and originates from other than the bottom left area (P1) or the
hard clip limit (the PS command-specified area) is shifted by the minimum value of each last drawn
coordinate to the plotting origin (where X and Y intersect, in the minus direction).
Likewise, the coordinates of images that are drawn in the plus direction are shifted similarly. Images that
exceed the hard clip limit are not output.
If the HP-GL/2 filter's clipping option is enabled (overriding the hard clip limit of the PS command), the
data is output with the hard clip limit reset to the image's minimum and maximum value for each co-ordinate,
and independent of the original position and the hard clip limit.

HP-GL/2 Specifications

The GL/2 &TIFF filter modules that are included in GL/2 & TIFF filter products emulate the HP-GL commands
of the HP DesignJet 600 but differ according to the settings of the GL/2 and TIFF modules. The following
commands are also different:

Character group commands

This section explains limitations to commands that belong to the character group shown in the HP-GL/2
reference manual.

Label default status

The table below shows the HP-GL/2 filter's label default status.

117
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Label Attribute Status

Character set ASCII code (Roman8)

ASCII code end of text command character ETX

Label terminator
(Decimal code 3)

Label's starting point Current pen position

Character width 2.83 mm, Character height 3.75

Character size mm (Below A0 size) Character width 4.23 mm,
Character height 5.21 mm (Above A0 size)

4 Label orientation Horizontal

Margins between characters and lines Normal (no extra margins added)

Character tilt No tilt

Character overprint mode Solid (total overprint)

Font Courier

Character codes that can be used with LB commands

The HP-GL/2 filter supports three character codes for specifying LB command parameters: ASCII (Roman
8), JIS, and Shift JIS. If other codes are included in HP-GL data, unwanted characters might be output.

Font specification and selection

As with other HP-GL/2 products, procedures for font selection at HP-GL/2 filter are based on SD and AD
command parameters.

Parameters that can be used with SD and AD commands

The standard and substitute character sets (SD and AD commands respectively) define each character set's
attributes, such as font, font spacing, pitch height, and character width. The table below shows which of
the attributes shown in the HPGL/2 manual can be used with HP-GL/2.

Types and attributes Default value Description

1 Character set 277 Roman8

2 Font spacing 0 Fixed spacing

118
 Printable GL/2 Files

Types and attributes Default value Description

3 Pitch Depends on paper size Characters per inch

4 Height Depends on paper size Font point

5 Character tilt 0 Upright

6 Line width 0 Normal

7 Font 3 Courier

Character Set
Character set attributes define the character sets used as the standard and substitute character set. 4
The table below shows the character sets that the HPGL/2 filter can use. If an unusable character set
is specified, the default set is applied.

Character set Description Note

0 and 277 Roman8

11 JIS ASCII

22 Arabic

If you select this font, the display

might not be as intended,
43 Katakana
depending on the area you
want to use.

101 Shift JIS

278 Arabic-8

300 Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats

332 PS ITC Zapf Dingbats

364 ITC Zapf Dingbats 100

396 ITC Zapf Dingbats 200

428 ITC Zapf Dingbats 300

531 HP-GL Download

If you select this font, the display

numbers higher than 1000 Kanji code
might not be as intended,

119
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Character set Description Note

depending on the area you
want to use.

Font
The font attribute selects the font that determines the rendering style. The table below shows the
character sets that the HP-GL/2 filter can use. If an unusable font is specified, the default font is applied.

Font Selection condition Note

The character set is 0, 277 or

Courie
4 the font is 3

Symbol The character set is 22, 278

The character set is 300, 332,

Zaps Dingbats
364, 396, 428

Fonts downloaded using the DL

User font The character set is 531
command.

The character set is 101, 43,

Conditions of usage by
1000 or a higher number; or
Mincho / Gothic Mincho / Gothic depends
the font is 81, 152, 153, 154,
upon the command parameter.
155, 156

Stick font The font is 48, 49, 50

Helvetica The font is 4

The font is 5 and the line width

Times Roman
is other than 3, 7

The font is 5 and the line width

Times Bold
is 3 or 7

The font is 5, the tilt is 1, and the

Times Italic
line width is other than 3, 7

The font is 5, the tilt is 1, and the

Times Bold Italic
line width is 3, 7

The font is 15 and the line width

Palatino-Roman
is other than 3, 7

120
 Printable GL/2 Files

Font Selection condition Note

The font is 5 and the line width

Palatino-Bold
is 3, 7

Palatino-Italic The font is 15 and the tilt is 1

The font is 15 and the tilt is 1

Palatino-Bold-Italic
and the line width is 3 , 7

The font is 23 and the line width

NewCenturySchlBk
is other than 3 , 7

NewCenturySchlBk-Bold
The font is 23 and the line width
is 3, 7 4
The font is 15, the tilt is 1, and
NewCenturySchlBk-Italic
the line width is other than 3,

The font is 23 , the tilt is 1, and

NewCenturySchlBk-Bold-Italic
the line width is 3, 7

AvantGarde-Book The font is 31

AvantGarde-Book-Oblique The font is 31 and the tilt is 1

Zapfchancery-midium-italic The font is 43

The font is 47 and the line width

Bookman-Light
is other than 3, 7

The font is 47 and the line width

Bookman-DemiLight
is 3, 7

The font is 47, the tilt is 1, and

Bookman-LightItalic
the line width is other than 3, 7

The font is 47, the tilt is 1, and

Bookman-DemiItalic
the line width is 3, 7

HP-RTL Specifications

This section explains limitations to commands that are explained in the HPGL/2 and HP-RTL reference
manuals.

121
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Logical Operation (ESC*|#o)

The table below shows the specifications of the parameters used by the HPGL/2 filter's Logical Operation
command.

Parameter Specification

252 (Default) OVERWRITE procedure

136 AND procedure

168 TRANSPARENT procedure

204 TRANSPARENT procedure

4 238 OR procedure

Values other than the above TRANSPARENT procedure

122
 Printable TIFF Files

Printable TIFF Files

TIFF Data Specifications

TIFF files that can be processed

This section explains the TIFF filter's file processing limitations. The TIFF filter can process only TIFF files that
are compliant with "TIFF Revision 6.0" (Adobe Developers Association, June 1992).

• The TIFF filter might be able to process non-compliant TIFF files, but the output is likely to be incorrect,
depending on the size of the image.
4

TIFF header
TIFF data requires the header values shown in the table below.

Field Values

Byte order 0x4d4d or 0x4949

Version number 42

TIFF directory
If the data is multi-page TIFF:
• Both the directory and data must be divided by page.
• The last four bytes of each directory must contain a pointer to the subsequent page, and the pointer
value must increase in keeping with the page order.

• The pointer value for both single page TIFF data and the last page of multipage TIFF data must
be "0x00000000".
• The page order must be the same as the intended output order.

TIFF tags
The table below shows the types and values of tags that can be included in the
TIFF directory. If included, other tags or unacceptable values are normally ignored, but might occasionally
cause processing to stop.

123
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Tag name (number) Value

ImageWidth (256) 0 - 65535

ImageHeight (257) 0 - 65535

BitsPerSample (258) 1, 4, or 8

Compression (259) 1, 3, or 4

PhotometricInterpretation (262) 0

FillOrder (266) 1

4 StripOffsets (273) 0 - 2**32 - 1

SamplesPerPixel (277) 1

RowsPerStrip (278) 1 - ImageLength

One of the following:

ImageWidth × ImageLength / 8
StripByteCounts (279) ImageWidth × ImageLength / 2
ImageWidth × ImageLength
size of compressed image in bytes

MinSampleValue (280) 0

MaxSampleValue (281) 2**BitsPerSample-1

XResolution (282) 50 - 1200

YResolution (283) 50 - 1200

T4Options (292) 0 or 1

ResolutionUnit (296) 2

Tag values must be entered in byte, ASCII, short, long, or rational data format.
If the value of the tag is a pointer to data that is stored outside the tag entry, that pointer must be at the
back of the directory that contains the tag, pointing either to the subsequent directory or the data domain
preceding the end of the data, not to the data domain of the subsequent page.

124
 Printable TIFF Files

Bitmap images
For reference, the top position of the strip data must be contained in the value of the StripeOffsets (273)
tag. The data size (byte) after it is coded must also be specified by the value of StripeByteCounts (279)
tag.
The byte at the end of the last page's strip data must be the same as the byte at the end of the TIFF data.
The bitmap data must be one of the following types:

Bitmap image type Limitations

The value of the BitsPerSample (256) tag must be

Monochrome: one sample, one bit (two colors) per
set to 1. Each pixel must be white when the sample
pixel.
value is 0, and black when the sample value is 1.
4
The value of the BitsPerSample (256) tag must be
Gray scale: one sample, four bit (16 colors) per set to be at 4. Each pixel must be white when the
pixel. sample value is 0, and black when the sample
value is 15.

The value of the BitsPerSample (256) tag must be

Gray scale: one sample, eight bit (256 colors) per set to be at 8. Each pixel must be white when the
pixel. sample value is 0, and black when the sample
value is 255.

The bitmap image data must be coded using one of the following compression methods.

Compression method Limitations Notes

The image is not compressed.

Data for each pixel is stored in the
order it is created or scanned.
Extra data is added to the end of
each line as a pad in place of
unused bytes.
The value of the Compression
Uncompressed method (259) tag must be set to 1 and the
T4Options (292) tag cannot be
included. Also, the value of the
StripByteCounts (279) tag must
be set as follows:
• 2 color monochrome image
ImageWidth
ImageLength / 8

125
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Compression method Limitations Notes

• 16 color gray scale image
ImageWidth
ImageLength / 2
• 256 color gray scale image
ImageWidth ImageLengt

This compression method is the

same as the one-dimensional
coding method of the CCITT
Group 3 Fax.
4 This compression method is used
for two color monochrome
images only.
MH (Modified Huffman) method
The value of the Compression
(259) must be set to 3 and the
T4Options (292) tag must be set
to 1. Also, the value of the
StripByteCounts (279) tag must
be set to the size (inbytes) of the
compressed data.

This compression method is the

same as the CCITT Group 4 Fax
coding method.
This compression is used for two
color monochrome images only.
MMR (Modified Modified Read) The value of the Compression
method (259) tag must be set to 4 and the
T4Options (292) tag cannot be
included. Also, the value of the
StripByteCounts (279) tag must
be set to the size (in bytes) of the
compressed data.

The value of the Compression

This method uses the data
(259) tag must be set to 5. Also,
compression algorithm originally
LZW (Lempel, Ziv, Welch) the value of the StripByte-Counts
devised by Terry Welch of Sperry
method (279) tag must be set to the size
(currently Unisys), and later used
(in bytes) of the compressed
as a dictionary "LZ77" algorithm
data.

126
 Printable TIFF Files

Compression method Limitations Notes

by Abraham Lempel and Jacob
Ziv.

127
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

Printable CALS Files

CALS Data Specifications

CALS files that can be processed

The TIFF filter can process only CALS files that are "CALS Raster (Type1)" compatible and compliant with
the following file format and raster drawing method: "MIL-STD-1840A" (US Department of Defense,
December 1987)

4 • The TIFF filter might be able to process non-compliant CALS files, but the output is likely to be incorrect,
depending on the size of the image.

CALS headers
CALS data must include a header block that is compliant with the conditions listed after the table below.
The header block requires the following eleven header records to be entered at the top in the order shown.

Record ID and configurable value (all ASCII

Byte offset
characters)

0000 srcdocid: optional

0128 (0x80) dstdocid: optional

0258 (0x102) txtfilid: optional

0348 (0x15C) Figid: optional

0512 (0x200) srcgph: optional

0640 (0x280) doccls: optional

0768 (0x300) Rtype: 1

0896 (0x380) rorient: 000, 270

1024 (0x400) rpelcnt: appropriate value

1152 (0x480) rdensty: appropriate value

1280 (0x500) notes: optional

1408 (0x580) 0x20 128 bytes

128
 Printable CALS Files

Record ID and configurable value (all ASCII

Byte offset
characters)

1530 (0x5FA) 0x20 128 bytes

1664 (0x680) 0x20 128 bytes

1792 (0x700) 0x20 128 bytes

1920 (0x780) 0x20 128 bytes

2048 (0x800) Bitmap data

Header Block Conditions

4
• The header must be 2048 bytes (fixed length).
• Header records must be 128 bytes (fixed length).
• Header records must start with a record ID.
• Specified values for header record IDs must be entered in the separator's two character spaces: Colon
(0x3a) and Space (0x20).
• Header records that contain no directive value must be given "NONE" as their value.
• Empty bytes in the header record and header block must be padded with spaces (0x20).

Bitmap image data

Bitmap image data must follow immediately after the header block's final byte and be of the following
format:
ITU-T T.6 monochrome raster (Group 4 Fax).

• The same compression format as MMR (Modified Modified Read).

129
 4. Printing GL/2 and TIFF Files

130
5. Saving and Printing Using the
Document Server
This chapter explains how to use the Document Server function.

Accessing the Document Server

The Document Server enables you to store documents on the machine's hard disk, and allows you to edit
and print them as necessary.

• Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this function.

• When you use the Document Server, the following functions can be selected using the machine's 5
control panel:
• Copies
• Collate
• Paper selection: Paper source tray, paper type, paper output tray.
• The above items are dimmed, so you cannot set them from the printer properties dialog box when the
Document Server is selected.
• You must enter a user ID, using up to eight alphanumeric characters.
• You should enter a Password and File Name to distinguish the job from others.
• Up to 3,000 files can be stored in the Document Server. New files cannot be stored when 3,000 files
have already stored. Even if less than 3,000 files are stored, new files cannot be stored when
• a file to be stored contains more than 1,000 pages,
• the machine's sent or stored files total over 3,000 pages. (The total varies depending on the size
of the files.)
• the hard disk is full.
• The Document Server also stores files scanned using the original table. You should delete unnecessary
stored files once in a while so as not to exceed the capacity of the hard disk. For details about deleting
stored files, see General Settings Guide.
• When using the hard disk for functions other than those of Document Server, you may not be able to
store new files in the Document Server, even if there are less than 3,000 files stored.
• For details about Document Server functions, see "Document Server", General Settings Guide.
• For details about how to access Document Server from a client, see the printer driver Help.

131
 5. Saving and Printing Using the Document Server

132
6. Appendix
This chapter lists the printer's specifications and the functions that are available on the Printer Features
screen.

Specifications
This section contains the machine's electrical and hardware specifications, including information about its
options.

Component Specifications

Resolution 600 × 600 dpi

Printing speed Type 1:

• 14 ppm
Type 2:
• 10 ppm 6
(A1 (D) , plain paper)
Printing speeds depend on the machine. Check which type of
machine you have. See General Settings Guide.

Interface Standard:
• Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T)
• USB 2.0 interface
Option:
• Giga Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T / 100BASE-TX /
10BASE-T)
• IEEE 1284 parallel interface
• IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless LAN interface

Network protocol IPv4, IPv6, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk

Printer language RPCS, PostScript 3, PDF, GL/2 & TIFF Filter *1

Fonts PostScript 3:
136 fonts (Type 2:24, Type 14:112)

Memory 1 GB

Hard disk Storage capacity: 320 GB

133
 6. Appendix

Component Specifications

USB Interface (Standard) • Supported Operating System:

Windows 2000 / XP / Vista, Windows Server 2003 /
2003 R2, MacOS 10.3.3 or later
• Transmission spec.
USB 2.0 Standard
• Connectable Device:
Devices corresponding to USB 2.0 Standard

*1 This machine can print HP-GL, HP-GL/2, and TIFF files.

• When using Mac OS, use only the standard USB Interface. The optional USB interface board is not
supported.
• When using the USB Interface (Standard) with Mac OS 10.3.3, USB2.0 is supported.
6

134
 Printer Features Menu

Printer Features Menu

The following explains settings and meanings of functions on the Printer Features screen. Select [Printer
Features] after you press the [User Tools/Counter] key. For details, see "Printer Features", General Settings
Guide.
List / Test Print

Menu Description

Multiple Lists You can print the configuration page and error log.

Configuration Page You can print the machine's current configuration values.

Error Log You can print error logs listing all errors that occurred during
printing.

Menu List You can print a Menu List showing the machine's function
menus.

PS Configuration / Font Page You can print the current PS configuration and installed 6
PostScript font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript
3 unit is installed.

PDF Configuration / Font Page You can print the current PDF configuration and installed PDF
font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript
3 unit is installed.

Hex Dump You can print in the Hex Dump mode.

Maintenance

Menu Description

Menu Protect This function lets you protect menu settings from accidental
change. It makes impossible to change menu settings with
normal procedures unless you perform the required key
operations.
In a network environment, only administrators can make
changes to menu settings.

List / Test Print Lock You can lock the [List / Test Print] menu.

135
 6. Appendix

Menu Description

Delete All Temporary Print Jobs You can delete all print jobs temporarily stored in the
machine.

Delete All Stored Print Jobs You can delete all print jobs stored in the machine.

System

Menu Description

Print Error Report You can print an error report when a printer or memory error
occurs.

Auto Continue You can select this to enable Auto Continue.

When it is On, printing continues after a system error occurs.

Memory Overflow Select this to have a memory overflow error report printed.

6 Rotate by 180 Degrees Specify whether to rotate the print image 180 degrees
relative to the paper orientation.

Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs You can select to automatically delete print jobs temporarily
stored in the machine.

Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs You can select to automatically delete print jobs stored in the
machine.

Initial Print Job List You can set the default Printer screen when you press [Print
Jobs].

Memory Usage You can select the amount of memory used in Font Priority
or Frame Priority, according to paper size or resolution.

Copies You can specify the number of print sets.

This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print has
been specified with the printer driver or another command.

Blank Page Print You can select whether or not to print blank pages.

Reserved Job Waiting Time You can specify how long the machine waits to receive a
print job before allowing other functions such as the copier
and scanner functions to interrupt it.

Printer Language You can specify the printer language.

136
 Printer Features Menu

Menu Description

Sub Paper Size You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4 LT)
feature.

Bypass Tray Setting Priority You can specify which of the two options, (Printer) Driver /
Command or Machine Settings, has priority for determining
the paper size for the bypass tray.

Edge to Edge Print You can select whether or not to print on the entire sheet.

Default Printer Language You can set the default printer language if the machine
cannot find the printer language automatically.

Tray Switching You can set to switch the paper tray.

Host Interface

Menu Description

I/O Buffer You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not
6
necessary to change this setting.

I/O Timeout You can set how many seconds the machine should wait
before ending a print job. If data from another port usually
arrives in the middle of a print job, you should increase this
timeout period.

PS Menu (optional)

Menu Description

Data Format You can select a data format.

Resolution You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.

PDF Menu (optional)

Menu Description

Change PDF Password You can set the password for the PDF file executing PDF
Direct Print.

PDF Group Password You can set the group password already specified with
DeskTopBinder Lite.

137
 6. Appendix

Menu Description

Resolution You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.

• Some options do not appear depending on optional units or selected printer languages in use.
• Some options cannot be set depending on security settings.
• For details, see "Printer Features", General Settings Guide.
• For details about "Copier Features" and "System Settings", see Copy/Document Server Reference
and General Settings Guide.

138
INDEX
A G
About This Machine.................................................1 General settings..................................................103
Adjusting the print settings..................................102 General Settings Guide..........................................1
B GL/2......................................................................95
GL/2 & TIFF Filter...............................................102
Bidirectional Communication.........................48, 49 GL/2 and TIFF Filter..............................................95
Bypass tray.............................................................15 GL/2 print settings..............................................105
film.......................................................................................19
Setting Custom Size Paper................................................18 H
Setting the Paper Size........................................................16
HDI driver............................................................108
translucent..........................................................................19
HDI driver for AutoCAD.....................................108
C HDI driver help....................................................110
CALS data specifications....................................128 Hold Print................................................................73
deleting...............................................................................76
Canceling a job.....................................................85
printing................................................................................74
Canceling a Print Job
using the computer............................................................. 85
How to Read This Manual......................................6
using the control panel......................................................85 HP-GL specifications...........................................112
Checking jobs in the print queue..........................14 HP-GL/2 specifications......................................117
Collate....................................................................93 HP-RTL specifications..........................................121
Command............................................................112 I
Confirming the Connection Method....................23
Information...............................................................1
Local Connection...............................................................25
Network Connection.........................................................23 Initial Display...........................................................8
Control panel.......................................................135 Initial Print Job List..................................................65
Copy/Document Server Reference.......................1 Installing the HDI Driver......................................109
Installing the Printer Driver....................................26
D IPP.......................................................................................31
LPR port...............................................................................34
DeskTopBinder Lite................................................57
Enhancements....................................................................58 NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer...........................39
Function Palette..................................................................58 Parallel Connection...........................................................46
Install...................................................................................57 Quick Install........................................................................26
Password-Protected...........................................................59 SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port.................................27
Standard TCP/IP port........................................................32
Display Panel...........................................................8
TCP/IP................................................................................29
Document Server.................................................131 Windows Network Printer.................................................37
Downloading the Printer Driver............................26 WSD port...........................................................................35
E Installing the Printer Driver Using USB.................42
Windows 2000.................................................................42
Error log.................................................................87 Windows Vista...................................................................44
F Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2.........43

Fold types...............................................................91 J
Folding finisher......................................................90 Job List..............................................................11, 14
Folding finisher cautions.......................................91 Change Order...................................................................13
Checking Jobs....................................................................12

139
 Deleting Jobs......................................................................14 printing................................................................................67
Holding Jobs......................................................................13 Scanner Reference..................................................1
Job History..........................................................................14 Security Reference...................................................1
Job List Screen....................................................................11
Setup CD-ROM...................................................108
L Simplified Display....................................................9
Specifications..............................................123, 133
List Per User ID.......................................................81
printing all print jobs..........................................................82 Spool printing........................................................89
printing the desired print job.............................................81 Stored Print.............................................................76
deleting...............................................................................79
Locked Print............................................................70
deleting...............................................................................73 printing................................................................................77
printing................................................................................71 T
M TIFF.........................................................................95
Making Option Settings for the Printer................48 TIFF print settings.................................................107
Manuals for This Machine......................................1 To print...................................................................96
Trouble Shooting.....................................................1
N
U
Network Guide........................................................1
UNIX Supplement....................................................1
O
Using web printing tool.........................................96
Other manuals.........................................................1
W
P
Web printing tool..................................................96
PageMaker............................................................50 basic operations................................................................99
PDF Direct Print................................................57, 59 password authentication...................................................99
PDF direct print properties.................................................60
using commands................................................................61
PostScript 3 Supplement.........................................1
Print Job Function...................................................62
Print settings.........................................................102
Printable CALS files.............................................128
Printable files..........................................................95
Printable GL/2 files.............................................112
Printable TIFF files................................................123
Printer Features Menu.........................................135
Printer Properties, RPCS
Windows 2000.................................................................51
Windows Server 2003 / 2003 R2.................................53
Windows Vista...................................................................54
Windows XP.......................................................................53
Printer Reference......................................................1
Printing commands................................................99
S
Sample Print...........................................................67
deleting...............................................................................69

140 GB GB EN USA D046

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, and Windows Vista® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc, registered in the United States and
other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Netware,IPX,IPX/SPX are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Java, the Java Coffee Cup logo, J2SE, and all trademarks and logos based
on Java are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective
companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
* The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
* The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Media Center Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Tablet PC Edition
* The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Web Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Datacenter Edition
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Datacenter Edition

Copyright © 2008
 Operating Instructions Printer Reference

Model No.
5100WD/7140WD/GWD5100/GWD7140/LW5100/LW7140/Aficio MP W5100/W7140
EN USA D046-7202
 Operating Instructions
Scanner Reference

1 Sending Scan Files by E-mail

2 Sending Scan Files to Folders
3 Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
4 Delivering Scan Files
5 Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner
6 Various Scan Settings
7 Appendix

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information
in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your safety and
benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy place for quick reference.

Important

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.

Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual might result
in hazardous radiation exposure.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.

• Media differ according to manual.

• The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
• For details about the functions of RW-7140, refer to the manuals for this option.
About This Machine
Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also explains the control panel,
preparation procedures for using the machine, how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs
provided.
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace paper, toner, and other
consumables.
Copy/ Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for
explanations on how to place originals.
Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software
provided.
General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering e-mail addresses and
user codes. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect the machine.
Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that you can use to
prevent unauthorized use of the machine, data tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced
security, we recommend that you first make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.

1
 • Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator using Web Image Monitor.
For details, see "Setting Up the Machine", Security Reference.
Be sure to read this manual when setting the enhanced security functions, or user and administrator
authentication.
PostScript 3 Supplement
Explains how to set up and use PostScript 3.
UNIX Supplement
For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized dealer.
Information
Contains general notes on the machine, and information about the trademarks of product names used
in the manuals.
Other manuals
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide

• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.

• The following software products are referred to using general names:

Product name General name

DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder

DeskTopBinder
Professional *1

ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and ScanRouter EX

the ScanRouter delivery software
Enterprise *1

*1 Optional

2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine.................................................................................................................................1
How to Read This Manual.................................................................................................................................8
Symbols...........................................................................................................................................................8
About the Scanner Functions.............................................................................................................................9
Display Panel....................................................................................................................................................10
Simplified Display........................................................................................................................................10
Confirmation Displays.................................................................................................................................11
How to Start Scanning.....................................................................................................................................17
1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail..............................................................................................................19
Outline of Sending Scan Files by E-mail....................................................................................................19
Preparation for Sending by E-mail.............................................................................................................20
Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book...................................................................................22
E-mail Screen...............................................................................................................................................23
Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail........................................................................................25
Switching to the E-mail Screen........................................................................................................................29
Specifying E-mail Destinations........................................................................................................................30
Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book...................................................................30
Entering an E-mail Address Manually........................................................................................................33
Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server...............................................................................34
Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book..............................................................37
Specifying the E-mail Sender..........................................................................................................................39
Selecting a Sender from the List..................................................................................................................39
Using a Registration Number to Specify a Sender Name........................................................................40
Selecting the Sender by Searching the Machine's Address Book...........................................................40
Specifying the E-mail Subject..........................................................................................................................43
Specifying the E-mail Message.......................................................................................................................44
Selecting a Message from the List..............................................................................................................44
Manual Entry of a Message.......................................................................................................................45
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail..............................................................................................46
Security Settings to E-mails..............................................................................................................................47
Sending Encrypted E-mail...........................................................................................................................47
Sending E-mail with a Signature.................................................................................................................48

3
 Sending the URL by E-mail..............................................................................................................................49
2. Sending Scan Files to Folders
Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder.........................................................................................................51
Outline of Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder......................................................................................51
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder...............................................................................................53
Registering Destination Folders in the Address Book................................................................................55
Scan to Folder Screen.................................................................................................................................55
Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder..............................................................................................57
Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen..........................................................................................................60
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations..........................................................................................................61
Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book...................................................................61
Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder................................................................................................65
Sending Files to an FTP Server....................................................................................................................68
Sending Files to NetWare Server...............................................................................................................69
Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book.....................................................73
Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder................................................................................74
3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function
Before Storing Files..........................................................................................................................................75
Outline of File Storage under the Scanner Function.................................................................................75
Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files...........................................................................................................77
Specifying File Information for a Stored File..................................................................................................79
Specifying a User Name.............................................................................................................................79
Specifying a File Name...............................................................................................................................79
Specifying a Password................................................................................................................................80
Displaying the List of Stored Files....................................................................................................................82
List of Stored Files.........................................................................................................................................82
Searching the List of Stored Files................................................................................................................83
Checking Stored Files......................................................................................................................................85
Checking a Stored File Selected from the List............................................................................................85
Checking Stored Files from a Client Computer.........................................................................................87
Sending a Stored File.......................................................................................................................................89
Sending Stored Files....................................................................................................................................89
Managing Stored Files....................................................................................................................................91

4
 Deleting a Stored File..................................................................................................................................91
Changing Information for a Stored File.....................................................................................................92
4. Delivering Scan Files
Before Delivering Files.....................................................................................................................................97
Outline of Scan File Delivery......................................................................................................................97
Preparing to Deliver Files............................................................................................................................98
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM...................................................................100
Network Delivery Scanner Screen..........................................................................................................101
Basic Operation for Delivering Files............................................................................................................103
Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen...................................................................................106
Specifying Delivery Destinations..................................................................................................................107
Selecting Destinations Registered in the Delivery Server's Address Book............................................107
Specifying the Sender...................................................................................................................................111
Selecting a Sender from the Sender List..................................................................................................111
Selecting the Sender by Entering the Registration Number...................................................................111
Selecting a Sender by Searching the Delivery Server's Destination List...............................................112
Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server........................................115
Simultaneous Storage and Delivery.............................................................................................................116
5. Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner
Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner...............................................................................................117
Outline of the Network TWAIN Scanner................................................................................................117
Preparing to Use the Network TWAIN Scanner.....................................................................................118
Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM.....................................................................120
Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation................................................................................................122
Scan Settings When Using TWAIN Scanner..............................................................................................124
Setting Original Orientation on the TWAIN Scanner............................................................................124
6. Various Scan Settings
Specifying Scan Settings...............................................................................................................................127
Scan Settings..................................................................................................................................................128
Scan Type..................................................................................................................................................128
Resolution...................................................................................................................................................128
Scan Size...................................................................................................................................................129
Edit..............................................................................................................................................................129

5
 Scanning Custom Size Originals..................................................................................................................131
Scanning the Entire Area of a Custom Size Original.............................................................................131
Scanning Part of an Original....................................................................................................................133
How to Set Originals to Scan Them by Custom Size.............................................................................135
Adjusting Image Density................................................................................................................................137
Waiting for Additional Originals..................................................................................................................138
Setting of Original Feed Type.......................................................................................................................139
Original Orientation..................................................................................................................................139
Original Output Exit..................................................................................................................................140
Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File.....................................................................................142
When a Time Limit Is Specified for Additional Originals.......................................................................142
When a Time Limit Is Not Specified for Additional Originals................................................................143
Specifying the File Type and File Name......................................................................................................145
Specifying the File Type............................................................................................................................145
Notes About and Limitations of File Types..............................................................................................146
Specifying the File Name..........................................................................................................................147
Security Settings to PDF Files....................................................................................................................149
Programs........................................................................................................................................................153
Registering Frequently Used Setting........................................................................................................153
Recalling a Registered Content................................................................................................................154
Changing a Registered Program..............................................................................................................154
Deleting a Program...................................................................................................................................155
Changing the Registered Program Name...............................................................................................155
Registering the Default Values of the Scanner's Initial Display..................................................................157
7. Appendix
Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size........................................................................................159
When Using the E-mail, Folder Sending, Storing, or Network Delivery Functions..............................159
When Using as a TWAIN Scanner..........................................................................................................164
Software Supplied on CD-ROM..................................................................................................................170
Auto-Run Program.....................................................................................................................................170
TWAIN Driver............................................................................................................................................170
DeskTopBinder Lite....................................................................................................................................171
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function...............................................173

6
 Transmission Function................................................................................................................................173
Storage Function........................................................................................................................................175
Network Delivery Function.......................................................................................................................176
Scanner Features...........................................................................................................................................178
Specifications.................................................................................................................................................181
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................185

7
 How to Read This Manual
Symbols

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.

This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.

[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.

[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.

8
About the Scanner Functions
This section describes functions you can use in the scanner mode.
You can use the scanner functions to send scan files to computers, scan originals from a computer using
the TWAIN driver, or store scan files on the machine's hard disk.
For details about each function, see respective chapters.
Sending scanned files (Network Scanner)
Scan files can be sent to or stored on a computer, and you can specify the format of a scan file
according to how the file will be used.
• Sending by e-mail
You can send scan files to specified e-mail addresses.
For details, see chapter 1 "Sending Scan Files by E-mail".
• Sending to folders
Scan files can be stored in shared network folders, or on FTP or Netware servers.
For details, see chapter 2 "Sending Scan Files to Folders".
• Delivering
You can deliver scan files using a delivery server.
For details, see chapter 4 "Delivering Scan Files".
Scanning originals from a client computer (TWAIN Scanner)
You can use the TWAIN driver to scan files from a networked or directly connected computer.
For details, see chapter 5 "Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner".
Storing files
Scan files can be stored on the machine's hard disk. You can do various things with stored files, such
as save them in shared folders or send them by e-mail.
For details, see chapter 3 "Storing Files Using the Scanner Function".

• p.19 "Sending Scan Files by E-mail"

• p.51 "Sending Scan Files to Folders"
• p.97 "Delivering Scan Files"
• p.117 "Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner"
• p.75 "Storing Files Using the Scanner Function"

9
 Display Panel
This section explains the simplified display and three confirmation screens: Check Modes, Preview, and
Scanned Files Status.
You can find explanations about the E-mail screen, Scan to Folder screen, list of stored files screen, or
network delivery scanner screen in this manual. For details, see "E-mail Screen", "Scan to Folder Screen",
"List of Stored Files", and "Network Delivery Scanner Screen".

• p.23 "E-mail Screen"

• p.55 "Scan to Folder Screen"
• p.82 "List of Stored Files"
• p.101 "Network Delivery Scanner Screen"

Simplified Display

This section explains how to switch to the simplified display.

When you press the [Simplified Display] key, the screen changes from the initial display to the simplified
display.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.

BLT013S

10
Example of Simplified Display

BLT001S

1. [Key Colour]
Press to increase screen contrast by changing the color of the keys.
This is available only for the simplified display.

• To return to the initial screen, press the [Simplified Display] key again.
• Certain keys do not appear on the simplified display.

Confirmation Displays

This section explains three confirmation displays: Check Modes, Preview, and Scanned Files Status.

Check Modes
This section explains items that are displayed and how to display the Check Modes screen.
Use the Check Modes screen to check scanning and transmission settings.
Pressing [Check Modes] switches the screen from the initial scanner screen to the Check Modes screen.

11
 Check Modes

BLT002S

1. Original
Displays Scan Settings, Original Feed Type, and other scanning settings.
2. Transmission function icon
Displays the icon of the transmission function in use.
3. Sender and Destination
Displays the sender and transmission or delivery destinations.
The ( ) symbol indicates a group destination.
The ( ) symbol indicates a destination that can receive encrypted e-mail.
4. Send
Displays transmission settings such as Sender and Subject.
5. [Expand Group Dest.]
Press to display the members of the group, when a group is specified as the destination.

Preview
Use the Preview screen to check that originals have been scanned correctly.
This section explains about the Preview screen that can be used before sending files by e-mail or Scan to
Folder, or delivering files.
Before you start scanning, press [Preview]. If you scan originals while [Preview] is selected, the Preview
screen appears. You can start or cancel sending the files after checking the preview and the scan settings
used for scanning.

12
Preview

BLT003S

1. [Zoom Out] and [Zoom In]

Press to reduce or enlarge the displayed preview.
2. [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Press to shift the displayed area.
3. [Cancel Sending]
Press to close a preview and interrupt a transmission.
4. [Send]
Press to close a preview and continue a transmission.
5. Display File
Displays a file's name and size.
6. Display Page
Displays the number of the currently displayed page, total number of pages, page size, and color mode.
7. [Switch]
Press to change the page of the selected file that is displayed.
8. Display Position
Displays the position of an image when enlarged.
9. Preview Area
Shows which section of the original is displayed by the preview function.
If an original is larger than A2 (18 × 24 in), only a specified section of the original can be displayed in the
preview. Use the area, size, and direction settings to specify the section that is displayed in the preview.
To specify these settings, select [Select Area].

13
 10. [Select Area]
If you are scanning an original that is larger than A2 (18 × 24 in), press this button to specify the area,
size, and direction of the displayed preview.

• The preview function is not available if you are scanning originals that are longer than 1219
mm (48 in).
• Preview is not available if a file is scanned using [Store Only].
• You can view a stored file using the Preview screen displayed from the list of stored files. For
details about viewing a stored file, see "Checking a Stored File Selected from the List".
• Preview might not be displayed if scanning failed or the image file is corrupted. If this is the case,
scan the original again.

• p.85 "Checking a Stored File Selected from the List"

Scanned Files Status

This section explains items that are displayed and how to display the Scanned Files Status screen.
Use the Scanned Files Status screen to check e-mail transmission, Scan to Folder, and delivery results.
Press [Scanned Files Status] to display the Scanned Files Status screen.

Up to 9 transmission or delivery results are displayed at the same time. Press [ ] or [ ] to switch between
results.

14
Scanned Files Status

BLT004S

1. Date / Time
Displays the time and date transmission was specified by this machine or the time and date when Completed,
Error, or Cancelled was confirmed.
2. Transmission function icon
Displays the icon of the transmission function used.
The ( ) symbol indicates a destination that can receive encrypted e-mail.
3. Destination
Displays the transmission destination.
If you have selected multiple destinations, the first selected destination is displayed.
Other destinations appear as "+ X" (X indicates the number of destinations.) when sending files by e-mail
or delivering them.
4. Sender
Displays the sender name.
5. File Name
Displays the stored file name of files that are simultaneously sent and stored, or of stored files that are sent.
6. Status
Displays one of the following transmission statuses: Completed, Trnsmtg., Waiting..., Error, or Cancelled.
7. [Cancel]
To cancel transmission, select a file whose status is "Waiting...", and then press [Cancel].
8. [Print List]
Press to print transmission results.

15
 • You cannot check scanner function transmission results by pressing [Job List] at the bottom of the
screen. To check transmission results, press [Scanned Files Status], and then display the Scanned
Files Status screen.
• Depending on security settings, some transmission results might not be displayed.

16
How to Start Scanning
Use one of the following two methods to start scanning:
• Place originals
• Press the [Start] key
The default settings allow you to start scanning, storing, and delivering files by simply placing originals
(without pressing the [Start] key). When you place originals, the [Start] key is unlit.
However, you must press the [Start] key in the following cases:
• To start printing the scanner journal
• Right after making additional scanning settings you had missed (for example, if you forgot to specify
a destination)

• You can change the settings for starting scanning by pressing the [Start] key. For details, see "System
Settings", General Settings Guide.

17
18
1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail 1

This section explains the necessary preparations and the procedure for sending scan files by e-mail.

Outline of Sending Scan Files by E-mail

This section outlines the function for sending scan files by e-mail.

ZZZ801S

1. This machine
You can attach scan files to e-mail and send them to a mail server. You can also encrypt and/or attach a signature
to the scan files you send by e-mail.
2. SMTP server
You need to have an access to an e-mail server that supports SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol), to send scan
files by e-mail. However, it is not essential to have an e-mail server inside the LAN where this machine belongs.
It transfers a received e-mail to a specified destination through a LAN or the Internet.
3. Client computer
Use e-mail client software to receive e-mail messages and scan file attachments that are generated by this
machine.
4. LDAP Server
Use this server for administering e-mail accounts, searching the network, and authenticating the computers that
access the machine. Using the LDAP server, you can search for destinations from the machine.

• This machine does not support SMTPS (SMTP over SSL).

19
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Preparation for Sending by E-mail

To send scanned files by e-mail, you must first perform the following:

1 • Check the machine is properly connected to the network

• Configure the network settings in [System Settings]
• Configure the necessary settings in [Scanner Features]

Check the machine is properly connected to the network

Check that this machine is properly connected to the network.
For details about how to connect this machine to a network, see "Connecting to the Interfaces", General
Settings Guide.

Configure the network settings in [System Settings]

Configure the network settings in [System Settings] according to your environment and how you will be
using the machine.
The following procedure explains connecting this machine to an IPv4 network using Ethernet cable.
Note that the settings you must configure will vary depending on your operating environment. For details
about network settings and configuration procedures, see "Network Settings Required to Use E-mail
Function", General Settings Guide.

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key, and then press [System Settings].

The System Settings screen appears.

20
 Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail

2. Press the [Interface Settings] tab.

3. Press [Machine IPv4 Address] to specify the machine's IPv4 address.

To specify a static IPv4 address for this machine, press [Specify], and then enter the IPv4 address and
subnet mask.
To obtain an IPv4 address from a DHCP server automatically, press Auto-Obtain (DHCP).
4. Press [IPv4 Gateway Address], and then enter the IPv4 gateway address.
5. Press [Effective Protocol], and then make [IPv4] active.
6. Press the [File Transfer] tab.

7. Press [SMTP Server].

8. Press [Change], which is to the right of [Server Name], then enter the SMTP server host name
or IPv4 address, and then press [OK].
If necessary, you can change the number by pressing [Change], which is to the right of the port number.

• If an extended wireless LAN board (optional) is installed, press [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings]
tab, then press [Ethernet], and then configure the network settings.

21
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Configure the necessary settings in [Scanner Features]

Using [Scanner Features], you can make or change various settings related to the scanner function, such
as compressing scan data or viewing the scanner journal. Configure the scanner settings according to your
1 environment and how you will be using the machine.
This section explains how to display the Scanner Features screen. For details about the settings on this
screen, see "Scanner Features", General Settings Guide.

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key, and then press [Scanner Features].

The Scanner Features screen appears.

2. Press the [General Settings], [Scan Settings], [Send Settings], or [Initial Settings] tabs and
configure the relevant settings on those tabs.

Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book

You can register frequently used e-mail addresses in the address book.
Register e-mail addresses in [Address Book Management] under [Administrator Tools] from [System
Settings]. Addresses can also be registered as groups.

• For details about registering e-mail addresses in the address book, see "Registering Addresses and
Users for Scanner Functions", General Settings Guide.
• You can also register e-mail addresses in the address book using Web Image Monitor or
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about how to display Web Image Monitor or install
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see "Monitoring and Configuring the Printer", Network Guide. For
details about registering addresses in the address book, see Web Image Monitor or
SmartDeviceMonitor Help.
• Depending on the machine type, you may not be able to use the machine when it is updating the
address book using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.
• Encrypted files can be sent by e-mail only to destinations for which decryption is set. For details about
sending encrypted files by e-mail, see "Security Settings to E-mails".

22
 Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail

• p.47 "Security Settings to E-mails"

E-mail Screen 1
This section explains the screen layout when sending scan files by e-mail.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an item by pressing it.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like [ ]. Keys that
cannot be selected appear like [ ].

BLT005S

1. Destination field
The specified destination appears. If more than one destination has been specified, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll
through the destinations.
2. E-mail / Folder
Press these tabs to switch between the E-mail screen and Scan to Folder screen.
Switch the screen also when sending the same files by both e-mail and Scan to Folder.
3. E-mail icon
Indicates that the E-mail screen is displayed.
4. [Manual Entry]
To specify destinations not registered in the address book, press this key, and then enter the e-mail addresses
using the soft keyboard that appears.
5. [Reg. No.]
Press this key to specify the destination using a 5-digit registration number.

23
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

6. Destination List
The list of destinations registered in the machine appears. If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press
[ ] or [ ] to switch the screen.

1 The (
The (
) symbol indicates a group destination.
or ) symbol indicates a destination that can receive encrypted e-mail.
7. [Text] [Subject] [Security] [Sender Name] [Recept. Notice]
Enter the message and specify the subject, security (encryption and a signature), sender, and whether or not to
use Message Disposition Notification.

24
 Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

This section describes the basic operation for sending scan files by e-mail.

1. Make sure that no previous settings remain. 1

If a previous setting remains, press the [Clear Modes] key.
2. If the network delivery scanner screen or Scan to Folder screen appears, switch to the E-
mail screen.
For details, see "Switching to the E-mail Screen".

3. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan
size.
For details, see "Various Scan Settings".

4. If necessary, specify the scanning density.

For details, see "Adjusting Image Density".
5. If necessary, press [Next Original Wait].
For details, see "Waiting for Additional Originals".
6. If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as the original orientation
and output exit.
For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".

25
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

7. If necessary, press [Send File Type / Name] to specify settings such as file format and file
name.
For details, see "Specifying the File Type and File Name".

1 8. Specify the destination.

You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see "Specifying E-mail Destinations".
9. If necessary, press [Text] to enter the e-mail message.
For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Message"
10. If necessary, press [Subject] to specify the e-mail subject.
For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Subject".
11. To specify the e-mail sender, press [Sender Name].
For details, see "Specifying the E-mail Sender".
12. If necessary, press [Security] to specify [Encryption] or [Signature].
For details, see "Security Settings to E-mails".
13. To use Message Disposition Notification, press [Recept. Notice].
If you select [Recept. Notice], the selected e-mail sender will receive e-mail notification when the e-
mail recipient has opened the e-mail.
14. Place originals.
15. If scanning does not start automatically, press the [Start] key.
If you are scanning batches, place the next originals.
For details, see "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File".

• If you have selected two or more destinations, the destinations can be made to appear one by
one by pressing [ ] or [ ] next to the destination field.
• To cancel a selected destination, press [ ] or [ ] to display the destination in the destination
field, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key. You can cancel a destination selected from the
destination list by pressing the selected destination again.
• In [System Settings], you can specify the administrator's e-mail address as the default sender
name. This lets you send e-mail without entering anything for [Sender Name]. For details, see
"File Transfer", General Settings Guide.
• Depending on the security setting, the logged-on user may be specified as [Sender Name].
• To use Message Disposition Notification, log on to the machine as a user and specify the sender.
Note, however, that the [Recept. Notice] notification e-mail may not be transmitted if the e-mail
software of the recipient does not support Message Disposition Notification.

26
 Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail

• If you press [Check Modes] before pressing the [Start] key, the initial scanner screen switches
to the Check Modes screen. You can use the Check Modes screen to check the settings such as
destinations. For details, see "Check Modes".
• If you press [Preview] and then start scanning while [Preview] is selected, the Preview screen
appears. You can use this screen to check how the originals are scanned and the scan setting
1
used for scanning. After checking the preview, you can specify whether to send the file or not.
For details, see "Preview".
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key.
• You can also store a scan file and simultaneously send it by e-mail. For details, see "Simultaneous
Storage and Sending by E-mail".
• Applying security to e-mail can reduce transmission speed.
• If you select [Do not Use Signatures] under the signature settings in Web Image Monitor, you
cannot attach signatures.
• To send encrypted files by e-mail, you must first configure the destination's decryption settings
in the address book settings of Web Image Monitor. E-mail sent to a destination for which
decryption is not configured cannot be decrypted even if [Encryption] is selected in [Security].
For details about configuring destination decryption settings, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• When [Security] is set to [Encryption], if you specify multiple destinations, a delivery failure
message will appear each time a scan file is sent to a destination where decryption settings have
not been configured.
• After an e-mail is sent, the destination, sender, subject, text, and file name fields will be
automatically cleared. If you want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local
dealer.

• p.29 "Switching to the E-mail Screen"

• p.127 "Various Scan Settings"
• p.137 "Adjusting Image Density"
• p.138 "Waiting for Additional Originals"
• p.139 "Setting of Original Feed Type"
• p.145 "Specifying the File Type and File Name"
• p.30 "Specifying E-mail Destinations"
• p.44 "Specifying the E-mail Message"
• p.43 "Specifying the E-mail Subject"
• p.39 "Specifying the E-mail Sender"
• p.47 "Security Settings to E-mails"
• p.142 "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File"

27
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

• p.11 "Check Modes"

• p.12 "Preview"
• p.46 "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail"
1

28
 Switching to the E-mail Screen

Switching to the E-mail Screen

This section explains how to switch the screen to the E-mail screen.
If the Scan to Folder screen is being displayed, press [E-mail] to switch to the E-mail screen. 1
If the network delivery scanner screen is being displayed, switch to the E-mail screen as follows:

1. Press [Delivery Dest.].

The E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen appears.

2. If the Scan to Folder screen appears, press [E-mail].

The E-mail screen appears.

• You cannot switch from the network delivery scanner screen while delivery destinations are being
specified. To clear the specified destination, display the destination in the destination field of the
network delivery scanner screen, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key.

29
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Specifying E-mail Destinations

This section explains how to specify e-mail destinations.
1 You can specify e-mail destinations by any of the following methods:
• Select the destination from the machine's address book
• Enter the e-mail address directly
• Search the LDAP server for the destination and select it
Before you select destinations, make sure you have selected [To]. If necessary, press [Cc] or [Bcc], and
then select destinations.

• You can specify multiple destinations.

Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book

This section explains how to select the destination from the machine's address book.

• To use this function, you must register the destinations in [System Settings] in advance. For details, see
"Registering Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions", General Settings Guide.
You can use the following methods to select destinations registered in the machine's address book:
• Select a destination from the list
• Select a destination by entering the registration number
• Select a destination by searching the machine's address book

Selecting a destination from the list

Select the destination from the destination list.

1. In the destination list, press the key including the destination name.

30
 Specifying E-mail Destinations

The key of the selected destination is highlighted, and the destination appears in the destination field
at the top of the screen.
If the target destination does not appear, take one of the following steps:
• Display the destination by selecting its initial letter from the title 1
• Display the destination by pressing [ ] or [ ]

• Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in the destination list.

Selecting destinations by entering the registration numbers

Select the destination from the machine's address book using its registration number.

1. Press [Reg. No.].

2. Using the number keys, enter the five-digit registration number assigned to the required
destination.
If the entered number is less than five digits, press the [ ] key after the last number.
Example: To enter 00003
Press the [3] key, and then press the [ ] key.
By pressing [Change], you can change the selected destination.
3. Press [OK].

Searching the machine's address book for the destination and selecting it
This section explains how to search the machine's address book for the destination and select it.

31
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

1. Press [Search Dest.].

2. To search by destination name, press [Name].

To search by e-mail address, press [E-mail Address].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [E-mail Address].
3. Enter the beginning of the destination name.
To search by e-mail address, enter the beginning of the address.
4. Press [OK].
5. If necessary, press [Advanced Search] to specify the detailed search criteria, and then press
[OK].
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search using criteria such as [Name], [E-mail Address], and
[Folder Name]. You can specify search criteria such as [Beginning Word] or [End Word]. You can
refine your search using multiple criteria.

The illustrated screen is an example. The items that actually appear on the screen may differ.
6. Press [Start Search].
Destinations that match the search criteria are displayed.
7. Select a destination.
8. Select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].

32
 Specifying E-mail Destinations

9. Press [OK].

• If [LDAP Search] is set to [On] in [System Settings], check that [Address Book] in the upper part
on the screen has been selected before executing the search. 1
• Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [E-mail Address], and
[Folder Name], are registered in the machine's address book. For details, see "Registering
Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions", General Setting Guide.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected destinations.
• Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
• By pressing [Advanced Search], the following criteria appear:
• [Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".
• [End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".
• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".
• [Include one Word]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
• [Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".

Entering an E-mail Address Manually

This section explains how to enter an e-mail address manually.

33
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

1. Press [Manual Entry].

The soft keyboard appears.

2. Enter the e-mail address.
3. Press [OK].

• Depending on the security settings, [Manual Entry] may not be displayed.

• To change a registered destination e-mail address, press [Edit] to the left of the destination field
to display the soft keyboard, use the soft keyboard to enter the new address, and then click [OK].
• The e-mail address that is entered directly can be registered in the machine's address book. For
details, see "Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book".

• p.37 "Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book"

Selecting Destinations by Searching an LDAP Server

This section explains how to search for an address registered in an LDAP server and specify it as an e-mail
destination.

• To use this function, an LDAP server must be connected to the network.

• Under [System Settings], the LDAP server must be registered and [LDAP Search] must be set to [On].
For details, see "System Settings", General Settings Guide.

34
 Specifying E-mail Destinations

1. Press [Search Dest.].

2. Select the LDAP server that appears next to [Address Book].

Register the LDAP server in advance in [System Settings].

If authentication is required to access the selected server, the authentication screen appears. To
authenticate, enter the user name and password.
3. To search by destination name, press [Name].
To search by e-mail address, press [E-mail Address].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [E-mail Address]. If you search by [Name], LDAP
server's settings determine whether the search is based on surname or first name. Consult your
administrator.
4. Enter the beginning of the destination name.
To search by e-mail address, enter the beginning of the destination address.
5. Press [OK].
6. If necessary, press [Advanced Search] to specify the detailed search criteria, and then press
[OK].
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search using criteria such as [Name], [Fax Destination], [E-
mail Address], [Company Name], and [Department Name]. You can specify search criteria such as
[Beginning Word] or [End Word]. You can refine your search using multiple criteria.

35
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

The illustrated screen is an example. The items that actually appear on the screen may differ.
7. Press [Start Search].
Destinations that match the search criteria are displayed.
8. Select the destination.
9. Select [To], [Cc], or [Bcc].
10. Press [OK].

• The [Name], [Fax Destination], [E-mail Address], [Company Name], and [Department Name]
search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search] are registered in the LDAP server.
• If you specified [Search Options] on [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server] under [System
Settings], you can add a search condition for LDAP search on the [Advanced Search] screen.
For details, see "System Settings", General Settings Guide.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected destinations.
• Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
• If an e-mail address returned by the LDAP server is too long, it will be impossible to specify it as
the destination. For details about the number of characters that can be specified, see "Sending
E-mail".
• You can register multiple e-mail addresses in individual LDAP server accounts. However, only
one e-mail address will be displayed as the search result. Usually, the address that was registered
first on the LDAP server is the address that is displayed.
• By pressing [Advanced Search], the following criteria appear:
• [Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".
• [End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".
• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".

36
 Specifying E-mail Destinations

• [Include one Word]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
• [Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
1
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".
• [Fuzzy Search]: a vague search (The function of this vague search depends on the system
supported by the LDAP server.)

• p.173 "Sending E-mail"

Registering a Directly-Entered Destination in the Address Book

This section explains how to register a directly-entered destination in the machine's address book. You can
also register a destination selected from the LDAP server.

1. In the destination field, display the destination you want to register.

2. Press [Prg. Dest.].

37
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

3. Press [Names], and then specify the name and other information to be registered.
For details about specifying the information to be registered, see "Registering Addresses and Users
for Scanner Functions", General Settings Guide.

1 4. Press [OK].

• Depending on the security setting, [Prg. Dest.] may not appear. In such case, you cannot complete
the registration.
• To register in the machine's address book a destination searched for and selected from the LDAP
server, display the destination, and then press [Prg. Dest.].

38
 Specifying the E-mail Sender

Specifying the E-mail Sender

This section explains how to specify the e-mail sender.
To send e-mail, you must specify the name of the sender. 1
You can specify the e-mail sender by any of the following methods:
• Select the sender from the sender list
• Select the sender by entering the registration number
• Select the sender by searching the machine's address book

• Senders must be registered in advance under [System Settings]. For details, see "Registering Addresses
and Users for Scanner Functions", General Settings Guide.
• In [System Settings], you can specify the administrator's e-mail address as the default sender name.
This lets you send e-mail without entering anything for [Sender Name]. For detail, see "File Transfer",
General Settings Guide.
• Depending on the security setting, the logged-on user may be specified as [Sender Name].
• When a protection code has been set, a screen for entering the protection code appears after selecting
the sender. Enter the protection code, and then press [OK]. If the protection code you entered is
correct, the sender name is displayed.

Selecting a Sender from the List

This section explains how to select the sender from the machine's sender list.

1. Press [Sender Name].

2. Select the sender.

3. Press [OK].

39
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Using a Registration Number to Specify a Sender Name

Select the sender using the registration numbers specified by users in the machine's address book.

1 1. Press [Sender Name].

2. Press [Registration No.].

3. Using the number keys, enter the five-digit registration number assigned to the required
destination.
If the entered number is less than five digits, press the [ ] key after the last number.
Example: To enter 00006
Press the [6] key, and then press the [ ] key.
By pressing [Change], you can change the selected destination.
4. Press [OK] twice.

Selecting the Sender by Searching the Machine's Address Book

This section explains how to select the sender by searching the machine's address book.

1. Press [Sender Name].

2. Press [Search].

40
 Specifying the E-mail Sender

3. To search by user name, press [Name].

To search by e-mail address, press [E-mail Address].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [E-mail Address]. 1
4. Enter the beginning of the sender's name you want to search for.
To search by e-mail address, enter the beginning of the address.
5. Press [OK].
6. If necessary, press [Advanced Search] to specify the detailed search criteria, and then press
[OK].
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search using criteria such as [Name], [E-mail Address], and
[Folder Name].
You can specify search criteria such as [Beginning Word] or [End Word]. You can refine your search
using multiple criteria.

The illustrated screen is an example. The items that actually appear on the screen may differ.
7. Press [Start Search].
Destinations that match the search criteria are displayed.
8. Select the sender.
9. Press [OK] twice.

• Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [E-mail Address], and
[Folder Name], are registered in the machine's address book. For details, see "Registering
Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions", General Setting Guide.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected sender.
• By pressing [Advanced Search], the following criteria appear:
• [Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".
• [End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters are targeted.

41
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".

• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are
targeted.

1 For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".

• [Include one Word]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
• [Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".

42
 Specifying the E-mail Subject

Specifying the E-mail Subject

You can specify the subject for an e-mail when sending a file by e-mail.

1. Press [Subject]. 1

2. Enter the subject.

To enter characters, press [Text Entry].
To enter symbols, press [Symbol Entry].
To add predefined User Text registered on this machine, press [User Text].
For details about entering the text, see "Entering Text", About This Machine.
3. Press [OK].

43
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Specifying the E-mail Message

This section explains how to specify the e-mail message.
1 The message can be created in the following ways:
• Select the registered e-mail message from the list
• Enter the message directly

• The messages that can be selected from the list must be registered in [System Settings] in advance.
For details, see "File Transfer", General Settings Guide.

Selecting a Message from the List

You can select a message from the list.

1. Press [Text].

2. Select a message.

3. Press [OK].

44
 Specifying the E-mail Message

Manual Entry of a Message

You can enter the message manually.

1. Press [Text]. 1

2. Press [Manual Entry].

The soft keyboard appears.
3. Enter the message.
4. Press [OK] twice.

45
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail

This section explains how to store a file and simultaneously send it by e-mail.
1 1. Press [Store File].

2. Select [Send & Store].

3. If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File Name], and
[Password].
For details, see "Specifying File Information for a Stored File".
4. Press [OK].
5. Specify the destination, make any other necessary settings, and then send the e-mail.
For details about sending a file by e-mail, see "Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail".

• Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For
details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.
• You can resend stored files by e-mail. To resend stored files, select the files on the Select Stored
File screen, and then send them. For details, see "Sending a Stored File".
• If a file is sent and stored simultaneously with [Security] set, the e-mail will be encrypted and the
signature applied, but the stored file will not be changed.

• p.79 "Specifying File Information for a Stored File"

• p.25 "Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail"
• p.89 "Sending a Stored File"

46
 Security Settings to E-mails

Security Settings to E-mails

This section explains the procedure for applying security (encryption and a signature) to e-mail.
Applying security (encryption and a signature) to e-mail helps prevent spoofing and information leakage. 1
• S/MIME is used to set security. For details about security settings, consult your network administrator.
• Applying security to e-mail can reduce transmission speed.

Sending Encrypted E-mail

Use the following procedure to specify a destination for which encryption is configured, and encrypt and
send an e-mail.
Destinations for which encryption can be configured for each transmission are indicated by this symbol
.

1. Press [Security].

2. Select [Encryption].

47
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

3. Press [OK].

• Encrypting e-mail will increase its size.

1 • When you specify a destination denoted by the symbol (which indicates that e-mail sent to
this destination is always encrypted) encrypted e-mail will be sent regardless of the setting
specified in [Security].
• If you have selected multiple destinations including destinations for which encryption has not
been configured, e-mail sent to such destinations will not be encrypted even if you specify
encryption.
• If you selected [Send & Store], the e-mail will be encrypted, but the stored file will not be
encrypted.

Sending E-mail with a Signature

Use the following procedure to apply a signature to an e-mail that has scan file attachments.

1. Press [Security].
2. Select [Signature].

3. Press [OK].

• The certificate (device certificate) installed on this machine is used to attach signatures.
• Note that the following can result if certain signature settings are specified by the administrator:
• [Signature] does not appear. This is because you cannot apply signatures to scan files that
are sent by e-mail.
• You cannot change the [Signature] settings. This is because a signature is always applied
to scan files that are sent by e-mail.

48
 Sending the URL by E-mail

Sending the URL by E-mail

This section explains how to send the URL of a scanned file by e-mail.
Use this function if network restrictions prevent you sending attachments by email. 1
• Depending on your e-mail application, a phishing warning might appear after you receive an e-mail
message. To prevent phishing warnings appearing after you receive e-mail from a specified sender,
you must add the sender to your e-mail application's exclusion list. For details about how to do this,
see your e-mail application's Help.

1. In [Scanner Features], on the [Send Settings] tab, press [Stored File E-mail Method], and
then select [Send URL Link].
For details about specifying the setting, see "Scanner Features", General Settings Guide.
2. Return to the initial scanner screen, and then press [Store File] to select [Send & Store].
To send the URL by e-mail, you must select [Send & Store].
3. Press [OK.]
4. Specify the e-mail destination, make any other necessary settings, and then send the e-mail.
For details about sending e-mail, see "Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail".
An e-mail similar to the following will be sent to the destination:

BAP044S

5. In the e-mail destination, click the URL.

Web Image Monitor starts.
6. View, delete, send, or download the file over the network using Web Image Monitor.

• For details about Web Image Monitor functions and their settings, see "Monitoring and
Configuring the Printer", Network Guide.
• It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor on the same network environment.
• Depending on the environment, even if you click the URL in the file sent by e-mail, the browser
may not start and you may not be able to view the file. If this happens, click the same URL again,
or manually enter the URL in the browser's address bar.

49
 1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

• To display details about the functions for managing stored files using Web Image Monitor, click
[Help] on the upper right of each Web browser's window.
• You can send the URL by e-mail and simultaneously send it by Scan to Folder. In this case, the

1 file is sent to the Scan to Folder destination, not the URL.

• p.25 "Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail"

50
2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder

This section describes the preparations and procedure for sending files by Scan to Folder.
2
Outline of Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder

This section outlines the function for sending scan files by Scan to Folder.

Sending files to shared folders

ZZZ802S

1. This machine
You can send scan files to shared network folders. To send scan files to shared network folders, use the SMB
protocol.
2. Computer with a shared folder
To use this function, it is necessary to create a shared folder in advance. You can specify a shared folder to save
scan files.
3. Client computer
You can also browse scanned files saved to a shared folder from a client computer.

51
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

Sending files to an FTP server

ZZZ803S

1. This machine
You can send scan files to FTP server folders. To send scan files to FTP server folders, use the FTP protocol.
2. FTP server
The FTP server is a server that provides file transfer services among computers on the same network. Transferred
files are stored on this server. It is essential to have the FTP server inside the LAN/WAN where this machine
belongs. It is not possible to access an FTP server via a proxy server.
3. Client computer
You can browse scanned files saved to an FTP server from a client computer. You need to have an FTP client
program on the computer to connect to an FTP server.

Sending files to a NetWare server

ZZZ804S

1. This machine
You can send scan files to NetWare folders. To send scan files to NetWare folders, use the NCP protocol.

52
 Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder

2. NetWare server
You can use this server to share files over the network via NetWare. By sending image data to the server, files
can be stored on the server.
3. Client computer
To download files, a computer must be running the NetWare client and be logged onto the server.

Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder

2
To send scanned files by Scan to Folder, you must first perform the following:
• Check the machine is properly connected to the network
• Configure the network settings in [System Settings]
• Configure the necessary settings in [Scanner Features]

• If necessary, configure the shared folders, FTP server, and Netware server on the network in advance.
• Files can be sent by SMB in NetBIOS over TCP/IP environments only. Files cannot be sent by SMB
in NetBEUI environments.
• Scan to Folder is still possible even if sending by SMB or FTP is disabled from the control panel, Web
Image Monitor, or Telnet etc.

Check the machine is properly connected to the network

Check that this machine is properly connected to the network.
For details about how to connect this machine to a network, see "Connecting to the Interfaces", General
Settings Guide.

Configure the network settings in [System Settings]

Configure the network settings in [System Settings] according to your environment and how you will be
using the machine.
The following procedure explains connecting this machine to an IPv4 network using Ethernet cable.
Note that the settings you must configure will vary depending on your operating environment. For details
about network settings and configuration procedures, see "Network Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder
Function", General Settings Guide.

53
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key, and then press [System Settings].

The System Settings screen appears.

2. Press the [Interface Settings] tab.

3. Press [Machine IPv4 Address] to specify the machine's IPv4 address.

To specify a static IPv4 address for this machine, press [Specify], and then enter the IPv4 address and
subnet mask.
To obtain an IPv4 address from a DHCP server automatically, press [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)].
4. Press [IPv4 Gateway Address], and then enter the IPv4 gateway address.
5. Press [Effective Protocol], and then make [IPv4] active.
To send files to shared folders, make [SMB] active.
To send files to Netware folders, make [NetWare] active.

• If an extended wireless LAN board (optional) is installed, press [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings]
tab, then press [Ethernet], and then configure the network settings.

Configure the necessary settings in [Scanner Features]

Using [Scanner Features], you can make or change various settings related to the scanner function, such
as compressing scan data or viewing the scanner journal. Configure the scanner settings according to your
environment and how you will be using the machine.

54
 Before Sending Files by Scan to Folder

This section explains how to display the Scanner Features screen. For details about the settings on this
screen, see "Scanner Features", General Settings Guide.

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key, and then press [Scanner Features].

The Scanner Features screen appears.

2. Press the [General Settings], [Scan Settings], [Send Settings], or [Initial Settings] tabs and
configure the relevant settings on those tabs.

Registering Destination Folders in the Address Book

You can register the addresses of frequently-used destination folders in the address book. Register the
folder addresses in [Address Book Management] under [Administrator Tools] from [System Settings]. These
addresses can also be registered as groups.

• For details about registering the address of a destination folder in the address book, see "Registering
Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions", General Settings Guide.
• You can register entries in the address book using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin. For details about how to display Web Image Monitor or install SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin, see "Monitoring and Configuring the Printer", Network Guide. For details about registering
addresses in the address book, see Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor Help.
• Depending on the machine type, you may not be able to use the machine when it is updating the
address book using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.

Scan to Folder Screen

This section describes the screen layout when sending scan files by Scan to Folder.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an item by pressing it. When
you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like [ ]. Keys that cannot be
selected appear like [ ].

55
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

BLT006S

1. Destination field
The specified destination appears. If more than one destination has been specified, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll
through the destinations.
2. E-mail / Folder
Press these tabs to switch between the Scan to Folder screen and E-mail screen.
Switch the screen also when sending the same files by both Scan to Folder and e-mail.
3. Scan to Folder icon
Shows that the Scan to Folder screen is displayed.
4. [Manual Entry]
To specify destinations not registered in the address book, press this button to display the soft keyboard, and
then enter the address of the destination folder.
5. [Reg. No.]
Press to specify a destination using a five-digit registration number.
6. Destination List
The list of destinations registered in the machine appears.
If all of the destinations cannot be displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to switch the screen.
The ( ) symbol indicates a group destination.
7. [Text] [Subject] [Security] [Sender Name] [Recept. Notice]
Enter the message and specify the subject, e-mail security (encryption and a signature), sender, and whether or
not to use Message Disposition Notification. The entries will be used for e-mail transmission when sending files
simultaneously by Scan to Folder and e-mail. For details, see "Sending Scan Files by E-mail".

• p.19 "Sending Scan Files by E-mail"

56
 Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder

Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder

This section describes the basic operations involved in using Scan to Folder.

1. Make sure that no previous settings remain.

If a previous setting remains, press the [Clear Modes] key.
2. If the network delivery scanner screen or E-mail screen appears, switch to the Scan to Folder 2
screen.
For details, see "Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen".

3. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan
size.
For details, see "Various Scan Settings".

4. If necessary, specify the scanning density.

For details, see "Adjusting Image Density".
5. If necessary, press [Next Original Wait].
For details, see "Waiting for Additional Originals".
6. If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as the original orientation
and output exit.
For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".

57
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

7. If necessary, press [Send File Type / Name] to specify settings such as file format and file
name.
For details, see "Specifying the File Type and File Name".
8. Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.

2 For details, see "Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations".

9. Place originals.
10. If scanning does not start automatically, press the [Start] key.
If you are scanning batches, place the next originals.
For details, see "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File".

• If you have selected more than one destination, you can press [ ] or [ ] next to the destination
field to scroll through the destinations.
• To cancel a selected destination, press [ ] or [ ] to display the destination in the destination
field, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key. You can cancel a destination selected from the
destination list by pressing the selected destination again.
• If you press [Check Modes] before pressing the [Start] key, the initial scanner screen switches
to the Check Modes screen. You can use the Check Modes screen to check the settings such as
destinations. For details, see "Check Modes".
• If you press [Preview], and then start scanning while [Preview] is highlighted, the Preview screen
appears. You can use this screen to check how the originals are scanned and the scan settings
used for scanning. After checking the preview, you can specify whether to send the file or not.
For details, see "Preview".
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key.
• You can also store a file and simultaneously send it by Scan to Folder. For details, see
"Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder".
• After an e-mail is sent, the destination, and file name fields will be automatically cleared. If you
want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local dealer.

• p.60 "Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen"

• p.127 "Various Scan Settings"
• p.137 "Adjusting Image Density"
• p.138 "Waiting for Additional Originals"
• p.139 "Setting of Original Feed Type"
• p.145 "Specifying the File Type and File Name"
• p.61 "Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations"

58
 Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder

• p.142 "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File"

• p.11 "Check Modes"
• p.12 "Preview"
• p.74 "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder"

59
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen

This section explains how to switch to the Scan to Folder screen.
If the E-mail screen is being displayed, press [Folder] to switch to the Scan to Folder screen.
If the network delivery scanner screen is being displayed, switch to the Scan to Folder screen as follows:

2 1. Press [Delivery Dest.].

The E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen appears.

2. If the E-mail screen appears, press [Folder].

The Scan to Folder screen appears.

• You cannot switch from the network delivery scanner screen while delivery destinations are being
specified. To clear the specified destination, display the destination in the destination field of the
network delivery scanner screen, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key.

60
 Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

This section explains how to specify Scan to Folder destinations.
You can send a file by Scan to Folder by any of the following methods:
• Select a destination registered in the machine's address book
• Send a file to a shared network folder 2
• Send a file to an FTP server
• Send a file to a NetWare server

• You can specify multiple destinations.

Selecting the Destination from the Machine's Address Book

This section explains how to select the destination from the machine's address book.

• To use this function, you must register the destinations in [System Settings] in advance.
You can select a destination registered in the machine's address book by any of the following methods:
• Select the destination from the destination list
• Select the destination by entering its registration number
• Select the destination by searching the machine's address book

• If you have specified the address protection code for accessing the address book, the screen for
entering the address protection code appears.
• Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in the destination list.

Selecting a destination registered in the destination list

Select the destination from the destination list.

1. In the destination list, press the key including the destination name.
The key of the selected destination is highlighted, and the destination appears in the destination field
at the top of the screen.

61
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

If the target destination does not appear, take one of the following steps:
• Display the destination by selecting its initial letter from the title
• Display the destination by pressing [ ] or [ ]

• Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in the destination list.

Selecting destinations by entering the registration numbers

Select the destination from the machine's address book using its registration number.

1. Press [Reg. No.].

2. Enter the five-digit registration number that has been assigned to a destination folder using
the number keys.
If the entered number is less than five digits, press the [ ] key after the last number.
Example: To enter 00004
Press the [4] key, and then press the [ ] key.
By pressing [Change], you can change the selected destination.
3. Press [OK].

62
 Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

Searching the machine's address book for the destination and selecting it
This section explains how to search the machine's address book for the destination and select it.

1. Press [Search Dest.].

2. To search by destination name, press [Name].

To search by path, press [Folder Name].

The soft keyboard appears.

You can also search by combining [Name] and [Folder Name].
3. Enter the beginning of the destination name.
To search by path, enter the beginning of the path.
4. Press [OK].
5. If necessary, press [Advanced Search] to specify the detailed search criteria, and then press
[OK].
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search using criteria such as [Name], [E-mail Address], and
[Folder Name].
You can specify search criteria such as [Beginning Word] or [End Word]. You can refine your search
using multiple criteria.

63
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

2
The illustrated screen is an example. The items that actually appear on the screen may differ.
6. Press [Start Search].
Destinations that match the search criterion are displayed.
7. Select the destination folder.
8. Press [OK].

• Search criteria that appear in [Advanced Search], such as [Name], [E-mail Address], and
[Folder Name], are registered in the machine's address book. For details, see "Registering
Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions", General Setting Guide.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected destinations.
• Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
• By pressing [Advanced Search], the following criteria appear:
• [Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".
• [End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".
• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".
• [Include one Word]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
• [Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".

64
 Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

Sending Files to a Shared Network Folder

This section explains how to specify the destination when sending files to a shared network folder.

• The shared folder must have been created on the client computer in advance. For details about creating
shared folders, see Windows Help.
• You can create the shared folder under Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/
2
R2, Windows NT, and Mac OS X 10.2 or later.
• Depending on the operating system of the client computer, access to the shared folder may require
authentication.
• This machine does not support DFS (Distributed File System).
You can send a file to a shared folder over the network by any of the following methods:
• Enter the path to the destination directly
• Specify the path by browsing the network for the destination

Entering the path to the destination manually

You can enter the path to the destination folder manually.

1. Press [Manual Entry].

2. Press [SMB].
3. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.
The soft keyboard appears.
4. Enter the path for the folder.
The following is an example of a path where the folder name is "user" and the computer name is
"desk01": \\desk01\user.
Alternatively, you can enter the computer's IPv4 address instead of its name.
5. Press [OK].

65
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

6. Depending on the destination setting, enter the user name for logging on to the client
computer.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field to display the soft keyboard.
7. Depending on the destination setting, enter the password for logging on to the client
computer.
Press [Manual Entry] for the password to display the soft keyboard.
2 8. Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified shared folder exists.
9. Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
10. Press [OK].

• If authentication is required to access the folder, the login screen appears. Enter the user name
and password.
• If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation
message appears.
• Computer and shared folder names containing more than 12 characters cannot be displayed.
• To change the path for the folder that has been entered, press [Edit] on the left side of the
destination field. Enter the correct path for the folder, and then press [OK].
• The connection test may take time.
• You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel] during a connection
test.
• Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not
have write privileges for the file or there is not enough free hard disk space.
• You can register the path to the destination in the machine's address book. For details, see
"Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".
• If the message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see
"Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function", Troubleshooting.

• p.73 "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book"

Specifying the path by browsing the network for destinations

You can browse computers on the network for the destination folder, and then specify the path.

66
 Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

1. Press [Manual Entry].

2. Press [SMB].
3. Press [Browse Network] under the path name field.

Domains or workgroups on the network appear.

4. Select the domain or workgroup in which the destination folder is located.
5. Select the client computer that has the destination folder.
If you cannot find the computer you are looking for, press [Up One Level] and browse that level.
If authentication is required to access the selected computer, the authentication screen appears. To
authenticate, enter the user name and password.
6. Select the destination folder.
When the selected folder has sub-folders, the sub-folders list appears.
If you cannot find the destination folder, press [Up One Level], and then search for the folder at that
level.
7. Press [OK] twice.

• If authentication is required to access the folder, the login screen appears. Enter the user name
and password.
• If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation
message appears.

67
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

• Computer and shared folder names containing more than 12 characters cannot be displayed.
• Up to 100 computers or shared folders can be displayed.
• The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have the write privileges for the shared
folder or there is not enough free hard disk space.
• You can register the path to the destination in the machine' address book. For details, see
"Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".
2 • If the message "Cannot find the specified path. Please check the settings." appears, see
"Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function", Troubleshooting.

• p.73 "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book"

Sending Files to an FTP Server

This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to an FTP server.

Entering the path to an FTP server manually

You can enter the path to an FTP server manually.

1. Press [Manual Entry].

2. Press [FTP].
3. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the server name field.
The soft keyboard appears.
4. Enter the server name.
Alternatively, you can enter the server's IPv4 address instead of its name.
5. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.

68
 Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

6. Enter the path for the folder.

The following is an example of a path where the folder name is "user" and the subfolder name is "lib":
user\lib.
7. Press [OK].
8. Enter the user name according to the setting at the destination.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field to display the soft keyboard.
2
9. Enter the password according to the setting at the destination.
Press [Manual Entry] next to the password field to make the soft keyboard appear.
10. To change the port number which is set in [System Settings], press [Change] on the right
side of the port number field. Enter a port number using the number keys, and then press
the [ ] key.
11. Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified folder exists.
12. Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
13. Press [OK].

• If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation
message appears.
• The connection test may take time.
• You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel] during a connection
test.
• To change the registered path to a destination folder, press [Edit] to the left of the destination
field to display the soft keyboard, enter the new path, and then click [OK].
• You can register the path to the destination in the machine's address book. For details, see
"Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".
• The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges for the folder or there
is not enough free hard disk space.

• p.73 "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book"

Sending Files to NetWare Server

This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to a NetWare server.
The NetWare folder of the destination can be specified in an NDS tree or on a NetWare Bindery server,
depending on the NetWare environment. Consult your administrator.

69
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

You can send a file to NetWare server by any of the following methods:
• Enter the destination path of the Netware server directly
• Specify the path by browsing to the destination on the Netware server

Entering the path of the NetWare server directly

2 You can enter the path of the NetWare server.

1. Press [Manual Entry].

2. Press [NCP].
3. Select the connection type.
Press [NDS] to specify the folder in the NDS tree.
Press [Bindery] to specify the folder on the NetWare Bindery server.
4. Press [Manual Entry] on the right side of the path field.

The soft keyboard appears.

5. Enter the path for the folder.
If you set the connection type to [NDS], the NDS tree name is "tree", the name of the context including
the volume is "context", the volume name is "volume", and the folder name is "folder", the path will
be \\tree\volume.context\folder".

70
 Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

If you set the connection type to [Bindery], the NetWare server name is "server", the volume name is
"volume", and the folder name is "folder", the path will be "\\server\volume\folder".
6. Press [OK].
7. Enter the user name for logging on to the NDS tree or NetWare Bindery server.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the user name field. The soft keyboard appears.
If you press [NDS] for [Connection Type], enter the user name, and then enter the name of the context
containing the user object. If the user name is "user" and the name of the Context is "context", the user
2
name will be "user.context".
8. If a password is specified for the log on user, enter it.
Press [Manual Entry] to the right of the password field. The soft keyboard appears.
9. Press [Connection Test].
A connection test is performed to check whether the specified share folder exists.
10. Check the connection test result, and then press [Exit].
11. Press [OK].

• If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation
message appears.
• To change a registered path to a destination folder, press [Edit] to the left to the destination field
to display the soft keyboard, enter the correct path to the folder, and then press [OK].
• You can connect only to folders that you have the read privileges for.
• The connection test may take time.
• You may not be able to press [Connection Test] right after pressing [Cancel] during a connection
test.
• Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not
have write privileges for the file or there is not enough free hard disk space.
• You can register the path to the destination in the machine's address book. For details, see
"Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".

• p.73 "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book"

Specify the path by browsing to the destination on the Netware server

Specify the path by browsing to the destination folder in an NDS tree or on a NetWare Bindery server.

1. Press [Manual Entry].

2. Press [NCP].

71
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

3. Select the connection type.

Press [NDS] to specify a folder in the NDS tree.
Press [Bindery] to specify a folder on the NetWare Bindery server.
4. Press [Browse Network] under the path name field.

If you selected [NDS] under [Connection Type], the NDS tree list appears.
If you selected [Bindery] under [Connection Type], the NetWare Bindery server list appears.
5. Search for the destination folder in the NDS tree or NetWare Bindery server.
If you cannot find the destination folder, press [Up One Level], and then search for the folder at that
level.
6. Select the destination folder.
7. Press [OK] twice.

• If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or password, a confirmation
message appears.
• Only folders that you have the read privileges for are displayed.
• If the language used for the NDS tree or by the NetWare Bindery server differs from that used
by the machine, file names in the NDS tree or on the NetWare Bindery server might appear
garbled.
• Up to 100 items can be displayed.
• If the selected NDS tree or NetWare Bindery server requires authentication, a login screen
appears. Enter a user name and password for logging on to the NDS tree or NetWare Bindery
server. If you log on to the NDS tree, enter a user name, and then enter the name of the context
containing the user object. If the user name is "user" and the name of the Context is "context",
the user name will be "user.context".
• The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges for the folder or there
is not enough free hard disk space.
• You can register the path to the destination in the machine's address book. For details, see
"Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book".

72
 Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

• p.73 "Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book"

Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book

This section explains how to register folder paths you have entered manually or specified by browsing the
network to the machine's address book.
2
1. In the destination field, display the destination you want to register.

2. Press [Prg. Dest.].

3. Press [Names], and then specify the name and other information to be registered.
For details about specifying the information to be registered, see "Registering Addresses and Users
for Scanner Functions", General Settings Guide.
4. Press [OK].

• Depending on the security setting, [Prg. Dest.] may not appear.

73
 2. Sending Scan Files to Folders

Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to

Folder
This section explains how to store a file and simultaneously send it by Scan to Folder.

1. Press [Store File].

2

2. Make sure that [Send & Store] is selected.

3. If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File Name], and
[Password].
For details, see "Specifying File Information for a Stored File".
4. Press [OK].
5. Specify the setting for sending the file by Scan to Folder, and then send the file.
For details about sending a file by Scan to Folder, see "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder".

• Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For
details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.
• You can resend stored files by Scan to Folder. To resend stored files, select the files on the Select
Stored File screen, and then send them. For details, see "Sending a Stored File".

• p.79 "Specifying File Information for a Stored File"

• p.57 "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder"
• p.89 "Sending a Stored File"

74
3. Storing Files Using the Scanner
Function

Before Storing Files

This section outlines file storage under the scanner function and provides related cautions.

Outline of File Storage under the Scanner Function

3
This section outlines storing files under the scanner function.

• You can specify a password for each stored file. Files that are not password-protected can be accessed
by other users on the same local area network using DeskTopBinder. It is recommended that you
protect stored files from unauthorized access by specifying passwords.
• Scan file stored in the machine may be lost if some kind of failure occurs. We advise against using
the hard disk to store important files. The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage that may
result from the loss of files. For long-term storage of files, we recommend the use of DeskTopBinder.
For details, contact your local dealer.

ZZZ806S

1. This Machine
You can store scan files on the machine's hard disk. The stored files can be sent by e-mail, Scan to Folder, or the
network delivery scanner.
2. Client Computer
Using DeskTopBinder, you can, over the network, view, copy, or delete files stored in the machine. Using Web
Image Monitor, you can, over the network, view, download, send, or delete files stored in the machine. For
details about DeskTopBinder Lite, see DeskTopBinder Lite-related manuals. For details about Web Image
Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.

75
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

• Stored files will be deleted after a set period. For details about specifying the period, see "Administrator
Tools", General Settings Guide.
• Files stored under the scanner function cannot be printed from the machine's control panel. Print the
files from a client computer after receiving them on the computer.
• You can also store a file and simultaneously send it. For details, see "Simultaneous Storage and
Sending by E-mail", "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder", and "Simultaneous
Storage and Delivery".
3
• p.46 "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail"
• p.74 "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder"
• p.116 "Simultaneous Storage and Delivery"

76
 Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files

Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files

This section describes the basic operation for storing scan files.

1. Make sure that no previous settings remain.

If a previous setting remains, press the [Clear Modes] key.
2. Press [Store File].

3. Press [Store Only].

4. If necessary, specify file information, such as [User Name], [File Name], and [Password].
For details, see "Specifying File Information for a Stored File".
5. Press [OK].
6. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan
size.
For details, see "Various Scan Settings".

7. If necessary, specify the scanning density.

For details, see "Adjusting Image Density".
8. If necessary, press [Next Original Wait].
For details, see "Waiting for Additional Originals".

77
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

9. If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as the original orientation
and output exit.
For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
10. Place originals.
11. If scanning does not start automatically, press the [Start] key.
If you are scanning batches, place the next originals.
For details, see "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File".

3 • Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For
details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.
• By pressing [Send & Store], you can simultaneously store scan files and send them. For details,
see "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail", "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by
Scan to Folder", and "Simultaneous Storage and Delivery".
• You cannot press [Store File] if "PDF" is selected as the file type and security is applied.
• You cannot specify [Store Only] if:
• a destination is specified
• [Preview] is selected
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key.
• After an e-mail is sent, the file information fields will be automatically cleared. If you want to
preserve the information in these fields, contact your local dealer.

• p.79 "Specifying File Information for a Stored File"

• p.127 "Various Scan Settings"
• p.137 "Adjusting Image Density"
• p.138 "Waiting for Additional Originals"
• p.139 "Setting of Original Feed Type"
• p.142 "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File"
• p.46 "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by E-mail"
• p.74 "Simultaneous Storage and Sending by Scan to Folder"
• p.116 "Simultaneous Storage and Delivery"

78
 Specifying File Information for a Stored File

Specifying File Information for a Stored File

You can specify information for a stored file, such as user name, file name, and password.
By specifying information for a stored file, you can search for the file by user name or file name, or protect
the file with a password to prevent other people from accessing the file.

Specifying a User Name

You can specify a user name for the stored file. 3

1. Press [Store File].

The Store File screen appears.

2. Press [User Name].
A list of user names appears.
3. Press the user name you want to specify.
The user names shown here are names that were registered on the [Administrator Tools] tab in [System
Settings]. To specify a name not shown here, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
4. Press [OK] twice.

• Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For
details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.

Specifying a File Name

This section explains how to change the name of a stored file.

A stored file is allocated a name starting with "SCAN" followed by a 4-digit number.
• Example: SCAN0001

79
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

You can change this file name.

1. Press [Store File].

The Store File screen appears.

2. Press [File Name].
The soft keyboard appears.
3. Change the file name.
4. Press [OK] twice.

• For details about entering the text, see "Entering Text", About This Machine.

Specifying a Password

You can specify a password for the stored file.

• Do not forget the password. If you forget it, consult the system administrator of the machine.
By specifying a password, you can ensure that only the people who know the password can view the file.

1. Press [Store File].

80
 Specifying File Information for a Stored File

The Store File screen appears.

2. Press [Password].
3. Using the number keys, enter a four to eight-digit number.
4. Press [OK].
5. Enter the same number again using the number keys.

6. Press [OK] twice.

81
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

Displaying the List of Stored Files

This section describes the list of stored files.
Using the list of stored files, you can delete stored files or change the file's information.

List of Stored Files

This section describes how the list of stored files is displayed.

3 To display the list of stored files, press [Select Stored File] on the initial scanner screen.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an item by pressing it. When
you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like [ ]. Keys that cannot be
selected appear like [ ].

BLT007S

1. Keys for searching for files

Press to switch to the screens for searching for a file by user name or file name, or to the screen for displaying
all files.
2. List / Thumbnails
You can select whether to display stored files as a list or as thumbnails.
If the original of a stored file was larger than A2 (18 × 24 in), only a specified section of the file can be displayed
as a thumbnail. Use the area, size, and direction settings to specify the section that is displayed in the thumbnail.
To access these settings, select [System Settings], [General Features], and [Preview Area Settings].
3. [Send]
Press this to deliver or send a stored file by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
4. [Manage / Delete File]
Press this to delete stored files or change the file data.

82
 Displaying the List of Stored Files

5. Keys for sorting files

Press to sort the files using the selected item. Select the same item once more for a reverse sort. However, the files
cannot be sorted in reverse delivery.
6. [Details]
Press this to display details about the selected file.
7. [Preview]
Press this to display a preview of the selected file. For details, see "Checking a Stored File Selected from the List".
8. List of stored files
Displays the list of stored files. 3
If the file you want to select is not displayed in the list, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll the screen. If a password has been
specified for a file, a key icon appears to the left of the user name for the file.

• If the original of a stored file was longer than 1219 mm (48 in), the file cannot be displayed as a
thumbnail or preview.
• Depending on the security setting, some files may not appear in the list.
• Files stored under functions other than the scanner function do not appear on this screen.

• p.85 "Checking a Stored File Selected from the List"

Searching the List of Stored Files

You can search for files from the stored files using the user name or file name.
You can search the list of stored files by either of the following methods:
• Search by user name
• Search by file name

Searching by user name

You can search for a stored file by its user name.

83
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

1. Press [Select Stored File].

3
2. Press [User Name].
3. Select the user name to be used for the search.
The user names shown here are names that were registered on the [Administrator Tools] tab in [System
Settings]. To change a user name not shown here, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
4. Press [OK].
The search begins, and then files belonging to the specified user appear.

Searching by file name

You can search for a stored file by its file name.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

2. Press [File Name].

The soft keyboard appears.
3. Enter the file name.
For information about how to enter characters, see "Entering Text", About This Machine.
4. Press [OK].
The search starts, and files whose name starts with the entered string appear.

84
 Checking Stored Files

Checking Stored Files

You can display the Preview screen and check a stored file on the machine or from the client computer.

Checking a Stored File Selected from the List

This section explains how to preview a file selected from the list of stored files.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

3

The list of stored files appears.

For details about the list of stored files, see "List of Stored Files".
2. From the list of stored files, select the file you want to check.
You can select more than one file.
3. Press [Preview].
A preview of the selected stored file appears.

• If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To
select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].

• p.82 "List of Stored Files"

85
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

Stored File Preview Screen

BLT008S

1. [Zoom Out], [Zoom In]

In previewing, you can reduce or enlarge the file image.
2. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
You can scroll the preview screen.
3. [Switch]
You can switch to a preview of another page.
4. [Switch]
You can switch to a preview of another file.
5. Display File
The name and size of the selected file appear.
6. Display Page
The page number of the previewed page, total number of pages, page size, and color mode appear.
7. Display Position
When the preview is enlarged, the location of the part of the page displayed on the preview screen is indicated.
8. Preview Area
Shows which section of the original is displayed by the preview function.
If the original of a stored file was larger than A2 (18 × 24 in), only a specified section of the file can be displayed
in the preview. Use the area, size, and direction settings to specify the section that is displayed in the preview.
To specify these settings, select [Select Area].
9. [Select Area]
If you are viewing a file that is larger than A2 (18 × 24 in), press this button to specify the area, size, and direction
of the displayed preview.

86
 Checking Stored Files

• If the original of a stored file was longer than 1219 mm (48 in), the file cannot be displayed as a
preview.

Checking Stored Files from a Client Computer

Using DeskTopBinder Lite or Web Image Monitor, you can also display the files stored in the machine on
a client computer.
3
• To view stored files from a client computer, you must first make the required IPv4 or IPv6 address
settings using DeskTopBinder or Web Image Monitor.
You can also check files stored under the copier, Document Server, and printer functions.

Using DeskTopBinder Lite to display stored files

The stored files are displayed and can be checked on a client computer using DeskTopBinder Lite.

• You can also transfer the stored files to the client computer.
• For details about DeskTopBinder, see the DeskTopBinder-related manuals.
• For details about installing DeskTopBinder Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied
CD-ROM".

• p.100 "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM"

Using Web Image Monitor to display stored files

The stored files are displayed and can be checked also on a client computer using Web Image Monitor.
If you enter http:// (machine IPv4 or IPv6 address, or host name)/ in the address bar of the client computer's
Web browser, the top page of Web Image Monitor appears.

• Do not begin IPv4 segments with zeros. For example: if the address is "192.168.001.010", enter it
as "192.168.1.10".

• You can also download the stored files.

• It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor only within your local area network.

87
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

• For details about displaying or downloading stored files using Web Image Monitor, see "Displaying
Stored Documents with Web Image Monitor", "Downloading Stored Documents with Web Image
Monitor", Copy/ Document Server Reference.
• For details about making settings for using Web Image Monitor, see "Monitoring and Configuring
the Printer", Network Guide.
• For details about functions for managing stored files using Web Image Monitor, click [Help] on the
upper-right corner of the displayed screen.

88
 Sending a Stored File

Sending a Stored File

This section explains how to send a stored file.
Stored files can be sent by e-mail, Scan to Folder, or the network delivery scanner.
There are two methods of sending stored files by e-mail. Settings made under [Scanner Features] determine
which method is used. For details, see "Scanner Features", General Settings Guide.
• To send the URL by e-mail:
Under [Scanner Features], [Stored File E-mail Method], select [Send URL Link]. This method is useful
when network restrictions prevent you sending attachments. 3
• To send an attached file by e-mail:
Under [Scanner Features], [Stored File E-mail Method], select [Send File].

• Depending on your e-mail application, a phishing warning might appear after you receive an e-mail
message. To prevent phishing warnings appearing after you receive e-mail from a specified sender,
you must add the sender to your e-mail application's exclusion list. For details about how to do this,
see your e-mail application's Help.

Sending Stored Files

This section mainly explains how to select the files you want to send.
For details about how to select stored files and make settings for sending those files, see respective pages.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

The list of stored files appears.

2. Select the file you want to send.
You can select multiple files.
The selected files are sent in the order they were selected.
If you press [Queue], only the files you have selected are displayed in the order they will be sent.

89
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

For details about selecting the stored files, see "Displaying the List of Stored Files".
3. Press [OK].
4. If necessary, switch to the E-mail, Scan to Folder, or network delivery scanner screen.
For details about switching the screen, see "Switching to the E-mail Screen", "Switching to the Scan
to Folder Screen", or "Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen".
5. Specify the destination, make any other necessary settings.
For details about how to send a file by e-mail or Scan to Folder, or how to deliver a file, see "Basic
Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail", "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder", or
3 "Basic Operation for Delivering Files".
6. Press the [Start] key.
The stored file will be sent.

• If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To
select the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
• When the URL has been sent by e-mail, the recipient can check the stored file by clicking that
URL. For details, see "Sending the URL by E-mail".
• You can encrypt e-mail or attach a signature to it. For details, see "Security Settings to E-mails".

• p.82 "Displaying the List of Stored Files"

• p.29 "Switching to the E-mail Screen"
• p.60 "Switching to the Scan to Folder Screen"
• p.106 "Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen"
• p.25 "Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail"
• p.57 "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder"
• p.103 "Basic Operation for Delivering Files"
• p.49 "Sending the URL by E-mail"
• p.47 "Security Settings to E-mails"

90
 Managing Stored Files

Managing Stored Files

This section explains how to delete stored files and how to change the data for stored files.

Deleting a Stored File

This section explains how to delete a stored file.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

3

The list of stored files appears.

2. Press [Manage / Delete File].

3. Select the file you want to delete.

If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. To select
the file, enter the correct password, and then press [OK].
4. Press [Delete File].
A confirmation message about deleting the file appears.
5. Press [Yes].

• Files waiting for sending cannot be deleted.

91
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

• You can also delete files stored in the machine by accessing the machine from a client computer
using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder. For detail about Web Image Monitor, see Web
Image Monitor Help. For details about DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with
DeskTopBinder.

Changing Information for a Stored File

You can change information for a stored file, such as [User Name], [File Name], and [Password].

3
• Information for files waiting for being sent cannot be changed.

Changing a user name

You can change the user name for a stored file.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

The list of stored files appears.

2. Press [Manage / Delete File].

3. Select the file containing the information you want to change.

If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. Enter the
password, and then press [OK].

92
 Managing Stored Files

4. Press [Change User Name].

5. Enter a new user name.
The user names shown here are names that were registered on the [Administrator Tools] tab in [System
Settings]. To change a user name not shown here, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
6. Press [OK].
7. Make sure that the user name was changed as necessary, and press [Exit].

• Using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder, you can also change the user name of a file stored
in the machine from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image
3
Monitor Help. For details about DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with
DeskTopBinder.
• Depending on the security setting, [Change Access Priv.] may appear instead of [Change User
Name]. For details about specifying [Change Access Priv.] consult the administrator.

Changing a file name

You can change the file name of a stored file.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

The list of stored files appears.

2. Press [Manage / Delete File].

93
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

3. Select the file containing the file information you want to change.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. Enter the
password, and then press [OK].
4. Press [Change File Name].
5. Change the file name.
6. Press [OK].
7. Make sure that the file information was changed as necessary, and press [Exit].

3 • For information about how to enter characters, see "Entering Text", About This Machine.
• Using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder, you can also change the name of a file stored in
the machine from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image
Monitor Help. For details about DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with
DeskTopBinder.

Changing a password
Enter the password for accessing the stored file.

• Be sure not to forget the password. If you forget it, consult the system administrator of the machine.

1. Press [Select Stored File].

The list of stored files appears.

2. Press [Manage / Delete File].
3. Select the file containing the file information you want to change.
If you select a password-protected stored file, a screen for entering the password appears. Enter the
password, and then press [OK].
4. Press [Change Password].
5. Using the number keys, enter a new four to eight-digit password.

94
 Managing Stored Files

6. Press [OK].
7. Enter the same number again using the number keys.
8. Press [OK].

• Using Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder, you can also change the password of a file stored
in the machine from the client computer. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image
Monitor Help. For details about DeskTopBinder, see the manuals supplied with
DeskTopBinder.
3

95
 3. Storing Files Using the Scanner Function

96
4. Delivering Scan Files

Before Delivering Files

This section describes the necessary preparations and the procedure for using the network delivery scanner.

• To use the network delivery scanner function, your network must have a delivery server on which the
ScanRouter delivery software (optional) is installed. You must also register destination and sender
information on the delivery server. For details about the ScanRouter delivery software, see the manuals
that are supplied with it.
4
Outline of Scan File Delivery

This section outlines the function for delivering files using the network delivery scanner.

ZZZ808S

1. This machine
You can send scan files to the delivery server.
2. Delivery server
Install the ScanRouter delivery software on this computer to use it as the delivery server.
After receiving a scan file, the delivery server delivers the file according to the setting specified for the destination.
The delivery settings are as follows:
• Storing the file in an in-tray
• Delivering the file by e-mail
• Storing the file in a selected folder
For details about the ScanRouter delivery software, see the manuals supplied with ScanRouter delivery software.
3. Client Computer
How to check a file from the client computer depends on the delivery method.

97
 4. Delivering Scan Files

For example, you can check a file by one of the following methods:
• Use DeskTopBinder to view a file delivered to the in-tray.
• Use e-mail software to receive e-mail with an attached file.
• Browse a folder for a stored file.

Preparing to Deliver Files

To deliver scanned files, you must first perform the following:

• Check the machine is properly connected to the network
• Configure the network settings in [System Settings]

4 • Configure the necessary settings in [Scanner Features]

• Configure the settings in ScanRouter delivery software

Check the machine is properly connected to the network

Check that this machine is properly connected to the network.
For details about how to connect this machine to a network, see "Connecting to the Interfaces", General
Settings Guide.

Configure the network settings in [System Settings]

Configure the network settings in [System Settings] according to your environment and how you will be
using the machine.
The following procedure explains connecting this machine to an IPv4 network using Ethernet cable.
Note that the settings you must configure will vary depending on your operating environment. For details
about network settings and configuration procedures, see "Network Settings Required to Use the Network
Delivery Scanner", General Settings Guide.

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key, and then press [System Settings].

98
 Before Delivering Files

The System Settings screen appears.

2. Press the [Interface Settings] tab.

3. Press [Machine IPv4 Address] to specify the machine's IPv4 address. 4

To specify a static IPv4 address for this machine, press [Specify], and then enter the IPv4 address and
subnet mask.
To obtain an IPv4 address from a DHCP server automatically, press [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)].
4. Press [IPv4 Gateway Address], and then enter the IPv4 gateway address.
5. Press [Effective Protocol], and then make [IPv4] active.
6. Press the [File Transfer] tab.

7. Press [Delivery Option], and then press [On].

• If an extended wireless LAN board (optional) is installed, press [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings]
tab, then press [Ethernet], and then configure the network settings.

Configure the necessary settings in [Scanner Features]

Using [Scanner Features], you can make or change various settings related to the scanner function, such
as compressing scan data or viewing the scanner journal. Configure the scanner settings according to your
environment and how you will be using the machine.

99
 4. Delivering Scan Files

This section explains how to display the Scanner Features screen. For details about the settings on this
screen, see "Scanner Features", General Settings Guide.

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key, and then press [Scanner Features].

4
The Scanner Features screen appears.
2. Press the [General Settings], [Scan Settings], [Send Settings], or [Initial Settings] tabs and
configure the relevant settings on those tabs.

Configure the settings in ScanRouter delivery software

Using SR Manager (a tool for ScanRouter delivery software), register this machine as an I/O device. In
addition, register destinations and specify such settings as the delivery type and sender.
For details about settings, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.

• To view files delivered to an in-tray, DeskTopBinder Lite must be installed on the client computer. For
details about installing DeskTopBinder Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-
ROM".
• The settings you must configure in [System Settings] vary depending on your network environment.
For details about network settings, see "Connecting the Machine", General Settings Guide.

• p.100 "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM"

Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM

This section explains how to install DeskTopBinder Lite on a client computer from the supplied CD-ROM.
To view or receive files delivered to the in-trays, you must install DeskTopBinder Lite on the client computer.

100
 Before Delivering Files

1. Make sure Windows is running on the client computer, and then insert the CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
2. Click [DeskTopBinder Lite].
The [DeskTopBinder Lite Setup] dialog box appears.
For the subsequent installation steps, see the Setup Guide displayed from the [DeskTopBinder Lite
Setup] dialog box.

• Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for DeskTopBinder Lite. For details,
see "Software Supplied on CD-ROM".
• You can install the software using the auto-run program. For details about the auto-run program, 4
see "Auto-Run Program".

• p.170 "Software Supplied on CD-ROM"

• p.170 "Auto-Run Program"

Network Delivery Scanner Screen

This section describes the screen layout when using the network delivery scanner.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an item by pressing it. When
you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like [ ]. Keys that cannot be
selected appear like [ ].

BLT009S

101
 4. Delivering Scan Files

1. Destination Field
The specified destination appears. If more than one destination has been specified, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll
through the destinations.
2. Network delivery scanner icon
Indicates that the network delivery scanner screen is displayed.
3. [Reg. No.]
Press this key to specify the destination using a 3-digit registration number.
4. [Manual Entry]
To send a file by e-mail via the delivery server to a destination not registered in the delivery server's Destination
List, press this key to display the soft keyboard. Then use the soft keyboard to enter the e-mail address. For details
about how to send a file by e-mail via the delivery server, see ScanRouter delivery software manual.
4 5. Destination List
The list of destinations registered in the delivery server appears. If all of the destinations cannot be displayed,
press [ ] or [ ] to switch the screen.
The ( ) symbol indicates a group destination.
6. [Subject] [Sender Name] [Recept. Notice]
Specify the subject, sender, and whether or not to enable Message Disposition Notification for the file to be
transmitted.

102
 Basic Operation for Delivering Files

Basic Operation for Delivering Files

This section describes the basic operation for delivering scan files using the network delivery scanner.

• You must register destinations and senders in advance using the ScanRouter delivery software installed
on the delivery server.

1. Make sure that no previous settings remain.

If a previous setting remains, press the [Clear Modes] key.
2. If the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen appears, switch to the network delivery scanner
screen.
For details, see "Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen".
4

3. If necessary, press [Scan Settings] to specify scanner settings such as resolution and scan
size.
For details, see "Various Scan Settings".

4. If necessary, specify the scanning density.

For details, see "Adjusting Image Density".
5. If necessary, press [Next Original Wait].
For details, see "Waiting for Additional Originals".

103
 4. Delivering Scan Files

6. If necessary, press [Original Feed Type] to specify settings such as the original orientation
and output exit.
For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
7. Specify the destination.
You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see "Specifying Delivery Destinations".
8. If necessary, press [Subject] to specify the e-mail subject.
For details, see "Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server".
9. If necessary, press [Sender Name] to specify the sender.
For details, see "Specifying the Sender".
4 10. Place originals.
11. If scanning does not start automatically, press the [Start] key.
If you are scanning batches, place the next originals.
For details, see "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File".

• By pressing [Manual Entry] on the network delivery scanner screen, you can send a file by e-
mail via the delivery server's network. For details about entering the e-mail address directly, see
"Entering an E-mail Address Manually".
• If you have selected more than one destination, press [ ] or [ ] next to the destination field to
scroll through the destinations.
• To cancel a selected destination, display the destination in the destination field, and then press
the [Clear/Stop] key. You can cancel a destination selected from the address book by pressing
the selected destination again.
• You can use the Message Disposition Notification function when sending e-mail via delivery
server. An e-mail is sent to the sender selected in step 9, notifying him/her that the recipient has
read his/her e-mail. To specify this setting, press [Recept. Notice].
• To enable the Return Receipt function, you must specify the ScanRouter delivery software settings
for sending e-mail by SMTP. For details about specifying this setting, see the ScanRouter delivery
software manual. Note, however, that if the e-mail software used at the destination does not
support Message Disposition Notification (MDN), e-mail notification that the e-mail has been
opened may not be sent.
• Register the sender's e-mail address using the ScanRouter delivery software in advance.
• If you press [Check Modes] before pressing the [Start] key, the initial scanner screen switches
to the Check Modes screen. You can use the Check Modes screen to check the settings such as
destinations. For details, see "Check Modes".
• If you press [Preview] and start scanning while [Preview] is highlighted, the Preview screen
appears. For details, see "Preview".

104
 Basic Operation for Delivering Files

• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key.

• You can also store a scan file and simultaneously deliver it. For details, see "Simultaneous Storage
and Delivery".
• After an e-mail is sent, the destination, sender, and subject fields will be automatically cleared.
If you want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local dealer.

• p.106 "Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner Screen"

• p.127 "Various Scan Settings"
• p.137 "Adjusting Image Density"
• p.138 "Waiting for Additional Originals"
• p.139 "Setting of Original Feed Type" 4
• p.107 "Specifying Delivery Destinations"
• p.115 "Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server"
• p.111 "Specifying the Sender"
• p.142 "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File"
• p.33 "Entering an E-mail Address Manually"
• p.11 "Check Modes"
• p.12 "Preview"
• p.116 "Simultaneous Storage and Delivery"

105
 4. Delivering Scan Files

Switching to the Network Delivery Scanner

Screen
This section explains how to switch the screen to the network delivery scanner screen.
If the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen is being displayed, switch to the network delivery scanner
screen.

1. Press [Delivery Dest.].

The network delivery scanner screen appears.

• You cannot switch from the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen while destinations or senders
are being specified. To clear a specified destination, display the destination in the destination
field of the E-mail screen or Scan to Folder screen, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key.

106
 Specifying Delivery Destinations

Specifying Delivery Destinations

This section explains how to specify delivery destinations.

Selecting Destinations Registered in the Delivery Server's Address Book

This section explains how to select destinations registered in the delivery server's address book
You can select a delivery destination registered in Destination List of the delivery server by any of the
following methods:
• Select the destination from the delivery destination list
• Select the destination by entering the registration number 4
• Select the destination by searching in the delivery server

Selecting a destination from the Destination List

From the destination list, select a destination.

1. In the destination list, press the key including the destination name.

The selected destination is highlighted and also is displayed in the destination field at the top of the
screen.
Destinations are registered in the delivery server under captions. The destination list is updated
automatically.

• If the target destination does not appear, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through the destinations until
it does.
• Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in the destination list.

107
 4. Delivering Scan Files

Selecting destinations by entering their registration numbers

Select a destination by entering its Short ID number (registered using the ScanRouter delivery software).
For details about how to set Short IDs, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.

1. Press [Reg. No.].

2. Using the number keys, enter the three-digit registration number, and then press the [ ]
key.
You can also enter a registration number of fewer than three digits.
Example: To enter 009
Press the [9] key, and then press the [ ] key.
By pressing [Change], you can change the selected destination.
3. Press [OK].

• To cancel a selected destination, press [ ] or [ ] next to the destination field to scroll through
the destinations until the one you want to cancel appears, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key.

Selecting destinations by searching the delivery server's Destination List

In the delivery server's Destination List, you can search for destinations and select them.

1. Press [Search Dest.].

108
 Specifying Delivery Destinations

2. To search by destination name, press [Name].

To search by comment, press [Comment].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [Comment].
3. Enter the beginning of the destination name.
To search by comment, enter the beginning of the comment.
4. Press [OK].
5. If necessary, press [Advanced Search] to specify the detailed search criteria, and then press
[OK].
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search by [Name] and [Comment]. You can specify search
criteria such as [Beginning Word] or [End Word]. You can refine your search using multiple criteria. 4

6. Press [Start Search].

Destinations that match the search criteria are displayed.
7. Select the destination.
8. Press [OK].

• The Comment search function searches for destinations by comment information, which is a
registration item required by the ScanRouter delivery software.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected destinations.
• Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
• By pressing [Advanced Search], the following criteria appear:
• [Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".
• [End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".

109
 4. Delivering Scan Files

• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".
• [Include one Word]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
• [Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".

110
 Specifying the Sender

Specifying the Sender

This section explains how to specify the e-mail sender when sending a file by e-mail via the delivery server.
You can specify the sender by any of the following methods:
• Select the sender from the sender list
• Select the sender by entering the registration number
• Select the sender by searching the delivery server's Destination List

Selecting a Sender from the Sender List

This section explains how to select a sender from the sender list. 4
The sender list displays destinations that are registered on the delivery server.

1. Press [Sender Name].

2. Select the sender.

3. Press [OK].

Selecting the Sender by Entering the Registration Number

Select a sender by entering its Short ID number (registered using the ScanRouter delivery software).
For details about how to set Short IDs, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.

111
 4. Delivering Scan Files

1. Press [Sender Name].

2. Press [Registration No.].

4

3. Using the number keys, enter the three-digit registration number assigned to the required
destination folder.
If the entered number is less than five digits, press the [ ] key after the last number.
Example: To enter 006
Press the [6] key, and then press the [ ] key.
By pressing [Change], you can change the selected destination.
4. Press [OK] twice.

Selecting a Sender by Searching the Delivery Server's Destination List

This section explains how to select a sender by searching the delivery server's Destination List.

112
 Specifying the Sender

1. Press [Sender Name].

2. Press [Search].
4

3. To search by destination name, press [Name].

To search by comment, press [Comment].
The soft keyboard appears.
You can also search by combining [Name] and [Comment].
4. Enter the beginning of the sender's name.
To search by comment, enter beginning of the comment.
5. Press [OK].
6. If necessary, press [Advanced Search] to specify the detailed search criteria, and then press
[OK].
By pressing [Advanced Search], you can search by [Name] and [Comment]. You can specify search
criteria such as [Beginning Word] or [End Word]. You can refine your search using multiple criteria.

113
 4. Delivering Scan Files

7. Press [Start Search].

Destinations that match the search criteria are displayed.
8. Select the sender.
4 9. Press [OK].

• The Comment search function searches for destinations by comment information, which is a
registration item required by the ScanRouter delivery software.
• By pressing [Details], you can view details about the selected sender.
• Up to 100 items can be displayed as the search results.
• By pressing [Advanced Search], the following criteria appear:
• [Beginning Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A".
• [End Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters are targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "C".
• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "ABC".
• [Include one Word]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "A", "B", or "C".
• [Exclude Words]: The names which do not contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
For example, to search for "ABC", enter "D".

114
 Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be Transmitted via the Delivery Server

Specifying the Subject of the E-mail to Be

Transmitted via the Delivery Server
This section explains how to specify the e-mail subject when sending a file by e-mail via the delivery server.

1. Press [Subject].

2. Enter the subject.

To enter characters, press [Text Entry].
To enter symbols, press [Symbol Entry].
To add predefined User Text registered on this machine, press [User Text].
For details about entering the text, see "Entering Text", About This Machine.
3. Press [OK].

115
 4. Delivering Scan Files

Simultaneous Storage and Delivery

This section explains how to store a file and simultaneously deliver it.

1. Press [Store File].

4
2. Make sure that [Send & Store] is selected.
3. If necessary, specify the stored file's information, such as [User Name], [File Name], and
[Password].
For details, see "Specifying File Information for a Stored File".
4. Press [OK].
5. Specify the setting for delivering the file, and then send the file.
For details about delivering a file, see "Basic Operation for Delivering Files".

• Depending on the security setting, [Access Privileges] may appear instead of [User Name]. For
details about specifying [Access Privileges], consult the administrator.
• You can resend stored files. To resend stored files, select the files on the Select Stored File screen,
and then send them. For details, see "Sending a Stored File".

• p.79 "Specifying File Information for a Stored File"

• p.103 "Basic Operation for Delivering Files"
• p.89 "Sending a Stored File"

116
5. Scanning Originals with the Network
TWAIN Scanner

Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner

This section describes the preparations and procedure for using the network TWAIN scanner.
The TWAIN driver allows you to scan originals on the machine from a client computer via the network.

• To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver, which is on the supplied CD-
ROM. For details about installing the TWAIN driver, see "Installing the TWAIN Driver from the
Supplied CD-ROM".
• To use the network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application, such as DeskTopBinder, must
be installed on the client computer.
5
• DeskTopBinder Lite is included on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing DeskTopBinder
Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM".

• p.120 "Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM"

• p.100 "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM"

Outline of the Network TWAIN Scanner

This section outlines the network TWAIN scanner function.

In the TWAIN scanner mode, you can share this machine among multiple computers. Therefore, you don't
have to prepare a special computer for scanner or reconnect the scanner and each computer every time
you need to use it.

ZZZ805S

117
 5. Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner

1. This Machine
Scans an original after receiving a scan instruction from a client computer, and then sends the scan file over the
network to the client computer.
2. Client Computer
Specifies the scanner settings and controls the scanner using an application, such as DeskTopBinder Lite, that
supports the network TWAIN scanner. Receives the files scanned by the machine and displays them using an
application that supports the network TWAIN scanner.

• When using the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, you do not need to press the [Scanner] key on the
machine's control panel. The screen switches automatically when you scan an original from a client
computer using the TWAIN driver. To use functions other than the network TWAIN scanner, press [Exit].

Preparing to Use the Network TWAIN Scanner

To use this machine as a network TWAIN scanner, you must first perform the following:
• Check the machine is properly connected to the network
• Configure the network settings in [System Settings]
• Install the TWAIN driver on a client computer
• Install a TWAIN-compliant application on the same client computer

Check the machine is properly connected to the network

Check that this machine is properly connected to the network.
For details about how to connect this machine to a network, see "Connecting to the Interfaces", General
Settings Guide.

Configure the network settings in [System Settings]

Configure the network settings in [System Settings] according to your environment and how you will be
using the machine.
The following procedure explains connecting this machine to an IPv4 network using Ethernet cable.

118
 Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner

Note that the settings you must configure will vary depending on your operating environment. For details
about network settings and configuration procedures, see "Network Settings Required to Use Network
TWAIN Scanner", General Settings Guide.

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key, and then press [System Settings].

The System Settings screen appears. 5

2. Press the [Interface Settings] tab.

3. Press [Machine IPv4 Address] to specify the machine's IPv4 address.

To specify a static IPv4 address for this machine, press [Specify], and then enter the IPv4 address and
subnet mask.
To obtain an IPv4 address from a DHCP server automatically, press [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)].
4. Press [IPv4 Gateway Address], and then enter the IPv4 gateway address.
5. Press [Effective Protocol], and then make [IPv4] active.

• If an extended wireless LAN board (optional) is installed, press [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings]
tab, then press [Ethernet], and then configure the network settings.

Install the TWAIN driver on a client computer

Install the TWAIN driver on your computer.

119
 5. Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner

For details about installing the TWAIN driver, see "Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-
ROM".

• p.120 "Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM"

Install a TWAIN-compliant application on the same client computer

To use this machine as a network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application, such as
DeskTopBinder, must be installed on the client computer. DeskTopBinder Lite is included on the supplied
CD-ROM.
For details about installing DeskTopBinder Lite, see "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-
ROM".

5 • p.100 "Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from the Supplied CD-ROM"

Installing the TWAIN Driver from the Supplied CD-ROM

This section explains how to install the TWAIN driver on a client computer from the supplied CD-ROM.
To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver on a client computer.

1. Start Windows, and then insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the client computer.
The installer starts.
2. Click [TWAIN Driver].
3. The installer of the TWAIN driver starts. Follow the instructions.

• Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for the TWAIN driver. For details
about the system requirements, see "Software Supplied on CD-ROM".
• You can install the software using the auto-run program. For details about the auto-run program,
see "Auto-Run Program".
• If the installer does not start automatically, see "Auto-Run Program".
• When the installation is complete, a message about restarting the client computer may appear.
In this case, restart the client computer.
• After the installation is complete, a folder with the name of the machine in use is added in
[Programs] or [All Programs] on the [Start] menu. Help can be displayed from here.
• Notes on using the network TWAIN scanner are provided in "Readme.txt". Be sure to read them
before use.

120
 Before Using the Network TWAIN Scanner

• p.170 "Software Supplied on CD-ROM"

• p.170 "Auto-Run Program"

121
 5. Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner

Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation

This section describes the basic operation for scanning with the network TWAIN scanner.

• To use the network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application, such as DeskTopBinder and
the TWAIN driver must be installed on the client computer.
• Under the Windows XP SP2/Vista or Windows Server 2003/R2 operating system, when the
Windows firewall is enabled, "Cannot find the scanner." or "No response from the scanner." may
appear and scanning with the TWAIN scanner may fail. In this case, change the settings of the
Windows firewall. For details, see Windows Help.
The following procedure uses Windows XP and DeskTopBinder Lite by way of example.

1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], point to DeskTopBinder, and then click

5 DeskTopBinder.
2. On the [Tools] menu, click [Scanner Settings...].
3. Click [Select Scanner Driver...].
4. Select the name of the machine you want to use in the list, and then click [Select].
5. Click [OK].
6. On the [File] menu, point to [Add Document], and then click [Scan...] to display the Scanner
Control dialog box.
The Scanner Control dialog box and DeskTopBinder Viewer will appear.
A dialog box that is used to control a scanner using the TWAIN driver is referred to as the Scanner
Control dialog box.
7. Make settings according to such factors as the type of original, type of scanning, and
orientation of the original.
For details, see the TWAIN driver Help.
8. In the Scanner Control dialog box, click [Scan].
Depending on the security setting, if you press [Scan], a dialog box for entering the user name and
password may appear.
9. Using the machine's control panel, specify where the scanned originals are output.
10. Place the original, and then start scanning.
If scanning does not start automatically, press the [Start] key.
If you have additional originals to scan, set them in the same place, and then start scanning.
11. If you complete scanning, click [Cancel] on the computer.
12. On the [File] menu of DeskTopBinder Viewer, click [Exit].

122
 Basic Network TWAIN Scanner Operation

13. Enter the file name, and then click [OK].

DeskTopBinder Viewer closes and the image is stored in DeskTopBinder Lite.

• If you are using the DeskTopBinder Easy Scanning function, you can scan originals only in black
and white or gray scale. To scan originals in color, use the Scan function.
• If you have already selected a scanner, you do not need to select the scanner unless you want
to change it.
• Using DeskTopBinder, you can edit and print scan files. For more information about
DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder manuals.
• The model name of the connected scanner appears in the title bar of the Scanner Control dialog
box. If there is more than one scanner of the same model on the network, make sure you have
selected the correct scanner. If you have not, click [Select Scanner Driver...], and then select the
scanner again. If the correct scanner does not appear in the list, check that the scanner is correctly
connected to the network and that its IPv4 address has been specified. If the correct scanner still 5
does not appear, consult the network administrator.

123
 5. Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner

Scan Settings When Using TWAIN Scanner

This section explains how to specify original orientation when you are using the machine as a TWAIN
scanner.

Setting Original Orientation on the TWAIN Scanner

To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of the scanned original on a client computer, the placement
of the original and the settings made in the Scanner Control dialog box must match.

1. Open the Scanner Control dialog box.

For details about how to open the Scanner Control dialog box, see "Basic Network TWAIN Scanner
Operation".

5 2. Make settings in the [Original Size] area.

The following table shows the relationship between the original orientation and the Scanner Control dialog
box settings:

How to place originals

Original orientation Scanner Control dialog box key

Top edge of original is placed first Off

ATF014S

Align the original, turn it rightward or

leftward, and then place it face down.

Top edge of original is on the right Right 90 deg.

ATF016S

Align the original so that its top edge is on

your left, turn it rightward or leftward, and
then place it face down.

Top edge of original is on the left Left 90 deg.

ATF015S

124
 Scan Settings When Using TWAIN Scanner

Original orientation Scanner Control dialog box key

Align the original so that its top edge is on
your right, turn it rightward or leftward, and
then place it face down.

Bottom edge of original is placed first 180 deg.

ATF017S

Align the original, turn it rightward or

leftward, and then place it face down.

• Originals are normally rectangular ( ) or horizontally long ( ). However, the table above uses
squares to make original orientation easier to understand. Even if the actual shape of the original is 5
different, the combination of original orientation and the orientation specified on the scanner driver
does not change.
• For details about the Scanner Control dialog box, see the TWAIN driver Help.

125
 5. Scanning Originals with the Network TWAIN Scanner

126
6. Various Scan Settings

Specifying Scan Settings

This section explains how to make scan settings.

1. Press [Scan Settings].

2. Specify resolution, scan size, and other settings, as required. 6

For details about individual scan setting items, see "Items for Specifying Scan Settings".

3. Press [OK].

• p.128 "Scan Settings"

127
 6. Various Scan Settings

Scan Settings
This section describes the items for Scan Settings.

Scan Type

Select a scan type that is appropriate for your original.

[Black & White: Text]
Appropriate to increase OCR readability using an OCR-compliant application.
[B & W: Text / Line Art]
Standard black and white originals containing mainly characters. Creates scanned images suitable
for printing.
[B & W: Text / Photo]
Originals containing a mixture of photographs, pictures, and characters (two-value). Creates scanned
images suitable for printing.
6 [Black & White: Photo]
Originals containing photographs and other pictures (two-value). Creates scanned images suitable
for printing.
[Black & White: Drawing]
Scans lines clearly. Prevents smudges on originals appearing on scanned images.
[Gray Scale]
Originals containing photographs and other pictures (multi-value). Creates scanned images suitable
for displaying on a computer screen.
[Full Colour: Text / Photo]
Originals for color printing mainly consisting of characters.
[Full Colour: Glossy Photo]
Originals of silver salt photographs and other color pictures.

Resolution

Select resolution for scanning originals.

Select [150 dpi], [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], or [600 dpi] as the scanning resolution.

128
 Scan Settings

Scan Size

Select the size of the original to be scanned.

The following items and sizes can be selected:
[Auto Detect]
Scans original sizes using the automatic size detect function.
Template size
• Metric Version
A0 , A1 , A1 , A2 , A2 , A3 , A3 , A4 , A4 , B1 JIS , B2 JIS , B2 JIS , B3 JIS
, B3 JIS , B4 JIS , B4 JIS , 880 mm × 1189 mm , 765 mm × 1085 mm , 625 mm × 880
mm , 625 mm × 880 mm
36 × 48 , 34 × 44 , 30 × 42 , 24 × 36 , 24 × 36 , 22 × 34 , 22 × 34 , 18 × 24 ,
18 × 24 , 17 × 22 , 17 × 22 , 12 × 18 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14
, 81/2 × 14 , 9 × 12 , 9 × 12 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11
• Inch Version
36 × 48 , 34 × 44 , 30 × 42 , 24 × 36 , 24 × 36 , 22 × 34 , 22 × 34 , 18 × 24 , 6
18 × 24 , 17 × 22 , 17 × 22 , 12 × 18 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14
, 81/2 × 14 , 9 × 12 , 9 × 12 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 11
A0 , A1 , A1 , A2 , A2 , A3 , A3 , A4 , A4 , B1 JIS , B2 JIS , B2 JIS , B3 JIS
, B3 JIS , B4 JIS , B4 JIS
[Custom Size]
Scans in a specified size.
You can specify the dimensions (width and height) of the scan area in mm (in).

• You can specify original sizes of 210 mm (8.3 in) or larger in [Custom Size].

Edit

Make editing settings.

[Erase Border]
Deletes the borders of the scanned original according to the specified width.
If you select [Same Width], you can specify a uniform width for deletion all around the original (top,
bottom, left, and right sides). If you select [Different Width], you can specify a different width for
deletion for each side.
[Positive / Negative]
If you select [Positive / Negative], a black and white original will produce a negative scanned image.

129
 6. Various Scan Settings

[Mirror Image]
If you select [Mirror Image], the scanned image will be a mirror image of the original.

• If you select both [Erase Border] and [Positive / Negative], the borders are displayed in black.
• [Erase Border] is available only when a scan size is specified.

130
 Scanning Custom Size Originals

Scanning Custom Size Originals

This section explains the settings you need to make in order to scan custom size originals, and how to place
custom size originals on the machine.
There are two methods of setting custom size to scan originals:
• Scan the entire are of an original
• Scan part of an original

Scanning the Entire Area of a Custom Size Original

This section explains how to configure the machine for scanning the entire area of a custom size original.
You can use the following two methods to scan the entire area of an original:
• Have the machine detect the length automatically
• Specify the length and width

6
• For X1 and Y1, you can specify 210 mm (8.3 in) or larger.

To automatically detect the length of an original

You can scan the entire are of an original by specifying only the width of the original. The length of the
original is detected automatically.
When you use this function, you can enter only the width of the original (X1).
This function is useful for scanning an original that is vertically long.
To display the custom size setting screen, on the initial scanner screen, press [Scan Settings] > [Scan Size]
> [Custom Size].

Custom size original to be scanned

BLS013S

131
 6. Various Scan Settings

Scan settings on the custom size setting screen

BLT012S

1. [Auto Detect]
Press this to have the machine automatically detect the length of the original.

6 2. Original Size (X1)

Specify the width of the custom size original.
Enter the width in [X1], and then press the [ ] key.

• For X1, you can specify a value between 210 mm (8.3 in) and 914 mm (36 in). Start Position (X2)
is fixed to 0 mm and the same value as that of Original Size (X1) is automatically entered in Scan
Area (X3).

To specify the length and width of an original

To scan the entire area of an original, specify its width and length under Original Size (X1 and Y1) and
Scan Area (X3 and Y3).
To display the custom size setting screen, on the initial scanner screen, press [Scan Settings] > [Scan Size]
> [Custom Size].

Custom size original to be scanned

BAO013S

132
 Scanning Custom Size Originals

Scan settings on the custom size setting screen

BLT010S

1. Original Size (X1 and Y1)

Specify the length and width of the custom size original.
Enter the actual width and length in [X1] and [Y1], respectively, and then press the [ ] key.
2. Start Position (X2 and Y2)
6
Set Start Position to 0 mm (0 in).
Enter "0" in both [X2] and [Y2], and then press the [ ] key.
3. Scan Area (X3 and Y3)
Specify the same values as Original Size (X1, Y1).
Enter the same values in [X3] and [Y3] as Original Size (X1 and Y1 respectively), and then press the [ ] key.

Scanning Part of an Original

This section explains how to specify a custom size for scanning part of an original.
To scan part of an original, measure Original Size (X1 and Y1), Start Position (X2 and Y2), and Scan Area
(X3 and Y3) on the surface of the original, and then enter those values in the same order on the custom
size setting screen.
To display the custom size setting screen, on the initial scanner screen, press [Scan Settings] > [Scan Size]
> [Custom Size].
Measuring methods differ depending on the original orientation. For details about how to measure Original
Size (X1 and Y1), Start Position (X2 and Y2), and Scan Area (X3 and Y3) correctly, see "How to measure
sizes".
Enter the sizes while referring to "Scan settings on the custom size setting screen".

133
 6. Various Scan Settings

How to measure sizes

Original Orientation Measuring method for scanning the "R" section

Original Orientation is or

BAO014S

Original Orientation is or

6
BAO015S

Scan settings on the custom size setting screen

BLT011S

1. Original Size (X1 and Y1)

Specify the original's entire size.
Enter the actual values in [X1] and [Y1] while referring to "How to measure sizes", and then press the [ ] key.
2. Start Position (X2 and Y2)
Specify the scanning start position.
Enter the actual values in [X2] and [Y2] while referring to "How to measure sizes", and then press the [ ] key.
3. Scan Area (X3 and Y3)
Specify sizes of the area you want to scan.

134
 Scanning Custom Size Originals

Enter the actual values in [X3] and [Y3] while referring to "How to measure sizes", and then press the [ ] key.

• When scanning originals using [Custom Size], you cannot enter specific values in [Original Size] and
[Start Position]. To configure the scan area, specify [Scan Area] and [Start Position] first, and then
[Original Size].

How to Set Originals to Scan Them by Custom Size

This section explains how to place originals you want to scan at custom size.
Original Orientation setting
Under [Original Orientation], select [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] according to the orientation of
your original. To display the [Original Orientation] settings, on the initial scanner screen, press
[Original Orientation]. For details, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
Placing an original
Turn it rightward or leftward, and then place it face down.

How to place originals 6

Original Orientation Description

Original Orientation is [ ]

BLS009S

Original Orientation is [ ]

BLS012S

135
 6. Various Scan Settings

Original Orientation Description

Original Orientation is [ ]

BLS010S

Original Orientation is [ ]

6 BLS011S

• p.139 "Setting of Original Feed Type"

136
 Adjusting Image Density

Adjusting Image Density

This section explains how to adjust image density.
To adjust image density, press [ ] or [ ], at the left and right of [Auto Density]. These buttons increase or
decrease the image density in single increments up to 7.
Selecting [Auto Density] corrects scanning density to improve resolution of paper types such as non-white
paper like newspaper or transparent originals.

6
• If you select [Black & White: Text], [B & W: Text / Line Art], [B & W: Text / Photo], or [Black & White:
Drawing] for [Scan Type] under [Scan Settings], [Auto Density] is automatically selected.

137
 6. Various Scan Settings

Waiting for Additional Originals

This section explains about the standby mode for additional originals when you scan multiple pages as a
single file.
If you select [Next Original Wait], the machine waits indefinitely for additional originals, regardless of the
settings configured for [Next Original Wait Setting] in [Scanner Features].
When you want to finish scanning originals and start sending or storing the files, press the [ ] key.

6
• If you do not press [Next Original Wait], the machine operates according to the settings configured
for [Next Original Wait Setting] in [Scanner Features]. However, if [Continuous Wait] has been
specified, [Next Original Wait] does not appear, because this setting forces the machine to wait
indefinitely for additional originals.
• For details about the procedure for scanning multiple pages into a single file, see "Scanning Multiple
Pages of Originals as One File".

• p.142 "Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File"

138
 Setting of Original Feed Type

Setting of Original Feed Type

This section explains Original Feed Type settings such as orientation and output exit.

Original Orientation

This section explains how to correctly display the top/bottom orientation of scanned originals on a client
computer screen.

1. Press [Original Feed Type].

2. Press the key that indicates the same orientation as the original.

3. Press [OK].
To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of the scanned original on a client computer, the placement
of the original and the settings made on the control panel must match.
Place originals correctly by referring to the following table:

How to place originals

Original orientation Control panel key

Top edge of original is placed first

ATF014S

Align the original, turn it rightward or leftward, and

then place it face down.

Top edge of original is on the right

ATF016S

Align the original so that its top edge is on your left,

turn it rightward or leftward, and then place it face
down.

139
 6. Various Scan Settings

Original orientation Control panel key

Top edge of original is on the left

ATF015S

Align the original so that its top edge is on your right,

turn it rightward or leftward, and then place it face
down.

Bottom edge of original is placed first

ATF017S

Align the original, turn it rightward or leftward, and

then place it face down.

6 • Originals are normally rectangular ( ) or horizontally long ( ). However, the table above uses
squares to make original orientation easier to understand. Even if the actual shape of the original is
different, the combination of original orientation and the orientation specified on the scanner driver
does not change.
• You can make the original orientation setting only when the scan size is specified.
• When you specify full color or gray scale for Scan Type, and single page TIFF/JPEG or multi-page
TIFF is selected as the file type, refer to the table below for how to place originals. Originals placed
in orientations that are not recommended in the table might appear incorrectly top/bottom oriented
on client computer displays.

Original orientation
Original orientation Control panel key

Place the top edge of original first.

ATF014S

Align the original, turn it rightward or leftward, and

then place it face down

Original Output Exit

This section explains how to select the output exit for originals.

140
 Setting of Original Feed Type

1. Press [Original Feed Type].

2. Under [Original Output Exit], press [Top] or [Rear].

3. Press [OK].

141
 6. Various Scan Settings

Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File

This section explains the procedure for sending multiple originals as a multi-page file or storing them as a
single stored file.

• To send multiple originals as a multi-page file, in [Send File Type / Name], select a multi-page file
type. For details about file types, see "Specifying the File Type".

When a Time Limit Is Specified for Additional Originals

Specify the waiting time in seconds for placing the additional originals in advance.
You can specify the waiting time under [Scanner Features] - [Next Original Wait Setting] - [Set Wait Time].

1. Specify scan settings and orientation for your originals.

For details about scan settings, see "Specifying Scan Settings".

6 For details about original orientation, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
2. Make sure [Next Original Wait] is not selected.
For details about selecting [Next Original Wait], see "Waiting for Additional Originals".
3. Make the necessary settings for sending by e-mail or Scan to Folder, storing, or delivering.
For details about settings for sending by e-mail or Scan to Folder, storing, or delivering, see "Basic
Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail", "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder", "Basic
Operation for Storing Scan Files", or "Basic Operation for Delivering Files".
4. Place the originals.
Originals are scanned in order. Place them from the first page. When scanning finishes, the time
remaining for the next originals is displayed. The selected destination is displayed while the machine
is waiting for additional originals.
5. To scan additional originals, place them within the specified time.
Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
If you change settings while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops. If
you place an original, it is scanned, and the countdown for placing additional originals starts.
6. When scanning of all originals and the countdown are completed, the machine
automatically starts storing or sending the scanned-in data.
Alternately, you can press the [ ] key to start sorting or sending the scanned data.

• If scanning does not start automatically, press the [Start] key.

• For details about [Next Original Wait Setting] in [Scanner Features], see General Settings Guide.

142
 Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File

• p.127 "Specifying Scan Settings"

• p.139 "Setting of Original Feed Type"
• p.138 "Waiting for Additional Originals"
• p.25 "Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail"
• p.57 "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder"
• p.77 "Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files"
• p.103 "Basic Operation for Delivering Files"

When a Time Limit Is Not Specified for Additional Originals

Specify one of the following settings to determine how long the machine waits to scan additional originals
when a time limit is not specified. To access these settings, select [Scanner Features], [Next Original Wait
Setting].
• [Continuous Wait]
The machine waits indefinitely for additional originals. [Next Original Wait] does not appear and
6
settings are not required.
• [Set Wait Time] or [Off]
[Next Original Wait] appears. Use the following procedure to scan originals.

1. Specify the scan settings and orientation for your original.

For details about scan settings, see "Specifying Scan Settings".
For details about original orientation, see "Setting of Original Feed Type".
2. Select [Next Original Wait].
For details about selecting [Next Original Wait], see "Waiting for Additional Originals".
3. Make the necessary settings for sending by e-mail or Scan to Folder, storing, or delivering.
For details about settings for sending by e-mail or Scan to Folder, storing, or delivering, see "Basic
Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail", "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder", "Basic
Operation for Storing Scan Files", or "Basic Operation for Delivering Files".
4. Place the originals.
Scanning starts.
Originals are scanned in order. Place them from the first page.
The selected destination is displayed while the machine is waiting for additional originals.
5. To scan additional originals, place them.
Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.

143
 6. Various Scan Settings

6. After all originals are scanned, press the [ ] key.

Sorting or sending starts.

• If scanning does not start automatically, press the [Start] key.

• p.127 "Specifying Scan Settings"

• p.139 "Setting of Original Feed Type"
• p.138 "Waiting for Additional Originals"
• p.25 "Basic Operation for Sending Scan Files by E-mail"
• p.57 "Basic Operations When Using Scan to Folder"
• p.77 "Basic Operation for Storing Scan Files"
• p.103 "Basic Operation for Delivering Files"

144
 Specifying the File Type and File Name

Specifying the File Type and File Name

This section explains the procedure for specifying the file type, file name, and security for PDF files.

Specifying the File Type

This section explains the procedure for specifying the file type of a file you want to send. File types can be
specified when sending files by e-mail or Scan to Folder, and sending stored files by e-mail or Scan to
Folder.
You can select one of the following file types:
• Single Page: [TIFF / JPEG], [PDF]
If you select a single-page file type when scanning multiple originals, one file is created for each
single page and the number of files sent is the same as the number of pages scanned.
• Multi-page: [TIFF], [PDF]
If you select a multi-page file type when scan multiple originals, scanned pages are combined and
sent as a single file. 6
Selectable file types differ depending on the scan settings and other conditions. For details about file
types, see "Notes About and Limitations of File Types".

1. Press [Send File Type / Name].

145
 6. Various Scan Settings

2. Select a file type.

3. Press [OK].

• To deliver files, specify the file type using the delivery server computer. For details, see the
manuals provided with the ScanRouter delivery software.
• If you select [Store Only] under [Store File], you cannot specify the file type.

6 • If you select [Send & Store] under [Store File], files are sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder in the
specified file type. However, files cannot be stored in the specified format-instead, they are
automatically stored in one of the following file types, depending on the Compression and Scan
Type settings:
• JPEG
Under [Scanner Features], [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Colour)] is set to [On], and
originals are scanned in full color or gray scale.
• TIFF
All other scannings

Notes About and Limitations of File Types

Depending on the file format you select, the following limitations will apply:
Single Page [TIFF / JPEG]
• Originals scanned in black and white are sent as TIFF files.
• According to the settings specified for [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Colour)] under [Scanner
Features], originals scanned in full color or gray scale are sent in one of the following file types:
• [On] : JPEG file
• [Off] : TIFF file

146
 Specifying the File Type and File Name

Multi-page [TIFF]
• When full color or gray scale is specified under [Scan Type] and [Compression (Gray Scale /
Full Colour)] is set to [On] under [Scanner Features], you cannot select [TIFF] under [Multi-page].
• Even if you select [TIFF] under [Multi-page], files stored in JPEG format are automatically
changed to multi-page PDF files and then sent.

Specifying the File Name

This section explains the procedure for specifying a file name.

Scanned file will be given a file name consisting of the time and date of scanning, 4-digit page number,
etc.
• Single-page files are assigned file names that contain the date and time of scanning and a four-digit
page number. An underscore is inserted between the date and time and the four-digit page number.
(Example: For a file scanned in single-page TIFF at 10 ms, 15 sec., 15:30 hours on Dec. 31, 2020,
the file name will be 20201231153015010_0001.tif)
• Multi-page files are given file names that contain the time and date of scanning.
6
(Example: For a file scanned in multi-page TIFF at 10 ms, 15 sec., 15:30 hours on Dec. 31, 2020,
the file name will be 20201231153015010.tif)
If necessary, you can change the file name.

1. Press [Send File Type / Name].

147
 6. Various Scan Settings

2. Press [File Name].

The soft keyboard appears.

3. Enter a file name.
4. Press [OK] twice.

Changing the starting digit of file name serial numbers

6 A single-page file is assigned a serial number after the file name. The starting number of this serial number
can be changed as follows:

1. Press [Send File Type / Name].

2. Press [Change] to the right of the entry box.

148
 Specifying the File Type and File Name

3. Using the number keys, enter the starting digit of the serial number.
4. Press the [ ] key.
5. Press [OK].

• You can change the starting digit only if other than [Single Page] is selected as the file type.
• You can change the number of digits in the serial number. Change the number under [Scanner
Features], [No. of Digits for Single Page Files]. You can select 4 or 8. For details, see "Scanner
Features", General Settings Guide.

Security Settings to PDF Files

This section explains security settings for PDF files.

Use security settings to prevent unauthorized access to PDF files.

• Security settings can be made for PDF files only.

6
Encrypting PDF files
Set a password to protect and encrypt a PDF file. Only users who have the password can open and decrypt
the PDF file.

• Encryption is possible only for scan files sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
• You cannot open an encrypted file without a password. Make sure you do not forget a file's password.

1. Press [Send File Type / Name].

2. Check that [PDF] is selected.

3. Press [Security Settings].
4. Select [Encryption].

149
 6. Various Scan Settings

5. In [Encrypt Document], select [On].

6. In [Password], press [Enter].

7. Enter a password, and then press [OK].

The password entered here will be required to open the PDF file.
8. Enter the password again, and then press [OK].
9. In [Encryption Level], select [40 bit] or [128 bit].
10. Press [OK] twice.

• A document password cannot be the same as the Master password.

• You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a document password.
• PDF files created under the [128 bit] Encryption Level cannot be viewed using Adobe Acrobat
Reader 3.0 and 4.0.
• If [Low Resolution Only] is selected as the print permission, you cannot select [40 bit] as the PDF
encryption level.

Changing security permissions for PDF files

Set a Master Password to restrict unauthorized printing, changing, copying, or extracting of a PDF file's
content. Only users who have the Master Password can reset or change these restrictions.

150
 Specifying the File Type and File Name

• Encryption is possible only for scan files sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
• You cannot reset or change a file's restriction setting without the Master Password. Make a note of
the Master Password in a secure place.

1. Press [Send File Type / Name].

2. Check that [PDF] is selected.

3. Press [Security Settings]. 6
4. Select [Permissions].
5. In [Master Password], select [Set].

6. In [Password], press [Enter].

151
 6. Various Scan Settings

7. Enter a password, and then press [OK].

The password entered here will be required to change the security settings of the PDF file.
8. Enter the password again, and then press [OK].
9. Select the security permission setting.
You can specify the following security settings:
• Print permission: [Prohibit], [Allow], or [Low Resolution Only]
• Editing permission: [Prohibit] or [Allow]
• Copying or extracting content permission: [Prohibit] or [Allow]

6
10. Press [OK] twice.

• The [Password] and [Master Password] cannot be the same.

• You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a Master Password.
• If [40 bit] is selected as the PDF encryption level, you cannot select [Low Resolution Only] as the
print permission.

152
 Programs

Programs
You can register frequently used settings in the machine memory and recall them for future use.

• You can register up to 10 programs for the scanner mode.

• Programs are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing the [Clear Modes] key unless the
content is deleted or newly registered.
• The following settings can be registered to programs: Scan Settings, Original Orientation, File Type,
Store File, Preview, Reception Notice, Security (E-mail Encryption and Signature), and Original
Output Exit.
• Setting made on the simplified display cannot be registered to a program.

Registering Frequently Used Setting

To register frequently used settings in a program:

1. On the initial scanner screen, make the settings you want to register in a program.
6
2. Press the [Program] key.

BLT014S

3. Press [Program].

153
 6. Various Scan Settings

4. Select the number of the program in which you want to register the settings.
Program numbers with already have settings in them.
5. Enter the program name.
6. Press [OK].
The Program screen reappears. When the settings are successfully registered, appears on the left
side of the registered program number and the program name appears on the right side. The initial
screen reappears after a moment.

Recalling a Registered Content

To recall settings registered in a program and use them for scanning:

1. Press the [Program] key.

2. Press [Recall].

3. Press the number of the program you want to recall.

Settings registered in the program are recalled and the initial scanner screen reappears.
Settings are not registered in numbers that appear without .
4. Place originals, and then press the [Start] key.

Changing a Registered Program

To change the settings registered to a program:

1. Press the [Program] key.

2. Press [Recall].
3. Press the number of the program you want to change.
Settings registered in the program are recalled and the initial scanner screen reappears.
4. Change settings of the program.

154
 Programs

5. Press the [Program] key.

6. Press [Program].
7. Press the number of the program whose settings you changed or the number of a different
program in which you want to register the changed settings.
8. If you select a program that is already registered, a confirmation message appears. To
overwrite the program, press [Yes].
If you select a new program number, you can omit this step. Proceed to the next step.
9. Enter a program name.
10. Press [OK].
If overwritten, the registered program is deleted.
The new program name appears briefly, and then the initial screen reappears after a moment.

Deleting a Program

To delete a registered program:

6
1. Press the [Program] key.
2. Press [Delete].

3. Press the number of the program you want to delete.

A confirmation screen appears.
4. Press [Yes].
The program is deleted, and the initial screen reappears after a moment.

Changing the Registered Program Name

To change the name of a registered program:

1. Press the [Program] key.

155
 6. Various Scan Settings

2. Press [Change Name].

3. Press the number of the program whose name you want to change.
The soft keyboard appears.
4. Enter a new program name.
5. Press [OK].
The new program name appears briefly, and then the initial screen reappears.

156
 Registering the Default Values of the Scanner's Initial Display

Registering the Default Values of the Scanner's

Initial Display
This section explains how to set defaults for the initial screen, which appears when the machine is turned
on or when settings are cleared or reset.
The following settings can be registered as defaults: Scan Settings, Original Orientation, File Type, Store
File, Preview, Reception Notice, Security (E-mail Encryption and Signature), and Original Output Exit.

1. Make the necessary scan settings on the initial screen.

2. Press the [Program] key.

6
BLT014S

3. Press [Program as Defaults].

4. Press [Program].
A confirmation screen appears.
5. Press [Yes].
The current settings are registered as defaults, and then the initial screen reappears.

• To restore the initial screen's original default settings, press [Restore Factory Defaults].
• Default settings for the initial screen can be registered for normal screens and simplified displays
respectively.

157
 6. Various Scan Settings

158
7. Appendix

Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size

This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size.
Resolution and scan size are inversely related. The higher the resolution (dpi) is set, the smaller the area
that can be scanned. Conversely, the larger the scan area, the lower the resolution that can be set.
The relationship between the scanning resolution and scan size is shown below. If the combination is
unreadable, "Exceeded max. data capacity. Check the scanning resolution, then press the Start key again."
appears on the machine's control panel display. Change the condition until scanning is enabled.

• Image compression level can limit Maximum image size.

• Only Type 2 machines can scan originals that are longer than 15000 mm (590.5 in). For details
about identifying the model of your machine, see About This Machine.

When Using the E-mail, Folder Sending, Storing, or Network Delivery Functions

This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size when using the e-mail, Scan to 7
Folder, storing, or network delivery scanner functions.
If [Black & White: Text], [B & W: Text / Line Art], [B & W: Text / Photo], [Black & White: Photo],
or [Black & White: Drawing] is selected for Scan Type:
• A1 - A4, B2 JIS - B4 JIS, Double Letter, Legal, and Letter
All combinations up to 600 dpi can be scanned.
• Larger than A1, B2 JIS, or Double Letter
The maximum possible resolution varies depending on the scan size and orientation of the
original.
Use the table below to specify the resolution for your original.

Maximum resolution
Maximum Maximum Maximum
resolution for resolution for resolution for
Width
Length (mm/in) or
(mm/in)
orientation orientation orientation
(dpi) (dpi) (dpi)

914/36.
Long Length 600 400 Unreadable
0 30000/1181.1

159
 7. Appendix

Maximum Maximum Maximum

resolution for resolution for resolution for
Width
Length (mm/in) or
(mm/in)
orientation orientation orientation
(dpi) (dpi) (dpi)

914/36.
Long Length 600 400 Unreadable
0 15000/590.5

914/36.
Long Length 600 600 Unreadable
0 13400/527.5

914/36.
Long Length 3680/144.8 600 600 150
0

914/36.
Long Length 2760/108.6 600 600 200
0

914/36.
Long Length 1840/72.4 600 600 300
0

914/36.
Long Length 1380/54.3 600 600 400
7 0

914/36.
Long Length 920/36.2 600 600 600
0

841/33.
A0 × 2 2378/93.6 600 600 200
2

594/23.
A1 × 2 1682/66.2 600 600 300
4

841/33.
A0 1189/46.8 600 600 400
2

728/28.
B1 JIS 1030/40.5 600 600 400
6

914/36.
36 × 48 1219.2/48.0 600 600 400
0

864/34.
Engineering E 1117.6/44.0 600 600 400
0

762/30.
30 × 42 1066.8/42.0 600 600 400
0

160
 Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size

Maximum Maximum Maximum

resolution for resolution for resolution for
Width
Length (mm/in) or
(mm/in)
orientation orientation orientation
(dpi) (dpi) (dpi)

610/24.
Architecture E 914.4/36.0 600 600 600
0

559/22.
Engineering D 863.6/34.0 600 600 600
0

457/18.
Architecture C 609.6/24.0 600 600 600
0

432/17.
Engineering C 558.8/22.0 600 600 600
0

Architecture A 229/9.0 304.8/12.0 600 600 600

If [Gray Scale] is selected for Scan Type:

• A0 - A4, B1 JIS - B4 JIS, Double Letter, Legal, and Letter
All combinations up to 600 dpi can be scanned.
7
• Larger than A0 or Double Letter
The maximum possible resolution varies depending on the scan size and whether or not the data
is compressed.
Use the table below to specify the resolution for your original.

Maximum resolution
Maximum resolution Maximum resolution
Width
Length (mm/in) when data is not when data is
(mm/in)
compressed (dpi) compressed (dpi)

Long Length 914/36.0 30000/1181.1 Unreadable Unreadable

Long Length 914/36.0 26000/1023.6 150 Unreadable

Long Length 914/36.0 15000/590.5 200 Unreadable

Long Length 914/36.0 11000/433.0 200 150

Long Length 914/36.0 8000/314.9 200 200

Long Length 914/36.0 6000/236.2 300 200

161
 7. Appendix

Maximum resolution Maximum resolution

Width
Length (mm/in) when data is not when data is
(mm/in)
compressed (dpi) compressed (dpi)

Long Length 914/36.0 5000/196.8 300 300

Long Length 914/36.0 4000/157.4 300 300 *1

Long Length 914/36.0 3680/144.8 400 400

Long Length 914/36.0 2760/108.6 400 400 *2

Long Length 914/36.0 1520/59.8 600 600

A0 × 2 841/33.2 2378/93.6 400 400 *2

A1 × 2 594/23.4 1682/66.2 600 600

36 × 48 914/36.0 1219.2/48.0 600 600

Engineering E 864/34.0 1117.6/44.0 600 600

30 × 42 762/30.0 1066.8/42.0 600 600

7 Architecture E 610/24.0 914.4/36.0 600 600

Engineering D 559/22.0 863.6/34.0 600 600

Architecture C 457/18.0 609.6/24.0 600 600

Engineering C 432/17.0 558.8/22.0 600 600

Architecture A 229/9.0 304.8/12.0 600 600

*1 Depending on the size of the compressed data, scanning up to 400 dpi is possible.

*2 Depending on the size of the compressed data, scanning up to 600 dpi is possible.

If [Full Colour: Text / Photo] or [Full Colour: Glossy Photo] is selected for Scan Type:
• A1 - A4, B2 JIS - B4 JIS, Double Letter, Legal, and Letter
All combinations up to 600 dpi can be scanned.
• Larger than A1, B2 JIS, or Double Letter
The maximum possible resolution varies depending on the scan size and whether or not the data
is compressed.
Use the table below to specify the resolution for your original.

162
 Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size

Maximum resolution
Maximum resolution Maximum resolution
Width
Length (mm/in) when data is not when data is
(mm/in)
compressed (dpi) compressed (dpi)

Long Length 914/36.0 30000/1181.1 Unreadable Unreadable

Long Length 914/36.0 15000/590.5 Unreadable Unreadable

Long Length 914/36.0 11000/433.0 Unreadable Unreadable *1

Long Length 914/36.0 8000/315.0 150 150 *2

Long Length 914/36.0 5000/196.9 200 200 *3

Long Length 914/36.0 4000/157.4 200 200 *4

Long Length 914/36.0 2000/78.8 300 300 *5

Long Length 914/36.0 1000/39.4 400 400 *5

A0 × 2 841/33.2 2378/93.6 300 300 *5

A1 × 2 594/23.4 1682/66.2 400 400 *5

7
A0 841/33.2 1189/46.8 400 400 *5

B1 JIS 728/28.6 1030/40.5 400 400 *5

36 × 48 914/36.0 1219.2/48.0 400 400 *5

Engineering E 864/34.0 1117.6/44.0 400 400 *5

30 × 42 762/30.0 1066.8/42.0 400 400 *5

Architecture E 610/24.0 914.4/36.0 400 400 *5

Engineering D 559/22.0 863.6/34.0 600 600

Architecture C 457/18.0 609.6/24.0 600 600

Engineering C 432/17.0 558.8/22.0 600 600

Architecture A 229/9.0 304.8/12.0 600 600

*1 Depending on the size of the compressed data, scanning up to 150 dpi is possible.

*2 Depending on the size of the compressed data, scanning up to 200 dpi is possible.

*3 Depending on the size of the compressed data, scanning up to 300 dpi is possible.

163
 7. Appendix

*4 Depending on the size of the compressed data, scanning up to 400 dpi is possible.

*5 Depending on the size of the compressed data, scanning up to 600 dpi is possible.

When Using as a TWAIN Scanner

This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size when using the machine as a TWAIN
scanner.
To specify the scan area or resolution for the machine you are using as a network TWAIN scanner, see
the TWAIN driver Help.

• You might not be able to scan large originals if the client computer has insufficient memory, is running
other applications, or if its operating system has restriction settings in place.
• Certain original types and resolution settings can reduce scanning quality.
If [Binary(Text)] or [Binary(Photo)] is selected in [Col./Grad.:]
The scan size determines the maximum possible resolution.
Refer to the table below for the maximum resolution available for each scan size.

Scan size and maximum resolution

7 Scan size Width (mm/in) Length (mm/in) Maximum resolution (dpi)

Maximum (Type 2) 914/36.0 30000/1181.1 600

Maximum (Type 1) 914/36.0 15000/590.5 600

A0 × 2 841/33.2 2378/93.6 652

A1 × 2 594/23.4 1682/66.2 923

A0 841/33.2 1189/46.8 652

B1 JIS 728/28.6 1030/40.5 753

A1 594/23.4 841/33.1 923

B2 JIS 515/20.2 728/28.6 1065

A2 420/16.5 594/23.3 1200

B3 JIS 364/14.3 515/20.2 1200

A3 297/11.6 420/16.5 1200

B4 JIS 257/10.1 364/14.3 1200

164
 Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size

Scan size Width (mm/in) Length (mm/in) Maximum resolution (dpi)

A4 210/8.2 297/11.6 1200

36 × 48 914/36.0 1219.2/48.0 600

Engineering E 864/34.0 1117.6/44.0 635

30 × 42 762/30.0 1066.8/42.0 720

Architecture E 610/24.0 914.4/36.0 899

Engineering D 559/22.0 863.6/34.0 981

Architecture C 457/18.0 609.6/24.0 1200

Engineering C 432/17.0 558.8/22.0 1200

Architecture A 229/9.0 304.8/12.0 1200

Double Letter 280/11.0 432/17.0 1200

Legal 216/8.5 356/14.0 1200

Letter 216/8.5 280/11.0 1200

7
If [8 Colors] or [8 Colors(Photo)] is selected in [Col./Grad.:]
The scan size determines the maximum possible resolution.
Refer to the table below for the maximum resolution available for each scan size.

Scan size and maximum resolution

Scan size Width (mm/in) Length (mm/in) Maximum resolution (dpi)

Maximum (Type 2) 914/36.0 30000/1181.1 229

Maximum (Type 1) 914/36.0 15000/590.5 324

A0 × 2 841/33.2 2378/93.6 652

A1 × 2 594/23.4 1682/66.2 923

A0 841/33.2 1189/46.8 652

B1 JIS 728/28.6 1030/40.5 753

A1 594/23.4 841/33.1 923

B2 JIS 515/20.2 728/28.6 1065

165
 7. Appendix

Scan size Width (mm/in) Length (mm/in) Maximum resolution (dpi)

A2 420/16.5 594/23.3 1200

B3 JIS 364/14.3 515/20.2 1200

A3 297/11.6 420/16.5 1200

B4 JIS 257/10.1 364/14.3 1200

A4 210/8.2 297/11.6 1200

36 × 48 914/36.0 1219.2/48.0 600

Engineering E 864/34.0 1117.6/44.0 635

30 × 42 762/30.0 1066.8/42.0 720

Architecture E 610/24.0 914.4/36.0 899

Engineering D 559/22.0 863.6/34.0 981

Architecture C 457/18.0 609.6/24.0 1200

7 Engineering C 432/17.0 558.8/22.0 1200

Architecture A 229/9.0 304.8/12.0 1200

Double Letter 280/11.0 432/17.0 1200

Legal 216/8.5 356/14.0 1200

Letter 216/8.5 280/11.0 1200

If [Gray Scale] or [16770K colors] is selected in [Col./Grad.:] and data is compressed

The scan size determines the maximum possible resolution.
Refer to the table below for the maximum resolution available for each scan size.

Scan size and maximum resolution

Scan size Width (mm/in) Length (mm/in) Maximum resolution (dpi)

Maximum 914/36.0 11097/436.8 150

A0 × 2 841/33.2 2378/93.6 652

A1 × 2 594/23.4 1682/66.2 923

A0 841/33.2 1189/46.8 652

166
 Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size

Scan size Width (mm/in) Length (mm/in) Maximum resolution (dpi)

B1 JIS 728/28.6 1030/40.5 753

A1 594/23.4 841/33.1 923

B2 JIS 515/20.2 728/28.6 1065

A2 420/16.5 594/23.3 1200

B3 JIS 364/14.3 515/20.2 1200

A3 297/11.6 420/16.5 1200

B4 JIS 257/10.1 364/14.3 1200

A4 210/8.2 297/11.6 1200

36 × 48 914/36.0 1219.2/48.0 600

Engineering E 864/34.0 1117.6/44.0 635

30 × 42 762/30.0 1066.8/42.0 720

Architecture E 610/24.0 914.4/36.0 899

7
Engineering D 559/22.0 863.6/34.0 981

Architecture C 457/18.0 609.6/24.0 1200

Engineering C 432/17.0 558.8/22.0 1200

Architecture A 229/9.0 304.8/12.0 1200

Double Letter 280/11.0 432/17.0 1200

Legal 216/8.5 356/14.0 1200

Letter 216/8.5 280/11.0 1200

If [Gray Scale] is selected in [Col./Grad.:] and data is not compressed

The scan size determines the maximum possible resolution.
Refer to the table below for the maximum resolution available for each scan size.

Scan size and maximum resolution

Scan size Width (mm/in) Length (mm/in) Maximum resolution (dpi)

Maximum (Type 2) 914/36.0 26326/1036.4 150

167
 7. Appendix

Scan size Width (mm/in) Length (mm/in) Maximum resolution (dpi)

Maximum (Type 1) 914/36.0 15000/590.5 198

A0 × 2 841/33.2 2378/93.6 520

A1 × 2 594/23.4 1682/66.2 736

A0 841/33.2 1189/46.8 652

B1 JIS 728/28.6 1030/40.5 753

A1 594/23.4 841/33.1 923

B2 JIS 515/20.2 728/28.6 1065

A2 420/16.5 594/23.3 1200

B3 JIS 364/14.3 515/20.2 1200

A3 297/11.6 420/16.5 1200

B4 JIS 257/10.1 364/14.3 1200

7 A4 210/8.2 297/11.6 1200

36 × 48 914/36.0 1219.2/48.0 600

Engineering E 864/34.0 1117.6/44.0 635

30 × 42 762/30.0 1066.8/42.0 720

Architecture E 610/24.0 914.4/36.0 899

Engineering D 559/22.0 863.6/34.0 981

Architecture C 457/18.0 609.6/24.0 1200

Engineering C 432/17.0 558.8/22.0 1200

Architecture A 229/9.0 304.8/12.0 1200

Double Letter 280/11.0 432/17.0 1200

Legal 216/8.5 356/14.0 1200

Letter 216/8.5 280/11.0 1200

If [16770K colors] is selected in [Col./Grad.:] and data is not compressed

The scan size determines the maximum possible resolution.

168
 Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size

Refer to the table below for the maximum resolution available for each scan size.

Scan size and maximum resolution

Scan size Width (mm/in) Length (mm/in) Maximum resolution (dpi)

Maximum 914/36.0 8775/345.4 150

A0 × 2 841/33.2 2378/93.6 300

A1 × 2 594/23.4 1682/66.2 425

A0 841/33.2 1189/46.8 424

B1 JIS 728/28.6 1030/40.5 490

A1 594/23.4 841/33.1 601

B2 JIS 515/20.2 728/28.6 693

A2 420/16.5 594/23.3 850

B3 JIS 364/14.3 515/20.2 981

A3 297/11.6 420/16.5 1200

B4 JIS 257/10.1 364/14.3 1200

7
A4 210/8.2 297/11.6 1200

36 × 48 914/36.0 1219.2/48.0 402

Engineering E 864/34.0 1117.6/44.0 432

30 × 42 762/30.0 1066.8/42.0 471

Architecture E 610/24.0 914.4/36.0 568

Engineering D 559/22.0 863.6/34.0 611

Architecture C 457/18.0 609.6/24.0 804

Engineering C 432/17.0 558.8/22.0 864

Architecture A 229/9.0 304.8/12.0 1200

Double Letter 280/11.0 432/17.0 1200

Legal 216/8.5 356/14.0 1200

Letter 216/8.5 280/11.0 1200

169
 7. Appendix

Software Supplied on CD-ROM

This section explains the applications on the supplied CD-ROM.

Auto-Run Program

This section explains the auto-run program.

When the CD-ROM is inserted into a client computer running Windows 2000/XP/Vista or Windows
Server 2003/R2, the installer starts up automatically (auto run) to install various software.

• When you install software, log on as an Administrators group member.

• Auto-run program may not automatically work with certain operating system settings. If this happens,
start "Setup.exe" on the CD-ROM root directory.
• To disable auto-run, set CD-ROM while pressing the Shift key. Keep the Shift key pressed until the
computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
• If [Cancel] is pressed during installation, the installation of all the software thereafter will be stopped.
If cancelled, reinstall the remaining software after restarting the client computer.

7
TWAIN Driver

This section tells you the file path to the TWAIN driver and the TWAIN driver's system requirements.
You must install this driver if you want to scan originals or use the machine as a network TWAIN scanner.
File path
The TWAIN driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM:
\DRIVERS\TWAIN
System requirements
• Computer hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
This driver cannot be used in RISC-based processor (MIPS R series, Alpha AXP, or PowerPC)
environments.
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2
• Display resolution

170
 Software Supplied on CD-ROM

800 × 600 pixels, 256 colors or higher

DeskTopBinder Lite

This section tells you the file path to DeskTopBinder Lite, the DeskTopBinder Lite system requirements, and
the applications that are installed with DeskTopBinder Lite.
DeskTopBinder is installed on the client computers to integrate and manage various kinds of files such as
scan files, files created with applications, and existing scan files. This software allows you to use various
functions for stored scan files such as viewing stored files. Also, with ScanRouter delivery software, you
can view the files stored in in-trays of the delivery server or use other functions for stored files. For details
about DeskTopBinder Lite, see DeskTopBinder Lite manuals or DeskTopBinder Lite Help.
File path
DeskTopBinder Lite is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM provided with this machine:
\UTILITY\DESKV2
System requirements
• Computer hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the following operating system properly
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP1 or later
7
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP1 or later
Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server SP1 or later
Microsoft Windows XP Professional/Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate/Enterprise/Business/Home Premium/Home Basic
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
• Display resolution
800 × 600 pixels, 64K colors or higher
Software installed with DeskTopBinder Lite
• Auto Document Link
Auto Document Link on the client computer monitors in-trays of the delivery server periodically,
retrieves files delivered to in-trays, and notifies the user of delivery.
• Function Palette
Function Palette allows you to use DeskTopBinder functions such as Scan using TWAIN scanner
or Print without starting DeskTopBinder. To use these functions from Function Palette, you must
first configure those using DeskTopBinder Extended Features. For details about Function
Palette, see DeskTopBinder manuals.

171
 7. Appendix

• SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client provides functions for continuous device status monitoring on the
network via TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.

172
 Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function

Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/

Storage/Delivery Function
This section explains the values of various transmission/storage/delivery function settings.

• Depending on the type or settings of the file or original, you may not be able to specify the destination
or enter the maximum number of characters stated below.

Transmission Function

This section explains the values of transmission function settings.

Sending E-mail
The following table tells you the maximum values of the e-mail sending function settings.
Values of Set Items for Sending by E-mail

Item Maximum value Comments

7
Number of subject line
128 alphanumeric characters -
characters

• Selecting from the list:

400 alphanumeric
characters (80 You cannot enter messages from
Number of e-mail message alphanumeric characters the list and manually at the same
characters 5 lines) time.
• Entering manually: 80
alphanumeric characters

E-mail addresses found via LDAP

Number of e-mail address server search cannot be selected
128 alphanumeric characters
characters if they contain more than 128
characters.

You can specify 100

destinations by direct entry,
Number of addresses you can
500 addresses including LDAP search. Select
specify at the same time
the remaining 400 destinations
from registered addresses.

173
 7. Appendix

Item Maximum value Comments

Sendable file size 725.3 MB per file -

Sendable number of pages 1000 pages per file -

Folder transmission
The following table tells you the maximum values of the Scan to Folder function settings.
Values of Set Items for Scan to Folder

Item Maximum value Comments

Number of path name 256 alphanumeric characters

-
characters on SMB

Number of user name 128 alphanumeric characters

-
characters on SMB

Number of password 128 alphanumeric characters

-
characters on SMB
7 Number of server name 64 alphanumeric characters
-
characters on FTP

Number of path name 256 alphanumeric characters

-
characters on FTP

Number of user name 64 alphanumeric characters

-
characters on FTP

Number of password 64 alphanumeric characters

-
characters on FTP

Number of path name 256 alphanumeric characters

-
characters on NCP

Number of user name 128 alphanumeric characters

-
characters on NCP

Number of password 64 alphanumeric characters

-
characters on NCP

Number of addresses you can 50 addresses You can specify a maximum of

specify at the same time 50 directly entered destinations.

174
 Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function

Item Maximum value Comments

Sendable file size 2000 MB per file -

Simultaneous Transmission
The following table tells you the maximum values of settings for using the E-mail and Scan to Folder functions
simultaneously.
Values of Set Items for Simultaneous Transmission

Item Maximum value Comments

Number of destinations you 550 addresses

can select for E-mail and Scan -
to Folder

Number of destinations you 500 addresses You can specify a maximum of

can select for sending by e- 100 directly entered
mail destinations, including LDAP
search-retrieved destinations.

Number of destinations you 50 addresses 7

can set for sending by Scan to -
Folder

Storage Function

The following table tells you the maximum values of the storage function settings.
Values of Set Items for File Storage

Item Maximum value Comments

Number of file name 64 alphanumeric characters On the control panel, the first 16
characters characters are displayed. When
viewing the stored files from a
client computer using
DeskTopBinder, all the entered
characters can be viewed.

Number of user name 20 alphanumeric characters On the control panel, the first 16
characters characters are displayed. When
viewing the stored files from a

175
 7. Appendix

Item Maximum value Comments

client computer using
DeskTopBinder, all the entered
characters can be viewed.

Number of password 4-8 digit number -

characters

Number of stored files you can 30 files -

select at the same time

Storable number of files 3,000 files This is the total number of files
stored under the scanner,
copier, document server, and
printer functions.

Storable number of pages 3,000 pages This is the total number of files
stored under the scanner,
copier, document server, and
printer functions.

Storable number of pages per 1,000 pages

7 file
-

Storable size 2,000 MB per file -

Network Delivery Function

The following table tells you the values of setting items for the network delivery scanner function.
Values of Set Items for Network Delivery

Item Maximum value Comments

Number of subject line 128 alphanumeric characters This is the total number of
characters characters selected from the list
and the number of characters
entered directly from text.

Number of e-mail address 128 alphanumeric characters

-
characters

Number of addresses you can 500 addresses You can specify 65 destinations
specify at the same time by direct entry, including LDAP
search. Select the remaining

176
 Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Storage/Delivery Function

Item Maximum value Comments

435 destinations from registered
addresses.
The maximum number of
destinations you can specify
differs depending on which
ScanRouter delivery software
you are using. For details, see the
manuals supplied with the
ScanRouter delivery software.

Sendable file size 2,000 MB per file -

177
 7. Appendix

Scanner Features
This section explains Scanner Features settings.
To display the Scanner Features screen, press the [User Tools/Counter] key. For detailed setting method,
see "Scanner Features", General Settings Guide.
Available Items in General Settings

Items Description

Sets index to use when the list of destinations of this

Switch Title
machine is displayed.

Allows you to update the delivery server's destination list

by pressing [Update Delivery Server Destination List]. To
Update Delivery Server Destination List
use this function, under [System Settings], set [Delivery
Option] to [On].

Specify the default search destination list from the

machine's address book or the LDAP server. To search
Search Destination
through an LDAP server, under [System Settings], register
the LDAP server, and then set [LDAP Search] to [On].
7
Select the machine's response if a client computer tries to
TWAIN Standby Time
use the TWAIN scanner while scanning is in progress.

Select the default destination list from the machine's

Destination List Display Priority 1 destination list or from the Destination List managed by the
delivery server.

Select whether to prioritize the e-mail destination list or the

Destination List Display Priority 2
folder destination list.

Specify the machine's response of the maximum number

Print & Delete Scanner Journal
of scanner journals is exceeded.

Allows you to print the scanner journal. The scanner

Print Scanner Journal
journal is then deleted.

Allows you to delete the scanner journal without printing

Delete Scanner Journal
it.

178
 Scanner Features

Available Items in Scan Settings

Items Description

When scanning multiple pages into a single file, you can

select [Continuous Wait], [Off], or [Set Wait Time] as the
standby mode for the additional originals.
If you press [Next Original Wait] when scanning
originals, the machine waits indefinitely for additional
originals, regardless of any other settings.
If you do not press [Next Original Wait], the settings you
configure here determine the machine's performance as
follows:
Next Original Wait Setting • [Set Wait Time]
The machine waits for additional originals until the
pre-specified wait period elapses.
• [Off]
The machine does not wait for additional originals
and sends the scan file immediately.
• [Continuous Wait] 7
The machine waits indefinitely for additional
originals and [Next Original Wait] does not appear.

Select either [Top] or [Rear] as the default output exit for

Original Output Exit (TWAIN)
originals scanned using TWAIN.

Available Items in Send Settings

Items Description

Specify a compression method for files scanned in black

Compression (Black & White)
and white.

Compression (Gray Scale / Full Specify a compression method for files scanned in gray
Colour) scale or full color.

Select whether or not to limit the size of e-mail that has

Max. E-mail Size
attachments.

Select whether or not to divide files that exceed the size

Divide & Send E-mail specified in [Max. E-mail Size] and send them as multiple
e-mails.

179
 7. Appendix

Items Description
If [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, depending on the e-
mail software, the received divided file may not be
restored.

Select whether or not to attach a standard message to

Insert Additional E-mail Info scan files sent by e-mail. If you select [On], you must also
select the language in which the message is sent.

Set the number of digits in serial numbers used for single-

No. of Digits for Single Page Files
page file names.

Sets the default for whether to attach a file or send URL

Stored File E-mail Method
Link when sending stored files by e-mail.

Available Items in Initial Settings

Items Description

Set the default access level for functions whose settings

Menu Protect
can be changed by users other than the administrator.
7

180
 Specifications

Specifications
The following table tells you the specifications of the scanner.

Specifications
Component Specifications

Scan method Original feed image scanning

• When scanning black and white originals:

150 dpi: 340 mm (13.3 in)/sec
200 dpi: 255 mm (10.0 in)/sec
300 dpi: 340 mm (13.3 in)/sec
600 dpi: 170 mm (6.6 in)/sec
1200 dpi: 85 mm (3.3 in)/sec
• When scanning gray scale originals:
150 dpi: 300 mm (11.8 in)/sec
200 dpi: 225 mm (8.8 in)/sec
300 dpi: 300 mm (11.8 in)/sec 7
600 dpi: 150 mm (5.9 in)/sec
Scan speed
1200 dpi: 75 mm (2.9 in)/sec
• When scanning full color originals:
150 dpi: 200 mm (7.8 in)/sec
200 dpi: 150 mm (5.9 in)/sec
300 dpi: 200 mm (7.8 in)/sec
600 dpi: 100 mm (3.9 in)/sec
1200 dpi: 50 mm (1.9 in)/sec

• Scanning originals at 1200 dpi resolution is

possible only if you are using the network
TWAIN scanner function.

Image sensor type Fixed contact image sensor

Scan type Sheet

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX or 1000BASE-T
Ethernet interface
(optional)

181
 7. Appendix

Component Specifications

Wireless LAN interface IEEE 802.11a/b/g (optional)

Type 1:
• Length
210–15000 mm (8.3–590.5 in)
• Width
210–914 mm (8.3–36.0 in)
Type 2:
• Length
Original sizes that can be scanned 210–30000 mm (8.3–1181.1 in)
• Width
210–914 mm (8.3–36.0 in)

• Scannable original sizes vary depending on

machine model. For details about identifying
the model of your machine, see About This
7 Machine.

Basic scanning resolution 600 dpi

Selectable scanning resolutions when using the E-

mail/Scan to Folder/Network delivery scanner 150 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
function

Selectable scanning resolution when using TWAIN

150 dpi to 1200 dpi
scanner

Sendable file formats TIFF, JPEG, PDF

Image compression type for black and white (two-

TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
value)

Image compression type for gray scale/full color JPEG

Network protocol IPv4, IPX

Protocol for sending e-mail SMTP, POP3

Protocol for Scan to Folder SMB, FTP, NCP

182
 Specifications

• Specifications are subject to change without notice.

183
 7. Appendix

184
INDEX
A D
Access Privileges.......................46, 74, 78, 79, 116 Delete...................................................................155
Address book Delete File..............................................................91
registering destination folders...........................................55 Delivering scan files......................................97, 103
registering e-mail addresses.............................................22 Delivery..................................................................97
ADF.......................................................................135 Delivery Dest........................................................106
Adjusting image density......................................137 Delivery destination.............................................107
Advanced Search..............................32, 35, 41, 63 Delivery server.......................................................97
Auto Density.........................................................137 DeskTopBinder Lite......................87, 100, 120, 171
Auto Detect..........................................................129 Destination (delivery)
Auto-run program...............................................170 searching the delivery server's destination list..............108
selecting by entering the registration numbers.............108
B
selecting from the delivery server's address book........107
B & W Text / Line Art.........................................128 selecting from the list.......................................................107
B & W Text / Photo............................................128 Destination (e-mail)
Basic operation entering manually..............................................................33
delivering scan files.........................................................103 registering a directly-entered destination in the address
network TWAIN scanner................................................ 122 book....................................................................................37
sending scan files by e-mail..............................................25 searching an LDAP server.................................................34
sending scan files by Scan to Folder................................57 searching the machine's address book............................31
storing scan files.................................................................77 selecting by entering the registration numbers................31
selecting from the list..........................................................30
Black & White Drawing......................................128
selecting from the machine's address book.....................30
Black & White Photo...........................................128
Destination (folder)
Black & White Text.............................................. 128
entering the path of the NetWare server directly...........70
C entering the path to a shared network folder manually.......
.............................................................................................65
CD-ROM..............................................................170 entering the path to an FTP server manually....................68
Certificate...............................................................48 registering the path to the selected destination in the address
Change Access Priv...............................................93 book....................................................................................73
Change File Name................................................93 searching the machine's address book............................63
selecting by entering the registration numbers................62
Change Name....................................................155
selecting from the list..........................................................61
Change Password.................................................94
selecting from the machine's address book.....................61
Change User Name..............................................92 specifying the path by browsing the NetWare server.........
Check Modes........................................................11 .............................................................................................71
Confirmation displays...........................................11 specifying the path by browsing the shared network folder
Check Modes.....................................................................11 .............................................................................................66
Preview...............................................................................12 Destination list...................24, 30, 56, 61, 102, 107
Scanned Files Status..........................................................14 Display
Connecting to the network..............20, 53, 98, 118 confirmation displays......................................................... 11
Custom Size................................................129, 131 Simplified Display..............................................................10
automatically detect the length of an original..............131 Display panel.........................................................10
original size.....................................................................135
E
scanning an entire original.............................................131
scanning part of an original...........................................133 E-mail destination..................................................30
specify the length and width of an original................... 132 E-mail message......................................................44

185
 entering manually..............................................................45 N
selecting from the list..........................................................44
E-mail screen...................................................23, 29 NCP.................................................................52, 69
E-mail sender.........................................................39 NetWare server..............................................53, 69
Edit........................................................................129 Network delivery function..................................176
Encryption Network delivery scanner screen.............101, 106
e-mail..................................................................................47 Network TWAIN scanner...................................117
PDF...................................................................................149 Next Original Wait....................................138, 143
Erase Border........................................................129 Next Original Wait Setting........................138, 142
Expand Group Dest..............................................12 Notes about file types.........................................146
F O
File Name............................................................147 Original Feed Type.............................................139
sending files.....................................................................145 Original orientation.............................................139
stored files...........................................................................79 custom size......................................................................135
File type................................................................145 TWAIN scanner..............................................................124
FTP....................................................................52, 68 Original Output Exit............................................140
FTP server...............................................................52 Outline
Full Colour Glossy Photo....................................128 delivering scan files...........................................................97
network TWAIN scanner................................................ 117
Full Colour Text / Photo.....................................128
sending scan files by e-mail..............................................19
Functions...................................................................9
sending scan files by Scan to Folder................................51
G storing scan files.................................................................75

General Settings..................................................178 P
Gray Scale..........................................................128 Password................................................................80
I PDF.......................................................................145
changing security permissions.......................................150
Initial Settings.......................................................180
encryption........................................................................149
Install security.............................................................................149
DeskTopBinder Lite.........................................................100
Permissions...........................................................150
TWAIN driver..................................................................120
Positive / Negative.............................................129
K Preparation
network TWAIN scanner................................................ 118
Key Colour.............................................................11
sending scan files by e-mail..............................................20
L sending scan files by Scan to Folder................................53

LDAP server.....................................................19, 34 Preview

viewing a file before sending............................................12
Limitations of file types........................................146
Prg. Dest...........................................................37, 73
M Print List...................................................................15
Manage / Delete File...........................................91 Program as Defaults............................................157
Manual Entry..........................................23, 56, 102 Programs..............................................................153
Mirror Image.......................................................130 changing...............................................................154, 155
Multi-page...........................................................145 defaults.............................................................................157
deleting............................................................................155
Multiple pages scanned as one file...................142
recalling...........................................................................154

186
 registering........................................................................153 searching the delivery server's destination list..............112
selecting by entering a registration number..................111
R
selecting from the list.......................................................111
Recall....................................................................154 Sender (e-mail)......................................................39
Recept. Notice..............................................26, 104 searching the machine's address book............................40
Reg. No...................................................23, 56, 102 selecting by entering a registration number....................40
selecting from the list..........................................................39
Registration number................31, 40, 62, 108, 111
Resolution.............................................................128 Sender Name................................39, 40, 111, 112
Resolution and scan size....................................159 Sending a stored file.............................................89
e-mail...............................................................................159 Sending scan files by e-mail..........................19, 25
network delivery..............................................................159 Sending scan files by Scan to Folder...................57
Scan to Folder.................................................................159 Sending scan files to folders.................................51
storing..............................................................................159 Sending the URL by e-mail...................................49
TWAIN scanner..............................................................164
Serial number......................................................148
Restore Factory Defaults.....................................157 Signature................................................................48
Result of sending....................................................14 Simplified Display..................................................10
S Single Page..........................................................145
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin...........................22
S/MIME.................................................................47
SMB.................................................................51, 65
Scan settings..............................124, 127, 128, 179
SMTP server...........................................................19
Scan Size.............................................................129
Specifications......................................................181
Scan to e-mail........................................................19
Start scanning........................................................17
Scan to Folder........................................................51
Storage function..................................................175
Scan to Folder destination....................................61
Store File................................................................77
Scan to Folder screen.....................................55, 60
Store Only..............................................................77
Scan Type............................................................128
Stored file
Scanner Features.............................22, 54, 99, 178
changing a file name.........................................................93
Scanner functions.....................................................9 changing a pasword.........................................................94
ScanRouter delivery software......................97, 100 changing a user name.......................................................92
Screen layout changing information........................................................92
delivering scan files.........................................................101 checking.............................................................................85
list of stored files.................................................................82 checking from a client computer.......................................87
sending scan files by e-mail..............................................23 checking from the list.........................................................85
sending scan files by Scan to Folder................................55 deleting...............................................................................91
Search Dest......................................31, 34, 63, 108 displaying the list................................................................82
Security displaying with DeskTopBinder Lite..................................87
e-mail..................................................................................47 displaying with Web Image Monitor...............................87
encryption (e-mail)............................................................47 managing...........................................................................91
PDF...................................................................................149 Preview screen...................................................................86
signature.............................................................................48 searching by file name......................................................84
Security Settings..................................................149 searching by user name....................................................83
searching the list.................................................................83
Select Stored File...................................................82
sending...............................................................................89
Send & Store..........................................46, 74, 116
Storing scan files....................................................75
Send Settings.......................................................179
specifying a file name........................................................79
Sender (delivery).................................................111 specifying a password......................................................80

187
 specifying a user name......................................................79
specifying file information.................................................79
Subject...........................................................43, 115
Switching screen
E-mail..................................................................................29
network delivery scanner...............................................106
Scan to Folder....................................................................60
Symbol......................................................................8
System Settings................................20, 53, 98, 118
T
Template size.......................................................129
Text...................................................................44, 45
TIFF.......................................................................145
TIFF / JPEG..........................................................145
Transmission function..........................................173
TWAIN driver............................119, 120, 122, 170
TWAIN scanner.................................117, 122, 124
U
URL..........................................................................49
User Name.............................................................79
V
Values of set items...............................................173
e-mail...............................................................................173
network delivery..............................................................176
Scan to Folder.................................................................174
simultaneous transmission...............................................175
storage.............................................................................175

W
Web Image Monitor.......................................22, 87

188 GB GB EN USA D046

Trademarks

Adobe®, Acrobat®, PostScript®, and Reader® are either registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
NetWare® is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows NT®, Windows Server®, and Windows Vista® are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective
companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
* The product name of Windows 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98.
* The product name of Windows Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
* The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
* The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
* The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
* The product names of Windows NT 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT ® Workstation 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT ® Server 4.0

Copyright © 2008
Operating Instructions Scanner Reference

D046-7302
EN USA